JP2021126415A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine for suitably presenting a display including a specific character in connection with a background image.SOLUTION: State control means in a game machine can perform control from a normal state to a special state on the basis of a special display result when the special display result differing from a specific display result is displayed as a variable display result in the normal state. Then, plural kinds of pieces of information including determination result information for permitting identification of control to an advantageous state when determination means determines that the advantageous state occurs, and special information for permitting identification of control to a special state when the determination means determines that the special state occurs can be transmitted to performance execution means, a read-ahead performance can be executed based on the determination result information when receiving the determination result information, and execution of a read-ahead performance based on the determination result information is restricted when receiving the determination result information after receiving the special information.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 11-4

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

A gaming machine capable of displaying a grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value granted in an advantageous state advantageous to the player and a notification display for notifying that the grant amount of the game value has reached a predetermined amount. It is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2019-17403

The gaming machine uses specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed in various displays such as a grant amount display and a notification display. In addition, the gaming machine displays background images corresponding to various states such as an advantageous state. There is room for improvement in the relationship between such specific characters and the background image.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying a display including a specific character in relation to a background image.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.). ), Display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means is a first display area and an area around the first display area. A second display area narrower than the first display area is included (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and the first display area 20SH51, and is the first. 1 Display area 20SH 52 narrower than 1 display area 20SH 51, etc.), the display means can display a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area. (For example, the image display device 5 can display a background image corresponding to a jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, etc.), and in the second display area, the above It is possible to display a grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the granted gaming value on the front side of the background image (for example, the image display device 5 is imparted to the front side of the background image in the second display area 20SH52. It is possible to display 20 SHK of the number of winning balls related to the number of prize balls, etc.), and at least in the first display area, the front side of the background image is notified that the amount of the game value to be given has reached a predetermined amount. As notification displays, a first notification display for notifying that the amount of game value to be given has reached the first predetermined amount, and a second notification display for notifying that the amount of game value to be given has reached the second predetermined amount. (For example, in the image display device 5, at least in the first display area 20SH51, the number of prize balls given to the front side of the background image in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "Kiriban". As the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH that notifies that, when the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", the acquisition number notification display of "1000 over" can be displayed, and the jackpot game state. When the number of prize balls given in the above reaches "2000", it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display of "2000 over", etc.), and the given amount display has a gaming value in the advantageous state. It is updated every time it is granted (for example, the acquired number display 20SHK is updated every time the game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state. The notification display ends when a specific period has elapsed since the display was started (for example, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is displayed when a predetermined period has elapsed since the display was started. The characters used for the notification display are characters having a size larger than the characters used for the grant amount display (for example, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKK are the acquisition number display 20SHK). The characters used for the grant amount display and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed (for example, the characters are larger in size than the characters used in). For example, the characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK and the acquired number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed), and the specific characters used in the given amount display. Is invisible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK are invisible from the specific area), and is used for the notification display. The background image of the specific character is visible from the specific area (for example, the background image of the specific character used in the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is visible from the specific area, etc.).
Moreover,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls the progress of the game, and
It is provided with an effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes an effect based on an effect control command) capable of executing an effect based on information from the game control means.
The game control means
Determining means for determining the advantageous state (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) and
A determination means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S213) for determining that the advantageous state is obtained before the determination of the determination means, and
A state control means that can control a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) and
Information transmitting means (for example, effect control) capable of transmitting a plurality of types of information including determination result information that can be specified to be controlled to the advantageous state when the determination means determines that the advantageous state is obtained. CPU 103 that sends commands, etc.), including
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result ( For example, the process of step 059AKS025 is executed),
The determination means can determine that the state control means will be in the special state before the state control means controls the special state (for example, the process of step 059AKS001 is executed).
The information transmitting means can transmit special information that can be specified to be controlled to the special state when the determination means determines to be in the special state (for example, designating a display result of "loss (time reduction)"). Commands can be sent, etc.),
The effect executing means is
When the determination result information is received, the look-ahead effect can be executed based on the determination result information (for example, the process of step S161 can be executed).
When the determination result information is received after receiving the special information, the execution of the look-ahead effect based on the determination result information is restricted (for example, when it is determined Yes in step 059AKS082, the processes of step 059AKS084 and step S1304). Etc.),
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, the display including the specific character can be suitably displayed in relation to the background image. Further, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the invention according to the following means 2. Conventionally, in a gaming machine, a gaming medium such as a gaming ball is launched into a gaming area by a launching device as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-80649, and the winning area such as a winning opening provided in the gaming area is used. When the game medium wins a prize and the execution condition (starting condition) is satisfied, a plurality of types of identification information (hereinafter, display symbols) are variably displayed on the variable display device, and whether or not a predetermined game value is given based on the display result. There is a pachinko game machine that enhances the game's interest by a so-called variable display game that determines whether or not. In such a pachinko gaming machine, when the stop symbol mode when the variable display of the display symbol in the variable display game is completely stopped becomes the specific display mode, the pachinko gaming machine becomes an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. Then, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, there is a gaming machine that controls the variable display to a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state.
As such a gaming machine, a gaming machine that controls a special state without going through a jackpot gaming state has been proposed.

However, there was room for improvement in control when transitioning to a state.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving control of state transition and improving gaming interest.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention performs variable display, and when a specific display result is displayed as the variable display result, the gaming machine can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, pachinko gaming). Machine 1 etc.)
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls the progress of the game, and
It is provided with an effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes an effect based on an effect control command) capable of executing an effect based on information from the game control means.
The game control means
Determining means for determining the advantageous state (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) and
A determination means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S213) for determining that the advantageous state is obtained before the determination of the determination means, and
A state control means that can control a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) and
Information transmitting means (for example, effect control) capable of transmitting a plurality of types of information including determination result information that can be specified to be controlled to the advantageous state when the determination means determines that the advantageous state is obtained. CPU 103 that sends commands, etc.), including
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result ( For example, the process of step 059AKS025 is executed),
The determination means can determine that the state control means will be in the special state before the state control means controls the special state (for example, the process of step 059AKS001 is executed).
The information transmitting means can transmit special information that can be specified to be controlled to the special state when the determination means determines to be in the special state (for example, designating a display result of "loss (time reduction)"). Commands can be sent, etc.),
The effect executing means is
When the determination result information is received, the look-ahead effect can be executed based on the determination result information (for example, the process of step S161 can be executed).
When the determination result information is received after receiving the special information, the execution of the look-ahead effect based on the determination result information is restricted (for example, when it is determined Yes in step 059AKS082, the processes of step 059AKS084 and step S1304). Etc.),
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a figure which shows the lighting example of a game effect lamp. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing during jackpot opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of various display processing. It is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big winning opening, the timing of various displays, and the like. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows an example of the state which a game ball is sandwiched by a special variable winning ball device. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big winning opening, the timing of various displays, and the like. It is a flowchart which shows an example of various display processing. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect display. It is a figure which shows the background technique which concerns on the 1st form of the feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the acquisition number display, etc. in the 1st form of the feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the appearance of the acquisition number display in the 1st form of the feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the acquisition number display and acquisition number notification display in the 1st form of the feature unit 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the acquisition number notification display in the 2nd form of the feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the acquisition number notification display in the 2nd form of the feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the modification 2 of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the acquisition number notification display in the 2nd form of the feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of Arabic numerals used for the result display in the 3rd form of a feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the production period of various effects in the jackpot game state in the 3rd form of the feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of various effects in the jackpot game state in the 3rd form of the feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting suggestion by the ending background image in the 3rd form of the feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the background technique which concerns on the 4th form of a feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the remaining number display in the 4th form of the feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the remaining number notification display in the 4th form of the feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the appearance of the remaining number display in the 4th form of the feature part 20SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the relationship between the variable display and the change of the display mode of the remaining number of times notification display in the 4th form of the feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the effect example of the remaining number display and the remaining number notification display in the first form of the feature unit 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect operation when a prize occurs during a round in a feature part 19SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers which display various displays in a feature part 19SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect operation when the over prize is generated in the feature part 19SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers which display various displays in a feature part 19SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting suggestion by the over-winning effect in the feature part 19SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect operation when there is a round which did not win a predetermined number and a round where an over prize occurred in the feature part 19SH. It is a figure which shows another example of the effect operation when there is a round which did not win a predetermined number and a round where an over prize occurred in the feature part 19SH. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random value value determination processing at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the jackpot type determination table. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the time saving type determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the time saving fanning production period. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the main production control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decorative symbol stop command transmission setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving start time processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving end time processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the remaining hold period end determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the command buffer at the time of a start winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the read-ahead notice setting process. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the hold change determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of a miss. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving fanning effect setting processing. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the time saving fanning production pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a return effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. This is a timing chart showing each timing during variable display when the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed and when it is not displayed. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation when the time saving symbol is stopped display, and the time saving fanning effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation when the time saving symbol is stopped display, and the time saving fanning effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation when the time saving symbol is stopped display, and the time saving fanning effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation when the time saving symbol is stopped display, and the time saving fanning effect is executed. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing in the information output processing. It is a timing chart which shows the output timing of various signals output by the external information output processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure display result. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation when the time saving symbol is stopped display. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the feature part 063AK. It is a figure which shows the structure of the special variable winning ball device which concerns on the feature part 063AK in the state which the big winning opening is controlled in the closed state. (A)-(c) is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the game ball which won a prize in the big prize opening which concerns on the characteristic part 063AK. (A) is a figure which shows the structure of the distribution part which concerns on the feature part 063AK. (B) is a figure which shows the structure of the distribution member which concerns on the characteristic part 063AK. (A)-(c) is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the game ball which entered the distribution part which concerns on the characteristic part 063AK. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation of the distribution member which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the small hit start effect time which concerns on a feature part 063AK, and the timing when a game ball enters a distribution part. (A) is a timing chart of the effect corresponding to the small hit fluctuation related to the feature unit 063AK. FIG. (B) is a diagram for explaining whether or not an effect is executed and an effect mode corresponding to the small hit variation related to the feature unit 063AK. (A) is a timing chart of the time saving suggestion effect related to the feature unit 063AK. (B) is a figure which shows the time saving suggestion symbol which concerns on the characteristic part 063AK. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the normal passage fanning effect corresponding to the 1st special figure game which concerns on the feature part 063AK. FIG. (B) is a diagram for explaining a normal passage fanning effect corresponding to the second special figure game according to the feature unit 063AK. (C) is a diagram for explaining the time-saving time-passing fanning effect related to the feature unit 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing which concerns on a feature part 063AK. (A) is a figure which shows the structural example of the 1st special figure display result determination table which concerns on the feature part 063AK. (B) is a figure which shows the structural example of the 2nd special figure display result determination table which concerns on the feature part 063AK. (A) is a figure which shows the list of the jackpot type which concerns on the feature part 063AK. FIG. (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table according to the feature unit 063AK. (A) is a figure which shows the list of the small hit type which concerns on the feature part 063AK. FIG. (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a small hit type determination table according to the feature unit 063AK. It is a figure which shows the list of the fluctuation pattern which concerns on the feature part 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the big hit variation pattern determination table which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the loss variation pattern determination table which concerns on the feature part 063AK. (A) is a figure which shows the structural example of the time saving variation pattern determination table for a normal state which concerns on a feature part 063AK. FIG. (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a time saving fluctuation pattern determination table for a time saving state according to the feature unit 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the small hit start effect waiting time determination table which concerns on the feature part 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit opening preprocessing which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit opening processing which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the hit end designation command determination table which concerns on the feature part 063AK. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the passage notification effect waiting time determination table which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit end processing which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process which concerns on a feature part 063AK. (A) is a figure which shows the decorative symbol which becomes the small hit combination which concerns on the feature part 063AK. FIG. (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a decoration symbol determination table for a small hit for a normal state according to the feature unit 063AK. (C) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a small hit time determination decoration symbol determination table for a time saving state according to the feature unit 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display which concerns on a feature part 063AK. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the waiting process for hitting a special figure according to the feature unit 063AK. FIG. (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a small hit start effect time determination table related to the feature unit 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit middle production process which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit end effect processing which concerns on a feature part 063AK. (A) to (i) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation in a normal state relating to the feature unit 063AK. (A) to (g) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation in a normal state relating to the feature unit 063AK. (A) to (e) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation in a time-saving state according to the feature unit 063AK. (A) to (e) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation in a time-saving state according to the feature unit 063AK. (A) is a figure which shows the structural example of the normal hold change determination table which concerns on the modification of the characteristic part 063AK. FIG. (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a limited time pending change determination table according to a modified example of the feature unit 063AK. (A) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation according to a modified example of the feature unit 063AK. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine of the feature part 065AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of ordinary symbol process processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the ordinary symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the normal figure display result and the number of time reductions. It is a figure which shows the special figure display result and the number of time reductions. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of normal symbol stop. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control process process of a feature part 065AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the normal figure interlocking effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special figure interlocking effect determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving notification setting processing. It is a timing chart which shows the production content at the time of time saving transition of the feature part 065AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the feature part 065AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the feature part 065AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the feature part 065AK. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. (A) is a diagram showing an image display device, (B) is a diagram showing a rotation display of a hold display in each hold display area, and (C) is a diagram showing a movement display of a telop in a telop display area. , (D) is a diagram showing a blinking mode of the fourth symbol. It is explanatory drawing of the image data which constitutes the display in an image display apparatus. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a variable display result and a variation pattern. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning prize determination processing. This is a part of the flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the chance up effect. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the still image display effect, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect content of each effect pattern. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect content of each effect pattern. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach α1. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach α2. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach α3. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach α3. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach β1. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach β2. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach β3. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach β3. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 1st reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 1st reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 2nd reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 2nd reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 2nd reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 3rd reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 3rd reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 4th reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 4th reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 4th reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 2nd reach effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 4th reach effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 4th reach effect in the modification.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electroluminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening that is always maintained in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Below the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. As shown in the figure, the frame lamp 9b includes a lower left lamp 9bL1 in a lower left portion, an upper left lamp 9bL2 in an upper left portion, a lower right lamp 9bR1 in a lower right portion, and an upper right lamp 9bR2 in an upper right portion. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. Further, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR are provided in the speakers 8L and 8R portions corresponding to the speakers 8L and 8R, respectively. A display device lower lamp 9f is provided at a position below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, and the display device lower lamp 9f includes a left side display device lower lamp 9fL and a right side display device lower lamp 9fR as shown in the figure. There is. Further, 9 g of lamps in the vicinity of the general winning opening are provided in the vicinity of the general winning opening 10 provided at three locations on the lower left side of the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. When the movable body lamp 9d, the above-mentioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, speaker lamp 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f, and general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. There is. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR, the display device lower lamp 9f, and the general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g are configured to include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, stick controller 31A and push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. On the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as a jackpot winning probability and a ball output rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ream ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning a prize to the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a common symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (although the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29.5 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until one of the earlier timings. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an open upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player. In the big hit game state, a so-called right-handed hit that launches the game ball into the game area on the right side may be performed so that the game ball is won in the big prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls are obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in the time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in the probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in the normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability big hit" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). If the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which a conductor pattern is formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electric components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, electric power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as a main board 11 and an effect control board 12 by a power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifying circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The reset signal, power cutoff signal, and clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting the control circuit of the game control microcomputer 100 or the like into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of the power supply monitoring circuit, the watchdog timer built-in IC, and the system reset IC. All you need is. The power off signal is turned off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and is turned on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage is below the predetermined value continues for the power interruption reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output voice) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. By the recovery process in step S4, the work area is set based on the stored contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the symbol can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the setting change process (step S7) is executed after the initialization process (step S6) is executed. The initialization process of step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so that the lost symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stopped state different from the lost symbol is displayed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the setting change state, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the amusement park or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is stored. Turns off. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in the game stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch is on, the step is performed together with the initialization process in step S6. The setting change process of S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and interrupts are permitted (step S10). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of times jackpots have occurred) and start information (starting) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold memories, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Be told. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination values to be compared with the random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is set using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a configuration in which the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability and the ball output rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. .. If the jackpot winning probability changes according to the set value, the ball output rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 7A shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 7B shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. A configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of the figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is in the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) are displayed as a special figure of "big hit". Assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high-probability state such as a probabilistic state in which the probabilistic change control is performed, there is a probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the low-probability state such as the normal state or the time-saving state. It gets higher.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, it is determined that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. A value has been assigned. In the display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is the display result for the first special figure regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that they have the same value as the judgment table. It should be noted that the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" may be different according to the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and while only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, the set value 2 to the set value 6 In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judgment. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit", so that only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

The set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (in order to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (to control the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Main operation of production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 8 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process process, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when receiving an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the jackpot effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process "7" in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the jackpot game state. Update to "" and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as the game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature 042AK)
Next, the gaming machine in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-21. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment starts displaying the number of balls acquired after a predetermined period in which the attacker is in the open state in the first round game, and the attacker wins a prize within the predetermined period. If not, a predetermined display indicating that the number of balls won has not increased is displayed, and if the attacker wins a prize within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed. Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 042AK having such features will be described. The same parts as those described in the above basic explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, which includes a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d. , Speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f (left side display device lower lamp 9fL, right side display device lower lamp 9fR), general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g, and other game effect lamps 9 are all turned on. It is a figure. In the feature portion 042AK of the present embodiment, which will be described in detail later, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d , Speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f (left side display device lower lamp 9fL, right side display device lower lamp 9fR), game effect lamp 9 such as general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g, lights in sequence from lower left to lower right. It is possible to suggest to the player that he should hit right.

FIG. 10-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 10-2, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step 042AKS001). At this time, if the jackpot flag is on (step 042AKS001; Yes), the effect waiting time at the start of the jackpot is set (step 042AKS002). For example, in the process of step 042AKS002, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the effect waiting time at the start of the big hit may be set in the game control process timer provided in the RAM 102.

Following the process of step 042AKS002, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step 042AKS003). For example, in the process of step 042AKS003, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start designation command is the buffer area designated by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. It should be stored in. After that, the jackpot flag is cleared to turn it off (step 042AKS004). In addition, a setting for ending the probability change state and the time saving state is made (step 042AKS005). For example, in step 042AKS005, a process of clearing the probability change flag and the time saving flag to turn off the state, a process of clearing the special figure fluctuation counter for counting the number of executions of the special figure game in the probability change state and the time saving state, and the like are performed. It should be executed. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "4", which is a value corresponding to the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening (step 042AKS006), the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

If the big hit flag is off in step 042AKS001 (step 042AKS001; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step 042AKS007). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step 042AKS007; No), the effect waiting time at the start of the small hit is set (step 042AKS008). For example, in the process of step 042AKS008, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the effect waiting time at the start of the small hit may be set in the game control process timer.

Following the process of step 042AKS008, the setting for transmitting the hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is made in the same manner as the process of step 042AKS003 (step 042AKS009). After that, the small hit flag is cleared to turn it off (step 042AKS010). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8", which is a value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step 042AKS011).

If the small hit flag is off in step 042AKS007 (step 042AKS007; No), the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 042AKS012). .. After executing any of the processes of step 042AKS011 and step 042AKS012, it is determined whether or not to end the probability change state or the time saving state (step 042AKS013). For example, in the process of step 042AKS003, the value of the special figure fluctuation count counter (special figure fluctuation count value) is updated by, for example, 1 subtraction or 1 addition, and the updated special figure fluctuation count value is predetermined. It is determined whether or not it matches the special game state end determination value. At this time, if it matches the special game state end determination value, the probability change state or the time reduction state may be ended and the normal state may be controlled by clearing the probability change flag or the time reduction flag to turn it off. On the other hand, if it does not match the special game state end determination value, the state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag may be maintained, and the process of step 042AKS013 may be completed. After executing the end determination of the probability change state or the time saving state, the special symbol stop process ends. It should be noted that the end determination based on the special figure fluctuation count value may be performed only when the time is shortened, and the probability variation state may be continued until the next variable display result becomes a "big hit". .. Alternatively, for example, the probability change state is terminated by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining the probability change state end from a random counter provided in the RAM 102 and referring to the probability change state end determination table previously stored in the ROM 101 or the like. It may be decided whether or not to do so.

FIG. 10-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S114 of FIG. 6 as the big hit opening pre-process. In the jackpot opening preprocessing shown in FIG. 10-3, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot start flag is on (step 042AKS021). Here, the jackpot start flag is set to the on state in the special symbol stop process of step S113 shown in FIG. 6 in response to the jackpot flag being on. If the jackpot start flag is on in step 042AKS021 (step 042AKS021; Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot start effect is waiting (step 042AKS022). As an example, in the special symbol stop process in step S113 shown in FIG. 3, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the effect waiting time at the start of the jackpot is set. Set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S312, it is determined that the jackpot start effect is waiting in response to the fact that the game control process timer value does not match the predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value (for example, "0"). , Corresponding to the match, it may be determined that the production is not waiting at the start of the big hit.

If the jackpot start effect is waiting in step 042AKS022, step 042AKS022; Yes), for example, after updating by subtracting 1 from the game control process timer value (step 042AKS023), the jackpot opening pre-processing ends. On the other hand, if the jackpot start production is not waiting in step 042AKS022 (step 042AKS022; No), the jackpot start flag is cleared (step 042AKS024), and the jackpot opening count counter is cleared. (Step 042AKS025), the jackpot type buffer value stored in the RAM 102 is read out (step 042AKS026), and the release control pattern corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value is set. In the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment, a common open control pattern is set regardless of the jackpot type. For example, when there is a jackpot type of "probability", a jackpot of "probability change" or "non-probability change" It may be set to an open control pattern different from the type. Further, even if the jackpot type is "probability variation" or "non-probability variation", different opening control patterns are set depending on the jackpot type, for example, the jackpot type of "probability variation 1" and "probability variation 2" are set to different opening control patterns. It may be set in a pattern.

After executing the process of step 042AKS026, it is determined whether or not the player is waiting for opening the large winning opening in the next round (waiting for the next opening) (step 042AKS027). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS027, it is determined whether or not the game control process timer value matches the next open waiting end determination value, and if it does not match, it is determined that the next open wait end is in progress, but if they match. If this is the case, it may be determined that the device is not waiting for opening next time. If the next opening standby is in step 042AKS027 (step 042AKS027; Yes), the process proceeds to step 042AKS023 to update the game control process timer value. The game control process timer value updated in step 042AKS023 is the time set as the waiting time at the start of the jackpot in step 042AKS002 shown in FIG. 10-2, or the post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 of FIG. This is the time set as the interval time between each round.

If it is determined in step 042AKS027 that the next opening is not waiting (step 042AKS027; No), the large winning opening is opened according to the set opening control pattern and the count value in the large winning opening opening counter. (Step 042AKS028). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS028, a large prize formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed by setting a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the large winning opening opening time in the game control process timer. The large winning opening time, which is the upper limit of the time for opening the mouth, is set. Further, for example, the solenoid drive signal for the predetermined large winning opening door is started to be output via the predetermined solenoid circuit, so that the large winning opening door solenoid for opening the large winning opening is turned on. The state is set.

At this time, for example, when the count value in the large winning opening opening counter is any of "1" to "15", the timer initial value corresponding to 29.5 seconds as the large winning opening opening time is the game control process timer. Is set to.

Then, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting the designated command during the opening of the large winning opening to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS029). After executing the process of step 042AKS029, the value of the special figure process flag is updated by adding 1 to the count value of the number of times the large winning opening is opened (step 042AKS030), and the value of the special figure process flag is a value corresponding to the process during the opening of the big hit. After updating to 5 ”(step 042AKS031), the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening is completed.

FIG. 10-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S115 of FIG. 6 as the process during the opening of the jackpot. In the process during the jackpot opening shown in FIG. 10-4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the game ball has been won in the jackpot by, for example, determining whether or not the count switch 23 has been turned on. (Step 042AKS041). If there is no winning of the game ball in the large winning opening in step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; No), the process proceeds to step 042AKS044.

On the other hand, if there is a winning of the game ball to the big winning opening in step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; Yes), the CPU 103 updates by adding 1 to the winning number count value, and the game ball is the big winning opening. A setting is made to transmit a prize designation command indicating that a prize has been won from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS042). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the updated winning number count value is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 042AKS043). If the winning number count value is not a predetermined number (step 042AKS043; No), after the game control process timer value is subtracted by 1 and updated (step 042AKS044), for example, the game control process timer value corresponds to 29.5 seconds. It is determined whether or not 29.5 seconds have passed since the large winning opening was opened, depending on whether or not the timer value is matched (step 042AKS045). At this time, if 29.5 seconds have not elapsed (step 042AKS045; No), the process of opening the large winning opening is terminated as it is.

When it is determined in step 042AKS043 that the updated winning number count value is a predetermined number (step 042AKS043; Yes), or 29.5 seconds have passed since the large winning opening was opened in step 042AKS045. When it is determined (step 042AKS043; Yes), for example, the output of the solenoid drive signal to the predetermined solenoid for the winning opening door is stopped via the predetermined solenoid circuit to close the winning opening. The solenoid for the large winning opening door is set to be turned off (step 042AKS046), and the winning number count value is cleared (step 042AKS047).

After executing the process of step 042AKS047, the setting for transmitting the designated command after opening the large winning opening is made to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS048), and the value of the special figure process flag is set after opening the large winning opening. After updating to "6", which is a value corresponding to the processing (step 042AKS049), the processing during the jackpot opening is terminated.

In this way, the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 10-2, the jackpot opening pre-processing shown in FIG. 10-3, the jackpot opening processing shown in FIG. 10-4, etc. (including the jackpot opening post-processing and the jackpot end processing). Is executed to set transmission of various effect control commands such as a winning start designation command, a large winning opening open designation command, a winning designation command, and a large winning opening post-opening designation command. Then, the command control process of step S27 in FIG. 5 is executed, and the effect control command set to be transmitted is transmitted to the control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12, so that the effect control board 12 side , The timing of each timing such as the start of the big hit, the opening and closing of the big winning opening (start of the round) and the closing (the end of the round), the winning of the big winning opening and the end of the big hit, etc. is grasped.

FIG. 10-5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing performed in the jackpot middle effect processing of step S176 of FIG. 9 as various display processing. In the various display processes shown in FIG. 10-5, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a hit end designation command has been received (step 042AKS051). When it is determined in the big hit opening post-processing of step S116 of FIG. 6 that the number of executions of the round that opens the big winning opening has reached the set upper limit execution number, the hit end designation command is executed on the main board. It is a command transmitted from the side of 11, and is a command for ending the big hit middle effect and executing the ending effect.

When it is determined that the hit end designation command has not been received (step 042AKS051; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the nR (the nR predetermined period has elapsed). Determine (step 042AKS052). Note that n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, and the initial value is set to "1", which is sequentially added by 1 in the process of step 042AKS066 described later, and cleared to "1" in step 042AKS066. The predetermined period is 0.6 seconds, which is set as a timer value at the start of the round game, and when the timer value becomes "0", it may be determined that the predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the nR round. More specifically, from the side of the main board 11 in response to the fact that the big prize opening is completely open (it is detected that the big winning door has moved to the position where it is completely open). The designated command during the opening of the large winning opening is transmitted, and the timer value for a predetermined period may be counted from the timing when the command is received.

In addition, in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment, as will be described later, after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the round game of the first round, the number of acquired balls is displayed and the number of rounds is indicated. The display is done. On the side of the production control board 12, the number of acquisitions is obtained each time a winning designation command indicating that the game ball has won a prize is received in the big winning opening during the period from the big hit to the end (the period from the fanfare to the ending). Is continuously added by 15. When the effect control board 12 receives the prize designation command, it is necessary to first analyze the command, add the number of acquisitions, and display the added number of acquisitions. It takes a predetermined period to display. Therefore, if the predetermined period is too short, the series of processes will not be in time for the winning from the start of the round game of the first round until the predetermined period elapses, and "0000" will be displayed as the number of acquisitions. , The process of displaying "0015" may not catch up even though the prize is won (it becomes "0015" after "0000" is displayed, which gives the player a sense of discomfort). Therefore, in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment, when a predetermined period of 0.6 seconds is provided and the game ball existing at the upper part of the large winning opening at the opening timing wins a prize from the opening until the number of rounds is displayed. In addition, a period in which "0015" is directly displayed without displaying "0000" as the number of acquisitions is secured. On the other hand, in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment, the predetermined period is set to 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval when continuously firing, and the period from firing to winning the grand prize opening is set. Even if it is taken into consideration, the time interval required for the continuously fired game balls to win a prize in the large winning opening is the firing interval. Therefore, the number of winnings in the large winning opening is one from the opening of the large winning opening to the display of the number of winnings. Therefore, by increasing the number of winnings in the state before the number of acquisitions and the number of rounds are displayed, it is possible to prevent the number of acquisitions from being displayed at the timing when the number of rounds is displayed and to give the player a sense of discomfort. can do. Although the predetermined period in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment is 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval, the predetermined period is not limited to 0.6 seconds and may be changed as appropriate.

When it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the start of the nR (step 042AKS052; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not n = 1, that is, whether or not it is the first round. Determine (step 042AKS053). n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, which is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. As described above, the initial value is set to "1", and 1 is sequentially added in the process of step 042AKS066, and "1" is added in step 042AKS068. Cleared to. In the process of step 042AKS053, it is determined whether or not n = 1 by confirming the value of n.

When it is determined that n = 1 (step 042AKS053; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs a right-handed effect suggesting that the player should hit right, and suggests that the player is in a big hit game state. The operation of the fanfare effect is controlled (step 042AKS054). On the other hand, when it is determined that n ≠ 1 (step 042AKS053; No), the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the n-1R, displays the number of acquisitions, and displays the number of acquisitions, and the n-1R. (Step 042AKS055). In the process of step 042AKS055, for example, when n = 2, the round display indicating that it is the first round and the number of acquisitions are displayed, and the operation control of the big hit middle effect corresponding to the first round is performed. In the process of step 042AKS055, as a jackpot effect, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9 is made to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the jackpot effect, and a predetermined song or sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. It suffices if the production of outputting is performed. The light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the jackpot production may be set in advance.

After executing the process of step 042AKS054 or step 042AKS055, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the winning designation command has been received, that is, whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening (step 042AKS056). In the process of step 042AKS056, the winning is determined from the start of the nR to the predetermined period. When the winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends various display processes as it is.

When the winning designation command is received, that is, when the winning opening is won by the predetermined period from the start of the nR (step 042AKS056; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 counts the number of winning balls. Is added by "15" (step 042AKS057). The count value of the number of acquired balls is stored in advance in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 with an initial value of "0", and "15" is added by the process of step 042AKS057 or the process of step 042AKS063 described later. The number of balls won is continuously counted during the so-called consecutive villa, and is cleared to "0" at the timing when the time saving control ends without the variable display result becoming a "big hit", that is, at the end timing of the consecutive villa. .. After executing the process of step 042AKS057, the effect control CPU 120 causes the attacker lamp 9c to emit light and outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning (step 042AKS058). The light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042AKS058 (the same applies to step 042AKS064) is, for example, more than the number of light emission per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c that emits light during the big hit production (winning prize). It emits light in an aspect of notifying that it has been done. Therefore, it becomes easy to visually recognize that the game ball has won the big prize opening, and the game interest can be improved. As for the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c, the number of light emission per unit time may be larger at the time of winning and at the time of producing during the big hit. When a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening, the attacker lamp 9c is made to emit light regardless of whether or not the winning is within a predetermined period, and a winning sound is output. Therefore, it becomes easy to recognize that the game ball has won the big prize opening, and the game interest can be improved.

After executing the process of step 042AKS058, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not n = 1, that is, whether or not it is the first round (1st R), as in step 042AKS053 (step 042AKS059). ). If n = 1, that is, if it is the first round (step 042AKS059; Yes), the various display processes are terminated as they are. On the other hand, if n ≠ 1, that is, if it is not the first round (step 042AKS059; No), the count value of the number of acquired balls added in step 042AKS057 is displayed (the number of acquired balls is displayed), and the number of acquired balls is displayed. After the update display (step 042AKS060), various display processes are terminated. In addition, in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment, when the acquired number update display is performed in the process of step 042AKS060, the count value of the acquired number of balls added in step 042AKS057 is not displayed as it is, but is shown in FIG. 10-. As shown in 12 (a-23), the count-up display (notification display indicating that the number of acquisitions is increasing) is performed, and then the number of acquisitions is displayed. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the number of balls to be acquired increases, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When it is determined in step 042AKS052 of FIG. 10-5 that a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the nR (step 042AKS052; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the nR and the number of acquisitions. And, at the same time, the operation control of the effect during the big hit of the nR is performed (step 042AKS061). When n = 1, that is, in the case of the first round, the number of rounds and the number of acquisitions are displayed for the first time in step 042AKS061. In this case, if there is a prize before the elapse of the predetermined period, the number of acquisitions is updated and displayed in the step 042AKS061. Specifically, if a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening before the lapse of a predetermined period, the number of acquisitions is added by "15" in step 042AKS057. Therefore, in step 042AKS061, FIG. 10-11 (a-20). ) Is displayed to count up (notification display that the number of acquisitions is increasing), and then as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-21), the number of acquisitions has not increased in this big hit. The number of acquisitions (as a specific display) is displayed (display of "0015"), which is different from the predetermined display indicating You can do it after the upload). On the other hand, if the game ball has not won the big prize opening before the lapse of the predetermined period, the number of winnings remains "0" and the number of winnings has not increased in this big hit. Therefore, FIG. 10-11 (a) As shown in -22), as a predetermined display, the number of acquisitions (display of "0000") indicating that the number of acquisitions has not increased is displayed (if it is in a consecutive villa, the number of acquisitions at the time of the previous big hit remains the same. You can display it). In addition to "0000" as the display of the number of acquisitions (predetermined display) indicating that the number of acquisitions has not increased, a display other than a number such as "---" or "not increased" is performed. You may do so. Further, in step 042AKS061, as a jackpot effect, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9 is made to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the jackpot effect, and predetermined music and sound are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. It suffices if the production of outputting is performed. The light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the jackpot production may be set in advance. In this way, during the predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened, that is, in the situation where the number of winnings is not displayed, only the attacker lamp 9c lights up when the game ball wins the large winning opening. However, in the situation where the number of acquisitions after the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed, the effect lamp 9 provided on the frame 3 for the double-game machine and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately alternated. Is turned on, and more effect lamps 9 are emitted than during a predetermined period. Therefore, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player, and after the number of acquisitions after the predetermined period is displayed. The production can be lively and the game entertainment can be improved. Further, since the effect lamp 9 is emitted at the same timing as the execution timing of the big hit middle effect, the effect can be excited at once at the timing when the big hit medium effect is executed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

After executing the process of step 042AKS061, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the winning designation command has been received, that is, whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening (step 042AKS062). When the winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning in the big winning opening (step 042AKS062; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 adds "15" to the count value of the number of acquired balls (step 042AKS063). The attacker playing card 9c is made to emit light, the winning sound corresponding to the winning is output, the count-up is displayed (notification display that the number of acquisitions is increasing), and then the number of acquisitions is displayed. The number of acquisitions is updated. (Step 042AKS064).

After executing the process of step 042AKS064, or when the prize designation command is not received in step 042AKS062 (step 042AKS062; No), has the effect control CPU 120 started the next round of the nR, the n + 1R? It is determined whether or not (step 042AKS065). In step 042AKS065, for example, it may be determined whether or not a designated command during opening of the large winning opening indicating the start of the n + 1R is received from the side of the main board 11. When the n + 1R has not started, that is, when the designated command during the opening of the large winning opening has not been received and the nR remains (step 042AKS065; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends various display processes as it is. .. On the other hand, when the n + 1R starts, that is, when a designated command indicating the start of the n + 1R is received (step 042AKS065; Yes), after adding n by "1" (step 042AKS066), various display processes To finish. For example, when n = 1, that is, in the first round, n = 2 in step 042AKS066. Although n = 2 and the second round, until the predetermined period elapses, it is determined as No in steps 042AKS052 and 053, and in step 042AKS055, it corresponds to the first round which is the n-1R. The round display is performed, and after the lapse of a predetermined period, the round display corresponding to the second round, which is the nR, is performed (after being determined as Yes in step 042AKS052, it is displayed in the process of step 042AKS061).

When it is determined in step 042AKS051 that the hit end designation command has been received (step 042AKS051; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets to end the big hit middle effect corresponding to the round in order to perform the ending effect (step 042AKS051). 042AKS067), clear n to 1 (step 042AKS068), and end various display processes.

Subsequently, display timings such as round number display and acquisition number display and examples of effect operations will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 10-6 to 10-14. In the illustrated example, the case of the so-called first hit (first big hit) is shown, not in the consecutive villas.

FIG. 10-6 is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the large winning opening, the timing of various displays, and the like. 10-7 to 10-14 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation display in the image display device 5, an open / closed state of a large winning opening, and a lighting state of various lamps. As shown in FIGS. 10-6 and 10-7 (a-1), when the combination of the decorative symbols constituting the jackpot is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game state is reached. At this stage, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (b-1), the large winning opening is closed. Further, in order to notify the player that a big hit has occurred, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-1), the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the speaker lamp 9eL, Various effect lamps 9 such as 9eR, the lower lamp 9f of the display device, and the general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g are turned on. In the illustrated example, the upper stage is the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3, and the lower stage is the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2.

When it becomes a big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-6, a right-handed effect and a fanfare effect are performed to notify the player that the player should hit right until the predetermined period of the first round ends (Fig. 10-). Step 042AKS054) of step 5. The period from the jackpot shown in FIG. 10-6 to the start of the first R is a sufficiently longer period than the predetermined period. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (a-2), the effect image of the fanfare is displayed on the image display device 5, and at the same time, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-2). All effect lamps 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, the effect lamp 9 is turned on in the order of the lower left side, the upper left side, the central portion, the upper right side, and the lower right side, and the right-handed effect of displaying "right-handed" on the image display device is performed. The small right-handed display displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 10-7 (a-2) may be continuously displayed during the big hit game state.

Specifically, in the right-handed effect, as shown in FIGS. 10-7 (a-3) to 10-10 (a-19), in the image display device 5, the "right-handed" image is superimposed on the fanfare image. The display continues. Therefore, the lighting order of the effect lamp 9 will be described below. When the right-handed effect is started, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-3), the general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g provided at the lower left of the game area is first lit, and then FIG. 10-7 (Fig. 10-7 (c-3). As shown in c-4), the lower left lamp 9bL1, which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower left portion, lights up. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-5), of the display device lower lamps 9f provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 on the game board 2, the left side display device lower lamp 9fL is lit, and then the left side display device lower lamp 9fL is turned on. As shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-6), the upper left lamp 9bL2, which is the frame lamp 9 in the upper left portion, lights up, and as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-7), the speaker lamp corresponding to the speaker 8L portion. 9eL lights up. In this way, the effect lamps 9 are turned on in order from the lower left side to the upper left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (b-7), since the large winning opening is closed, the launched game medium does not win the large winning opening at this stage. In the example shown in FIG. 10-8 (b-7), the launched game ball passes through the second path of the upper part of the grand prize opening door and is guided to the discharge path.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-8), the movable body lamp 9d corresponding to the movable body 32 provided in the upper center portion of the game board 2 is turned on, and FIG. 10-8 (c-9). ), The main lamp 9 located above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3 is lit, so that the effect lamp 9 provided in the upper center portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is lit.

Next, the speaker lamp 9eR corresponding to the speaker 8R portion is turned on as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-10), and then the frame lamp in the upper right portion is lit as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-11). The upper right lamp 9bR2, which is 9, lights up, and as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-12), the right display device of the display device lower lamp 9f provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 on the game board 2. The lower lamp 9fR lights up. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-13), the lower right lamp 9bR1 which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower right part is lit, and the attacker lamp 9c provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 is lit. do. In this way, the effect lamps 9 are lit in order from the upper right side to the lower right side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a result, the effect lamp 9 lights up in order from the lower left side to the upper left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the central part, and then from the upper right side to the lower right side, so that the effect lamp 9 hits the player right. Right-handed production will be performed to suggest. In this example, an example is shown in which both the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are used to suggest right-handed striking. It may be. Further, only the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 lights from the lower left side to the center and the lower right side, and only the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 lights from the lower left side to the center and right. Both may be lit independently at the same time or with a time lag, such as lighting in the downward direction.

After the right-handed effect of the effect lamps 9 is completed, all the effect lamps 9 are turned off as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). As shown in FIG. 10-9 (a-15), the right-handed display on the image display device 5 is continuously performed (the right-handed effect itself is being executed).

Next, when the opening timing of the large winning opening is reached as shown in FIG. 10-6, the first R is started, and the large winning opening is opened as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-16). At this stage, right-handed display on the image display device 5 is continuously performed as shown in FIG. 10-10 (a-16), and is shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-16) until a predetermined period elapses. As such, all effect lamps 9 remain off (same until FIGS. 10-10 (a-19) and (c-19)). Even if all the effect lamps 9 are not turned off, any of the indexes such as luminous intensity, brightness, and illuminance may be set to be lower than usual. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-16), even after the large winning opening is opened, until a predetermined period elapses, FIGS. 10-7 (c-3) to 10-9. As shown in (c-13), the effect lamps 9 may be turned on in sequence to suggest right-handed strikes. In this case, the lighting speed of each effect lamp may be faster than before the opening of the big winning opening (the lighting period may be shortened and the transition speed may be faster). Further, when the effect lamps 9 are sequentially turned on after the large winning opening is opened to suggest a right-handed strike, after the last lit attacker lamp 9c is turned on, it is shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). You may leave it on as it is without turning it off. According to this, the player can be made aware that the big winning opening is open.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-17), when the large winning opening is completely opened, the count of 0.6 seconds as a predetermined period corresponding to the first R is started, and FIG. 10-10 When the game ball wins the large winning opening as shown in (b-18), the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, and the winning designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side. It should be noted that the large winning opening is also open for the game ball (early hit game ball) launched by performing the right-handed effect before the first R is started (before the large winning opening is opened). If it exists in the upper part of the large winning opening at the timing, it becomes possible to win a prize within a predetermined period corresponding to the first R. On the side of the effect control board 12, the winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18) by the processing of step 042AKS058 in FIG. 10-5, and the winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18). As shown in the above, the attacker lamp 9c is turned on in a manner of notifying that the prize has been won. As described above, the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c is emitted in a manner larger than the number of light emission per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c, which emits light in, for example, the big hit medium effect. In the example shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), the launched game ball passes through the first path, which is the path in the direction of the big winning opening, and is guided to the winning path provided with the count switch 23. An example is shown. The special variable winning ball device 7 is configured such that the time until the game ball existing in the large winning opening door portion is detected by the count switch 23 is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball existing in the upper part of the large winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 within a predetermined period from the opening of the large winning opening, and the player's interest in the game is reduced without giving anxiety to the player. Can be prevented.

After the game ball has won the big prize opening as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), or after the state shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-17) has not been won, time has passed, and FIG. 10- When the predetermined period elapses as shown in 10 (a-19), (b-19) and (c-19), as shown in FIG. 10-6, the number of rounds corresponding to the 1st R is displayed and the jackpot medium effect is produced. Since it is the execution timing and the execution timing of the acquisition number display, the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 is executed.

Specifically, when the game ball wins the large winning opening before the lapse of a predetermined period as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-20), the first The number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and the count-up display is performed. Further, at the same timing as these displays, as a big hit middle effect (1st R middle effect), as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-20), a decorative pattern constituting the big hit is displayed and "BOUNUS" is displayed. , And the character are displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbols constituting the jackpot and the display of "during BOUNUS" displayed as the jackpot middle production (1st R middle production) are not shown (the same applies to FIGS. 10-20 described later). It is displayed in a manner suggesting that it should be right-handed as shown in 10-21. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-1), when a fanfare or a right-handed effect is performed and a predetermined period elapses after the big winning opening is opened, the big hit medium effect is shown in FIG. 10-21. As shown in (A-2), the design of "7", which is a decorative design constituting the jackpot, is displayed in a front-facing manner, and is displayed above "B" in the "BOUNUS" display. A star-shaped image is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-3), the design of "7", which is a decorative design constituting the jackpot, is tilted toward the right back, and "in BOUNUS" is displayed. The star-shaped image shifts to the upper part of "O". Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-4), the symbol "7", which is a decorative symbol constituting the jackpot, faces the front, and a star is placed above the "N" in the "BOUNUUS" display. The shape image shifts. After that, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-5), the design of "7", which is a decorative design constituting the jackpot, is inclined toward the left back direction, and "U" in the display of "BOUNUS" is displayed. The star-shaped image shifts to the top of. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-6), the symbol "7", which is the decorative symbol constituting the jackpot again, faces the front, and the star is above the "S" in the "BOUNUUS" display. The image of the shape shifts and returns to FIG. 10-21 (A-2). In this way, in the big hit medium production, the decorative patterns that make up the big hit are operated in the right back direction, the front, and the left back direction, and a star-shaped image is displayed from the left character of the "BOUNUS middle" display to the right. It suggests to the player that he should hit right by shifting. The operation display of the decorative pattern that composes the jackpot and the transition display of the star-shaped image are called effect display. In addition to this, for example, a predetermined image is rotated clockwise or the character is gradually displayed. Includes indications such as pointing to the right. That is, the effect display may be displayed in a manner suggesting right-handed striking. According to this, it is suggested that the right-handed hit should be made by the effect display, and the right-handed hit can be easily recognized.

In the jackpot effect, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (c-20), the effect lamp 9 lights up according to a light emission pattern preset according to the jackpot effect. In this example, it is assumed that a light emitting pattern is set in which the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately lit. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-21), "0015" is displayed as the acquired number display. In this way, as shown in FIGS. 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19), the effect lamp 9 is not emitted until the large winning opening is opened and the predetermined period elapses. As shown in -11 (c-20) and (c-22), the effect lamp 9 is made to emit light after the display of the number of acquisitions after the lapse of a predetermined period is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the early hitting by the player and promote the firing timing.

On the other hand, when the predetermined period elapses without the game ball winning the big prize opening, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-22), the count-up display is not performed and the number of acquisitions is displayed as "0000". Is displayed. In addition, the point that the number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and as the big hit middle production (1st R middle production), the decorative symbols constituting the big hit are displayed, "BOUNUS" is displayed, and The point that the character is displayed and the point that the effect lamp 9 lights up according to the light emission pattern set in advance according to the effect during the big hit are common regardless of whether or not a prize is won.

Next, as time elapses, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), when the tenth game ball wins the big winning opening in the first R, the upper limit at which the big winning opening can be opened. It will be a period. Along with the winning, the process of step 042AKS064 shown in FIG. 10-5 is executed, the count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23), and FIG. 10-12 (a-24). As shown in the above, the number of acquired "0150" is displayed. Further, along with the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), and in addition to lighting the effect lamp 9 corresponding to the effect during the big hit, FIG. 10-12 (c-23). ), The attacker lamp 9c lights up in a manner of notifying that a prize has been won. It should be noted that the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened is a sufficient period even if it is counted after the lapse of a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win a prize. Specifically, the upper limit period is 29.5 seconds after opening, and is 28.9 seconds even after the elapse of a predetermined period. Since the continuous firing interval is 0.6 seconds, 10 prizes are sufficiently possible. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of security because sufficient time is secured for winning.

When the 10th game ball wins the big prize opening in the 1st R, the maximum period during which the big winning opening can be opened is reached. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-24), the large winning opening is opened. It is controlled to be closed. After that, during the period until the second R shown in FIG. 10-6 is started, the large winning opening is controlled to be completely closed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-25). On the other hand, until the predetermined period of the second R elapses (from the time when n = 2 until the predetermined period elapses), as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-25), the number of rounds corresponding to the first R is displayed. , The big hit production is continuously performed (the number of acquisitions is updated and displayed according to the winning), and the effect lamp 9 corresponds to the big hit production as shown in FIG. 10-12 (c-25). Lights up.

In the 1st R, when the 10th game ball wins the big winning opening and the upper limit period is reached, the big winning opening is controlled to be closed. At this time, the 11th game ball is controlled. In some cases, a so-called over-winning may occur in which the player wins a prize in the large winning opening following the tenth game ball. Even in the over-winning, the count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23), and the number of acquired "0165" may be displayed. In this case, after the count-up display and the number of winnings are displayed according to the tenth prize, the count-up display and the number of winnings corresponding to the over-winning are displayed, but FIG. 10-12 (b-25). As shown in the above, the count-up display and the number of winnings display corresponding to the over-winning are completed within the period from the time when the large winning opening is completely closed to the time before the opening state corresponding to the second R is reached. Therefore, it is easy for the player to recognize that the over-winning has occurred in the first round, and the game interest can be improved. In addition, since the update of the number of acquisitions display in the opening corresponding to the first round does not overlap with the update of the number of acquisitions in the opening corresponding to the second round, it is possible to determine which prize will be awarded corresponding to the opening of the round. It will be easy. Further, the winning sound corresponding to the over winning sound may be a sound different from the normal winning sound (over winning sound). In this case, when the winning value exceeds the upper limit value "10", the over winning sound may be output. Further, the attacker lamp 9c may also emit light in a mode corresponding to over-winning, unlike the light emission in the normal winning mode.

Then, corresponding to the second round, the timing is such that the large winning opening is opened again as shown in FIG. 10-6, and the large winning opening is opened again as shown in FIG. 10-13 (b-26). Is controlled to be. At this time, Yes is determined in step 042AKS065 of FIG. 10-5, that is, a command indicating the start of the n + 1R is received, and the process of 042AKS066 is executed, so that n = 2. Become. At this stage, since the process of step 042AKS055 in FIG. 10-5 is executed, as shown in FIGS. 10-13 (a-26) and (c-26), the big hit medium effect and the number of rounds corresponding to the first R The display is made (see also Figure 10-6).

Next, when the big winning opening is completely opened and the game ball wins the big winning opening as shown in FIG. 10-13 (b-27), the step of FIG. 10-5 is different from the case of the 1st R. In the process of 042AKS060, the count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-27), and the number of acquired "0165" is displayed as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-28). Further, along with the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-13 (b-27), and in addition to lighting the effect lamp 9 corresponding to the effect during the big hit, FIG. 10-13 (c-27). ), The attacker lamp 9c lights up. As described above, in the rounds other than the 1st R, the number of winnings is updated and displayed during the predetermined period even if the prize is won during the predetermined period. Then, when the predetermined period of the second R elapses, the process of step 042AKS061 of FIG. 10-5 is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30), "2R" indicating that the second round is performed. The number of rounds is displayed, and the big hit middle production corresponding to the 2nd R is executed. In this case, the number of "1" in the round number display of "1R" which is the first round is changed to "2". That is, "R" is continuously displayed from the first round. Further, the display of "1R" is continuously displayed until the predetermined period of the second R elapses. Further, in the feature unit 042AK of this embodiment, an example of executing a common big hit medium effect regardless of the number of rounds (the same applies to the lighting control of the effect effect lamp 9) is shown, but it is executed in each round. The production during the big hit may be different. The same applies to the lighting of the effect lamp 9. In this way, since the large winning opening is opened before the number of rounds indicating that it is the second round is displayed, the player's game ball that has been continuously fired from the first round is released at an early stage. You can win a prize in the big prize opening. Therefore, in each round of the plurality of round games, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game balls fired in succession are won in the large winning opening opened earlier than the round display.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-13 (a-26), (b-26), and (c-26), the large winning opening is controlled to be open corresponding to the second R, and FIG. 10-13 (a-29). ), (B-29), and (c-29) show that when a predetermined period has passed without the game ball winning after the large winning opening is completely opened, FIG. 10-14 (a-31). ), (B-31), and (c-31), the number of acquisitions acquired in the first R is continuously displayed as it is. After that, the same processing is performed until the final round determined in advance, and when it is determined that the hit end designation command has been received in step 042AKS051 of FIG. Set to end. In this way, for the second and subsequent rounds, if the prize is not won during the predetermined period, the number of winnings displayed in the previous round is continuously displayed, while the prize is won during the predetermined period. Is displayed by adding the number of acquired balls to the number of acquired balls displayed in the previous round. Therefore, even after the second round, it is possible to easily recognize the winning of the big winning opening.

For example, in the final round, when the 10th game ball wins the big winning opening and the upper limit period is reached, the big winning opening is controlled to be closed. At this time, the 11th game is played. As shown in FIG. 10-15, the big hit game state may end while the ball is sandwiched between the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a). .. In this case, at the start of the 1st R in the case of the next big hit (when the big winning opening corresponding to the 1st R is opened), the game ball will win the big winning opening, and during the predetermined period of the 1st R A game ball wins. Also in this case, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18), the attacker lamp 9c is turned on in a manner of notifying that the winner has been won, and after the lapse of the predetermined period, FIGS. 10-11 (a-20) and FIG. As shown in (a-21), after performing the count-up display, "0015" may be displayed as the acquired number display. Further, in such a case, there is a possibility that the launched game ball will further win a prize during the predetermined period (the second ball may win a prize), and in that case, after the predetermined period elapses, FIG. 10-11 ( As shown in a-20) and (a-21), after the count-up display is performed, "0030" may be directly displayed without displaying "0000" or "0015" as the acquisition number display. According to this, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the game entertainment.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 042AK in this embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the number of acquisitions by the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 after a predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened and the first round is started. Then, if the game ball does not win the big prize opening within the predetermined period after the first round is started, a predetermined display indicating that the number of acquired balls has not increased is performed after the predetermined period, and the first round is performed. If the game ball wins the large winning opening within a predetermined period after the start of one round, the number of acquisitions is displayed as a specific display different from the predetermined display after the predetermined period. According to this, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player.

Further, when the game ball wins the large winning opening within a predetermined period after the first round is started, the effect control CPU 120 directly specifies the number of acquired "0000" as a predetermined display. Display the number of acquisitions of "0015" as a display. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and to prevent the game from being enjoyed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs a count-up display as a notification display that the number of acquisitions will increase if the game ball wins the large winning opening within a predetermined period after the first round is started. , Display the number of acquisitions of "0015" as a specific display. According to this, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a prize and the number of acquisitions increases.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 counts the timer value for a predetermined period from the timing of receiving the command indicating that the large winning opening is open, which is transmitted from the main board 11 side in response to the opening of the large winning opening. Is started, and the number of acquisitions is displayed after the lapse of a predetermined period. According to this, since the predetermined period is suitably counted and the specific display is performed when a prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 closes the large winning opening door to guide the launched game ball through the second path of the upper part of the large winning opening door to the discharge path. By opening the winning opening door, the launched game ball is guided to the large winning opening through the first path and detected by the count switch 23. The special variable winning ball device 7 is configured such that the time until the game ball existing in the large winning opening door portion is detected by the count switch 23 is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period. .. According to this, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball existing in the upper part of the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 within a predetermined period from the opening of the big winning opening, and the game is enjoyed without giving the player anxiety. Can be prevented from decreasing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the effect control CPU 120 strikes right as shown in FIG. 10-7 (a-3) between the time when the big hit is reached and the time when the big winning opening is opened. By performing the production, the player is informed that he / she should hit right. According to this, since the game area to be launched during the big hit is suggested, the game method can be easily recognized and the game interest can be improved.

The open state of the large winning opening is a state in which the large winning opening is completely open, that is, the large winning opening is moved to a position where the large winning opening is completely open, and the large winning opening is opened. A command for specifying that the large winning opening is open is transmitted from the side of the main board 11 in response to the detection that the position has been moved to the completely open state. According to this, since the predetermined period is counted after the large winning opening is completely opened, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player.

In addition, the big winning opening is also open for the game ball (early hit game ball) that was launched by performing the right-handed effect before the first R is started (before the big winning opening is open). If it exists in the upper part of the large winning opening at the timing, it is possible to win a prize within a predetermined period corresponding to the first R. The number of acquisitions is displayed as a display. According to this, it is possible to prevent the game ball hit early from being wasted.

Further, for example, in the final round, when the 10th game ball wins the big winning opening and the upper limit period is reached, the big winning opening is controlled to be closed. At this time, the 11th game is played. As shown in FIG. 10-15, the big hit game state may end while the ball is sandwiched between the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a). .. In this case, at the start of the 1st R in the case of the next big hit (when the big winning opening corresponding to the 1st R is opened), the game ball will win the big winning opening, and during the predetermined period of the 1st R The winning of the game ball occurs, and the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of acquisitions as a specific display after the lapse of the predetermined period. According to this, it is possible to prevent the dissatisfaction felt by the player when an irregular event occurs.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a fanfare effect suggesting that the game is in a big hit game state from the closed state to the open state of the big winning opening. Then, after the big winning opening is opened and a predetermined period has passed, the number of rounds is displayed together with the number of winnings, and it is possible to perform a big hit middle production corresponding to the round game. According to this, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by adding sharpness to the production.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), the effect control CPU 120 is used when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening during a predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened. The attacker lamp 9c is turned on as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening other than the predetermined period, the attacker lamp is also shown in FIG. 10-12 (c-23). Turn on 9c. According to this, since the specific display is performed when the prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player, and it is possible to visually recognize that the prize has been won within the predetermined period. It will be easier.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 emits light from the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042AKS058 in FIG. 10-5 (the same applies to step 042AKS064), for example, a unit of the game effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c that emits light in the big hit medium effect. Light is emitted in a mode that is greater than the number of light emission per hour (a mode for notifying that a prize has been won). According to this, it becomes easy to visually recognize that the game ball has won the big prize opening, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), the effect control CPU 120 is concerned when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening during a predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened. Outputs the winning sound corresponding to the winning. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), even when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening other than the predetermined period, a winning sound corresponding to the winning is output. According to this, it becomes easy to recognize that the game ball has won the big prize opening, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 also displays the number of rounds corresponding to the first and subsequent rounds in the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 after a predetermined period after the round is started. conduct. According to this, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest without giving anxiety to the player, and in each round of a plurality of round games, It is possible to increase the possibility of winning consecutively fired game balls in the large winning opening opened earlier than the round display.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in the figure when the game medium does not win a prize in the large winning opening within a predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened when the round game after the second round is performed. As shown in 10-14 (a-31), when the number of acquisitions displayed in the previous round game is continuously displayed, while the game medium wins the large winning opening within the predetermined period. Is displayed by adding the number of winning balls given in response to the winning from the winning number display displayed in the previous round game, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30). According to this, it is possible to easily recognize the winning of the big winning opening even after the second round.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the count-up display as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23) even when an over-winning occurs, and displays the number of acquisitions of "0165". In this case, after the count-up display and the number of winnings are displayed according to the tenth prize, the count-up display and the number of winnings corresponding to the over-winning are displayed, but FIG. 10-12 (b-25). As shown in the above, the count-up display and the number of winnings display corresponding to the over-winning are completed within the period from the time when the large winning opening is completely closed to the time before the opening state corresponding to the second R is reached. According to this, since the update of the acquired number display at the time of one opening does not overlap with the update of the acquired number display at the next opening, it becomes easy to determine which opening corresponds to the winning.

Further, in the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18), the game is played during a predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened, that is, in a situation where the number of acquisitions is not displayed. Although the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the ball wins the big prize opening, in the situation where the number of acquisitions after the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed, for example, FIG. 10-11 (c-20) and ( As shown in c-21), the effect lamps 9 provided on the frame 3 for the multi-game machine and the effect lamps 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately turned on, and more than during the predetermined period. The effect lamp 9 emits light. According to this, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player, and the number of acquisitions after the predetermined period is displayed. It is possible to liven up the production after that and improve the game entertainment.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a right-handed effect and a fanfare effect before the start of the first round, and even after the large winning opening is opened, a predetermined period of time is reached. The effect lamps 9 may be turned on in sequence as shown in FIGS. 10-7 (c-3) to 10-9 (c-13) to suggest right-handed strikes, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. As shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-21), for example, the effect lamp 9 provided in the frame 3 for the double-game machine and the effect effect provided in the game board 2. The lamps 9 are turned on alternately. According to this, it is possible to suggest right-handed striking by using the effect lamp 9. Further, when the effect lamps 9 are sequentially turned on after the large winning opening is opened to suggest a right-handed strike, after the last lit attacker lamp 9c is turned on, it is shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). The lights may be turned on as they are without being turned off as in the above-mentioned manner, and according to this, the player can be made aware that the big winning opening is in the open state.

In addition, the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened is a sufficient period even if it is counted after the lapse of a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win a prize. According to this, it is possible to give the player a sense of security because sufficient time is secured for winning.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIGS. 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19) until the large winning opening is opened and a predetermined period elapses, that is, until the number of winnings is displayed. In addition, the effect lamp 9 is not emitted, and as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the effect lamp 9 is emitted after the display of the number of acquisitions after the lapse of a predetermined period is displayed. Let me. According to this, it is possible to suppress the early hitting by the player and promote the firing timing.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the effect control CPU 120 emits the effect lamp 9 at the same timing as the execution timing of the effect during the big hit after the elapse of a predetermined period. Let me. According to this, the production can be excited at once at the timing when the production during the big hit is executed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-21, the effect control CPU 120 suggests right-handed effect display for shifting and displaying a decorative pattern or a star-shaped image constituting a big hit at the timing when the number of acquisitions is displayed. Perform in a mode. According to this, the effect display suggests that the player should hit the right side, and the player can easily recognize that the player should hit the right side.

(Modification example of feature part 042AK)
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), the effect lamps 9 are turned on in order, suggesting that the effect lamp 9 should be right-handed. An example is shown in which all the effect lamps 9 are turned off after the right-handed effect by the effect lamp 9 is completed, but this is an example. For example, after the states shown in FIGS. 10-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), FIGS. 10-16 (a-16A), (b-16A), (c-16A). As shown in FIG. 10-16 (c-16A) at the timing (FIG. 10-16 (b-16A)) when the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. The attacker lamp 9c provided at the position may be turned on. According to this, the player can easily visually recognize that the big winning opening is in the open state. The attacker lamp 9c may be continuously lit until a predetermined period elapses or during the opening period.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the round display is updated from the first round to the second round, the number of "1" in the number of rounds of "1R" which is the first round is changed to "2". , "R" is continuously displayed from the first round, and "1R" is continuously displayed until the predetermined period of the second R elapses, but this is just an example. be. For example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, the display of "1" in the display of "1R" is deleted at the end of the open state corresponding to the first round, that is, at the timing when the large winning opening is closed. , "R" may be displayed only. Then, "2" may be displayed at the timing when the predetermined period of the second R has elapsed, and the round display of "2R" indicating that it is the second round may be performed. The same applies to the second and subsequent rounds. According to this, the end of each round can be visually recognized, and the game can be sharpened.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the number of winnings that is the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened is 10 (the upper limit winning number is 10). For example, the upper limit winning is set to 1. , If two pieces are entered during the predetermined period before the number of rounds is displayed, an over prize may be given. In this case, as the over-winning winning sound during the predetermined period, a sound different from the normal winning sound (over-winning sound) may be output, and the attacker lamp 9c may also emit light in a manner indicating the occurrence of over-winning. ..

Further, in the above embodiment, an example of counting the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening is shown for displaying the number of acquisitions, but in addition to this, the winning to the general winning opening 10 during the big hit is also counted. May be good. Since right-handed hits are made during the big hit, the general winning opening for winning is the general winning opening 10 provided above the variable winning ball device 6B. FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processes in the case of counting the winning of the general winning opening 10 during the big hit. The same part as in FIG. 10-5 will not be described.

In the various display processes shown in FIGS. 10-18, when it is determined in step 042AKS056 that the prize designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), a general prize indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the general prize opening 10 is further obtained. It is determined whether or not the designated command has been received (step 042AKS081). Then, when the general winning designation command is received, that is, when the general winning opening 10 is won (step 042AKS081; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of acquired balls (step 042AKS081; Yes). Step 042AKS082). After executing the process of step 042AKS082, or when the general winning designation command has not been received, that is, when there is no winning in the general winning opening 10 (step 042AKS081; No), the process proceeds to the process of step 042AKS059. In addition, along with winning the general winning opening 10, a winning sound indicating that the game ball has won the general winning opening 10 (a winning sound different from the case where the large winning opening is won) may be output.

Further, in the various display processes shown in FIGS. 10-18, when it is determined in step 042AKS062 that the winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS062; No), it further indicates that the game ball has won the general winning opening 10. It is determined whether or not the general prize designation command has been received (step 042AKS083). Then, when the general winning designation command is received, that is, when the general winning opening 10 is won (step 042AKS083; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of acquired balls (step 042AKS083; Yes). Step 042AKS083), the number of acquisitions is updated and displayed (step 042AKS085). Even when the acquisition number update display in step 042AKS085 is performed, the acquisition number display is performed after the count-up display (notification display that the acquisition number increases) is performed. After executing the process of step 042AKS085, or when the general winning designation command has not been received, that is, when there is no winning in the general winning opening 10 (step 042AKS083; No), the process proceeds to the process of step 042AKS065. In addition, along with winning the general winning opening 10, a winning sound indicating that the game ball has won the general winning opening 10 (a winning sound different from the case where the large winning opening is won) may be output.

Subsequently, an example of the effect operation in the case of counting the winning of the general winning opening 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20. 10-19 and 10-20 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation display in the image display device 5, an open / closed state of a large winning opening, and a lighting state of various lamps. (A-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17) shown in FIG. 10-19 are shown in FIG. 10-10 ( The same applies to a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17). As shown in the figure, when the big winning opening is opened, the counting of 0.6 seconds as a predetermined period is started. When the game ball wins the general winning opening 10, the state shifts to the states shown in FIGS. 10-19 (a-18A), (b-18A), and (c-18A). Then, after the game ball has won the general winning opening 10 as shown in FIG. 10-19 (b-18A), or from the state shown in FIG. 10-19 (b-17), the game ball is also generally used in the large winning opening. When time elapses without winning the winning opening 10 and a predetermined period elapses as shown in FIGS. 10-19 (a-19A), (b-19A) and (c-19A), the game ball wins a general prize. When a prize is won in the mouth 10, the state shifts to the state shown in FIGS. 10-20 (a-20A), (b-20A), and (c-20A), and as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-20A). , The number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is the first round is displayed, and the count-up display is performed. Further, at the same timing as these displays, as a big hit middle effect (1st R middle effect), as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-20A), a decorative pattern constituting the big hit is displayed or "BOUNUS is in progress" is displayed. , And the character are displayed. In the jackpot effect, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (c-20A), the effect lamp 9 lights up according to a light emission pattern preset according to the jackpot effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-21A), "0003" is displayed as the number of acquisitions.

On the other hand, when the predetermined period elapses without the game ball winning the general winning opening 10, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-22A), the count-up display is not performed and the number of acquisitions is displayed as "0000". Is displayed. In addition, the point that the number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and as the big hit middle production (1st R middle production), the decorative symbols constituting the big hit are displayed, "BOUNUS" is displayed, and The point that the character is displayed and the point that the effect lamp 9 lights up according to the light emission pattern set in advance according to the effect during the big hit are common regardless of whether or not a prize is won.

As described above, even when the game ball wins the general winning opening 10 during the predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened at the start of the first round, the predetermined setting is the same as in the above embodiment. After the elapse of the period, "0003" is displayed as the number of winnings in response to the winning of the general winning opening 10. Further, when the game ball is not won in the general winning opening 10 during the predetermined period, "0000" is displayed as a predetermined display indicating that the prize ball is not given. Therefore, since the number of winnings corresponding to the winning is displayed also for the game ball that has won the general winning opening 10 during the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from being anxious.

(Explanation of Means Related to Feature 042AK)
(1) The gaming machine according to the feature unit 042AK is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and displays the display contents on the display means (for example, the image display device 5). A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change between a first state in which the gaming medium is easy to win and a second state in which the gaming medium is impossible or difficult to win. A control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state a plurality of times when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state. (For example, a CPU 103 that performs a round game), and the display means can display a grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the variable winning means (for example, a CPU 103 that performs a round game). (For example, the number of acquisitions is displayed), when the first round game of the plurality of round games is performed, a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. After the lapse of time, the grant amount display is displayed (for example, in the first round, the number of winnings is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened), and the gaming medium is the variable winning means within the predetermined period. If the player does not win a prize, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0000" is displayed as the number of acquisitions), and the above. When the gaming medium wins the variable winning means within a predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display. Etc.), which is characteristic.

According to such a configuration, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest without giving anxiety to the player.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, when the gaming medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the display means displays the specific display without displaying the predetermined display. (For example, "0015" may be displayed instead of "0000").

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and to prevent the game from being enjoyed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the display means is given the gaming value when the gaming medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period. After performing the count-up display indicating the above, the display according to the gaming value given as the specific display is performed (for example, the count-up display which is a notification display that the number of acquisitions increases is performed, and then “0015”. , Etc.), may be done.

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a prize and the number of acquisitions increases.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, the display means is a command indicating that the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state. After the predetermined period elapses after reception, the display of the grant amount display is started (for example, counting of the timer value for the predetermined period is started from the timing when the designated command for opening the large winning opening sent from the main board 11 side is received. Etc.), you may do so.

According to such a configuration, since the predetermined period is suitably counted and the specific display is performed when the prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above, the variable winning means is the first path (for example, large) that guides the game medium to the winning path by being in the first state. By opening the winning opening door, the launched game ball passes through the first path and leads to the big winning opening, etc.), and in the second state, the game medium is guided to the discharge path. A route forming means including two routes (for example, by closing the grand prize opening door, the launched game ball is guided to the discharge route by passing through the second route of the upper part of the grand prize opening door). And a detection means (for example, a count switch 23) formed in the winning path to detect the winning of the gaming medium, and the time from the path forming means to the detecting means of the gaming medium is within the predetermined period. (For example, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the game ball existing in the large winning opening door portion is detected by the count switch 23 is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period. Etc.), you may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball existing in the upper part of the big winning opening is detected within a predetermined period from the opening of the big winning opening, and the player can enjoy the game without giving anxiety. It is possible to prevent a decrease.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, after being controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means becomes the first state, the player is asked. An operation promotion display is performed to promote the operation (for example, a game is played by performing a right-handed effect as shown in FIG. 10-7 (a-3) between the time when the big hit is reached and the time when the big winning opening is opened. (Indicate to the person what should be right-handed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, since the operation to be performed during the advantageous state is suggested, the game method can be easily recognized and the game interest can be improved.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above, the first state is a state in which the variable winning door included in the variable winning means is completely opened (for example,). The open state of the large winning opening is a state in which the large winning opening is completely open, that is, the large winning opening is moved to a position where the large winning opening is completely open, and the large winning opening is opened. In response to the detection that the machine has moved to a completely open state, a command for specifying that the large winning opening is open is transmitted from the side of the main board 11).

According to such a configuration, since the predetermined period is counted after the large winning opening is completely opened, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above, the operation promotion display is performed before the first round game in the advantageous state is started. When the launched gaming medium wins the variable winning means, the specific display is displayed after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, a gaming ball launched by performing a right-handed effect before the first R is started). However, it is possible to win a prize at the timing when the large winning opening is opened, and if a prize is won within the predetermined period, the number of winnings is displayed as a specific display after the predetermined period).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game medium launched before the start of the round game from being wasted.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above, in the last round game of the plurality of round games in the advantageous state, the variable winning means is the first. When the state changes from the first state to the second state, the advantageous state ends with the game medium sandwiched (for example, in the final round, as shown in FIG. 10-15, the eleventh game ball is a special variable winning ball. The first round game when the device 7 (more specifically, the big hit game state ends while being sandwiched between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a) is controlled again to the advantageous state. When the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state and the gaming medium in the sandwiched state wins the variable winning means, the specific display is displayed after the lapse of the predetermined period ( For example, in the case of the next big hit, the game ball wins the big winning opening at the start of the first R, and after a predetermined period of time, the number of acquisitions is displayed as a specific display).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the dissatisfaction felt by the player when an irregular event occurs.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above, until the variable winning means is controlled from the advantageous state and the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. , It is possible to execute a suggestion effect suggesting that the machine is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare effect suggesting that the game is in a big hit game state from the closed state to the open state of the big winning opening). (It is possible, etc.), along with the start of the display of the grant amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period, it is possible to execute the round game display capable of identifying the round game being executed and the in-round effect corresponding to the round game. (For example, after the big winning opening is open and a predetermined period has passed, the number of rounds can be displayed together with the number of winnings, and a big hit middle production corresponding to the round game can be executed).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by adding sharpness to the production.

(Explanation of Means Related to Feature 043AK)
The feature unit 042AK includes the following feature unit 043AK. (1) The gaming machine according to the feature unit 043AK is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and displays the display contents on the display means (for example, the image display device 5). A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change between a first state in which the gaming medium is easy to win and a second state in which the gaming medium is impossible or difficult to win. When,
A control means (for example, a control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state a plurality of times when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state (for example). The display means can display a grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the variable winning means (for example, acquisition). When the first round game of the plurality of round games is performed (such as displaying a number), after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. The grant amount display is displayed (for example, in the first round, the number of winnings is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened), and the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period. If not, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0000" is displayed as the acquisition number display), and the predetermined period is displayed. When the game medium wins the variable winning means, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display). Further, the light emitting means (for example, the effect lamp 9 or the like) and the light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 or the like) are further provided. The light emitting means is controlled by a light emitting pattern corresponding to the winning of the game medium depending on whether the variable winning means is won or the game medium wins the variable winning means before the lapse of the predetermined period. For example, when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening, the attacker lamp 9c is made to emit light regardless of whether or not the winning is within a predetermined period).

According to such a configuration, since the specific display is performed when the prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player, and the prize is won within the predetermined period. Is easier to see.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the light emitting means is a specific light emitting means (for example, an attacker lamp 9c) located in the vicinity of the variable winning means that emits light when a game medium wins the variable winning means. Etc.) and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means (for example, an effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c), and the light emission of the specific light emitting means when the game medium wins the variable winning means. A game other than the attacker lamp 9c, which emits light from the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042AKS058 (similarly to step 042AKS064) in a production during a big hit. The effect lamp 9 may emit light in a manner larger than the number of times of light emission per unit time (such as in a mode of notifying that a prize has been won).

According to this configuration, it becomes easy to visually recognize that the game ball has won the big prize opening, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above is further provided with sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.), and the sound output means is used when the gaming medium wins a prize in the variable winning means. The winning sound corresponding to the winning is output to, and the winning is performed even when the gaming medium wins the variable winning means after the elapse of the predetermined period or when the gaming medium wins the variable winning means before the elapse of the predetermined period. A sound may be output (for example, when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening, a winning sound is output regardless of whether or not the winning is within a predetermined period).

According to this configuration, it becomes easy to recognize that the game ball has won the big prize opening, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 044AK)
The feature unit 042AK includes the following feature unit 044AK. (1) The gaming machine according to the feature unit 044AK is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and displays the display contents on the display means (for example, the image display device 5). A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change between a first state in which the gaming medium is easy to win and a second state in which the gaming medium is impossible or difficult to win. A control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state a plurality of times when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state. (For example, a CPU 103 that performs a round game), and the display means can display a grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the gaming value given by the game medium winning the variable winning means (for example, a CPU 103 that performs a round game). It is possible to display a round game display that can identify the round game being executed (for example, display the number of rounds), and the first round of the multiple round games. When the game is played, the grant amount display and the round game display corresponding to the first round game are displayed after a lapse of a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of rounds and the number of winnings are displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened), and the second and subsequent rounds of the multiple games are displayed. When the game is played, the round game display corresponding to the second and subsequent round games is displayed after the lapse of the predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the second round, the number of rounds is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened), and if the gaming medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the predetermined period After the lapse of time, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the granted amount display (for example, "0000" is displayed as the acquired number display), and the gaming medium is variable within the predetermined period. When a prize is won in the winning means, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the grant amount display (for example, "0015" is displayed as the acquired number display) after the lapse of the predetermined period.

According to this configuration, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the game interest without giving anxiety to the player, and in each round of a plurality of round games. , It is possible to increase the possibility of winning consecutively fired game balls in the large winning opening opened earlier than the round display.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, when the second and subsequent round games are performed, a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. If the gaming medium does not win the variable winning means, the grant amount display displayed in the previous round game is continuously displayed (for example, when the second and subsequent round games are performed). If the game medium does not win the big prize opening within a predetermined period after the big winning opening is opened, it is displayed in the previous round game as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-31). When the second and subsequent round games are performed, the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state within a predetermined period. When the gaming medium wins the variable winning means, the grant amount corresponding to the prize is added from the grant amount display displayed in the previous round game. (For example, when the game medium wins the big winning opening within a predetermined period, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30), the number of acquisitions displayed in the previous round game is displayed. , The number of balls won in response to the winning prize is added and displayed).

According to this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the winning of the large winning opening even in the second and subsequent round games.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the display means can update and display the given amount display being displayed in response to the winning of the game medium in the variable winning means. Yes, the update display of the grant amount display ends after the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state and then changes to the first state again (for example, the large winning opening is completely closed). The count-up display and the number of acquisitions corresponding to the over-winning are completed within the period from the closing to the opening state corresponding to the second R).

According to this configuration, since the update of the acquisition number display at the time of one opening does not overlap with the update of the acquisition number display at the next opening, it becomes easy to determine which opening corresponds to the winning. ..

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 045AK)
The feature unit 042AK includes the following feature unit 045AK. (1) The gaming machine according to the feature unit 045AK is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and displays the display contents on the display means (for example, the image display device 5). A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change between a first state in which the gaming medium is easy to win and a second state in which the gaming medium is impossible or difficult to win. A control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state a plurality of times when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state. (For example, a CPU 103 that performs a round game), and the display means can display a grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the variable winning means (for example, a CPU 103 that performs a round game). (For example, the number of acquisitions is displayed), when the first round game of the plurality of round games is performed, a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. After the lapse of time, the grant amount display is displayed (for example, in the first round, the number of winnings is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened), and the gaming medium is the variable winning means within the predetermined period. If the player does not win a prize, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0000" is displayed as the number of acquisitions), and the above. When the gaming medium wins the variable winning means within a predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display. , Etc.), a plurality of light emitting means (for example, the effect lamp 9 and the like), and a light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 and the like), and the light emitting control means is the variable winning means. Is in the first state and the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed, the variable winning means is in the first state and the grant amount display before the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed. Is controlled to emit light more than when is not displayed (for example, during a predetermined period, that is, in a situation where the acquired number is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18)). , Although the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the game ball wins the big prize opening, the number of acquisitions after the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed. In this situation, for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-21), the effect lamp 9 and the game board 2 provided in the frame 3 for the double game machine are provided. The effect lamps 9 are turned on alternately to emit more light from the effect lamps 9 than during a predetermined period).

According to such a configuration, since the specific display is performed when the prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player, and the number of acquisitions after the predetermined period is displayed. It is possible to liven up the production after the event is performed and improve the game entertainment.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, an operation promotion display for encouraging the player to operate is displayed after the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means is in the first state. It is possible (for example, right-handed display is performed), and the light emitting means is a specific light emitting means (for example, an attacker lamp 9c or the like) located in the vicinity of the variable winning means that emits light when the gaming medium wins the variable winning means. ) And a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means (for example, an effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c), and when the variable winning means is in the first state, the said before the elapse of the predetermined period. When the imparted amount display is not displayed, the predetermined light emitting means is made to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the operation promotion display while the specific light emitting means is made to emit light, and the given amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period is displayed. When there is, the specific light emitting means and the predetermined light emitting means are made to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, after the large winning opening is opened, until a predetermined period elapses, FIG. 10-7 (c-3). )-As shown in FIGS. 10-9 (c-13), the effect lamps 9 are sequentially turned on to suggest right-handed strikes, and after a predetermined period of time, for example, FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c). As shown in -21), the effect lamps 9 provided on the double-game machine frame 3 and the effect lamps 9 provided on the game board 2 were alternately turned on, and the large winning opening was opened. Later, when the effect lamps 9 are turned on in sequence to suggest a right-handed strike, after the attacker lamp 9c that is turned on last is turned on, it is not turned off as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15), but remains lit. Etc.), you may do so.

According to this configuration, the operation can be promoted by using the predetermined light emitting means, and the player can be made aware that the variable winning means is in the first state.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, in the round game, one of the round games is completed by winning a specific number of game media, and the game shifts to the next round game. (For example, the maximum period during which the large winning opening can be opened by winning 10 gaming balls is reached.) The time from the lapse of the predetermined period until the variable winning means is in the second state is It is a sufficient time for the gaming medium to win the specified number (for example, for the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened, it is sufficient to count after a predetermined period for 10 gaming balls to win a prize. (For example, during a long period of time).

According to this configuration, a sufficient time is secured for winning, so that the player can feel reassured.

(4) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, in the round game, one round game is completed when a specific number of game media wins a prize, and the game shifts to the next round game (for example, 10 machines). The game medium is the time from the lapse of the predetermined period until the variable winning means is in the second state. It is a sufficient time for a specific number of prizes to be won (for example, the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened is a sufficient period even if it is counted after the lapse of a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win a prize. Etc.), when the variable winning means is in the first state, when the grant amount display before the lapse of the predetermined period is not displayed, the light emission of the light emitting means is restricted, and the grant after the lapse of the predetermined period is performed. After the amount display is displayed, the light emitting means is made to emit light (for example, until the large winning opening is opened and a predetermined period elapses, that is, until the number of winnings is displayed, FIGS. 10-9 (c-16) to ( As shown in c-19), the effect lamp 9 is not emitted, and as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the number of acquisitions after the lapse of a predetermined period is displayed. (For example, the effect lamp 9 is made to emit light).

According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from hitting quickly and promote the firing timing.

(5) In the gaming machine according to (4) above, the gaming machine is controlled to the advantageous state, and is controlled to the advantageous state until the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests (for example, it is possible to execute a fanfare effect), and a round game that can identify the round game being executed at the same time as the display of the grant amount display is started after the lapse of the predetermined period. It is possible to execute the display and the effect during the round corresponding to the round game (for example, the number of rounds is displayed, the number of acquisitions is displayed, and the effect during the jackpot is performed after a predetermined period of time), which is the same as the execution timing of the effect during the round. The light emitting means is made to emit light at the timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the effect effect lamp 9 is made to emit light at the same timing as the execution timing of the effect during the big hit). , You may do so.

According to this configuration, the production can be excited at once at the timing when the production is executed during the round, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, a general winning means (for example, a general winning opening 10) capable of winning a prize in a game medium is further provided, and the display means is described as described above. It is possible to display the amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the general winning means as the given amount display (for example, the winning number display is displayed in response to the winning of the general winning opening 10). If the gaming medium does not win the general winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (such as). For example, if the game ball does not win in the general winning opening 10 during the predetermined period, "0000" is displayed as a predetermined display indicating that the prize ball has not been given), and the game medium is displayed within the predetermined period. When a prize is won in the general prize-winning means, a display corresponding to the prize in the general prize-winning means is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, during a predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened. When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 10, after the lapse of the predetermined period, "0003" is displayed as the number of winnings in response to the winning in the general winning opening 10). May be good.

According to this configuration, even when the general winning means is won during the predetermined period, the display corresponding to the winning of the general winning means is displayed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being anxious.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above, the variable winning means is provided in a predetermined area in a gaming area (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7 is placed in a gaming area on the right side). The display means can display a first image (for example, a decorative pattern constituting a jackpot) at the same timing as the imparted amount display, and the first image is in the advantageous state. The effect is displayed at the same timing as the imparted amount display (for example, the effect display for operating the decorative symbol constituting the jackpot is performed), and the effect display is displayed in a manner suggesting the predetermined area (for example, the effect display). The decorative pattern constituting the jackpot may be moved in the right-back direction, the front, and the left-back direction to be displayed in a manner suggesting right-handed hitting).

According to this configuration, the effect display suggests a game area to be fired, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the game area to be fired.

(Explanation of First Form of Feature 20SH)
Next, the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the feature unit 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the first aspect of the feature unit 20SH, the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state is displayed, and the number of prize balls granted in the jackpot game state has reached a predetermined number. It is possible to display the acquisition number notification display and. The characters used in the acquired number display and the acquired number notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. As for the specific characters used for displaying the acquired number, the background image during the big hit is invisible from the specific area. As for the specific characters used in the acquired number notification display, the background image during the big hit can be visually recognized from the specific area.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the first form of the feature unit 20SH having such features will be described. The description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Background technology related to the first form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 11-1 is a diagram showing a background technique related to the first form of the feature portion 20SH.

When the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, as shown in FIG. 11-1 (A), the pachinko gaming machine may display the number of winnings displayed with respect to the number of prize balls given in the jackpot gaming state. In the example shown in FIG. 11-1 (A), the number of acquired balls is displayed as "point 120" corresponding to the number of acquired balls being 120.

In the winning number display, a number for displaying the number of prize balls and a character other than the number for recognizing that the winning number is displayed are used. The numbers used to display the number of acquisitions are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, and the like. In the display of the number of acquisitions shown in FIG. 11-1 (A), the characters "point" for recognizing that the display is the number of acquisitions and the number "120" for displaying the number of prize balls are displayed. It is used.

Among the characters used to display the number of acquisitions, there are characters in which a specific area is formed. Here, the specific area is an area surrounded by a line forming a character and does not lead to an area outside the line forming the character. Here, "not connected to the area outside the line forming the character" means that the "specific area" is completely isolated from the "area outside the line forming the character" by the "line forming the character". And when the "specific area" is not completely separated from the "area outside the line that forms the character" by the "line that forms the character", but at first glance it appears to be a different area. ,including. In the following description, a character in which a specific area is formed is referred to as a "specific character".

For example, in the case of Arabic numerals, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" correspond to specific characters. That is, in the case of Arabic numerals "0", "6", "8", and "9", a substantially circular area surrounded by a curve forming a character is a specific area. The Arabic numeral "8" forms two specific regions. In the case of the Arabic numeral "4", the triangular area surrounded by the three straight lines forming the character is the specific area.

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, as shown in FIG. 11-1 (A), the pachinko gaming machine displays a background image of the jackpot game state related to the jackpot gaming state in the entire display area of the image display device. do. In the example shown in FIG. 11-1 (A), a background image during a big hit in which a "butterfly" is flying is displayed. The big hit medium background image is an image displayed on the back side of the other displays displayed on the image display device in the big hit game state. The background image during the jackpot contains many lines expressing animation pictures and effects.

The acquired number display is displayed small in the edge area in the display area of the image display device, which does not impair the visibility of the background image during the big hit. If the big hit medium background image changes over time, the line of the big hit medium background image may overlap the back of the acquired number display. Then, when a specific character is displayed on the acquired number display, a big hit is made on the back surface of the specific area of the specific character as shown by the "0" part of the Arabic numeral surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 11-1 (A). When the lines of the middle background image overlap, the lines of the big hit middle background image may be assimilated with the lines forming the specific characters, and the specific characters may appear different from the original characters.

FIG. 11-1 (B) is an enlarged view of the portion of the Arabic numeral “0” surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 11-1 (A). In the examples shown in FIGS. 11-1 (A) and 11-1 (A) and (B), the line of "Chou" in the background image of the jackpot overlaps with the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used for displaying the number of acquisitions. The line of "Chou" in the background image during the big hit is assimilated with the line forming the specific character "0", and the specific character "0" looks like the Arabic numeral "8" instead of the Arabic numeral "0".

In this way, if the character of the acquired number display is mistaken for a character different from the original character, the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state cannot be accurately recognized. However, for example, it is difficult to adjust the position of the line included in the big hit medium background image so that the line of the big hit medium background image does not overlap the specific area of the specific character.

The first form of the feature portion 20SH is made in view of such a background. Hereinafter, the first form of the feature unit 20SH will be described.

(Display of the number of acquisitions in the first form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 11-2 (A) is a diagram showing an example of an Arabic numeral display mode used for displaying the number of acquisitions in the first embodiment of the feature unit 20SH.

In the first form of the feature unit 20SH, among the Arabic numerals used for displaying the number of acquisitions, the specific area 20SHI1 of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to the specific character is , It is a non-transparent display mode, and is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode of the line 20SHS1 forming characters. In the example shown in FIG. 11-2 (A), the color of the Arabic numeral line 20SHS1 used for displaying the number of acquisitions is "black", whereas "0", "4", and "6" corresponding to specific characters are used. , "8", "9", the specific area 20SHI1 is displayed in "white".

Further, the display mode of the specific area 20SHI1 is not limited to a color different from the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the character, and the character is displayed to such an extent that the specific area 20SHI1 and the line 20SHS1 forming the character can be accurately distinguished. Any display mode may be used as long as it has a high contrast with respect to the display mode of the line 20SHS1 to be formed.

For example, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color having a high contrast with the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the character. In that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may be such that the contrast is low with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may have a low contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may be a texture having a low contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character.

Further, for example, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may have a high contrast with the brightness of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color having a low contrast with the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the character. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may have a low contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may be a texture having a low contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character.

Further, for example, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may have a high contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color having a low contrast with the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the character. Further, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may be such that the contrast is low with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may be a texture having a low contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character.

Further, for example, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may be a texture having a high contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color having a low contrast with the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the character. Further, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may be such that the contrast is low with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may have a low contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character.

Among the characters used to display the number of winnings, the numbers other than Arabic numerals for displaying the number of prize balls and the specific characters among the characters other than the numbers for recognizing that the number of winnings is displayed are also shown in Fig. 11-. Like the Arabic numerals shown in 2 (A), the specific area is displayed in a non-transparent display mode, which is different from the display mode of the lines forming the characters.

(Display of acquired number notification in the first form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 11-2 (A) is a diagram showing an example of an Arabic numeral display mode used for the acquisition number notification display in the first embodiment of the feature unit 20SH.

When the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches a predetermined number, the pachinko gaming machine 1 displays an acquisition number notification display for notifying that fact.

Here, the time saving control and the probability variation control executed after the end of the jackpot game state are the jackpot game states before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed or the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. However, for example, the number of time reduction control and probability variation control may be different for each jackpot type, and in the case of a specific jackpot type, the high amount executed after the jackpot game state ends. The certainty control and the time saving control may be continuously executed after the end of the big hit game state until the big hit occurs again. In such a case, the jackpot game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state, which is a so-called consecutive villa state.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the consecutive villa state, when the number of prize balls given in the multiple big hit game states in the consecutive villa state reaches a predetermined number, the pachinko gaming machine 1 displays an acquisition number notification display for notifying that fact. do.

In the acquisition number notification display, when the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state is reached, a number other than a number for displaying the predetermined number and a character other than the number for recognizing that the acquisition number notification display is used. And are used. The numbers used for displaying the number of acquisitions are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, and the like.

Among the characters used for the acquisition number notification display, there are characters that correspond to specific characters. In the first embodiment of the feature unit 20SH, as shown in FIG. 11-2 (B), the specific area of the specific character used for the acquisition number notification display is displayed in a transparent display mode. In the example shown in FIG. 11-2 (B), among the Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display, identification of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to specific characters Region 20SHI2 is displayed in a transparent display mode.

Among the characters used for the acquisition number notification display, when the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches, it is a number other than the Arabic numeral for displaying the predetermined number, or the acquisition number notification display. As for the specific characters among the characters other than the numbers to be recognized, the specific area is displayed in a transparent display mode as in the Arabic numerals shown in FIG. 11-2 (B).

(How to see the acquired number display in the first form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 11-3 (A) is a diagram showing how the acquisition number display in the first form of the feature unit 20SH is displayed. FIG. 11-3 (B) is an enlarged view of the portion of the Arabic numeral “0” surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 11-1 (A).

In the examples shown in FIGS. 11-3 (A) and 11-3 (B), the "butterfly" line of the big hit medium background image overlaps the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used in the acquired number display 20SHK. However, since the specific area 20SHI1 is displayed in "white", the background image during the jackpot cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI1. Therefore, in the specific area 20SHI1, the line 20SHHS of the "butterfly" in the background image during the big hit is not assimilated with the line 20SHS1 forming the specific character "0", and the specific character "0" is accurately regarded as the Arabic numeral "0". Can be recognized.

In addition to the acquired number display 20SHK, the image display device 5 has a jackpot display 20SHO for recognizing that the jackpot game state is controlled, and a jackpot combination displayed when the jackpot game state is controlled. The decorative symbol display 20SHZ indicating the fixed decorative symbol, the round number display 20SHR indicating the number of rounds of the round game in the jackpot game state, and the right-handed display 20SHM suggesting that the player should hit right are displayed. Has been done. The jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM are also located in the edge area in the display area of the image display device 5 that does not impair the visibility of the background image during the jackpot, as in the acquisition number display 20SHK. It is displayed small.

The characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM are the same types of characters as those used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display, and the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number display. Characters of a type different from the characters used for the numerical notification display may be included. In this embodiment, "number" and "katakana" are used as the characters of the acquired number display 20SHK and the acquired number notification display 20SHKH as shown in FIG. 11-4. On the other hand, in the jackpot display 20SHO, "alphabet" and "kanji", which are different types of characters from the characters used for the acquired number display 20SHK and the acquired number notification display, are used. Further, in the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, "number" which is the same kind of character as the character used for the acquired number display 20SHK and the acquired number notification display is used. Further, the round number display 20SHR is different from the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display, which are the same type of characters as the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display. "Alphabet", which is a kind of character, is used. Further, in the right-handed display 20SHM, "Kanji", "Hiragana", and "Symbol", which are different types of characters from the characters used for the acquired number display 20SHK and the acquired number notification display, are used.

Among the characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM, there are characters corresponding to specific characters regardless of the type of the characters. The specific area of the specific character used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM is also a non-transparent display mode and the characters are displayed in the same manner as the specific area 20SHI1 of the acquired number display 20SHK. Since the line 20SHS1 to be formed is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode, the background image during the jackpot cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI1.

(Example of production operation of acquisition number display and acquisition number notification display in the first form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 11-4 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation of the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), the display area of the image display device 5 is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and the first display area 20SH51, and is the first display area. Various displays are performed by distinguishing the second display area 20SH 52, which is narrower than the 20SH 51. In the example shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), the region inside the alternate long and short dash line is the first display area 20SH51, and the region outside the alternate long and short dash line is the second display area 20SH52.

As shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), the effect control CPU 120 displays a big hit medium background image in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5. Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the acquired number display 20SHK on the front side of the big hit medium background image in the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), a jackpot display, a decorative symbol display, a round number display, and a right-handed display are also displayed in the second display area 20SH52.

Here, as described above, in this embodiment, when the game balls enter the large winning opening, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. In FIG. 11-4 (A), since the acquired number display 20SHK with "point 990" is displayed, it can be recognized that 990 game balls have been paid out as prize balls in the jackpot game state. can. The effect control CPU 120 updates the number of the acquired number display 20SHK every time the game ball is paid out in the big hit game state.

In such a situation, it is assumed that a game ball enters the large prize opening and 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls.

As shown in FIGS. 11-4 (B) to (G), the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of acquired numbers 20SHK from "990" in response to the 15 game balls being paid out. Count up to "1005" one by one. In that case, the number of the acquired number display 20SHK goes through the so-called "Kiriban", which is a good number of "1000". In other words, the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state has reached "1000".

Here, the effect control CPU 120 displays the acquisition number notification display every time "1000" game balls are paid out in the big hit game state. For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays an acquisition number notification display of "1000 over" when the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", and the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state is "2000". Is displayed, the acquisition number notification display of "2000 over" is displayed.

When the number of the acquired number display 20SHK becomes “1000” of Kiriban, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the acquired number to the right end of the display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-4 (D). Display 20 A part of SHKH is displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 (E) to 11-4 (G), the effect control CPU 120 is displayed in each frame of the image while the number of the acquired number display 20SHK changes from "1000" to "1005". The display position of the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is moved from the right end of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the center of the first display area 20SH51. Then, when the number of the acquired number display 20SHK becomes "1005", the effect control CPU 120 has the acquired number in the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (G). Notification display 20 SHKH is stopped and displayed. At this time, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH may be displayed at least in the first display area 20SH51, and may be displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52.

By such display control, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is displayed so as to frame in from the outside to the inside of the display area of the image display device 5.

Then, when a predetermined period elapses after the display of the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is started, the effect control CPU 120 ends the display of the acquired number notification display 20SHKH. In the example shown in FIG. 11-4 (H), the effect control CPU 120 displays the display position of the acquired number notification display 20SHKH displayed in each frame of the video from the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. Move towards the left edge of the area.

By such display control, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is displayed so as to frame out from the inside to the outside of the display area of the image display device 5, and the display is displayed because it is no longer displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. finish.

The effect control CPU 120 considers that the display of the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is started by displaying a part of the acquired number notification display 20SHKH when the number of the acquired number display 20SHK becomes "Kiriban", and from that timing. When the predetermined period elapses, the display control for ending the display of the acquired number notification display 20SHKH may be performed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 considers that the display of the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is started by stopping and displaying the acquired number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, and a predetermined period from that timing. The display control for ending the display of the acquired number notification display 20SHKH may be performed when the above has elapsed.

As described above, the specific area of the specific character used in the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is displayed in a transparent display mode. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 (E) to 11-4 (H), the background image during the jackpot can be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific character used in the acquired number notification display 20SHKH. For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 11-4 (E) to 11-4 (H), the background image during the jackpot is visible from the specific area of the Arabic numeral "0", which is a specific character used in the acquired number notification display 20SHKH.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 (D) to (H), the characters used in the acquired number notification display 20SHK are characters having a size larger than the characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK.

The effect mode when the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is stopped and displayed in the first display area 20SH 51 is not limited to the mode in which the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is framed in, stopped, and then framed out. For example, instead of the effect of frame-in the acquired number notification display 20SHKH, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH may be produced so as to pop out from the back side to the front side of the screen, or the acquired number notification display 20SHKH gradually emerges. The effect may be such that the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is displayed in a balloon indicating the character's dialogue when the character appears. Further, instead of the effect of frame-out the acquired number notification display 20SHKH, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH may be sucked from the front side to the back side of the screen, or the acquired number notification display 20SHKH may gradually disappear. The effect may be such that when the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is displayed in the balloon indicating the character's dialogue, the character leaves.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first aspect of the feature unit 20SH can be controlled to the jackpot gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. Then, the image display device 5 can display the big hit middle background image corresponding to the big hit gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. Further, the image display device 5 can display the acquired number display 20SHK regarding the number of prize balls given on the front side of the big hit medium background image in the second display area 20SH52. Further, the image display device 5 notifies that the number of prize balls given in the big hit game state has reached the number of "Kiriban" on the front side of the big hit medium background image at least in the first display area 20SH51. As the notification display 20SHKH, it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display of "1000 over" when the number of prize balls given in the big hit game state reaches "1000", and the prize balls given in the big hit game state. When the number reaches "2000", it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display of "2000 over". Then, the acquired number display 20SHK is updated every time the game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state. On the other hand, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH ends the display when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the display. The characters used in the acquired number notification display 20SHKH are characters having a size larger than the characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK. The characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK and the acquired number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. As for the specific characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK, the background image during the jackpot cannot be visually recognized from the specific area. On the other hand, as for the specific characters used in the acquired number notification display 20SHKH, the background image during the big hit can be visually recognized from the specific area.

According to such a configuration, the acquired number display 20SHK including the specific character and the acquired number notification display 20SHKH can be suitably displayed in relation to the big hit medium background image. For example, when the player confirms the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state, he / she confirms the acquired number display 20SHK, but the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed in a narrow second display area 20SH52 in small size characters and is specified. If the background image during the big hit is visible from the specific area of the character, the specific character may look different from the original character, but the background image during the big hit cannot be seen from the specific area of the specific character. Therefore, a specific character can be recognized accurately. Further, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is not always displayed in the jackpot game state unlike the acquired number display 20SHK, but the game is played when the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches the number of "Kiriban". It is displayed only for a predetermined period in the sense of congratulating the person, and since it is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, the background image during the big hit can be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific character. By doing so, it is possible to show the background image during the big hit as much as possible in the conspicuous display position of the first display area.

Further, as described above, the specific character includes Arabic numerals "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9".

According to such a configuration, the acquired number display 20SHK and the acquired number notification display 20SHKH using Arabic numerals can be suitably displayed in relation to the big hit medium background image.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 displays the acquired number notification display 20SHKH when displaying the acquired number display 20SHK.

According to such a configuration, even when the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is displayed, the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state can be accurately grasped by the acquired number display 20SHK.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the acquired number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52.

According to such a configuration, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH becomes easily noticeable to the player, and it is possible to preferably notify that the number of prize balls given in the big hit game state has reached the number of "Kiriban". ..

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM on the front side of the jackpot medium background image in the second display area 20SH52. Is. The characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM are the same types of characters as those used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, and the acquisition number display 20SHK and The acquired number notification display 20 includes characters of a type different from the characters used in SHKH, and each type of character includes a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the character is formed. As for the specific characters used in the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM, the background image during the jackpot cannot be visually recognized from the specific area.

According to such a configuration, the specific characters can be accurately recognized even for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the acquired number notification display 20SHKH by stopping it in the first display area 20SH51, and the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is framed in to the stop position in the first display area 20SH51. When a predetermined period has elapsed since the setting, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is framed out.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect when the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is displayed.

(Second form of feature 20SH)
Next, the gaming machine according to the second form of the feature portion 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-5 to 11-7. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the second form of the feature unit 20SH, the specific character used for the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is a specific area with respect to the area of the line forming the character, rather than the specific character used for the acquired number display 20SHK. The proportion of the size of the part is small.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the second form of the feature unit 20SH having such features will be described. The description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Display of acquired number notification in the second form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 11-5 (A) is a diagram showing an example of an Arabic numeral display mode used for the acquisition number notification display in the second embodiment of the feature unit 20SH.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the second form of the feature unit 20SH uses three-dimensional characters for the acquisition number notification display. Here, the three-dimensional character is a character format that makes the character appear as if it protrudes to the front side. The area of the line forming the three-dimensional character includes the area 20SHS21 for expressing the character and the area 20SHS22 for expressing the depth of the three-dimensional character.

Among such three-dimensional characters, there are characters corresponding to specific characters. In the example shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), among the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to specific characters. The specific area 20SHI3 is displayed in a transparent display mode, and when the specific area 20SHI3 is displayed in front of the big hit medium background image, the big hit medium background image can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI3.

(Comparison between non-three-dimensional characters and three-dimensional characters)
FIG. 11-5 (B) is an explanatory diagram comparing the non-three-dimensional character used for displaying the acquired number and the three-dimensional character used for displaying the acquired number notification.

Comparing the non-three-dimensional character used for displaying the acquired number and the three-dimensional character used for displaying the acquired number notification, the size of the line area 20SHI1 forming the non-three-dimensional character and the area of the line forming the three-dimensional character are compared. The size of the area 20SHS21 for expressing characters is the same. Then, in the non-three-dimensional specific character, the region surrounded by the outline of the inner circumference of the line region 20SHI1 forming the character becomes the specific region 20SHI1. On the other hand, in a three-dimensional specific character, since the area of the line forming the character includes the area 20SHS22 expressing the depth of the character, it is located on the outline of the inner circumference of the area 20SHS21 expressing the character and the inner circumference side thereof. The outline of the area 20SHS22 expressing the depth of the character and the area surrounded by the area are the specific area 20SHI3. Therefore, the three-dimensional specific character used for the acquired number notification display is the area 20SHS22 that expresses the depth of the character on the inner peripheral side of the area 20SHS21 that expresses the character, rather than the non-three-dimensional specific character used for the acquired number display. The size of the specific area is reduced by the size, and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the area of the line forming the character is small.

(A modified example of the acquired number notification display in the second form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 11-6 (A) is a diagram showing a modified example 1 of the display mode of Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the feature unit 20SH.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-6 (A), among the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display, "0", "4", "6", "8", "9" corresponding to a specific character. When the specific area 20SHI4 of the above is displayed in "white" and displayed in front of the big hit medium background image, the big hit medium background image becomes invisible from the specific area 20SHI3.

(Comparison between non-three-dimensional characters and three-dimensional characters in 1 in the modified example)
FIG. 11-6 (B) is an explanatory diagram comparing the non-three-dimensional character used for displaying the acquired number and the three-dimensional character used for displaying the acquired number notification in the first modification.

Also in the first modification, when the non-three-dimensional character used for displaying the acquired number and the three-dimensional character used for displaying the acquired number notification are compared, the size of the line region 20SHI1 forming the non-three-dimensional character and the three-dimensional character are formed. The size of the area 20SH31 that expresses the characters in the area of the line is the same. Then, in the non-three-dimensional specific character, the region surrounded by the outline of the inner circumference of the line region 20SHI1 forming the character becomes the specific region 20SHI1. On the other hand, in a three-dimensional specific character, since the area of the line forming the character includes the area 20SH32 expressing the depth of the character, the outline of the inner circumference of the area 20SH31 expressing the character and the character on the inner circumference side thereof. The outline of the area 20SH32 expressing the depth of the character and the area surrounded by the area 20SH32 are the specific area 20SHI4. Therefore, the three-dimensional specific character used for the acquired number notification display is the area 20SH32 that expresses the depth of the character located on the inner peripheral side of the character expressing area 20SH31 than the non-three-dimensional specific character used for the acquired number display. The size of the specific area is reduced by the size of the character, and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the area of the line forming the character is small.

(A modified example of the acquired number notification display in the second form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 11-7 (A) is a diagram showing a modified example 2 of the display mode of Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the feature unit 20SH.

In the second modification, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), the characters used for the acquisition number notification display have the area of the line forming the characters displayed in a three-color gradation, and the three-color gradation. It is displayed in any of the display modes A to G in which the combinations are different.

The area of the line forming the character of the display mode A is colored with a gradation of three colors: the upper area 20SHSU is "red", the central area 20SHSC is "orange", and the lower area 20SHSD is "yellow". The area of the line forming the character of the display mode B is colored with a gradation of three colors: the upper area 20SHSU is "orange", the central area 20SHSC is "yellow", and the lower area 20SHSD is "green". The area of the line forming the character of the display mode C is colored with a gradation of three colors: the upper area 20SHSU is "yellow", the central area 20SHSC is "green", and the lower area 20SHSD is "light blue". The area of the line forming the character of the display mode D is colored with a gradation of three colors: the upper area 20SHSU is "green", the central area 20SHSC is "light blue", and the lower area 20SHSD is "blue". The area of the line forming the character of the display mode E is colored with a gradation of three colors: the upper area 20SHSU is "light blue", the central area 20SHSC is "blue", and the lower area 20SHSD is "purple". The area of the line forming the character of the display mode F is colored with a gradation of three colors: the upper area 20SHSU is "blue", the central area 20SHSC is "purple", and the lower area 20SHSD is "red". The area of the line forming the character of the display mode G is colored with a gradation of three colors: the upper area 20SHSU is "purple", the central area 20SHSC is "red", and the lower area 20SHSD is "yellow".

The image display device 5 displays the mode of the characters used for displaying the acquired number notification as display mode A → display mode B → display mode C → display mode D → display mode E → display mode F → display mode G → display mode A → The display is changed over time in the order of ...

FIG. 11-7 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a color change accompanying the operation of the acquired number notification display in the modified example 2.

In the second modification, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), the acquired number notification display moves (frame-in) when the acquired number notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. The speed at which the display mode of the acquisition number notification display changes differs depending on whether the frame is out).

In the example shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), the acquired number notification display is moved (framed in) from the right end of the display area of the image display device 5 to the center of the first display area 20SH51 over 0.35 seconds. , The display mode A changes to the display mode D in order. After that, the acquired number display changes in order from the display mode D to the display mode G while being stopped and displayed at the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 for 1 second. After that, the acquired number notification display moves (frames out) from the center of the first display area 20SH51 to the left end of the display area of the image display device 5 over 0.35 seconds, in order from the display mode G to the display mode C. Change.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the second form of the feature unit 20SH can be controlled to the jackpot gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. Then, the image display device 5 can display the big hit middle background image corresponding to the big hit gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. Further, the image display device 5 can display the acquired number display regarding the number of prize balls given on the front side of the background image during the big hit in the second display area 20SH52. Further, the image display device 5 notifies that the number of prize balls given in the big hit game state has reached the number of "Kiriban" on the front side of the big hit medium background image at least in the first display area 20SH51. As a notification display, when the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display of "1000 over", and the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state. When the number reaches "2000", it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display of "2000 over". Then, the acquired number display is updated every time the game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state. On the other hand, the acquired number notification display ends when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the display. The characters used for the acquisition number notification display are characters having a size larger than the characters used for the acquisition number display. The characters used for the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. As for the specific characters used for displaying the acquired number, the background image during the jackpot cannot be visually recognized from the specific area. The specific character used for displaying the acquired number notification has a smaller ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the area of the line forming the character than the specific character used for displaying the acquired number.

According to such a configuration, the acquired number display including the specific character and the acquired number notification display can be suitably displayed in relation to the big hit medium background image. For example, when the player confirms the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state, he / she confirms the number of winnings display, but the number of winnings is displayed in small size characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, and the specific characters are displayed. If the background image during the big hit is visible from a specific area, the specific character may look different from the original character, but by making the background image during the big hit invisible from the specific area of the specific character, It is possible to accurately recognize a specific character.

The characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions are three-dimensional characters. The area of the line forming the three-dimensional character includes an area for expressing the character and an area for expressing the depth of the character.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of the acquired number notification display.

Further, as described above, the background image during the big hit can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI3 as the specific character used for the acquisition number notification display.

According to such a configuration, the acquired number notification display is not always displayed in the jackpot game state like the acquired number display, but the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches the number of "Kiriban". It is displayed only for a predetermined period in the sense of congratulating the player when it is done, and is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, and the size of the line areas 20SHS21 and 20SHS22 forming the characters. Since the ratio of the size of the specific area 20SHI3 to the specific area 20SHI3 is small, it is possible to suppress the risk of misidentifying the character even if the background image in the big hit is visible from the specific area 20SHI3 of the specific character, and also the specific area of the specific character. By making the background image in the middle of the big hit visible from 20SHI3, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, as described above, the background image during the jackpot cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI4 for the specific character used for the acquired number notification display in the modification 1.

According to such a configuration, the acquired number notification display is not always displayed in the jackpot game state like the acquired number display, but the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches the number of "Kiriban". It is displayed only for a predetermined period in the sense of congratulating the player when it is done, and is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, and is a specific area with respect to the size of the area of the line forming the character. Because the ratio of the size of the characters is small, even if the background image during the big hit is invisible from the specific area of the specific character, it is not only possible to suppress the discomfort, but also the background image during the big hit is invisible from the specific area of the specific character. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the characters from being misidentified.

Further, as described above, in the character used for the acquisition number notification display in the modification 2, the area of the line forming the character is displayed with a gradation of three colors. Then, the image display device 5 displays the mode of the characters used for the acquired number notification display as display mode A → display mode B → display mode C → display mode D → display mode E → display mode F → display mode G → display mode. The display is changed over time in the order of A → .... Then, when the acquired number notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 and when the acquired number notification display is moving (frame-in / frame-out), the acquired number notification display is displayed. The speed at which the display mode changes is different.

According to such a configuration, the display mode changes according to the moving speed of the acquired number notification display, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

(Explanation of Third Form of Feature 20SH)
Next, the gaming machine according to the third form of the feature unit 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-8 to 11-11. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the third aspect of the feature unit 20SH, the ending background image of the specific characters used for the result display can be visually recognized from the specific area.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the third form of the feature unit 20SH having such features will be described. The description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Arabic numerals used for result display)
FIG. 11-8 is a diagram showing an example of an Arabic numeral display mode used for result display in the third form of the feature portion 20SH.

When the round game of the final round is completed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes an ending effect corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. At this time, the image display device 5 displays the ending background image. Further, the image display device 5 displays a result display for notifying the total number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state when displaying the ending background image.

In the result display, a number for displaying the total number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state and a character other than the number for recognizing the result display are used. The numbers used for the result display are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals and the like.

Among the characters used for result display, there are characters that correspond to specific characters. In the third form of the feature unit 20SH, as shown in FIG. 11-8, the specific area of the specific character used for the result display is displayed in a transparent display mode. In the example shown in FIG. 11-8, among the Arabic numerals used for the result display, the specific area 20SHI5 of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to the specific character is transparent. It is displayed in the display mode of.

Among the characters used for the result display, the numbers other than the Arabic numerals for displaying the total number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state and the characters other than the numbers for recognizing the result display are also shown in FIG. Specific areas are displayed in a transparent display mode, such as the Arabic numerals shown in −8.

(Various productions in the jackpot game state)
FIG. 11-9 is a diagram showing an example of the production period of various effects in the jackpot game state. FIG. 11-10 is a diagram showing an example of production operation of various effects in the jackpot game state.

When the hold information is stored in the jackpot game state, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the hold in-house consecutive villa notice suggesting that the hold information is controlled to the jackpot game state in response to the stored hold information. be. For example, in the case of a big hit game state of all 10 rounds, the effect control CPU 120 finishes the 9 round round game as shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-10 (A) to 11-10 (B). At the timing T1 when the round game of 10 rounds, which is a round, is started, the notice of the pending Uchirenso will be started.

When the notice of the consecutive villas on hold is executed, the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5 corresponds to the progress of the round game in the jackpot game state as shown in FIG. 11-10 (B). On the front side of the background image during the big hit, the effect image of the notice of the pending villa is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 11-10 (B), the effect image 20SH of "flame" is displayed as the effect image of the notice of the consecutive villas on hold.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 11-10 (B), the "flame" line of the effect image overlaps the back side of the specific area of the specific character "0" used in the acquired number display 20SHK. Since the specific area is displayed in "white", the effect image cannot be visually recognized from the specific area. Therefore, the line of "flame" in the effect image is not assimilated with the line forming the specific character "0" in the specific area, and the specific character "0" can be accurately recognized as the Arabic numeral "0". ..

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-10 (B) to 11-10 (C), at the timing T2 when the round game of the final round is finished and the ending effect is started, the effect control CPU 120 is on hold. End the notice of the consecutive villas and start the ending production. When the ending effect is started, the display of the ending background image is started at a predetermined brightness in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. In the example shown in FIG. 11-10 (C), the ending background image in which the blizzard of cherry blossoms dances is displayed from the back of the screen in the first display area 20SH51. Further, on the front of the ending background image, the characters "big hit end" are displayed corresponding to the end of the big hit game state.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 finishes the notice of the pending villa before the display of the ending background image starts at the timing T2. Therefore, when the ending background image is displayed, the effect image 20SHE of the pending villa notice is not displayed. In other words, the effect video 20SHE of the pending villa notice is displayed when the ending background video is not displayed.

The ending background image may be at least an image displayed in the first display area 20SH51, and is displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52 as shown in FIG. 11-10 (D). It may happen. In the example shown in FIG. 11-10 (D), the blizzard of cherry blossoms displayed as the ending background image is flying over the entire screen.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-10 (D) to (E), at the timing T3 when the result display is started, the effect control CPU 120 sets the brightness of the ending background image to be higher than the predetermined brightness. The brightness is reduced to a specific darkness, and the progress of the ending background image is paused and displayed as a still image. Then, the effect control CPU 120 displays the result display 20SHRE on the front side of the ending background image with a brightness brighter than a specific brightness of the still image of the ending background image. In the example shown in FIG. 11-10 (E), the fluttering cherry blossom blizzard is stationary, and the result display 20SHRE is displayed in white characters.

As described above, as for the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE, the specific area 20SHI5 is displayed in a transparent display. Therefore, the ending background image of the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI5.

As shown in FIGS. 11-10 (A), (B), and (E), the characters used in the result display 20SHRE are larger in size than the characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK. Further, the result display 20SHRE may be displayed at least in the first display area 20SH51, and is displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52 as shown in FIG. 11-10 (E). There may be things.

(Suggestion of setting by ending background video)
FIG. 11-11 is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode of the setting suggestion effect by the ending background image.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability of the jackpot changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6, the jackpot winning probability is changed by using the display result determination table according to the set value. The set value consists of 6 levels from "1" to "6", with "1" having the lowest ball output rate, "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6". The larger the value in the order of, the higher the ball output rate. That is, when "1" is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and the larger the value is, the larger the value is in the order of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". The advantage increases gradually. In this embodiment, the set values "1" to "3" are referred to as "low setting", and the set values "4" to "6" are referred to as "high setting".

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third aspect of the feature unit 20SH is configured so that the set value can be changed and the above-mentioned ending background image can be displayed as a setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value. For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays an ending background image in which a blizzard of cherry blossoms dances from the back of the screen as shown in FIG. 11-11 (A) when the set value is set low. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 displays an ending background image in which a large amount of cherry blossom blizzard dances from the left and right cherry blossom trees in full bloom, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B), when the set value is set high.

It should be noted that the setting suggestion by the ending background image does not have to definitively suggest whether the set value is a low setting or a high setting. For example, when the set value is set low, the ending background image of the mode shown in FIG. 11-11 (B) may be displayed at a sufficiently low rate, or when the set value is set high. In addition, the ending background image of the aspect shown in FIG. 11-11 (A) may be displayed at a sufficiently low ratio.

Further, the ending background image may have different production modes depending on whether the setting value "6" is the most advantageous for the player and the setting value is not "6". Further, the ending background image may have different production modes depending on whether the setting value is an odd number or an even number.

Here, the above-mentioned notice of the villa in the hold is one of a plurality of types of notice effects for notifying the reliability of the jackpot, but the setting suggestion effect by the notice of the villa in the hold is not executed.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment of the feature unit 20SH can be controlled to the jackpot gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. Then, the image display device 5 can display the big hit middle background image corresponding to the progress of the round game in the big hit game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. Further, the image display device 5 can display an ending background image corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state at least in the first display area 20SH51. Further, when the ending background image is not displayed, the image display device 5 controls the jackpot gaming state in the second display area 20SH52 in response to the hold information stored on the front side of the jackpot medium background image. It is possible to display the effect image 20SHE of the notice of the pending villa, which suggests that it will be done. Further, the image display device 5 can display the acquired number display 20SHK regarding the number of prize balls given on the front side of the big hit medium background image in the second display area 20SH52. Further, when the ending background image is displayed, the image display device 5 notifies the front side of the ending background image at least in the first display area 20SH51 of the total number of prize balls given in the big hit game state. Display 20SHRE can be displayed. The characters used in the result display 20SHRE are larger in size than the characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK. The characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK and the result display 20SHRE include a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the character is formed. As for the specific characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK, the background image during the big hit and the effect image 20SHRE of the notice of the consecutive villas on hold are invisible from the specific area. On the other hand, as for the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE, the ending background image can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI5.

According to such a configuration, the acquired number display 20SHK including specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the background image during the big hit and the effect image 20SHE of the notice of the consecutive villas on hold, and the result display 20SHRE including the specific characters can be displayed. Can be suitably displayed in relation to the ending background image. For example, when the player confirms the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state, the acquired number display 20SHK is confirmed, but the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed in small size characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, and is held. Since it may overlap with the effect video 20SHE of the villa notice, if the background video during the big hit or the effect video 20SHE of the pending villa notice is visible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character will look different from the original character. By making the background image during the big hit and the effect image 20SH of the notice of the pending villa invisible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character can be accurately recognized. On the other hand, the result display 20SHRE is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area 20SH51 and does not overlap with the effect image 20SHE of the pending villa notice, so that the ending background image can be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific characters. By making it possible, it is possible to show the ending background image as much as possible in the conspicuous display position of the first display area 20SH51.

Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can set any of a plurality of types of set values "1" to "6" having different jackpot winning probabilities. Then, the image display device 5 can display the ending background image in a manner suggesting the set set value. The effect video 20SHRE of the notice of the villa in the hold is one of a plurality of types of notice effects for notifying the reliability of the jackpot, but the setting suggestion effect by the notice of the villa in the hold is not executed.

According to such a configuration, there is a possibility that the setting suggestion effect by the ending background image is executed. Therefore, it is significant that the ending background image can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI5 of the specific character used for the result display 20SHRE. Increase.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 starts displaying the ending background image at a predetermined brightness. Then, the image display device 5 pauses and displays the ending background image at a specific lightness darker than the predetermined lightness at the timing T3 when the display of the result display 20SHRE is started, and at a lightness brighter than the specific lightness. Result display 20SHRE is displayed.

According to such a configuration, the visibility of the result display 20SHRE can be improved.

(Explanation of the Fourth Form of Feature 20SH)
Next, the gaming machine according to the fourth form of the feature unit 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-12 to 11-16. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the fourth aspect of the feature unit 20SH, the remaining number of times of the ST number in the probabilistic state is displayed, and when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times is the predetermined number of times, the predetermined number of times is notified. It is possible to display the remaining number of times notification display. The characters used for the remaining number display and the remaining number notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. As for the specific character used for displaying the remaining number of times, the background image during ST cannot be visually recognized from the specific area. As for the specific character used for the remaining number notification display, the background image during ST can be visually recognized from the specific area.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the fourth form of the feature unit 20SH having such features will be described. The description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Background technology related to the fourth form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 11-12 is a diagram showing a background technique related to the fourth form of the feature portion 20SH.

Basically, a pachinko gaming machine is a game in a normal state rather than a period in which a game is played in an advantageous state when comparing a state advantageous for a player such as a probabilistic state, a time saving state, and a jackpot game state with a normal state. It is designed to have a longer period of time.

For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, when the upper limit number of hold information is stored regardless of whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game, when the upper limit number of hold information is not stored. It is easier to execute shortened fluctuations with a shorter variable display time. Then, in the probabilistic state accompanied by the time reduction control, since the variable winning ball device changes to the open state, winning is more likely to occur than in the normal state, so that the shortening fluctuation is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and faster than in the normal state. It is possible to advance the game. Therefore, the period during which the game is played in the normal state is longer than the period during which the game is played in the probabilistic state accompanied by the time reduction control.

In the probabilistic change control, one of the conditions of the time when the special figure game of a predetermined number of ST times is executed after the end of the big hit game state and the time when the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit" is satisfied first. It ends when you do. Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display does not become a "big hit" when the probability variation control is being performed, the probability variation control ends when the special figure game of a predetermined number of ST times is exhausted. .. The predetermined number of STs is, for example, 70 times.

Further, by performing the time saving control, the variable display time of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the case where the time saving control is not performed. In the time saving control, one of the conditions that the special figure game of a predetermined number of time saving times is executed after the end of the big hit game state and that the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit" is satisfied first. It ends when you do. Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display does not become a "big hit" when the time reduction control is being performed, the time reduction control ends when the special figure game of a predetermined number of time reductions is exhausted. .. The predetermined number of time reductions is, for example, 70 times.

The set value of the number of STs and the set value of the number of time reductions may be different values.

When the pachinko machine is controlled to the probabilistic state, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (A), the pachinko gaming machine may display the remaining number display regarding the remaining number of STs in the probabilistic state. In the example shown in FIG. 11-12 (A), the remaining number display of "30 remaining" is displayed corresponding to the remaining number of STs being 30.

In the remaining number display, a number for displaying the remaining number of ST times and a character other than the number for recognizing that the remaining number is displayed are used. The numbers used for displaying the remaining number of times are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, and the like. The remaining number display shown in FIG. 11-12 (A) is the characters "remaining" and "times" for recognizing that the remaining number is displayed, and "30" for displaying the remaining number of ST times. And the numbers are used.

Among the characters used for displaying the remaining number of times, there is a specific character in which a specific area is formed.

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the probabilistic state, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (A), the background image during ST corresponding to the probabilistic state is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device. do. In the example shown in FIG. 11-12 (A), the background image during ST in a manner in which the screen is cracked is displayed. The background image during ST is an image displayed on the back side of the other display displayed on the image display device in the probabilistic state. The background image during ST contains many lines expressing animation pictures and effects.

The remaining number display is displayed small in the edge area in the display area of the image display device, which does not impair the visibility of the variable display of the decorative pattern. If the background image during ST changes over time, the line of the background image during ST may overlap the back of the remaining number display. Then, when a specific character is displayed on the remaining number of times display, ST is displayed on the back surface of the specific area of the specific character as shown by the Arabic numeral "0" part surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 11-12 (A). When the lines of the middle image overlap, the lines of the background image during ST may be assimilated with the lines forming the specific characters, and the specific characters may appear different from the original characters.

FIG. 11-12 (B) is an enlarged view of the portion of the Arabic numeral “0” surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 11-12 (A). In the examples shown in FIGS. 11-12 (A) and 11-12 (B), the line of the ST middle background image overlaps the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used for the remaining number display, and the ST middle background image. The line is assimilated with the line forming the specific character "0", and the specific character "0" appears to be the Arabic numeral "8" instead of the Arabic numeral "0".

In this way, if the character of the remaining number display is mistaken for a character different from the original character, the remaining number of ST times in the probabilistic state cannot be accurately recognized. However, for example, it is difficult to adjust the position of the line of the background image during ST so that the line of the background image during ST does not overlap the specific area of the specific character.

The fourth form of the feature portion 20SH is made in view of such a background, and the fourth form of the feature portion 20SH will be described below.

(Display of the remaining number of times in the fourth form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 11-13 is a diagram showing an example of an Arabic numeral display mode used for displaying the remaining number of times in the fourth embodiment of the feature unit 20SH.

In the fourth form of the feature unit 20SH, among the Arabic numerals used for displaying the remaining number of times, the specific area 20SHI6 of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to the specific character is , It is a non-transparent display mode, and is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode of the line 20SHS6 forming characters. In the example shown in FIG. 11-13, the color of the Arabic numeral line 20SHS6 used for displaying the remaining number of times is "black", whereas "0", "4", "6", and "6" corresponding to specific characters are used. When the specific area 20SHI6 of "8" and "9" is displayed in "white" and displayed in front of the background image during ST, the background image during ST becomes invisible from the specific area 20SHI6.

Further, the display mode of the specific area 20SHI6 is not limited to a color different from the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the moji, and the characters are displayed to such an extent that the specific area 20SHI6 and the line 20SHS6 forming the characters can be accurately distinguished. Any display mode may be used as long as it has a high contrast with respect to the display mode of the line 20SHS6 to be formed.

For example, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color having a high contrast with the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the character. In that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be such that the contrast is low with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may have a low contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS6 forming the character. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may be a texture having a low contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS6 forming the character.

Further, for example, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may have a high contrast with the brightness of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color having a low contrast with the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the character. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may have a low contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS6 forming the character. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may be a texture having a low contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS6 forming the character.

Further, for example, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may have a high contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color having a low contrast with the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the character. Further, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be such that the contrast is low with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may be a texture having a low contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS6 forming the character.

Further, for example, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may be a texture having a high contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS6 forming the character. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color having a low contrast with the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the character. Further, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be such that the contrast is low with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may have a low contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS6 forming the character.

Among the characters used for displaying the remaining number, the numbers other than the Arabic numerals for displaying the remaining number of ST times and the specific characters among the characters other than the numbers for recognizing that the remaining number is displayed are also shown in the figure. Like the Arabic numerals shown in 11-13, the specific area is displayed in a non-transparent display mode different from the display mode of the lines forming the characters.

(Remaining number of times notification display in the fourth form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 11-14 is a diagram showing an example of an Arabic numeral display mode used for the remaining number notification display in the fourth embodiment of the feature unit 20SH.

When the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times, the pachinko gaming machine 1 displays a remaining number of times notification display for notifying the predetermined number of times.

In the remaining number notification display, when the remaining number indicated by the remaining number display reaches a predetermined number, a number other than a number for displaying the predetermined number and a character other than a number for recognizing that the remaining number notification display is used. And are used. The numbers used for the remaining number notification display are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, and the like.

As shown in FIGS. 11-14, the remaining number notification display is displayed in a plurality of types having different transmittances. The remaining number notification display shown in FIG. 11-14 (A) is a display mode in which the area of the line forming the character of the remaining number notification display is not transparent and the background of the character cannot be seen from the line area. The remaining number notification display shown in FIG. 11-14 (B) is a display mode in which the area of the line forming the character of the remaining number notification display is transparent and the background of the character can be seen from the area of the line.

In addition, the remaining number notification display is displayed in three-dimensional characters. In the display mode in which the background of the character is not visible, the area of the line forming the three-dimensional character includes the area 20SHS71 expressing the character and the area 20SHS72A expressing the depth of the three-dimensional character. In the display mode in which the background of the character is transparent, the area 20SHS71 expressing the character is transparently displayed, and in the display mode in which the background of the character is not visible, the area 20SHS72A expressing the depth of the three-dimensional character is displayed. The area is displayed as the area 20SHS72B representing the bottom surface of the three-dimensional character.

Among such three-dimensional characters, there are characters corresponding to specific characters. In the example shown in FIGS. 11-14, among the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used for the remaining number notification display, the specific areas of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to the specific characters. The 20SHI7 is displayed in a transparent display mode, and when it is displayed in front of the background image during ST, the background image during ST can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI7.

As shown in FIG. 11-14, the specific area 20SHI7 of the remaining number notification display differs depending on whether the remaining number notification display is displayed in a non-transparent mode or a transparent mode. In the example shown in FIGS. 11-14, the remaining number notification display is displayed in a non-transparent manner, and since the area of the line forming the character includes the area 20SHS72A expressing the depth of the character, the area expressing the character. The area surrounded by the outline of the inner circumference of the 20SHS71 and the outline of the area 20SHS72A representing the depth of the characters located on the inner circumference side thereof is the specific area 20SHI7. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 11-14 (B), the remaining number notification display is displayed in a transparent manner, and the area 20SHS71 expressing the character is transparently displayed, so that the bottom surface of the three-dimensional character is represented. The region surrounded by the outline of the inner circumference of the region 20SHS72B is the specific region 20SHI7.

(How the remaining number of times is displayed in the fourth form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 11-15 (A) is a diagram showing how the remaining number display is displayed in the fourth form of the feature unit 20SH. FIG. 11-15 (B) is an enlarged view of the portion of the Arabic numeral “0” surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 11-15 (A).

In the examples shown in FIGS. 11-15 (A) and 11-15 (B), the line of the background image during ST overlaps the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used in the remaining number display 20SHST, but the specific area Since 20SHI6 is displayed in "white", the background image during ST cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI6. Therefore, in the specific area 20SHI6, it is not assimilated with the line 20SHHS2 of the background image during ST, and the specific character "0" can be accurately recognized as the Arabic numeral "0".

In addition to the remaining number display 20SHST, the image display device 5 displays the acquired number display 20SHK, the right-handed display 20SHM, and the probability variation display 20SHRU for recognizing that the image display device 5 is controlled to the probability variation state. There is. The acquired number display 20SHK, the right-handed display 20SHM, and the probability variation display 20SHRU are also displayed small in the edge area in the display area of the image display device 5 that does not impair the visibility of the decorative pattern, as in the remaining number display 20SHST.

The characters used for the acquired number display 20SHK, the right-handed display 20SHM, and the probability variation display 20SHRU are the same types of characters as those used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display, and the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display. It may contain characters of a different type from the characters to be used. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-17, "number", "hiragana", and "kanji" are used as the characters of the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHST. On the other hand, in the probability variation display 20SHRU, an "alphabet" which is a character different from the characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHST is used. Further, the acquired number display 20SHK includes "numbers" which are the same types of characters as those used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHST, and the characters used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHST. Different types of characters, "katakana", are used. In addition, the right-handed display 20SHM includes "hiragana" and "kanji", which are the same types of characters as those used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHST, and the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHST. "Symbols", which are different types of characters from the characters used, are used.

Among the characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK, the right-handed display 20SHM, and the probability variation display 20SHRU, there are characters corresponding to specific characters regardless of the type of the characters. The specific area of the specific character used in the acquired number display 20SHK, the right-handed display 20SHM, and the probability variation display 20SHRU is also a non-transparent display mode like the specific area 20SHI6 of the remaining number display 20SHST, and the line 20SHS6 forming the character. Since the display mode is different from the display mode, the background image during ST cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI6.

(Example of effect operation of remaining number display and remaining number notification display in the fourth form of the feature unit 20SH)
FIG. 11-16 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the relationship between the variable display and the change in the display mode of the remaining number notification display in the fourth embodiment of the feature unit 20SH. FIG. 11-17 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation of the remaining number display and the remaining number notification display in the first embodiment of the feature unit 20SH.

As shown in FIG. 11-17, the effect control CPU 120 displays the remaining number display 20SHST in the second display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. As shown in FIGS. 11-17 (A) to 11-17, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the number for displaying the remaining number of STs of the remaining number display 20SHST each time the variable display is executed. Let me display it.

As shown in FIGS. 11-16 and 11-17 (A) to 11-17 (B), the effect control CPU 120 starts a variable display in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display becomes a predetermined number of times. The display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH for notifying a predetermined number of times is started in a display mode that does not transmit. For example, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the number of times when the variable display in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display is 60 times, 50 times, 40 times, 30 times, 20 times, or 10 times is started. The display of the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is started to be displayed in a non-transparent display mode. As shown in FIGS. 11-17 (B) to (D), the characters used for the remaining number display 20SHST are characters having a size larger than the characters used for the remaining number display 20SHST. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11-17, the acquired number display 20SHK is also displayed when the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, but the remaining number notification display 20SHST is a display in which the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed. It is displayed in a display area different from the area. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-16 and 11-17 (B) to 11-17 (C), when the first period elapses after the display of the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is started, the effect control CPU 120 remains. The display mode of the number-of-times notification display 20SHSTH is changed from a non-transparent display mode to a transparent display mode. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-16 and 11-17 (B) to (E), when the second period elapses after changing the display mode of the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH, the effect control CPU 120 is set. The display of the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is terminated.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute variable display based on a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns having different variable display times.

The remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is a display for notifying the predetermined number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number display reaches a predetermined number of times. Therefore, if the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed over a plurality of variable displays, the remaining number of STs may be misidentified.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the first period and the remaining number notification display 20SHST are displayed in a display mode that does not transmit the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH so that the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH can be terminated in one variable display. The total period with the second period displayed in the transparent display mode is set to be shorter than the variable display time of the type of variation pattern having the shortest variable display time.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 11-16, in the variable display in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display is a predetermined number of times, even if the variable display based on any kind of fluctuation pattern is executed, the variable display is executed. In the one variable display, the display of the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH can be terminated.

Here, the first display area 20SH51 includes the above-mentioned "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. On the other hand, the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed on the front side of the identification information at least in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R in the first display area 20SH51. Therefore, if the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed while the non-transparent remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, the display result may not be recognized.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the first period of displaying in a display mode that does not transmit the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is the type of variation pattern having the shortest variable display time so that the display result of the variable display can be recognized. It is set to end before the timing when the display result in the variable display of is derived.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 11-16, in the variable display in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display is a predetermined number of times, even if the variable display based on any kind of fluctuation pattern is executed, the variable display is executed. The display result of the variable display can be preferably recognized.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-17 (D), the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed when the display result of the variable display is derived, but the display mode of the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is transparent. Since it has changed, the identification information in the background of the character can be visually recognized from the area of the line forming the character of the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH.

In this embodiment, the change in the display mode of the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is controlled so that the remaining number notification display 20SHST is displayed in a display mode in which the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is transparent when the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. However, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the variable display in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number display 20SHST is a predetermined number, the remaining number of times is temporarily stopped when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notification display 20SHSTH may be displayed in a transparent display mode.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth aspect of the feature unit 20SH can be controlled to a probabilistic state accompanied by a time saving control capable of advancing the game faster than the normal state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. Then, the image display device 5 can display the background image during ST in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. Further, the image display device 5 can display the remaining number display 20SHST regarding the remaining number of STs in the probabilistic state on the front side of the background image during ST in the second display area 20SH52. Further, the image display device 5 notifies the remaining number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number on the front side of the background image during ST at least in the first display area 20SH51. As the display 20SHST, the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH for notifying "60" when the remaining number indicated by the remaining number display 20SHST is 60 times, and the remaining number display 20SHST indicating "60" when the remaining number indicated by the remaining number display 20SHST is 50 times. It is possible to display the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH for notifying "50". Then, the remaining number display 20SHST is updated every time the variable display is executed. On the other hand, the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH ends the display when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the display. The characters used in the remaining number notification display 20SHST are characters having a size larger than the characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST. The characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHST include a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters. As for the specific characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST, the background image during ST cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI6. On the other hand, as for the specific characters used in the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH, the background image during ST can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI7.

According to such a configuration, the remaining number display 20SHST including the specific characters and the remaining number notification display 20SHST can be suitably displayed in relation to the background image during ST. For example, when the player confirms the remaining number of STs in the probabilistic state, he / she confirms the remaining number display 20SHST, but the remaining number display 20SHST is displayed in small size characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52. If the background image during ST is visible from the specific area 20SHI6 of a specific character, the specific character may look different from the original character, but the background image during ST cannot be seen from the specific area 20SHI6 of the specific character. By doing so, it is possible to accurately recognize a specific character. Further, the remaining number notification display 20SHST is not always displayed like the remaining number display 20SHST, but is predetermined in the sense of alerting the player that the remaining number indicated by the remaining number display 20SHST is a predetermined number. It is displayed only for a period of time, and is displayed in large characters in the wide first display area 20SH51. Therefore, by making the background image during ST visible from the specific area 20SHI7 of the specific characters, the first In the conspicuous display position of the display area 20SH51, it is possible to show the background image during ST as much as possible.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the characters used in the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH in a transparent display mode in which the image on the back surface can be seen through the line portion forming the characters. be.

According to such a configuration, the background image can be visually recognized while the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, so that unnecessary stress can be prevented from being applied to the player.

Further, as described above, the first display area 20SH51 includes the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, the image display device 5 can display the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH on the front side of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

According to such a configuration, since the variable display of the decorative symbol can be visually recognized while the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, it is possible to prevent unnecessary stress from being applied to the player. ..

Further, as described above, when the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, the image display device 5 displays the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a display mode transparent to the display.

According to such a configuration, even if the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed while the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, the display result of the variable display can be recognized.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the acquired number display 20SHK regarding the number of prize balls given. Then, the image display device 5 displays the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH in a display area different from the display area in which the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the acquired number display 20SHK from being lowered due to the display of the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH.

In the above description, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player determines the game. The present invention is also applied to a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player when the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button. It is possible.

(Explanation of Means Related to Feature 20SH)
(1) The gaming machine according to the first aspect of the feature unit 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state). The display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an image display device 5 and the like), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and around the first display area. The area includes a second display area that is narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and the first display area 20SH51. The display means includes, for example, a second display area 20SH52 narrower than the first display area 20SH51), the display means displays a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area. The image display device 5 can display (for example, the image display device 5 can display a big hit medium background image corresponding to the big hit gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52), and the second display. In the area, it is possible to display the grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the granted gaming value on the front side of the background image (for example, the image display device 5 can display the jackpot medium background image in the second display area 20SH52. The number of winning balls displayed 20SHK regarding the number of prize balls given can be displayed on the front side), and at least in the first display area, the amount of value given for gaming is set to a predetermined amount on the front side of the background image. As a notification display for notifying that the value has been reached, a first notification display for notifying that the amount of the game value to be given has reached the first predetermined amount and a notification that the amount of the game value to be given has reached the second predetermined amount. It is possible to display a second notification display to be notified (for example, in the image display device 5, at least in the first display area 20SH51, the number of prize balls given in the jackpot gaming state is displayed on the front side of the jackpot medium background image. As the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH that notifies that the number of "Kiriban" has been reached, when the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", the acquisition number notification display of "1000 over" is displayed. It is possible to display, and when the number of prize balls granted in the jackpot game state reaches "2000", it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display of "2000 over", etc.), and the grant amount display is It is updated every time the gaming value is given in the advantageous state (for example, the acquired number display 20SHK is paid by the gaming ball as a prize ball in the jackpot gaming state. The notification display ends when a specific period has elapsed since the display was started (for example, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is displayed after the display is started). The characters used for the notification display are characters having a size larger than the characters used for the grant amount display (for example, used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH). The characters to be used are characters having a size larger than the characters used for the acquired number display 20SHK, etc.), and the characters used for the grant amount display and the notification display have a specific area surrounded by a line forming the characters. The characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK and the acquired number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters to be formed (for example, the characters used in the acquired number display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed, etc.). The background image of the specific character used for the given amount display is invisible from the specific area (for example, the specific character used for the acquired number display 20SHK cannot see the background image during the big hit from the specific area. The background image of the specific character used for the notification display can be visually recognized from the specific area (for example, the specific character used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH can be visually recognized from the jackpot medium background image from the specific area. It is characterized by being possible).

According to such a configuration, the grant amount display and the notification display including the specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the background image. For example, when the player confirms the amount of the game value given in the advantageous state, he / she confirms the amount of grant, but the amount of grant is displayed in small size characters in the narrow second display area. , If the background image is visible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character may look different from the original character, but by making the background image invisible from the specific area of the specific character, It is possible to accurately recognize a specific character. In addition, the notification display is not always displayed in an advantageous state like the grant amount display, but is meant to congratulate the player when the grant amount of the game value granted in the advantageous state reaches a predetermined amount. It is displayed only for a predetermined period, and is displayed in large size characters in a wide first display area. Therefore, by making the background image visible from a specific area of a specific character, it is called a first display area. It is possible to show the background image as much as possible at a conspicuous display position.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1), the specific character includes the Arabic numerals 0, 4, 6, 8, 9 (for example, the specific characters are the Arabic numerals "0", "4", " 6 ”,“ 8 ”,“ 9 ”, etc.) may be included.

According to such a configuration, the grant amount display and the notification display using Arabic numerals can be suitably displayed in relation to the background image.

(3) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), the display means displays the notification display when the grant amount display is displayed (for example, the image display device 5 is the acquired number). When the display 20SHK is displayed, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may be displayed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, even when the notification display is displayed, it is possible to accurately grasp the amount of the game value given in the jackpot game state by the grant amount display.

(4) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (3), the display means can display the notification display in the first display area and the second display area (for example, an image). The display device 5 may display the acquired number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52).

According to such a configuration, the notification display becomes easily noticeable to the player, and it is possible to preferably notify that the amount of the game value given in the advantageous state has reached a predetermined amount.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4), the display means can display a specific display relating to the advantageous state on the front side of the background image in the second region (5). For example, the image display device 5 can display the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, the right-handed display 20SHM, etc. on the front side of the jackpot medium background image in the second display area 20SH52). , The characters used for the specific display include characters of the same type as the characters used for the grant amount display and the notification display, and characters of a type different from the characters used for the grant amount display and the notification display. , Each type of character includes a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the character is formed (for example, used for a jackpot display 20SHO, a decorative pattern display 20SHZ, a round number display 20SHR, and a right-handed display 20SHM. The characters to be used include characters of the same type as those used for the acquired number display 20SHK and acquired number notification display 20SHKH, and characters of a type different from the characters used for the acquired number display 20SHK and the acquired number notification display 20SHKH. Characters of the same type also include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed), and the specific characters used for the specific display cannot see the background image from the specific area. (For example, the specific characters used in the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM are such that the jackpot medium background image cannot be visually recognized from a specific area).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to accurately recognize a specific character even for a specific display.

(6) The gaming machine according to the second aspect of the feature unit 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state), and is a display means. (For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means is a first display area and an area around the first display area. A second display area narrower than one display area is included (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and the first display area 20SH51, and is the first display area 20SH51. The display means can display a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area (for example, including a second display area 20SH 52, which is narrower than the above). , The image display device 5 can display a big hit medium background image corresponding to the big hit gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52), and the background image in the second display area. It is possible to display the grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the granted gaming value on the front side of the (for example, the image display device 5 is granted to the front side of the big hit medium background image in the second display area 20SH52. (The display of the number of winning balls related to the number of prize balls can be displayed, etc.), at least in the first display area, a notification that the amount of game value to be given has reached a predetermined amount on the front side of the background image. As a display, a first notification display for notifying that the amount of game value to be given has reached the first predetermined amount, and a second notification display for notifying that the amount of game value to be given has reached the second predetermined amount. (For example, in the image display device 5, at least in the first display area 20SH51, the number of prize balls given in the jackpot gaming state reaches the number of "Kiriban" on the front side of the background image during the jackpot. As the acquisition number notification display for notifying that the game has been performed, it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display of "1000 over" when the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", and the jackpot game state. When the number of prize balls given in the above reaches "2000", it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display of "2000 over", etc.), and the given amount display has a gaming value in the advantageous state. It is updated every time it is given (for example, the number of acquisitions is updated every time the game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state), and the notification display is shown in the table. The display ends when a specific period elapses from the start of the display (for example, the acquired number notification display ends the display when a predetermined period elapses after the display starts), and the notification display The character used for is a character having a size larger than the character used for the given amount display (for example, the character used for the acquisition number notification display is a character having a size larger than the character used for the acquisition number display). The characters used for the grant amount display and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed (for example, used for the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display). The characters to be used include a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the character is formed), and the specific character used for the given amount display cannot see the background image from the specific area. Yes (for example, the specific character used for displaying the number of acquisitions is that the background image during the big hit is invisible from the specific area, etc.), and the specific character used for the notification display is the specific character used for the given amount display. The ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the area of the line forming the character is smaller than that of the character (for example, the specific character used for the acquisition number notification display is a character than the specific character used for the acquisition number display. The ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the area of the line forming the character is small, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the grant amount display and the notification display including the specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the background image. For example, when the player confirms the amount of the game value given in the advantageous state, he / she confirms the amount of grant, but the amount of grant is displayed in small size characters in the narrow second display area. , If the background image is visible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character may look different from the original character, but by making the background image invisible from the specific area of the specific character, It is possible to accurately recognize a specific character.

(7) In the game machine of the above (6), the character used for the notification display is a three-dimensional character (for example, the character used for the acquisition number notification display is a three-dimensional character, etc.), and the three-dimensional character is used. The area of the line to be formed may include an area for expressing a character and an area for expressing the depth of the character.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of the notification display.

(8) In the gaming machine according to (6) or (7), the specific character used for the notification display is such that the background image can be visually recognized from the specific area (for example, the specific character used for the acquisition number notification display). The background image during the big hit can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI3).

According to such a configuration, the notification display is not always displayed in the advantageous state like the grant amount display, but when the grant amount of the game value given in the advantageous state reaches a predetermined amount, the game is played. It is displayed only for a predetermined period in the sense of congratulating the person, and is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area, and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the area of the line forming the character. Because the background image is visible from a specific area of a specific character, not only can the risk of misidentifying the character be suppressed, but also the background image can be visually recognized from a specific area of the specific character, which has a directing effect. Can be enhanced.

(9) In the gaming machine according to (6) or (7), the background image of the specific character used for the notification display is invisible from the specific area (for example, the acquisition number notification display in the modification 1). The specific characters used in the above may be such that the background image during the jackpot is invisible from the specific area 20SHI4).

According to such a configuration, the acquired number notification display is not always displayed in the jackpot game state like the acquired number display, but the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches the number of "Kiriban". It is displayed only for a predetermined period in the sense of congratulating the player when it is done, and is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, and is a specific area with respect to the size of the area of the line forming the character. Since the ratio of the size of the characters is small, not only can the discomfort be suppressed even if the background image cannot be seen from the specific area of the specific character, but also the background image cannot be seen from the specific area of the specific character. Can be prevented from being misunderstood.

(10) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (9) above, the display means can change the mode of the notification display to a specific mode (for example, the image display device 5 is the number of acquisitions. The notification display 20SHKH can be stopped and displayed in the first display area 20SH51, etc.), and when the specific period elapses after the mode of the notification display changes to the specific mode, the mode of the notification display is displayed. The acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is framed out when a predetermined period elapses after the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is framed in to the stop position in the first display area 20SH51. Things, etc.), you may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect when the notification display is displayed.

(11) In the game machine of the above (10), in the character used for the notification display, the area of the line forming the character is displayed in a plurality of kinds of colors (for example, a modification relating to the second form of the feature portion 20SH). The character used for the acquired number notification display in 2 is that the area of the line forming the character is displayed in a gradation of three colors, etc.), and the display means changes the combination of the plurality of types of colors over time. (For example, the image display device 5 displays the mode of the characters used for the acquired number notification display in a display mode A → display mode B → display mode C → display mode D → display mode E → display mode F → Display mode G → display mode A → ..., which is changed over time, etc.), and the notification display is displayed in a mode different from that of the specific mode. The speed at which the combination of the plurality of types of colors changes differs depending on whether or not the combination is used (for example, when the acquired number notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 and when the acquired number notification display is stopped. The speed at which the display mode of the acquisition number notification display changes differs depending on whether or not is moving (frame-in / frame-out)).

According to such a configuration, the display mode changes according to the moving speed of the notification display, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

(12) The gaming machine according to the fourth aspect of the feature unit 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state capable of advancing the game faster than the normal state (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine 1). The display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with the image display device 5 and the like), the display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with the image display device 5 and the like). The display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is a region around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (for example, an image display device). The display area 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51). The background image corresponding to the special state can be displayed in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 has the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. , ST background image can be displayed, etc.), and in the second display area, the variation number display regarding the variation number in the special state can be displayed on the front side of the background image (for example, an image display device). In the second display area 20SH52, the remaining number display 20SHST regarding the remaining number of ST times in the probabilistic state can be displayed on the front side of the background image during ST), at least in the first display area. On the front side of the background image, the number of fluctuations is notified when the value of the number of fluctuations is a predetermined value, and the number of fluctuations is notified when the value of the number of fluctuations is the first predetermined value. It is possible to display a first number of times notification display and a second number of times notification display for notifying the number of fluctuations when the value of the number of fluctuations display becomes a second predetermined value (for example, the image display device 5 has at least the first number. 1 In the display area 20SH51, when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times on the front side of the background image during ST, it is indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST as the remaining number of times notification display 20SHST to notify the predetermined number of times. The remaining number notification display 20SHSTH that notifies "60" when the remaining number of times is 60, and the remaining number notification display 20SHST that notifies "50" when the remaining number indicated by the remaining number display 20SHST is 50 times. , Etc.), the variable number display is changed every time the variable display is executed. New (for example, the remaining number display 20SHST is updated every time the variable display is executed, etc.), and the number notification display ends when a specific period elapses from the start of the display (for example, the remaining number display 20SHST is updated every time the variable display is executed). For example, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH ends the display when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the display), and the characters used for the number of times notification display are larger than the characters used for the fluctuation number of times display. It is a large-sized character (for example, the character used for the remaining number of times notification display 20SHST is a character of a size larger than the character used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST, etc.), and is used for the fluctuation number of times display and the number of times notification display. The characters used include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed (for example, the characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH are surrounded by the lines forming the characters. The background image of the specific character used for displaying the number of fluctuations is invisible from the specific area (for example, the specific character used for displaying the remaining number of times 20SHST is a specific area). The specific characters used for the number-of-times notification display are visible from the specific area (for example, the background image during ST is invisible from 20SHI6) (for example, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH). The specific character is characterized in that the background image during ST can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI7).

According to such a configuration, the variation number display including the specific character and the number notification display can be suitably displayed in relation to the background image. For example, when the player confirms the number of fluctuations in the special state, the number of fluctuations is displayed, but the number of fluctuations is displayed in small size characters in the narrow second display area, and the number of fluctuations is displayed from the specific area of the specific character. When the background image is visible, the specific character may look different from the original character. However, by making the background image invisible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character is recognized accurately. be able to. In addition, the number of times notification display is not always displayed like the number of fluctuations display, but is limited to a specific period in the sense of alerting the player that the remaining number of times indicated by the number of fluctuations display will be a predetermined number of times. Since it is displayed and is displayed in large size characters in a wide first display area, by making the background image visible from a specific area of the specific character, in a conspicuous display position called the first display area, It is possible to show the background image as much as possible.

(13) In the game machine of the above (12), the display means can display the characters used for the number-of-times notification display in a transparent mode in which the image on the back surface can be seen through the area of the line forming the characters. (For example, the image display device 5 can display the characters used in the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH in a transparent display mode in which the image on the back surface can be seen through the line portion forming the characters. etc).

According to such a configuration, since the background image can be visually recognized while the number-of-times notification display is displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from being unnecessarily stressed.

(14) In the gaming machine of the above (13), the first display area includes a variable display area in which the identification information is variably displayed (for example, the first display area 20SH51 is “left”, “middle”, Each of the "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, etc.), the display means can display the number-of-times notification display on the front side of the identification information in the variable display area (for example,). , The image display device 5 can display the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH on the front side of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, etc.).

According to such a configuration, since the variable display of the identification information can be visually recognized while the number-of-times notification display is displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from being unnecessarily stressed.

(15) In the gaming machine of the above (14), when the identification information is recognizable, the display means displays the number-of-times notification display in the transparent mode (for example, the image display device 5 is variable). When the display result of the display is derived and displayed, the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a transparent display mode, etc.).

According to such a configuration, even if the identification information is recognizable when the number-of-times notification display is displayed, the display result of the variable display can be recognized.

(16) In any of the game machines (12) to (15), the display means can display a grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the granted gaming value (for example, the image display device 5 can display the grant amount display. , The acquired number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded prize balls can be displayed, etc.), and the number-of-times notification display is displayed in a display area different from the display area in which the grant amount display is displayed (for example, image display). The device 5 displays the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH in a display area different from the display area in which the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the imparted amount display from being lowered due to the display of the number-of-times notification display.

(17) The gaming machine according to the first aspect of the feature unit 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state). The display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an image display device 5 and the like), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and around the first display area. The area includes a second display area that is narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and the first display area 20SH51. The second display area 20SH52, which is narrower than the first display area 20SH51, and the like), the display means has advanced the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area. (For example, the image display device 5 corresponds to the progress of the round game in the jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. The background image during the jackpot can be displayed (for example, the background image can be displayed), and at least in the first display area, the second background image corresponding to the end of the advantageous state can be displayed (for example, the image display device 5 can display at least the second background image). In the first display area 20SH51, the ending background image corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state can be displayed, etc.), and when the second background image is not displayed, in the second display area, the said A specific suggestion video that suggests the progress of the game can be displayed on the front side of the first background video (for example, the image display device 5 can display the ending background video in the second display area 20SH52 when the ending background video is not displayed. , The effect video 20SH of the notice of the pachinko machine on hold, which suggests that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state in response to the stored hold information, can be displayed on the front side of the background video during the big hit, etc.), In the second display area, it is possible to display the grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the granted gaming value on the front side of the first background image (for example, the image display device 5 can display the grant amount display in the second display area 20SH52. On the front side of the background image during the jackpot, it is possible to display 20 SHK of the number of winning balls related to the number of prize balls given), and when the second background image is displayed, at least in the first display area. Notifying the front side of the second background image of the amount of gaming value granted in the advantageous state. The result notification display can be displayed (for example, when the ending background image is displayed, the image display device 5 gives the ending background image to the front side of the ending background image in a jackpot game state at least in the first display area 20SH51. The result display 20SHRE for notifying the total number of prize balls has been displayed (for example, the result display 20SHRE can be displayed), and the characters used for the result notification display are characters having a size larger than the characters used for the grant amount display (for example,). The characters used for the result display 20SHRE are larger than the characters used for the acquired number display 20SHK, etc.), and the characters used for the grant amount display and the result notification display are based on the lines forming the characters. The characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK and the result display 20SHRE include the specific characters in which the enclosed specific area is formed (for example, the characters used in the result display 20SHRE include the specific characters in which the specific area surrounded by the lines forming the characters is formed. Etc.), the first background image and the previous term specific suggestion image cannot be visually recognized from the specific area as the specific character used for the given amount display (for example, the specific character used for the acquired number display 20SHK is the specific area. (The background image during the big hit and the effect image 20SHRE of the notice of the pending villa are invisible, etc.), and the specific characters used for the result notification display are the second background image visible from the specific area. (For example, the specific character used in the result display 20SHRE is such that the ending background image can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI5).

According to such a configuration, the grant amount display including the specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the first background image and the specific suggestion image, and the result notification display including the specific characters can be displayed with the second background image. It can be preferably displayed in relation to each other. For example, when the player confirms the amount of the game value given in the advantageous state, he / she confirms the amount of grant, but the amount of grant is displayed in small size characters in the narrow second display area and is specified. Since it may overlap with the suggestion video, if the first background video or the specific suggestion video is visible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character may look different from the original character. By making the background image during the big hit and the specific suggestion image invisible from the specific area of the above, the specific character can be accurately recognized. On the other hand, the result notification display is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area and does not overlap with the specific suggestion image. Therefore, by making the second background image visible from the specific area of the specific character, the result notification display can be visually recognized. It is possible to show the second background image as much as possible in a conspicuous display position called the first display area.

(18) In the gaming machine of the above (17), a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of types of setting values having different advantages for the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a jackpot winning probability). It is possible to set any one of a plurality of types of setting values "1" to "6"), and the display means suggests a setting value set by the setting means. The second background image can be displayed (for example, the image display device 5 can display the ending background image in a mode that suggests the set value), and the specific suggestion image is It is one aspect of a plurality of types of suggestion images that suggest the advantageous state, and does not suggest the set value set by the setting means (for example, the effect image 20SHRE of the pending villa notice announces the jackpot reliability. Although it is one of multiple types of notice effects, the setting suggestion effect due to the pending villa notice is not executed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, there is a possibility that the set value is suggested by the second background image, so that it is significant that the second background image can be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific character used for the result notification display. Will increase.

(19) In the gaming machine according to (17) or (18), the display means starts displaying the second background image at a predetermined brightness (for example, the image display device 5 has an ending background at a predetermined brightness. At the timing of starting the display of the result notification display, the second background image is paused and displayed at a specific brightness darker than the predetermined brightness, and the specific brightness is displayed. The result notification display is displayed with a lightness brighter than the lightness (for example, the image display device 5 pauses the ending background image at a specific lightness darker than a predetermined lightness at the timing T3 at which the display of the result display 20SHRE is started. Display the result display 20SHRE at a brightness brighter than a specific brightness, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the visibility of the result notification display can be improved.

(Explanation of feature 19SH)
Next, the gaming machine related to the feature unit 19SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-1 to 12-6. The image display device 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 regarding the feature unit 19SH is scheduled to display the number of winning balls given by the game ball entering the big winning opening in the big hit game state and to give it in the big hit game state. It is possible to display the number of planned acquisitions and the total number of prize balls. In addition, the image display device 5 can display an effect display that makes the display of the number of planned acquisitions invisible or difficult when an over-winning occurs. Then, the image display device 5 updates the value of the planned acquisition number display when the planned acquisition number display becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 starts the over-winning effect before the expected acquisition number display becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the feature unit 19SH having such features will be described. The description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Direction operation when a prize occurs during a round game)
FIG. 12-1 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when a prize is generated during a round game. FIG. 12-2 is a diagram showing an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 12-1 (A), the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment displays the number of acquisitions 20SHK when the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state, and the game ball is a big prize opening in the big hit game state. 20SHK1 for displaying the number of prize balls given by entering the box, and 20SHK2 for displaying the total number of winning balls scheduled to be given in the jackpot game state are displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 12-1 (A), the acquired number display 20SHK is such that the acquired number display 20SHK is "135" in the numerator with the central convoluted line "/" separated, as in "135/1500". It is arranged and displayed in the form of a fraction in which "1500" is arranged and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is arranged. That is, in the acquired number display 20SHK shown in FIG. 12-1 (A), the number of prize balls given when the game ball enters the big winning opening in the big hit game state is 135 balls, and the prize ball is given in the big hit game state. It shows that the total number of prize balls to be awarded is 1500.

Further, also in this embodiment, the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed in the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5, and the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative symbol display 20SHZ, and the round number display 20SHR are displayed in the second display area 20SH52. , Right-handed display 20SHM is also displayed. Further, the image display device 5 displays a background image during the jackpot in which the character 20SHCA appears in response to the progress of the round game in the jackpot game state. As shown in FIG. 12-2, the big hit middle background image is displayed on the display layer arranged on the back side of the display layer on which the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed.

When the prize ball is given by the game ball entering the big winning opening in the big hit game state, the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of acquisitions according to the effect mode as shown in FIGS. 12-1 (B) to (F). Update the value of 20SHK.

When the prize ball is given by the game ball entering the big prize opening in the big hit game state, the effect control CPU 120 first forms the big winning opening as shown in FIG. 12-1 (B). The display of the effect display is started in the display area near the position of the variable winning ball device 7. Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 is arranged at the lower right position of the image display device 5 when viewed from the player. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 12-1 (B), the effect display 20SHEF imitating a tornado is displayed at the lower right corner of the display area of the image display device 5. At this timing, the acquired number display 20SHK can be visually recognized, but the value of the acquired number display 20SHK has not been updated.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (C), the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF toward the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK. In the example shown in FIG. 12-1 (C), since the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed above the display area of the image display device 5, the effect display 20SHEF whose display is started is displayed at the lower right end of the display area. Moving upwards in the area. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 12-1 (C), the size of the effect display 20SHEF increases with movement. Even at this timing, the acquired number display 20SHK can be visually recognized, but the value of the acquired number display 20SHK has not been updated.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (D), the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK. Here, as shown in FIG. 12-2, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed on the display layer arranged in front of the display layer on which the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed. Therefore, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, the acquired number display 20SHK becomes invisible. At this timing, the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible, but as shown in FIG. 12-2 (D), the value of the acquired number display 20SHK is not updated.

In the example shown in FIG. 12-1 (D), the acquisition number display 20SHK is invisible due to the movement of the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is recognized. A part of the acquired number display 20SHK may be visible as long as it cannot be done. That is, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, the acquired number display 20SHK may be difficult to see.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 12-1 (D) to (E) and FIGS. 12-2 (D) to (E), the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect display 20SHEF in the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK. As a result, when the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated. Here, in this embodiment, as described above, when a game ball enters the large winning opening, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. Therefore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 12-1 (D) to (E) and FIGS. 12-2 (D) to (E), the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" to "150".

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (F), the effect control CPU 120 ends the display of the effect display 20SHEF. In the example shown in FIG. 12-1 (F), since the display of the effect display 20SHEF is completed, the acquired number display 20SHK can be visually recognized, and it can be confirmed that the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 has been updated. can.

According to such an effect mode, the effect display 20SHEF can be first noticed by displaying the effect display 20SHEF. Then, as the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, the attention to the acquired number display 20SHK can be increased. Then, by updating the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 when the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult due to the effect display 20SHEF, the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends and the acquired number display 20SHK becomes visible. At that time, it is possible to preferably recognize that the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 that has been attracting attention has been updated.

(Example of production operation when over-winning occurs)
FIG. 12-3 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when an over-winning occurs. FIG. 12-4 is a diagram showing an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is controlled so that when the tenth game ball enters the large winning opening in one round game, the large winning opening is closed. At this time, 11 A so-called over-winning may occur in which the first gaming ball enters the large winning opening following the tenth gaming ball. When an over-winning occurs, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the acquired number display 20SHK according to the effect mode as shown in FIG. 12-3.

When an over-winning occurs, the effect control CPU 120 first forms a large winning opening as shown in FIGS. 12-3 (A) to (B), as in the case where the tenth winning is generated. The display of the effect display is started in the display area close to the position of the special variable winning ball device 7. In the example shown in FIG. 12-3 (B), the effect display 20SHEF imitating a tornado is displayed at the lower right corner of the display area of the image display device 5. At this timing, the acquired number display 20SHK can be visually recognized, but the value of the acquired number display 20SHK has not been updated.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (C), the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF toward the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK. In the example shown in FIG. 12-3 (C), since the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed above the display area of the image display device 5, the effect display 20SHEF whose display is started is displayed at the lower right end of the display area. Moving upwards in the area. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 12-3 (C), the size of the effect display 20SHEF increases with movement. Even at this timing, the acquired number display 20SHK can be visually recognized, but the value of the acquired number display 20SHK has not been updated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (C), the effect control CPU 120 displays the acquired number display 20SHK by the effect display 20SHEF before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK. Before it becomes invisible or difficult, an over-winning effect for notifying that an over-winning has occurred is started. In the example shown in FIG. 12-3 (C), the over-winning effect video in which the character CHCB appears is displayed on the image display device 5.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute an effect by another effect device as an over-winning effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (C), the effect control CPU 120 outputs an over-winning sound in a mode different from the normal winning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R as the over-winning effect. In the example shown in FIG. 12-3 (C), the over-winning sound with the "picone picone" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Further, the effect control CPU 120 may cause the attacker lamp 9c to emit light in a light emitting mode different from the normal sound at the time of winning as an over-winning effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (D), the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK. Here, as shown in FIG. 12-4, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed on the display layer arranged in front of the display layer on which the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed. Therefore, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, the acquired number display 20SHK becomes invisible. At this timing, the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible, but as shown in FIG. 12-4 (D), the value of the acquired number display 20SHK is not updated.

In the example shown in FIG. 12-3 (D), the acquisition number display 20SHK is invisible due to the movement of the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is recognized. A part of the acquired number display 20SHK may be visible as long as it cannot be done. That is, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, the acquired number display 20SHK may be difficult to see.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 12-3 (D) to (E) and FIGS. 12-4 (D) to (E), the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect display 20SHEF in the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK. As a result, when the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult, the values of the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are updated. In the examples shown in FIGS. 12-3 (D) to (E) and FIGS. 12-4 (D) to (E), the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "150" to "165", and the expected acquired number is displayed. The value of 20SHK2 has been updated from "1500" to "1515".

Then, the effect control CPU 120 ends the display of the effect display 20SHEF as shown in FIG. 12-3 (F). In the example shown in FIG. 12-3 (F), the acquired number display 20SHK is visible because the effect display 20SHEF is finished, and the values of the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 have been updated. You can confirm that.

According to such an effect mode, the effect display 20SHEF can be first noticed by displaying the effect display 20SHEF. Then, as the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, the attention to the acquired number display 20SHK can be increased. Then, when the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult to be seen by the effect display 20SHEF, by updating the values of the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2, the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends and the acquired number. When the display 20SHK becomes visible, it is possible to preferably recognize that the values of the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2, which have been attracting attention, have been updated.

In particular, when an over-winning occurs, not only the value of the winning number display 20SHK1 but also the value of the planned winning number display 20SHK2 is updated, so that the total number of prize balls to be given in the jackpot game state is given by the over-winning. It is possible to preferably recognize that the number of prize balls has increased by the number of prize balls.

After finishing the display of the effect display 20SHEF, the effect control CPU 120 ends the over-winning effect as shown in FIG. 12-3 (G). In the example shown in FIG. 12-3 (G), the display of the over-winning effect image displayed on the image display device 5 as the over-winning effect is finished, and the background image during the big hit in which the character 20SHCA appears is displayed.

(Suggestion of setting by over winning production)
As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability of the jackpot changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6, the jackpot winning probability is changed by using the display result determination table according to the set value. The set value consists of 6 levels from "1" to "6", with "1" having the lowest ball output rate, "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6". The larger the value in the order of, the higher the ball output rate. That is, when "1" is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and the larger the value is, the larger the value is in the order of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". The advantage increases gradually. In this embodiment, the set values "1" to "3" are referred to as "low setting", and the set values "4" to "6" are referred to as "high setting".

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the set value can be changed, and the above-mentioned over-winning effect can be executed as the setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value. For example, when the setting value is low, the effect control CPU 120 displays the over-winning effect image in which the character CHCB appears on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 12-5 (A), and displays the “picone”. The over-winning sound with "picone" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. On the other hand, when the set value is set high, the effect control CPU 120 displays the over-winning effect image in which the character CHCC appears on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. The over-winning sound with "Pee Po" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

It should be noted that the setting suggestion effect by the over-winning effect does not have to definitively suggest whether the set value is a low setting or a high setting. For example, when the set value is set low, the over-winning effect of the mode shown in FIG. 12-5 (B) may be executed at a sufficiently low rate, or when the set value is set high. In addition, the over-winning effect of the aspect shown in FIG. 12-5 (A) may be executed at a sufficiently low rate.

Further, the over-winning effect may be different depending on whether the set value "6" is the most advantageous for the player and the set value is not "6". Further, the over-winning effect may be different depending on whether the set value is an odd number or an even number.

(When there are rounds where the specified number of prizes have not been won and rounds where over prizes have occurred)
FIG. 11-6 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when there are a round in which a predetermined number of prizes have not been won and a round in which an over prize has occurred in the feature unit 19SH.

As described above, the open state of the jackpot game state is continued until the elapsed timing of the predetermined period or the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot reaches the predetermined number, whichever is earlier. ..

In the examples shown in FIGS. 12-6 (A) to 12-6, although there were 9 prizes in the round game of 1 round, before the number of game balls that entered the large winning opening reached 10. After 29.5 seconds have passed, the 1-round round game is completed and the 2-round round game is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 12-6 (B), the number of acquisitions displayed as "135/1500" is displayed as 20 SHK, corresponding to the fact that nine prizes were won during the round game of one round. ing. In this example, it is assumed that the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which the round game of 10 rounds is executed is 1500.

Then, in the two-round round game, the number of game balls that entered the large winning opening reached ten, the two-round round game was completed, and even in the three-round round game, there were ten prizes. And. That is, it is assumed that 300 prize balls have been awarded in the round games of the 2nd and 3rd rounds. In that case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" at the start of the second round to "435" as shown in FIG. 12-6 (C).

Then, it is assumed that an over prize has occurred in the round game of 3 rounds. In that case, as shown in FIG. 12-6 (D), the display of the effect display 20SHEF is started, and the over-winning effect is executed when the effect display 20SHEF is moving.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-6 (E), the effect display 20SHEF makes the acquired number display 20SHK invisible or difficult, but when the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult, the acquired number display is displayed. The value of 20SHK is updated. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-6 (F), when the display of the effect display 20SHEF is completed, the acquired number display 20SHK becomes visible. In this example, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "435" to "450", and the value of the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated from "1500" to "1515".

Then, in the round games of 4 rounds to 10 rounds, it is assumed that the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches 10 and the round games of each round are completed. In that case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "450" at the start of the 4th round to "1500" as shown in FIG. 12-6 (G).

Then, when the round game of all 10 rounds is completed, the ending effect is executed as shown in FIG. 12-6 (H), and the total number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state is 1500 by the result display 20SH. Is notified.

Here, in this example, the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which the 10-round round game is executed was 1500, but the over-winning occurred in the 3-round round game, so that the final prize was obtained. The value of 20SHK2, which is the number of planned acquisitions, is "1515". However, since there were only nine prizes in the round game of one round, the value of the final number display 20SHK1 is "1500" instead of "1515".

According to such an embodiment, when there are a round in which a predetermined number of prizes has not been won and a round in which an over-winning has occurred, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is smaller than the value of the planned number of acquired number display 20SHK2. By confirming the final number of winnings display 20SHK, it is easy to understand that there were rounds in which a predetermined number of prizes were not won and there were rounds in which over-winning occurred.

FIG. 11-7 is a diagram showing another example of the effect operation when there are a round in which a predetermined number of prizes have not been won and a round in which an over prize has occurred in the feature unit 19SH.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 12-7 (A) to 12-7, although there were 9 prizes in the round game of 1 round, before the number of game balls that entered the large winning opening reached 10. After 29.5 seconds have passed, the 1-round round game is completed and the 2-round round game is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (B), the number of acquisitions displayed as "135/1500" is displayed as 20 SHK, corresponding to the fact that nine prizes were won during the round game of one round. ing. In this example, it is assumed that the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which the round game of 10 rounds is executed is 1500.

Then, in the two-round round game, the number of game balls that entered the large winning opening reached ten, the two-round round game was completed, and even in the three-round round game, there were ten prizes. And. That is, it is assumed that 300 prize balls have been awarded in the round games of the 2nd and 3rd rounds. In that case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" at the start of the second round to "435" as shown in FIG. 12-7 (C).

Then, it is assumed that an over prize has occurred in the round game of 3 rounds. In that case, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (D), the display of the effect display 20SHEF is started, and the over-winning effect is executed when the effect display 20SHEF is moving.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (E), the effect display 20SHEF makes the acquired number display 20SHK invisible or difficult, but when the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult, the acquired number display is displayed. The value of 20SHK1 is updated. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (F), when the display of the effect display 20SHEF is completed, the acquired number display 20SHK becomes visible. In this example, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "435" to "450", but the value of the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 is not updated and remains "1500".

Then, in the round games of 4 rounds to 10 rounds, it is assumed that the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches 10 and the round games of each round are completed. In that case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "450" at the start of the 4th round to "1500" as shown in FIG. 12-7 (G).

Then, when the round game of all 10 rounds is completed, the ending effect is executed as shown in FIG. 12-7 (H), and the total number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state is 1500 by the result display 20SH. Is notified.

Here, in this example, the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which the 10-round round game is executed is 1500, but the over-winning occurs in the 3-round round game. However, the value of the final planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 remains "1500". However, since there were only nine prizes in the round game of one round, the value of the final number display 20SHK1 is "1500".

According to such an embodiment, when there is a round in which a predetermined number of prizes has not been won and a round in which an over-winning has occurred, there is no sense of discomfort due to the values of the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2. be able to.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 19SH can be controlled to the jackpot gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an image display device 5. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a special variable winning ball device 7 that can be changed into an open state in which the game ball is easy to win and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a CPU 103 capable of executing a round game in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed from the closed state to the open state and then changed to the closed state when controlled to the big hit game state. .. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an effect control CPU 120 capable of executing an over-winning effect when an over-winning occurs in one round game. Then, the image display device 5 displays 20 SHK1 for displaying the number of prize balls given by the game ball entering the special variable winning ball device 7, and the acquisition for the total number of prize balls to be given in the jackpot game state. It is possible to display the planned number display 20SHK2. In addition, the image display device 5 can display the effect display 20SHEF that makes the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult when an over-winning occurs. Further, the image display device 5 updates the value of the effect display 20SHEF when the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is invisible or difficult to be seen by the effect display 20SHEF. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 starts the over-winning effect before the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display 20SHEF.

According to such a configuration, a sense of incongruity occurs when the value of the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated, as compared with the case where the value of the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated while the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 is visible. Can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes speakers 8L and 8R. Then, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the effect by the image display device 5 and the effect by the speakers 8L and 8R as the over-winning effect.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of the over-winning effect.

Further, as described above, when the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 7, the image display device 5 starts displaying the effect display 20SHEF in the display area close to the special variable winning ball device 7, and displays the effect. The 20SHEF is moved to make the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, the fact that the game ball has entered the special variable winning device 7 can be expressed by the display effect on the image display device 5, and the interest can be improved. Further, since the effect display 20SHEF makes not only the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 but also the acquisition number display 20SHK1 invisible or difficult, it is possible to more effectively suppress the occurrence of discomfort.

Further, as described above, the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are visible when the effect display 20SHEF is moving, and the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed. When the effect display 20SHEF reaches the area, it becomes invisible or difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, when the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area where the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed, the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 naturally come into view. Therefore, due to the attention paid to the effect display 20SHEF, it is possible to pay attention to the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 in the state before the value is updated.

Further, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 starts the over-winning effect before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquired number display 20SHK2 are displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in advance that an over-winning has occurred by executing the over-winning effect, so that a sense of incongruity may occur when the planned number of acquisitions display 20SHK2 is updated. It can be suppressed more effectively.

Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can set any of a plurality of types of set values "1" to "6" having different jackpot winning probabilities. Then, the image display device 5 can execute the over-winning effect in a manner of suggesting the set set value.

With such a configuration, attention can be raised to the over-winning effect.

Further, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 ends the over-winning effect after the display of the effect display 20SHEF is completed.

According to such a configuration, the updated value of the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 can be visually recognized while the over-winning effect continues, so that a sense of incongruity caused by the update of the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2. Can be suppressed more effectively.

(Modification example of feature 19SH)
The gaming machine related to the feature unit 19SH is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

For example, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. Even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, by executing such a power supply stop processing, the CPU 103 can play the game before the power failure after the power failure is restored. You can continue.

On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 does not back up various data for advancing the effect. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 cannot continue the effect based on the game information before the power failure after the power failure is restored.

For example, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like during the round game, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the effect corresponding to the round game after the power failure is restored. In that case, the effect control CPU 120 does not display the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 in the round game after the power failure is restored, or concretely such as "??? / ????" The acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed in a mode in which the value is not displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 does not display the effect display 20SHEF because the image display device 5 does not execute the effect corresponding to the round game even if a prize is generated in the round game after the power failure is restored. .. On the other hand, if it is possible to identify that the over-winning has occurred in the one-round round game after the power failure is restored, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the over-winning effect by the image display device 5, while the speakers 8L and 8R And the attacker lamp 9c can be used to produce an over-winning effect. The effect control CPU 120 can identify that an over-winning has occurred, for example, by an effect control command that notifies that the over-winning has occurred.

According to such a configuration, in a situation where the values of the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 cannot be confirmed after the power failure is restored, the effect display 20SHEF is not displayed so that a sense of incongruity does not occur. On the other hand, if an over-winning occurs, it is possible to notify that fact.

(Explanation of means related to feature 19SH)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 19SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.) and is displayed. Variable means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5 or the like), a first state in which the gaming medium is easy to win, and a second state in which the gaming medium is impossible or difficult to win. The winning means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a special variable winning ball device 7 that can be changed into an open state in which the game ball is easy to win and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win, etc.). When controlled to the advantageous state, a control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state (for example, pachinko). The gaming machine 1 is provided with a CPU 103 capable of executing a round game in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed from the closed state to the open state and then changed to the closed state when controlled to the jackpot gaming state). , A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect when more game media than a predetermined number win the variable winning means in the one round game (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a one round game. The display means is provided by the gaming medium winning the variable winning means, etc.). It is possible to display a first grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value and a second grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value to be granted in the advantageous state (for example, the image display device 5 can display the second grant amount display. , 20SHK1 indicating the number of winning balls given by the game ball entering the special variable winning ball device 7, and 20SHK2 displaying the number of expected winning balls related to the total number of winning balls scheduled to be given in the jackpot game state. When more than the predetermined number of gaming media wins the variable winning means, it is possible to display a specific display that makes the second grant amount display invisible or difficult (for example, displayable). The image display device 5 can display the effect display 20SHEF that makes the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult when an over-winning occurs), and the second grant amount display is visually recognized by the specific display. When it becomes impossible or difficult, the value of the second grant amount display is updated (for example, the image display device 5 is an effect table. (For example, updating the value of the effect display 20SHEF when the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 is invisible or difficult by the display 20SHEF), the specific effect executing means displays the second grant amount by the specific display. The specific effect is started before it becomes invisible or difficult (the effect control CPU 120 starts an over-winning effect before the expected number display 20SHK2 becomes invisible or difficult by the effect display 20SHEF, etc.). , Characterized by.

According to such a configuration, a sense of incongruity occurs when the value of the second grant amount display is updated, as compared with the case where the value of the second grant amount display is updated while the second grant amount display is visible. Can be suppressed.

(2) The gaming machine of the above (1) includes audio output means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes speakers 8L, 8R, etc.), and the specific effect executing means is described as the specific effect. It is possible to execute an effect by the display means and an effect by the audio output means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has an effect by the image display device 5 and an effect by the speakers 8L and 8R as an over-winning effect. Being feasible, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of the specific effect.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2), when the gaming medium wins the variable winning means, the display means starts displaying the specific display in a display area close to the variable winning means. Then, the specific display is moved to make the first grant amount display and the second grant amount display invisible or difficult (for example, in the image display device 5, the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 7). At that time, the display of the effect display 20SHEF is started in the display area close to the special variable winning ball device 7, and the effect display 20SHEF is moved to make the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see. Things etc.).

According to such a configuration, the fact that the game ball has entered the variable winning means can be expressed by the display effect in the display means, and the interest can be improved. Further, since not only the second grant amount display but also the first grant amount display becomes invisible or difficult due to the specific display, it is possible to more effectively suppress the occurrence of a sense of discomfort.

(4) In the gaming machine of the above (3), the first grant amount display and the second grant amount display are visible when the specific display is moving, and the first grant amount display and the second grant amount display. When the specific display reaches the display area where the second grant amount display is displayed, it becomes invisible or difficult (for example, in the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2, the effect display 20SHEF is moving. Sometimes it is visible, and when the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed, it becomes invisible or difficult to see, etc.).

According to such a configuration, when the specific display approaches the display area where the first grant amount display and the second grant amount display are displayed, the first grant amount display and the second grant amount display are naturally visible. Therefore, due to the attention to the specific display, it is possible to pay attention to the first grant amount display and the second grant amount display in the state before the value is updated.

(5) In the gaming machine of the above (4), the specific effect executing means said the specific display before reaching the display area where the first grant amount display and the second grant amount display are displayed. Start a specific effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 starts an over-winning effect before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed). ..

According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in advance that more game media than a predetermined number have won the variable winning means by executing the specific effect, so that the second grant amount display is updated. It is possible to more effectively suppress the occurrence of discomfort at the time.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above, a setting means (for example, a pachinko game) capable of setting any one of a plurality of types of setting values having different advantages for the player. The machine 1 includes a plurality of types of setting values "1" to "6" having different jackpot winning probabilities), and the specific effect executing means is the setting. The specific effect can be executed in a manner suggesting a set value set by the means (for example, the image display device 5 can execute an over-winning effect in a manner suggesting a set value set, etc.). ..

With such a configuration, attention to a specific effect can be increased.

(7) In the gaming machine of the above (5), the specific effect executing means ends the specific effect after the display of the specific display is completed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect display 20SHEF. After finishing, ending the over-winning production, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the updated value of the second grant amount display can be visually recognized while the specific effect is continued, so that a sense of incongruity due to the update of the second grant amount display can be felt. , Can be suppressed more effectively.

(Another example of transition to a time saving state)
Further, in each of the above-mentioned feature portions and each modification, the mode in which the transition to the time saving state is always performed via the big hit state or the small hit state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is operated is illustrated. , The present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the time saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the time saving state may be shifted without operating the special variable winning ball device 7.

As the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be a part of the out-of-time symbols or a part of the small hit symbols.

In addition, when performing a lottery process related to the derivation display of the time-saving symbol, the lottery may be executed by using a dedicated random number for the time-saving symbol lottery in these lottery processes, or a lottery random number of a missed symbol or a big hit symbol. The lottery may be performed using other lottery random numbers such as the lottery random number of the above, the lottery random number of the small hit symbol, the random number for determining the big hit lottery, and the lottery random number of the fall lottery.

Further, these time-saving symbols may be a plurality of types of symbols, and may be used in combination with a combination of symbols displayed as other symbols such as a small hit symbol or a missed symbol. In this case, it may be determined whether or not the time saving state is changed depending on the small hit symbol used together. However, if a time-saving symbol is won, the presence or absence of a transition to the time-saving state will not be drawn by lottery, and the number of time-savings will not be drawn.

Further, in the case of drawing a time-saving symbol and the set value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the set value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol in all the set values. Are the same. However, the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special figure and the second special figure.

In addition, regarding the timing of random number acquisition when drawing a lottery of time-saving symbols, regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used, the timing at the time of winning a prize at the starting port is set. good.

In addition, regarding the winning when the time saving symbol is drawn, the lottery result by the dedicated random number is used as the winning value when the dedicated random number is used, and when the small hit symbol random number is used for the time saving symbol lottery, the specific small hit symbol is used. When the random number value is used as the winning value and the random number for the falling lottery judgment value is used for the lottery of the time saving symbol, the random number for the falling lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. A time saving area may be provided inside the device 7, and the passing of the game ball through the time saving area may be the winning of the time saving symbol.

In addition, in the case where the lottery of the time saving symbol is performed using the structure, when the small hit symbol also uses the time saving symbol, the variable display number of the time saving state is not changed depending on the presence or absence of passing through the time saving area.

In addition, regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol lottery is performed, when the time-saving symbol lottery uses the missing symbol random number, the specific missing symbol random number value is used as the winning value, and when the jackpot symbol random number is used for the time-saving symbol lottery, it is specified. The jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, when these random values are used as winning values, the performance other than the jackpot probability differs depending on the setting, so that the set value can be changed only if it cannot be changed.

Further, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be the timing after the jackpot determination. It should be noted that the lottery of the time-saving symbols is not executed in the time-saving state or the high-probability time regardless of the random number value used in the lottery, and is executed only in the low-probability low-base state. However, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed in the state where the time-saving state is already set, it may be determined for each gaming machine regardless of whether the time-saving number of times is reset or the lottery is not performed.

Further, regarding the number of time reductions when the time reduction symbol is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of time reductions according to the winning value and the game state. In addition, the conditions for granting the time reduction can be made different for each time reduction symbol.

Further, when the number of time reductions differs depending on the time reduction symbol, the time reduction symbol distribution lottery can be changed between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Further, even when the same time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time saving times given may be different depending on the game state at that time. However, it is necessary that the game state is predetermined.

In addition, the lottery result of "0 times of time saving" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving symbol in the low probability low base state.

Further, the derivation lottery for the time-saving end symbol may be executed, and the number of time reductions may be set to the number of times after the time reduction start until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. That is, in principle, the number of time reductions may not be set and may be unlimited.

Further, the number of time reductions and the granting condition may be different between the time reduction state controlled by the time reduction symbol and the time reduction state controlled by the occurrence of a big hit.

Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing of being controlled to the time-saving state is the time when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where the small hit symbol random number is used for the lottery of the time saving symbol, when the small hit is won and the time saving state is entered, the end time of the small hit operation is controlled to the time saving state.

Further, in the case of a lottery using the structure, the timing controlled to the time saving state is the timing at the end of the operation of the structure in the gaming state in which the structure is operated.

Further, in the case of a gaming machine controlled to a high-probability low-base state for a predetermined variable display number after a big hit, the high-probability low-base state is set when the game hall is opened, and the high-probability low-base state is the specified number of times. After the variable display of is executed and finished, the time saving state may be controlled.

In addition, when the time saving limiter function is installed and the time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time saving limiter is updated. Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol may be set to a time different from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the description below but by the scope of claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.) and is displayed. Means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an image display device 5 and the like), and the display area of the display means is a first display area and an area around the first display area. A second display area narrower than the first display area is included (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and the first display area 20SH51 and is the first display area. The display means can display a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area (including a second display area 20SH 52 narrower than the 20SH 51, etc.). For example, the image display device 5 can display a background image corresponding to a jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52), and the background image in the second display area. It is possible to display a grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the granted gaming value on the front side (for example, the image display device 5 is a prize ball given to the front side of the background image in the second display area 20SH52. (The acquisition number display 20SHK regarding the number can be displayed, etc.), at least in the first display area, as a notification display notifying that the amount of the game value to be given has reached a predetermined amount on the front side of the background image. , A first notification display for notifying that the amount of game value given has reached the first predetermined amount, and a second notification display for notifying that the amount of game value given has reached the second predetermined amount. It is possible to display (for example, the image display device 5 notifies the front side of the background image that the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "Kiriban" at least in the first display area 20SH51. As the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display of "1000 over" when the number of prize balls granted in the jackpot gaming state reaches "1000", and is granted in the jackpot gaming state. When the number of prize balls reaches "2000", it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display of "2000 over", etc.), and the grant amount display is given a gaming value in the advantageous state. It is updated every time (for example, the acquired number display 20SHK is updated every time the game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the big hit game state, etc.). The intellectual display ends when a specific period elapses from the start of the display (for example, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH ends the display when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the display, etc. ), The characters used for the notification display are characters having a size larger than the characters used for the grant amount display (for example, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKK are from the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK). The characters used for the grant amount display and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed (for example, acquisition number display). The characters used in the 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed, etc.), and the specific characters used in the grant amount display are the specific areas. The background image is invisible (for example, the specific character used in the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible from the specific area, etc.), and the specific character used in the notification display is the above. The background image can be visually recognized from a specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the acquired number notification display 20SHKH can be visually recognized from the specific area, etc.).
Moreover,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls the progress of the game, and
It is provided with an effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes an effect based on an effect control command) capable of executing an effect based on information from the game control means.
The game control means
Determining means for determining the advantageous state (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) and
A determination means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S213) for determining that the advantageous state is obtained before the determination of the determination means, and
A state control means that can control a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) and
Information transmitting means (for example, effect control) capable of transmitting a plurality of types of information including determination result information that can be specified to be controlled to the advantageous state when the determination means determines that the advantageous state is obtained. CPU 103 that sends commands, etc.), including
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result ( For example, the process of step 059AKS025 is executed),
The determination means can determine that the state control means will be in the special state before the state control means controls the special state (for example, the process of step 059AKS001 is executed).
The information transmitting means can transmit special information that can be specified to be controlled to the special state when the determination means determines to be in the special state (for example, designating a display result of "loss (time reduction)"). Commands can be sent, etc.),
The effect executing means is
When the determination result information is received, the look-ahead effect can be executed based on the determination result information (for example, the process of step S161 can be executed).
When the determination result information is received after receiving the special information, the execution of the look-ahead effect based on the determination result information is restricted (for example, when it is determined Yes in step 059AKS082, the processing of step 059AKS084 and step S1304). For example), gaming machines.

According to such a configuration, the display including the specific character can be suitably displayed in relation to the background image. Further, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

That is, the background image is invisible from the specific area surrounded by the lines forming the characters, and the characters used for the notification display are characters having a size larger than the characters used for the grant amount display and the specific area. Since the background image can be visually recognized from the above, the amount of grant can be displayed in small characters but can always be easily confirmed, while the notification display can display the fact that the predetermined amount has been reached in large characters without hiding the background image. The effect executing means is controlled to a special state in order to limit the execution of the look-ahead effect based on the determination result information when the determination result information is received after receiving the special information that can be specified to be controlled to the special state. For example, it is known in advance by executing the look-ahead effect that the judgment result information to be judged after that is the judgment result that the special state ends, and the game interest is rather lowered by the look-ahead effect. You can avoid the situation. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which it is easy for the player to grasp the amount of the value to be given for the game when it is installed in the game hall and it is easy to recognize that the predetermined amount has been reached, and the interest in the game is not easily deteriorated.

Further, the grant amount display and the look-ahead notice may be associated with each other. For example, when the pre-reading notice is executed based on the pre-reading determination, the size of the characters displayed in the grant amount display and the display mode of the formed lines may be different. By doing so, it becomes possible to execute the look-ahead notice using the grant amount display, and the interest is improved.

Further, as another example of a gaming machine capable of improving the interest, a variable display is performed, and when a specific display result is displayed as the variable display result, the gaming machine can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example). Pachinko game machine 1 etc.)
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls the progress of the game, and
It is provided with an effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes an effect based on an effect control command) capable of executing an effect based on information from the game control means.
The game control means
Determining means for determining the advantageous state (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) and
A determination means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S213) for determining that the advantageous state is obtained before the determination of the determination means, and
A state control means that can control a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) and
Information transmitting means (for example, effect control) capable of transmitting a plurality of types of information including determination result information that can be specified to be controlled to the advantageous state when the determination means determines that the advantageous state is obtained. CPU 103 that sends commands, etc.), including
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result ( For example, the process of step 059AKS025 is executed),
The determination means can determine that the state control means will be in the special state before the state control means controls the special state (for example, the process of step 059AKS001 is executed).
The information transmitting means can transmit special information that can be specified to be controlled to the special state when the determination means determines to be in the special state (for example, designating a display result of "loss (time reduction)"). Commands can be sent, etc.),
The effect executing means is
When the determination result information is received, the look-ahead effect can be executed based on the determination result information (for example, the process of step S161 can be executed).
When the determination result information is received after receiving the special information, the execution of the look-ahead effect based on the determination result information is restricted (for example, when it is determined Yes in step 059AKS082, the processing of step 059AKS084 and step S1304). For example, a gaming machine. A form example of this gaming machine will be described below as another form example.

(Explanation of feature 059AK)
Next, the gaming machine in the feature unit 059AK of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-1 to 13-35. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 059AK of this embodiment is not limited to the jackpot gaming state, and the time saving control is performed (the time saving state is set) even when the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result. As for the display result of the special figure game, the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed in both the normal state and the time saving state, but in the time saving state, even if the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed, the time saving control is not newly performed. On the other hand, as for the decorative symbol, different symbols are stopped and displayed in the normal state and the time saving state. Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 059AK having such features will be described. The same parts as those described in the above basic explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 13-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 059AK of this embodiment, showing the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol changes, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display. In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbol includes one in which a plurality of LEDs are sequentially lit or blinked, and as a display result, a predetermined LED lighting combination may be displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display). included.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening that is always maintained in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81. The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory. Further, in the time saving state, the control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is executed, and the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved. Then, in the time-saving state, if a so-called right-handed hit is performed to launch the game ball into the game area on the right side of the player so that the game ball is won in the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. good.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82, and forms a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player. In the big hit game state, a so-called right-handed hit that launches the game ball into the game area on the right side may be performed so that the game ball is won in the big prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 13-1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Below the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 13-1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. In addition to the upper plate, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (ball hitting plate) on which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A.

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, stick controller 31A and push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 13-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101 of FIG. When the start winning prize determination process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is on (). Step S1201). When it is determined that the first start port switch 22A is on (step S2101; Yes) because it is determined that the first start port switch 22A is on in the switch processing, the CPU 103 sets the first special drawing. It is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved stored number of the special figure game used, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S1202). At this time, the CPU 103 is the first stored value of the first special figure reserved storage number counter (counter for counting the first special figure reserved storage number) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.). It suffices if the first special figure reserved storage number can be specified by reading the special figure reserved storage number count value. When it is determined in step S1202 that the number of reserved first special figure is not the upper limit value (step S1202; No), the CPU 103 stores the start port buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control buffer setting unit, etc.). The starting port buffer value, which is a value, is set to "1" (step S1203).

When it is determined in step S1201 that the first start port switch 22A is off (step S1201; No), or when it is determined in step S1202 that the number of reserved first special figures has reached the upper limit value (step S1202; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second start opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is on (step S1204). When it is determined that the second start port switch 22B is on in the switch processing, for example, the second start port switch 22B is determined to be on (step S1204; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the second special figure. It is determined whether or not the second special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved stored number of the special figure game used, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S1205). At this time, the CPU 103 is a second stored value of a second special figure reserved storage number counter (counter for counting the second special figure reserved storage number) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.). It suffices if the second special figure reserved storage number can be specified by reading the special figure reserved storage number count value. When it is determined in step S1205 that the number of reserved second special figure is not the upper limit value (step S1205; No), the CPU 103 sets the start port buffer value to "2" (step S1206). When it is determined that the second start port switch 22B is not on (step S1204; No), or when it is determined that the second special figure reserved storage number is the upper limit value (step S1205; Yes), the CPU 103 determines. Start The winning prize determination process ends.

After executing either the process of step S1203 or S1206, the CPU 103 updates so as to add 1 to the special figure hold storage count value according to the start port buffer value (step S207). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the 1st special figure hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the 2nd special figure hold memory count value is added. Add 1 In this way, the 1st special figure reserved memory count value is incremented by 1 when the game ball enters the 1st start winning opening and the 1st start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the 1st special figure is satisfied. Updated to (increment). In addition, the second special figure reserved memory count value is incremented by 1 when the game ball enters the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to (increment). At this time, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.), is updated so as to be added by 1 (step S1208).

After executing the process of step S1208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning prize (step S1209). As an example, in the process of step S1209, among the numerical data updated by the random number counter or the like provided in the predetermined area (game control counter setting unit or the like) of the random number circuit 104 or the RAM 102, the random number for determining the special figure display result is determined. Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR1, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted. Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored as hold data by being set at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S1210). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the hold data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit. At this time, when the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit, the CPU 103 can control the first hold indicator 25A to specify the number of the first special figure hold storage added by one. The first hold indicator 25A may be made to perform such a display (for example, increase the number of LEDs lit by one). When the hold data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit, the CPU 103 controls the second hold indicator 25B to display a display capable of specifying the number of the second special figure hold storage added by one. The second hold indicator 25B may be made to perform (for example, increase the number of LEDs lit by one).

The first special figure reservation storage unit is a special figure game (first special figure game) in which the game ball enters the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the first starting winning is generated, but the game has not been started yet. The hold data of the special figure game) using the first special figure in the symbol display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order with the first starting winning opening (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number, and based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the entry of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 are stored as pending data. Is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. In this way, the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result in this special figure game. Hold that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is determined to control the jackpot game state based on (special figure display result), and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, reach effect). It becomes memory information.

It should be noted that the hold number of the first special figure hold storage unit and the display position of the hold display symbol (controlled by the effect control board 12 side) basically correspond to each other. Therefore, when the hold data is stored in the first special figure hold storage unit, the hold display symbol is displayed at the display position corresponding to the hold number associated with the hold data. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number "1", the hold display symbol is displayed at the first display position on the leftmost side of the first hold display unit 5HL. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number "2", the hold display symbol is displayed at the second display position located on the right side of the first display position of the first hold display unit 5HL. do.

The second special figure holding storage unit is a special figure game (second) that has not been started yet, although the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B and the second starting winning is generated. The reserved data of the special figure game) using the second special figure in the special symbol display device 4B is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order with the second starting winning opening (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number, and based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the entry of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 or the like are set as pending data, and the number of them is Store until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. In this way, the hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result in this special figure game. Hold that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is determined to control the jackpot game state based on (special figure display result), and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, reach effect). It becomes memory information.

The hold number of the second special figure hold storage unit and the display position of the hold display symbol (controlled by the effect control board 12 side) basically correspond to each other. Therefore, when the hold data is stored in the second special figure hold storage unit, the hold display symbol is displayed at the display position corresponding to the hold number associated with the hold data. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number "1", the hold display symbol is displayed at the first display position on the leftmost side of the second hold display unit 5HR. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number "2", the hold display symbol is displayed at the second display position located on the right side of the first display position of the second hold display unit 5HR. do.

After executing the process of step S1210, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting the start port winning designation command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 (step S1211). After that, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting the hold storage number notification command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 (step S1212).

Subsequently, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number value determination process (step S1213). As described above, the winning random number value determination process is a process of determining the starting winning value, and the random number value is based on the random number values MR1 and MR3 of the random number values MR1 to 3 extracted in step S1209. This is a process for determining whether or not the variable display result of the variable display of the execution target is a “big hit” or a “small hit” and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (see FIG. 10-5). After that, the CPU 103 determines whether the start port buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S1214). At this time, if it is determined that the start port buffer value is "2" (step S1214; "2"), the CPU 103 clears the start port buffer and initializes the stored value to "0" (). Step S1215), the start winning determination process is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start port buffer value is "1" (step S1214; "1"), the CPU 103 clears the start port buffer and initializes the stored value to "0". (Step S1216), the process proceeds to step S1204. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 13-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S1213 of FIG. 13-2 as the winning random number value determination process. In this embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is set as a "big hit" or a "small hit" by the special symbol normal processing, and the big hit game. A decision is made as to whether or not to control the state or the small hit game state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, in the winning random number value determination process, the game ball is extracted at the starting winning timing detected at the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) at this timing. Judgment as to whether or not the variable display result of the variable display of the execution target of the randomized value (random value extracted in the process of step S1209) is "big hit" or "small hit", and variable display of the decorative symbol. It determines which fluctuation pattern will be (so-called "look-ahead"). As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started (before the start condition of the special symbol game is satisfied), the special symbol display result is "big hit" or It is pre-read that it will be a "small hit" and that the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be the predetermined display mode, and based on this pre-reading result, the effect control board 12 will hold the display by the effect control CPU 120 or the like. The display mode and the like can be determined.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 13-3, the CPU 103 first, for example, a time saving flag (a flag that turns on when the time saving state is set) provided in a predetermined area (game control flag setting unit or the like) of the RAM 102. ) And the state of the probabilistic flag (the flag that turns on when the probabilistic change state is reached) to identify the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S351). The CPU 103 determines whether or not the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the jackpot gaming state by checking the value of the special figure process flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control flag control unit, etc.). To identify. For example, when the value of the special figure process flag is "4" to "7", it may be specified that the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the jackpot gaming state.

Following the process of step S351, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the specified gaming state is in the jackpot gaming state (step S352). When it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (step S352; No), the CPU 103 further determines whether or not the high base is in the high open control accompanying the time reduction control in the probability variation state or the time reduction state (step S353). ). When it is determined that the base is high (step S353; Yes), or when it is determined that the big hit is in the process of step S352 (step S352; Yes), the CPU 103 has a start port buffer value of "2". It is determined whether or not there is (step S354). When it is determined that the start port buffer value is not "2" (step S354; No), the CPU 103 makes a setting for limiting the determination at the time of winning (step S356).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the start port buffer value is "2" (step S354; Yes), or when it is determined that the high base is not in the process of step S353 (step S353; No), the CPU 103 is the third. The special figure display result is determined from the 1 special figure display result determination table or the 2nd special figure display result determination table according to the start port buffer value ("1" or "2") and the current gaming state. A table for determining the figure display result is selected (step S355).

Following the process of step S355, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range (step S357). The CPU 103 compares, for example, the individual determined values included in the jackpot determination range with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted by the process of step S1209 shown in FIG. 13-2 one by one. It may be determined whether or not there is a determined value that matches the random number value MR1. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating a minimum value (lower limit value) and a maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value included in the jackpot determination range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot determination range. By comparing, it may be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, if it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "big hit" (big hit start determination). can.

In the process of step S357, for example, the CPU 103 may read the random number value MR1 stored in the special figure reservation storage unit in step S1210, and perform the above determination using the read random number value MR1. Further, the CPU 103 holds the random number value MR1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (an area other than the special figure reservation storage unit) or a storage area of the CPU 103 separately from the step S1210, and makes the above determination based on the held random number value. May be done. This also applies to the random number value MR3 described later. As described above, the random number value used in the winning random number value determination process does not have to be the random number value stored in the special figure holding storage unit.

When it is determined in the process of step S357 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S357; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S358). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the jackpot type determination table. The CPU 103 determines which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data.

Following the process of step S358, the CPU 103 selects a jackpot variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 13-11) prepared in advance by storing it in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 and sets it in the table to be used (step 13-11). S359). The jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table is a table for determining a variable display fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result becomes a “big hit”, and a determination value to be compared with the random number value MR3 is assigned to each fluctuation pattern.

When it is determined in the process of step S357 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S357; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (step). S360). The CPU 103 executes the same processing as in the case of the big hit determination range for the determination value assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" in the special figure display result determination table selected by the process of step S305. , It suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the small hit determination range.

When it is determined that the small hit is within the small hit determination range (step S360; Yes), the small hit fluctuation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance (see FIG. 13-11 (B)). Is selected and set in the usage table (step S362). The small hit fluctuation pattern determination table is a table for determining the variable display fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result is "small hit", and a determination value to be compared with the random number value MR3 is assigned to each fluctuation pattern. ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit is not within the small hit determination range (step S360; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within the predetermined time saving determination range (step). 059AKS001). The CPU 103 executes the same process as in the case of the jackpot determination range for the determination value assigned to the special figure display result of "loss (time reduction)" in the special figure display result determination table selected by the process of step S355. Therefore, it suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the time saving determination range. Although the special figure display result of "loss (time reduction)" is "loss", it is a variable display result in which the time reduction symbol is stopped and displayed, and the time reduction control is performed from the variable display performed after the stop display is performed. show.

When it is determined that the time saving is within the range of the time saving determination range (step 059AKS001; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the time saving type based on the random number value MR2 (step 059AKS002). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the time saving type determination table data from the time saving type determination table shown in FIG. 13-7. The CPU 103 determines which of the plurality of types the time saving type is determined by referring to the selected time saving type determination table data.

Following the process of step 059AKS002, the CPU 103 prepares a table for determining the loss variation pattern at the time of turning on the time saving start flag, which will be described later, prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance (see FIGS. 13-12 (A) and 13-12 (D)). Is selected and set in the usage table (step 059AKS002A). The time saving start flag on time loss fluctuation pattern determination table is a table for determining the variation pattern of the variable display in which the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed although the variable display result is "missing", and the random number value MR3 is used for each fluctuation pattern. The decision value to be compared with is assigned. In step 059AKS002A, one of the time saving start flag on time loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13-12 (A) and the time saving start flag on time loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13-12 (D) is selected according to the time saving type. do it.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving is not within the time saving determination range (step 059AKS001; No), the time saving start flag off time loss fluctuation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance (FIG. 13-12 (FIG. 13-12). B)) is selected and set in the usage table (step 059AKS002B).

After executing any of step S309, step S312, step 059AKS002A, and step 059AKS002B, the CPU 103 is set in the use table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted in step S1209. Refer to any of the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table, small hit fluctuation pattern determination table, loss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time reduction start flag is on, and loss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time reduction start flag is off, and set the determination value to match the random number MR3. The assigned fluctuation pattern is determined (step S363). The CPU 103 determines the variation pattern by, for example, comparing the individual determination values assigned to each variation pattern with the random number value MR3 one by one to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR3. Alternatively, the CPU 103 sets a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value assigned to each fluctuation pattern, and the CPU 103 sets the random value MR3 and the minimum value of the determination value. Or, the fluctuation pattern may be determined by comparing with the maximum value.

After executing any of the processes of steps S356 and S363, the CPU 103 sets the transmission setting of the start winning command according to the determination results of step S358, step 059AKS002, and step S363 (step S364), and the winning time disorder. The numerical judgment process is terminated. The start winning command is composed of a starting opening winning designation command, a special figure hold storage number designation command, a symbol judgment result designation command, and a variation pattern judgment result designation command. When the start port buffer value is "1", the first start port prize designation command, the first special figure hold storage number designation command, the symbol judgment result specification command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation are used as start win commands. Set the command and send. When the start port buffer value is "2", the second start opening prize designation command, the second special figure hold storage number designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation are used as the start win prize command. Set the command and send. The command set for transmission is transmitted in the command control process.

The 1st special figure hold storage number specification command and the 2nd special figure hold storage number specification command to be set for transmission are commands for specifying the current 1st special figure hold storage number and 2nd special figure hold storage number (to the storage number). The command including the corresponding EXT data) may be specified, and the number of special figure reserved storage to be specified may be specified by the count value of the first special figure reserved storage number counter or the second special figure reserved storage number counter. When the determination result in step S357 is within the jackpot determination range (step S357; Yes), the symbol specification command to be set for transmission is a command that specifies that the determination result of the variable display result is "big hit" (to "big hit"). A command that includes the corresponding EXT data), and when the determination result in step S357 is within the small hit determination range (step S360; Yes), a command that specifies that the determination result of the variable display result is "small hit" ("small hit"). A command including EXT data corresponding to "small hit"), and when the judgment result of step 059AKS001 is within the time saving determination range (step 059AKS001; Yes), the judgment result of the variable display result is "missing (time saving)". When the command is specified (a command that includes EXT data corresponding to "loss (time reduction)") and the determination result of step 059AKS001 is not within the time reduction determination range (step S360; No), the determination result of the variable display result is "loss". It is a command to specify that there is (a command including EXT data corresponding to "loss"), and when the determination result in step S354 is the start port buffer value = 1 (step S354; No), the determination at the start winning is performed. It may be a command that specifies that it is "no judgment" (a command that includes EXT data corresponding to "no judgment"). The variation pattern determination result specification command to be set for transmission is a command for specifying a variation pattern that is the determination result determined in step S363 (a command including EXT data corresponding to the variation pattern that is the determination result), and the determination result in step S354 is When the start port buffer value = 1 (step S354; No), a command (a command including EXT data corresponding to "no judgment") that specifies that the judgment at the time of starting winning is not performed is "no judgment". do it.

In the winning random number value determination process, as described above, regarding the variable display corresponding to the random number values MR1 to 3 extracted in step S1209 this time, the variable display result of the variable display (special figure game) is "big hit" or "small". Whether or not there is a "hit" or "loss (time reduction)" and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (see FIG. 13-10) are determined, and so-called look-ahead is performed. In this process, the determination is made based on the current gaming state, and the determination is not made based on the gaming state when the variable display is actually executed. Therefore, the determination is not always accurate, but to some extent. Variable display results and fluctuation patterns can be predicted with accuracy. Further, in the winning random number value determination process, the start is started by the process of step S354 based on the case where it is determined that the big hit is being made in the process of step S352 or the time reduction control is being performed in the process of step S353. It is determined whether or not the mouth buffer value is "2". At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" and not "2", the process proceeds to step S364 without executing the process such as step S355, and the determination at the time of starting winning is not performed. In this way, when the high opening control accompanying the time saving control is performed or when the big hit game state is performed, each of the above is based on the occurrence of the start prize (first start prize) due to the game ball entering the first start prize opening. Limit the judgment so that it is not made. As a result, when the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, and the time reduction control is in progress or the jackpot game state is in effect, the first start prize is won. It is possible to ensure the soundness of the game by limiting the pre-reading based on the above.

FIG. 13-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 13-4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure hold storage number is “0” (step S1231). The second special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step S1231, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the RAM 102 may be read, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

When the number of the second special figure hold storage is other than "0" in step S1231 (step S1231; No), the hold stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B corresponding to the hold number "1". As the data, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S1232). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step S1232, for example, by subtracting 1 from the second reserved storage number count value and updating, the second special figure holding storage number is updated so as to be subtracted by 1, and the second special figure holding storage is updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the part 151B is shifted upward one entry at a time. (Step S1233). Further, in the process of step S1233, the RAM 102 may be updated so as to subtract 1 from the total hold storage count value stored in the total hold storage counter. At this time, the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step S1234).

When the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in step S1231 (step S1231; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (step S1235). The first special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step S1235, the RAM 102 may read the first hold storage count value stored by the first hold storage counter, and determine whether or not the read value is “0”. As described above, the process of step S1235 is executed when the second special figure reserved storage number is determined to be "0" in step S1231, and the first special figure reserved storage number is "0". Judge whether or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to the one that is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, for example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start prizes are generated is provided, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It is only necessary to be able to determine.

When the number of first special figure hold storage is other than "0" in step S1235 (step S235; No), the hold stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A corresponding to the hold number "1". As the data, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S1236). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step S1236, for example, by subtracting 1 from the first reserved storage number count value and updating, the first special figure reserved storage number is updated so as to be subtracted by 1, and the first special figure reserved storage is updated. The hold data indicated by the random number values MR1 and MR2 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the unit 151A is shifted upward one entry at a time. (Step S1237). Further, in the process of step S1237, the RAM 102 may be updated so as to subtract 1 from the total hold storage count value stored in the total hold storage counter. At this time, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S1238).

After executing either of the processes of steps S1234 and S1238, the table used for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is "big hit" or "missing" is changed. The special figure display result determination table corresponding to the special figure designation buffer value is selected and set (step S1239). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 13-5 (A) is set in the used table. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 13-5 (B) is set in the used table. Further, the CPU 103 may select the table data for determining the special figure display result corresponding to the current gaming state.

The first special symbol display result determination table displays the variable display result before the definite special symbol, which is the variable display result, is derived and displayed in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. Whether or not to control the big hit game state as "big hit", whether or not to control the variable display result to the small hit game state as "small hit", and the variable display result as "loss (time reduction)" and then variable It is a table referred to for determining whether or not to control from the display to the time saving state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. The second special symbol display result determination table displays the variable display result before the definite special symbol, which is the variable display result, is derived and displayed in the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Whether or not to control the big hit game state as "big hit", whether or not to control the variable display result to the small hit game state as "small hit", and the variable display result as "loss (time reduction)" and then variable It is a table referred to for determining whether or not to control from the display to the time saving state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is determined according to whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability variation state (high probability state). A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR1 for determination is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit", "small hit", "loss (time reduction)", and "loss". In the second special figure display result determination table, a random number value for determining the special figure display result is determined according to whether the game state is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability variation state (high probability state). Numerical values (decision values) to be compared with MR1 are assigned to the special figure display results of "big hit", "loss (time reduction)", and "loss".

In the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result has the special figure display result as a "big hit". It is the decision data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the jackpot game state and whether or not to control the special figure display result to the time saving state from the next variable display as "loss (time saving)". In each of the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is in the probability change state (high probability state), it is higher than when it is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Many decision values are assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probabilistic state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" as compared with the case of the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Controlling to a state increases the probability of being determined. That is, in each of the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state, it is a big hit as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of being determined to control the gaming state is high. In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, the second special figure display result determination table sets the special figure display result as "loss (time reduction)" from the next variable display. The decision data is assigned so that the probability of being decided to control the time saving state is high. Therefore, in the variable display corresponding to the hold of the second special figure stored at the end of the time saving state, the ratio of the special figure display result being "missing (time saving)" is high.

In the setting example of the first special figure display result determination table, the determination value in a predetermined range (value in the range of "30000" to "30350") is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". On the other hand, in the setting example of the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the determination value is not assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". With such a setting, the variable display result is determined based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. In the case where the variable display result is determined based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, the special figure display result is displayed. The ratio determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" can be different.

In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state, so for example, a time saving state (low accuracy high base state) or a probability change Frequent small hit game states in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball in a game state where the game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B, such as a state (high accuracy and high base state). By avoiding this, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the extension of the game. In the second special figure display result determination table, a determination value in a predetermined range different from the setting in the first special figure display result determination table may be assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". .. For example, in the second special figure display result determination table, a smaller determination value than in the first special figure display result determination table may be assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". In this way, even if the ratio determined to control the small hit game state is lower in the high base state such as the time saving state or the probability change state than in the low base state such as the normal state or the probability change state without time reduction. good. Alternatively, regardless of whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the special figure display result may be determined by referring to the common special figure display result determination table.

Following the process of step S1239 shown in FIG. 13-4, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is subjected to "big hit", "small hit", and "loss (loss). Compared with the decision value assigned to each special figure display result of "time reduction)" and "loss", the special figure display result is either "big hit", "small hit", "loss (time reduction)" or "loss". (Step S1240).

Since the table data for determining the special figure display result corresponding to the current game state is selected in step S1239, in the process of step S1240, the game state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is in a probable change state. Whether or not the special figure display result is a "big hit" is determined using different determination data depending on whether or not the result is. For example, when the game state when the variable display of the special figure game is started is the normal state or the time saving state, the game state is the normal state in the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table. Alternatively, the table data corresponding to the case of the time saving state is usually selected as the determination data, and the special figure display result corresponding to the random number value MR1 is determined with reference to this. On the other hand, when the game state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is the probability change state, the game state is the probability change state in the first special figure display result determination table or the second special figure display result determination table. The table data corresponding to the case of is selected as the special determination data, and the special figure display result corresponding to the random number value MR1 is determined with reference to this.

After determining the special figure display result in step S1240, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "big hit" (step S1241). Then, when it is determined to be a "big hit" (step S1241; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the on state (step S1242). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 13-6 is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step S1243).

The jackpot type determination table determines the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit". It is a table referenced by. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variation) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second special symbol). There are multiple types of numerical values (decision values) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, such as "non-probability variation", "probability variation", and "probability", depending on whether the game is a special figure game using the symbol display device 4B). It is assigned to the jackpot type of.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table, the assignment of the determination value for the jackpot type of "probability" is different depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. That is, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the determined value in a predetermined range (the value in the range of "82" to "99") is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability", while the variable special figure. When is the second special figure, the determined value is not assigned to the jackpot type of "probability". With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B Therefore, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable" can be made different. In particular, in a special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is set to "probability" and controlled to the short-term open jackpot state. In a game state in which a game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by 6B, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of a short-term open jackpot state in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the game interest due to the extension of the game. ..

Even when the variable special figure is the second special figure, a determination value in a predetermined range different from the case where the variable special figure is the first special figure is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability". good. For example, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, a smaller decision value may be assigned to the jackpot type of "probability" as compared with the case where the variable special figure is the first special figure. Alternatively, regardless of whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data.

By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in step S1243 shown in FIG. 13-4, the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random number value MR2 stored in the variable random number buffer can be changed to “non-probability”. It is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type should be, depending on which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type of "probability change" and "probability" is matched (step S1244).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step S1244, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be set to either a time-saving state or a probabilistic state in which the player has a higher advantage than the time-saving state. It will be decided before the definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the storage value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the RAM 102 (step S1245), the determined jackpot type is stored. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probability", the jackpot type buffer value may be set to "0", if it is "probability variation", it may be set to "1", and if it is "probability", it may be set to "2".

If it is determined in step S1241 that it is not a "big hit" (step S1241; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" (step S1246). Then, when it is determined to be a "small hit" (step S1246; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the on state (step S1247).

If it is determined in step S1246 that it is not a "small hit" (step S1246; No), the special figure display result is "loss (time reduction)" (hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as "time reduction"). It is determined whether or not there is (step 059AKS003). Then, when it is determined to be "time saving" (step 059AKS003; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the time saving type shown in FIG. 13-7 as a table to be used for determining the time saving type to any of a plurality of types. The table is selected and set, and the time saving type is determined based on the random number value MR2 in the same manner as in the case of determining the jackpot type (step 059AKS004).

The time saving type determination table shown in FIG. 13-7 is based on MR2, which is common with the random number value for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the time saving state as "loss (time saving)". It is a table referred to for determining the time saving type to one of a plurality of types. In the time saving type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variation) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second special symbol). Depending on whether it is a special figure game by the symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the time saving type is a plurality of types of big hit types such as "time saving A" to "time saving D". Is assigned to. As shown in the figure, in the feature unit 059AK of this embodiment, when the special symbol in which the variable display (variation) is performed in the special figure game is the first special figure, "time saving A" or "time saving B" When the special symbol whose variable display (variation) is performed in the special figure game is the second special figure, it is determined to be the time saving type of "time saving C" or "time saving D". "Time saving A" and "time saving C" are time saving types that are controlled to the time saving state while the special figure game is played 100 times. "Time saving B" is a time saving type that is controlled to a time saving state while the special figure game is played 50 times. "Time saving D" is a time saving type that is controlled to a time saving state while the special figure game is played 20 times.

After executing the process of step 059AKS004 of FIG. 13-4, the CPU 103 corresponds to the time saving type determined in the step 059AKS004, for example, the time saving type buffer value which is the storage value of the time saving type buffer provided in the RAM 102. (Step 059AKS005), the determined time saving type is stored. As an example, if the time saving type is "time saving A", the time saving type buffer value is set to "0", if it is "time saving B", it is set to "1", if it is "time saving C", it is set to "2", and "time saving D". If it is, it may be set to "3".

After executing the process of step 059AKS005, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving / medium flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the ON state (step 059AKS006). The time saving medium flag is a flag indicating that the time saving control is currently in progress (sometimes simply referred to as a time saving flag). If the time saving middle flag is in the off state (step 059AKS006; No), the time saving start flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the on state (step 059AKS006A). The time saving start flag is a flag indicating that the time saving control is started from the next special figure game.

When it is determined in step 059AKS003 that it is not "missing (time reduction)" (step 059AKS003; No), or when it is determined in step 059AKS006 that the time reduction medium flag is on (step 059AKS006; Yes), step After executing any of the processes of S1245, S1247, and step 059AKS006A, the result of pre-determination of whether or not to control the big hit game state or the small hit game state, and whether or not to control the next time reduction state, and further, the big hit. A definite special symbol is set according to the determination result of the jackpot type in the game state and the determination result of the time saving type in the time saving state (step S1248). As an example, if it is determined in step 059AKS003 that the special figure display result is not "missing (time reduction)", the lost symbol corresponds to the pre-determined result that the special figure display result is "missing". The special symbol indicating the "-" symbol that becomes is set as the finalized special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 059AKS003 that the special figure display result is "loss (time reduction)", the time reduction symbols "1" and " Any one of the special symbols indicating the numbers 4 ”,“ 6 ”, and“ 8 ”is set as the finalized special symbol. That is, the special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as the finalized special symbol according to the determination result that the time saving type is "time saving A". Further, according to the determination result that the time saving type is "time saving B", the special symbol indicating the number "4" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Depending on the determination result that the time saving type is "time saving C", the special symbol indicating the number "6" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Depending on the determination result that the time saving type is "time saving D", the special symbol indicating the number "8" is set as the confirmed special symbol.

When it is determined in step S1246 that the special figure display result is "small hit", the small hit symbol is set in response to the pre-determined result that the special figure display result is "small hit". The special symbol indicating the number 2 ”is set as the finalized special symbol. Further, when it is determined in step S1241 that the special figure display result is "big hit", the big hit symbols are "3", "5", and "7" according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S1244. Any of the special symbols indicating the numbers of "" is set as the finalized special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", the special symbol indicating the number "3", which is the normal jackpot symbol, among the normally open round jackpot symbols is set as the finalized special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is "probability variation", the special symbol indicating the number "7", which is the probability variation jackpot symbol, among the normally open round jackpot symbols is set as the finalized special symbol. A special symbol indicating the number "5", which is a short-term open jackpot symbol, is set as a confirmed special symbol according to the decision result of setting the jackpot type to "probability".

After the finalized special symbol is set in step S1248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S1249), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. .. If the number of reserved memory of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in step S1235 (step S1235; Yes), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (step S1250), the special symbol Ends normal processing. In this demo display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is produced from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed to the board 12. At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

FIG. 13-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process executed in step S111 shown in FIG. When the variation pattern setting process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step S261). When it is determined that the jackpot flag is on (step S261; Yes), the CPU 103 refers to the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13-11 (A), and the jackpot display result is "big hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the time is determined (step S262).

FIG. 13-10 shows an example of the fluctuation pattern in the feature portion 059AK of this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)" and "loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", respectively. Correspondingly, a plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "big hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern") and is variable. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is "loss (time reduction)" or "loss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). .. Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “loss”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. In the feature unit 059AK, a dedicated variation pattern (the variation pattern of PB2-4 shown in the figure) or a variable display, which is selected only when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)", is selected. Although it encourages the result to be "missing (time saving)", there is a variation pattern of time saving that is "missing". Regarding the fluctuation pattern dedicated to the time of loss (time reduction), which is selected only when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)", the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)", for example, the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach D. There may be a variation pattern of the type of super reach effect that is executed only when.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern. The big hit fluctuation pattern and the small hit fluctuation pattern are included in the hit fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit". The super reach variation pattern includes reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C, regardless of whether the variable display result is "big hit" or "miss".

The jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13-11 (A) changes the fluctuation pattern according to the determination result of the jackpot type when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is set to "big hit". It is a table referred to for determining one of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR3 for pattern determination. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13-11 (A), a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is determined according to whether the determination result of the jackpot type is “non-probability”, “probability”, or “probability”. The numerical value (determined value) to be compared with MR3 is any of the fluctuation pattern PA4-1, the fluctuation pattern PB4-1, the fluctuation pattern PB4-2, the fluctuation pattern PB4-3, and the fluctuation pattern PC1-1 to the fluctuation pattern PC1-3. Is assigned to a crab.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table 132A shown in FIG. 13-11 (A), the determination value varies depending on which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined, so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern is different. There is a part assigned to the pattern. For example, depending on whether the jackpot type is "non-probability" or "probability", the determination values for the fluctuation pattern PA4-1, the fluctuation pattern PB4-1, the fluctuation pattern PB4-2, and the fluctuation pattern PB4-3 The allocation is different. As a result, it is possible to make the ratio determined for the same fluctuation pattern different depending on the determination result of which of the plurality of types of jackpot types is used.

Further, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, there is a part in which determination values are assigned to different fluctuation patterns depending on which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined. For example, when the jackpot type is "non-probable change" or "probable change", a determined value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PA4-1, the fluctuation pattern PB4-1, the fluctuation pattern PB4-2, and the fluctuation pattern PB4-3. On the other hand, no determined value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PC1-1 to the fluctuation pattern PC1-3. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probability", the determination value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PC1-1 to the fluctuation pattern PC1-3, while the fluctuation pattern PA4-1 and the fluctuation pattern PB4. No decision value is assigned to -1, fluctuation pattern PB4-2, and fluctuation pattern PB4-3. As a result, when the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is controlled to the short-term open big hit state according to "probability", the fluctuation pattern is determined to be different from the case where the normal open big hit state is controlled. be able to.

When the jackpot type is determined to be "non-probability", "probability", or "probability", it depends on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probabilistic state, or the time saving state. Therefore, the assignment of the determined value for each fluctuation pattern may be different. As a result, the ratio determined for the same variation pattern can be different depending on which of the plurality of types of game states is used. Further, when the jackpot type is determined to be "non-probability", "probability", or "probability", it depends on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probable change state, or the time saving state. Therefore, the determined value may be assigned to different fluctuation patterns. As a result, different fluctuation patterns can be determined depending on which of the plurality of types of game states is used. In this embodiment, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", more determined values are assigned to the variation pattern PA4-1 indicating the variation pattern of normal reach than when the jackpot type is "probability variation". .. Therefore, when the reach effect of Super Reach is executed, there is a higher possibility that the jackpot type will be "probable change" rather than "non-probable change", so that the player can have expectations and the game. You can improve your interest. Further, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13-11 (A), the fluctuation pattern PB4-2 that performs the reach effect of the super reach B is more than the fluctuation pattern PB4-1 that performs the reach effect of the super reach C. , The fluctuation pattern PB4-3 that produces the reach of Super Reach A is more assigned than the fluctuation pattern PB4-2, that is, as the fluctuation time becomes longer (see the fluctuation time in FIG. 13-10). Has been done.

Returning to FIG. 13-8, when it is determined in the process of step S261 that the big hit flag is in the off state (step S261; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is in the on state (step S263). ). When it is determined that the small hit flag is on (step S263; Yes), the CPU 103 refers to the small hit fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 13-11 (B), and the special figure display result is "small hit". The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the small hit is determined (step S264).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit flag is in the off state (step S263; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving start flag is in the on state (step 059AKS007). When it is determined that the time saving start flag is on (step 059AKS007; Yes), the CPU 103 selects the variation pattern table when the time saving start flag is turned on as shown in FIGS. 13-12 (A), (C) and (D). (Step 059AKS008). On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving start flag is off (step 059AKS007; No), the CPU 103 selects the variation pattern table at the time of turning off the time saving start flag shown in FIGS. 13-12 (B) and (E) (step). 059AKS009).

After executing the process of step 059AKS008 or step 059AKS009, the CPU 103 determines whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, depending on the type of the special figure and whether or not the time is shortened. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the loss when the special figure display result is “loss (time reduction)” or “loss” is determined (step 059AKS010). Specifically, in step 059AKS010, when the special figure display result is "loss (time reduction)" and the variable special figure is the first special figure, regardless of whether or not the time reduction control is performed, FIG. 13- Refer to the time saving start flag on time loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in 12 (A), and use it as numerical data indicating the fluctuation pattern determination random number value MR3 stored in, for example, the fluctuation random number buffer, depending on the time reduction type. Based on this, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types. On the other hand, when the special figure display result is "loss (time reduction)" and the variable special figure is the second special figure, FIG. 13-12 (C) or (D) depending on whether or not the time reduction control is performed. ) Refers to the time saving start flag on time loss fluctuation pattern determination table, and determines the fluctuation pattern to one of a plurality of types based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. Further, when the special figure display result is "missing" and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the time saving control can be performed by referring to the time saving start flag off time loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13-12 (B). The fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on numerical data indicating a random number value MR3 or the like depending on whether or not the time saving state is being performed. Further, when the special figure display result is "missing" and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the time saving is in progress, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of turning off the time saving start flag shown in FIG. 13-12 (B) is displayed. With reference to it, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 or the like. On the other hand, in the normal state, the variation pattern can be selected from a plurality of types based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 by referring to the loss variation pattern determination table when the time reduction start flag is off shown in FIG. 13-12 (E). decide. As shown in the figure, in the feature unit 059AK of this embodiment, when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)" (when the time reduction start flag is on, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table is selected), the type of super reach is selected. Decision values are assigned so that the time saving types are determined at different rates. Specifically, the decision value is assigned so that the person who executes the super reach with a high expectation of big hit is the time reduction type with a large number of time reductions (B is "time reduction A" rather than super reach C). It is assigned so that the ratio of time saving types is high). In addition, as shown in the figure, when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)" (when the loss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time reduction start flag is on is selected), the determination value is set to Super Reach A, which has the highest jackpot expectation. Not assigned. That is, in the feature unit 059AK, the determination value is assigned so that the ratio of “loss (time reduction)” differs depending on the type of super reach. Further, in the feature unit 059AK, for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-11 and 11-12, when the reach effects of Super Reach B and Super Reach C are executed, when a big hit occurs, or when a loss (time reduction) occurs. Determining values are assigned so that a plurality of variable display results are obtained, such as when the result is simply lost. Therefore, the variation of the production result can be increased and the game entertainment can be improved. Further, as described above, the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning opening is provided in the game area on the right side for the player, and the game ball wins only when the so-called right-handed hit is made. ing. Therefore, in the feature unit 059AK, the second special figure fluctuates in the time saving state due to the player hitting the right in the time saving state. On the other hand, when the time saving control is completed and the reserved memory corresponding to the second special figure remains, the second special figure changes in the normal state. That is, in the normal state, the second special figure fluctuates only when the time saving control is completed and the reserved memory corresponding to the second special figure remains. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (E), the feature unit 059AK corresponds to four times, which is the maximum number of variable displays performed after the end of the time reduction (maximum value of the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure). It is a variable display (variable) fluctuation pattern determination table (corresponding to "4").

After returning to FIG. 13-8 and executing the process of step 059AKS010, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving start flag is set to the ON state (step 059AKS011). When the time saving start flag is on (step 059AKS011; Yes), the CPU 103 indicates that the determined fluctuation pattern is a time saving fixed fluctuation pattern (that is, a dedicated fluctuation pattern at the time of loss (time saving)) PB2-4. (Step 059AKS012). When the determined fluctuation pattern is not PB2-4, the time saving fanning effect period as a period for executing the time saving fanning effect described later is added to the special figure fluctuation time indicated by the determined fluctuation pattern (step 059AKS013). .. Specifically, in step 059AKS013, as shown in FIG. 13-9, a time saving fanning effect period may be added according to the time saving type. In addition, PB2-4, which is a dedicated fluctuation pattern at the time of loss (time reduction), and PB2-5, which is a fluctuation pattern of time reduction, have a special figure fluctuation time shown in FIG. 13-10 and a time reduction fanning production period (10 seconds). )It is included. The time-saving fanning effect is an effect of fanning whether or not the time-saving symbol, which is a decorative symbol indicating that the decorative symbol is controlled to the time-saving state from the next variable display, is stopped-displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol.

After executing any of the processes of steps S262, S264, and 059AKS013 of FIG. 13-8, the CPU 103 sets the special figure fluctuation time (also referred to as fluctuation time), which is the variable display time of the special symbol (step S266). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the definite special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is derived and displayed. Is. As shown in FIG. 13-10, the special figure fluctuation time is predetermined in response to a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance, but when the process of step 059AKS013 is executed, the time saving fanning production period Is the added period. The CPU 103 sets the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected in each process of steps S262, S264, and 059AKS013 (when the process of step 059AKS013 is executed, the period in which the time saving fanning effect period is added). Therefore, it is possible to set the timing at which the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is derived. The special figure fluctuation time is set, for example, by setting a timer value according to the special figure fluctuation time in a game control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. In the feature unit 059AK of this embodiment, when the time saving start flag is on and the determined fluctuation pattern is not PB2-4, the time saving fanning effect period is set as the period for executing the time saving fanning effect. , An example of adding to the special figure fluctuation time indicated by the fluctuation pattern is shown, but in addition to this, for example, when the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit", a predetermined period is set. It may be added to the special figure fluctuation time. In this case, as in the case of the time saving type, a period corresponding to the jackpot type may be added, and the processing may be common to step 059AKS013. Specifically, the respective periods corresponding to "time saving A", "time saving B", and "time saving C" shown in FIG. 13-9 are added as periods corresponding to "non-probability", "probability", and "probability". do it.

Following the process of step S266, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B are started. A setting for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol is made so as to start any of the special symbol games for which the conditions are satisfied (step S267). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. As a result, the special figure game is started. When the CPU 103 starts the variable display using the first special figure, the CPU 103 controls the first hold indicator 25A to display a display capable of specifying the subtracted 1st special figure hold storage number. The hold indicator 25A may be made to perform (for example, reduce the number of LEDs lit by one). When the CPU 103 starts the variable display using the second special figure, the CPU 103 controls the second hold display 25B to display a display capable of specifying the subtracted second special figure hold storage number. The hold indicator 25B may be made to perform (for example, reduce the number of LEDs lit by one).

After executing the process of step S267, the CPU 103 issues a command at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (command at the start of fluctuation) in order to notify the effect control board 12 of the special symbol display result, the determination result of the fluctuation pattern, and the like. Transmission settings are made (step S268). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sends the first fluctuation start designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command as the fluctuation start command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 ( A command including EXT data indicating the fluctuation pattern determined in steps S262, S264, or S265), a display result specification command (a command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), and a first special figure hold storage number specification command (command containing EXT data indicating the determined variable display result). The 1-decreased 1st special figure reserved memory count value, that is, the command including the EXT data indicating the 1st special figure reserved memory when one reserved memory is exhausted by the start of execution of the special figure game) is sequentially transmitted. Set the transmission settings for this. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends the second fluctuation start designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command as the fluctuation start command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 ( A command including EXT data indicating the fluctuation pattern determined in steps S262, S264 or S265), a display result specification command (a command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), and a second special figure hold storage number specification command (1). The decremented second special figure reserved memory count value, that is, the command including the EXT data indicating the second special figure reserved memory when one reserved memory is exhausted by the start of execution of the special figure game) is sequentially transmitted. Set the transmission settings for.

After executing the process of step S268, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "2" (step S267), and then ends the variation pattern setting process.

FIG. 13-13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 13-13, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the special symbol confirmation display flag provided in a predetermined area (game control flag setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 102 is on. (Step S291). Here, the flag for confirming the special figure is set to the ON state by the process of step S295, which will be described later, in response to the derivation and display of the confirmed special symbol that is the variable display result in the special figure game.

When the flag for confirming the special symbol is off in step S291 (step S291; No), a setting for deriving and displaying the confirmed special symbol is performed (step S292). At this time, the decorative symbol stop command transmission setting process for transmitting the decorative symbol stop command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step 059AKS021). The decorative symbol stop command is also called a symbol confirmation command, and is a command that specifies that the variable display (variation) of the decorative symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. This command specifies the period (fixed period) for displaying the symbol.

Here, the main effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the command control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-14. In addition, "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number.

The command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern designation command) for designating a variation pattern of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. In this embodiment, a variation pattern designation command corresponding to each variation pattern is set. For example, a unique number (variation pattern number) is assigned to each variation pattern, and the number is set to "XX" in the command (for example, "01" for variation pattern PA1-1). The variation pattern specification command is also a command for designating the variation start of the decorative pattern.

The command 8A01 (H) is an effect control command (first start opening prize designation command) for designating that the first start winning is generated due to the game medium entering the first start winning opening. The command 8A02 (H) is an effect control command (second start opening prize designation command) for designating that the second start winning is generated due to the game medium entering the second starting winning opening. The first starting port winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command may be collectively referred to as a starting opening winning designation command.

The command 8CXX (H) specifies whether or not to make a big hit, whether to make a loss (time saving), and the big hit type and the time saving type, that is, an effect control command (display result) that specifies a variable display result. Specified command). In this embodiment, display result specification commands corresponding to each display result are set. For example, a unique number is assigned to each display result, and the number is set to "XX" in the command (for example, "00" for "loss" and "loss (time reduction A") for the time reduction type. "01" for "time saving)", "05" for "big hit" with "probability change" as the jackpot type).

The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first variation start designation command) that specifies to start variable display (variation) of the first special symbol. The command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second variation start designation command) that specifies to start variable display (variation) of the second special symbol. The first fluctuation start designation command and the second fluctuation start designation command may be collectively referred to as a fluctuation start designation command. Information indicating whether to start the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern determination result specification command described later.

The command 8FXX (H) is an effect control command (design confirmation specification command) that specifies that the variable display (variation) of the decorative symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed, and the derived display is displayed. This command specifies the period (fixed period) for displaying the decorative pattern. In the feature unit 059AK of this embodiment, whether or not the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)" and the display result corresponding to each time reduction type when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)". The specified command is set. For example, if the variable display result is not "loss (time reduction)", "00" is set for "XX" in the command, and if the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)", the time reduction type is selected. A unique number is assigned accordingly, and that number is set to "XX" in the command (for example, "01" if the time saving type is "time saving A", "02" if the time saving type is "time saving B", time saving. If the type is "time saving C", "03", if the time saving type is "time saving D", "04", etc.).

The command 95XX (H) is an effect control command (game state designation command) for designating the game state. In this embodiment, game state designation commands corresponding to each game state are set. For example, if the gaming state is a normal state (low probability low base), "XX" is set to "00". For example, if the gaming state is a high-accuracy low-base state, "XX" is set to "01". For example, if the gaming state is a high-accuracy high-base state, "XX" is set to "02". For example, if the gaming state is a low accuracy high base state, "XX" is set to "03".

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command) for designating the start of the jackpot game state (start of fanfare). The fanfare is an effect that is executed at the start of the big hit game state to notify that the big hit game state has been reached. The command A100 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game state.

The command A2XX (H) is an effect control command (command for designating the opening of the large winning opening) for designating the opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A3XX (H) is an effect control command (a command designated after opening the large winning opening) for designating the closure of the special variable winning ball device 7 for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

The command A601 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot game state (start of the ending). The ending is an effect of notifying the end of the big hit game state, which is executed at the end of the big hit game state. The command A602 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game state.

The command C1XX (H) is an effect control command (first special figure hold storage number designation command) for designating the first special figure hold storage number. “XX” indicates the number of first special figure reserved storage. The command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (second special figure holding storage number designation command) for designating the second special figure holding storage number. “XX” indicates the second special figure reserved storage number. The first special figure holding storage number designation command and the second special figure holding storage number designation command are collectively referred to as a special figure holding storage number designation command.

The command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (design determination result designation command) for designating a display result among the determination results at the time of starting winning. The command C5XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern determination result designation command) for designating a variation pattern among the determination results at the time of starting winning. In this embodiment, in the process of step S101 described later, when the first start winning or the second starting winning occurs, the random numbers MR1 to 3 are extracted. Regarding the variable display corresponding to the extracted random number values MR1 to 3, the variable display is variable based on the random number values MR1 and MR3 of the extracted random number values MR1 to 3 before the start condition of the variable display is satisfied. Whether or not the display result is a "big hit" and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display are determined. The determination at the time of starting winning refers to these determinations, and is executed in the winning random value determination process (see FIG. 13-3) in step S1213. In a predetermined case, this determination may not be performed. A unique number is assigned to the judgment result (including the case where there is no judgment) about the display result, and the number is set to "XX" in the symbol specification command (for example, if "no judgment", " If it is "00" or "miss", "01" is set, if it is "loss (time reduction)", a unique number is assigned according to the time reduction type, and if it is "big hit", it is unique according to the big hit type. Number is assigned). A unique number is assigned to the judgment result (including the case without judgment) for the fluctuation pattern, and the number is set to "XX" in the fluctuation pattern specification command (for example, if "no judgment" is used. "00", "11" for "PA1-1", "12" for "PA1-2", etc.).

FIG. 13-15 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS021 of FIG. 13-13 as the decorative symbol stop command transmission setting process. The decorative symbol stop command transmission setting process is a process for setting to transmit a variable display result and a decorative symbol stop command according to the time saving type. In the decorative symbol stop command transmission setting process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the time saving / medium flag is set to the ON state (step 059AKS041). If the time saving middle flag is in the off state (step 059AKS041; No), it is determined whether or not the time saving start flag is set in the on state (step 059AKS042). If the time saving start flag is on (step 059AKS042; Yes), the variable display result this time is "missing (time saving)", so that the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the decorative symbol stop command according to the time saving type. (Step 059AKS043), the decorative symbol stop command transmission setting process is terminated.

Specifically, in step 059AKS043, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (B), a predetermined decorative symbol stop command (symbol confirmation command) is set according to the time saving type. As shown in the figure, the fixed time is 10 seconds for "time saving A" and "time saving B", while the fixing time is 5 seconds for "time saving C" and 2 seconds for "time saving D". The time saving types of "time saving A" and "time saving B" are the time saving types determined only when the variable display result of the first special figure is "missing (time saving)", and are "time saving C" and "time saving". Since the time saving type of "D" is a time saving type that is determined only when the variable display result of the second special figure is "missing (time saving)", the variable display result of the first special figure is "missing (time saving)". Since the fixed time differs depending on whether the variable display result of the second special figure is "miss (time reduction)", the variation of the variable display increases and the game interest can be improved. Further, when the variable display result of the second special figure is "loss (time reduction)", the confirmation period differs depending on the time reduction type, so that the player's attention can be drawn to the confirmation period. Further, in the feature unit 059AK, since the processing of step 059AKS043 is performed only when the time reduction state is not obtained, the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure remaining after the time reduction ends is obtained. By performing the process of step 059AKS043 only in the case of "loss (time reduction)", the fixed time according to the time reduction type of "time reduction C" and "time reduction D" shown in the figure is obtained. That is, in the case where the time reduction state is controlled again in a short period after the end of the time reduction (at the maximum after the end of the period of four variable display of the maximum reserved storage number of the second special figure) (“time reduction”). In "C" and "time reduction D"), as shown in the case, when the variable display result corresponding to the first special figure is "loss (time reduction)" in the normal state ("time reduction A" and "time reduction B"). The confirmation time is shorter than. Therefore, it is necessary to clearly notify the player that the time saving state is controlled, and it is possible to control the time saving state by lengthening the confirmation period for the normal state and the variable display of the first special figure. A period can be provided to clearly notify the player. In addition, in the case where the time is controlled again in a short period of time after the end of the time reduction, if the confirmation period is long, the game interest may be deteriorated. Is prevented from decreasing.

When the time saving medium flag is on in step 059AKS041 of FIG. 13-15 (A) (step 059AKS041; Yes), or when the time saving start flag is off in step 059AKS042 (step 059AKS042; No), the CPU103 Sets to transmit the command 8F00 (fixed period 0.5 seconds) as the decorative symbol stop command (step 059AKS044), and ends the decorative symbol stop command transmission setting process.

After returning to FIG. 13-13 and executing the process of step 059AKS021, the CPU 103 has a confirmation period (10 seconds, 5 seconds, 2 seconds, 0) corresponding to the decorative symbol stop command (symbol confirmation command) set in step 059AKS021. (Any of .5 seconds) is set as the special figure confirmation display time (step 059AKS022). In the process of step 059AKS022, a timer initial value predetermined according to the variable display result and the time saving type may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153. Then, after the special symbol confirmation display flag is set to the ON state (step S295), the special symbol stop process is terminated. In this way, after the confirmed special symbol is derived and displayed by the process of step S292, the special symbol process process corresponding to the occurrence of the timer interrupt is performed until the special symbol confirmed display time set in step 059AKS022 elapses. Every time the stop process is executed, it is determined in step S291 that the special figure confirmation display flag is on.

When the special figure confirmation display flag is on in step S291 (step S291; Yes), it is determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed (step S296). For example, in the process of step S296, the game control process timer value, which is the stored value of the game control process timer for which the timer initial value is set by the process of step S294, is read, and whether or not the timer value becomes "0" is determined. Therefore, it may be determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed. If the timer value is a value other than "0", the game control process timer value should be updated so that it is decremented by 1 each time the game control timer interrupt process is executed based on the occurrence of the timer interrupt. Just do it. If the special symbol confirmation display time has not elapsed in step S296 (step S296; No), the special symbol stop processing is terminated, and the process waits until the special symbol confirmation display time elapses.

When the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed in step S296 (step S296; Yes), after clearing the special figure confirmation display flag and turning it off (step S297), whether or not the jackpot flag is on is determined. Determine (step S298). At this time, if the jackpot flag is on (step S298; Yes), a predetermined fixed time is set as the effect waiting time at the start of the jackpot (step S299). In addition, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is made (step S300). For example, in the process of step S300, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start designation command according to the jackpot type buffer value is the transmission command in the transmission command buffer. It may be stored in the buffer area specified by the pointer.

Following the process of step S300, the jackpot flag is cleared to turn it off (step S301). In addition, a setting for ending the probability change state, the time saving state, and the remaining holding period described later is made (step 059AKS023). For example, as the process of step 059AKS023, the process of clearing the probability change flag, the time saving medium flag, and the remaining holding period flag to turn off the state, and the number of time saving times for counting the remaining number of times of the special figure game executed in the time saving state. A process such as clearing the counter may be executed. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "4", which is a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S303), the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

If the big hit flag is off in step S298 (step S298; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S304). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step S304; Yes), a predetermined fixed time is set as the effect waiting time at the start of the small hit (step S305). Subsequently, a setting is made for transmitting a hit start designation command corresponding to the special figure display result of "small hit" from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S306). After that, the small hit flag is cleared to turn it off (step S307). In addition, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8", which is a value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step S308).

If the small hit flag is off in step S304 (step S304; No), it is determined whether or not the time saving start flag is on (step 059AKS024). If the time saving start flag is on (step 059AKS024; Yes), the time saving start time processing is executed (step 059AKS025). The details of the time saving start processing will be described later. After executing the process of step 059AKS025, or when the time saving start flag is off in step 059AKS024 (step 059AKS024; No), the CPU 103 clears the special figure process flag and initializes the value to "0". (Step S309). After executing any of the processes of steps S308 and S309, it is determined whether or not to end the time saving state (step 059AKS027). Specifically, in the process of step 059AKS027, when the time reduction flag is on, the time reduction count value, which is the stored value of the time reduction counter, is updated by, for example, subtracting one. Then, it is determined whether or not the updated time reduction count value matches a predetermined time reduction end determination value (for example, "0"). At this time, if it matches the time saving end determination value, it is determined as Yes. On the other hand, if it does not match the time saving end determination value, it is determined as No.

When ending the time saving state (step 059AKS027; Yes), the CPU 103 performs the time saving ending time processing (step 059AKS028). The details of the time-saving end processing will be described later. After executing the process of step 059AKS028, or when the time saving state is not terminated in step 059AKS027 (step 059AKS027; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the remaining hold period is reached (step 059AKS030). Whether or not it is the remaining hold period may be determined by checking whether or not the flag during the remaining hold period, which will be described later, is set to the ON state. When the remaining hold period is set, that is, when the flag during the remaining hold period is on (step 059AKS030; Yes), the CPU 103 performs the remaining hold period end determination process (step 059AKS031), and then ends the special symbol stop process. .. The details of the remaining hold period end determination process will be described later. On the other hand, when it is not the remaining hold period, that is, when the flag during the remaining hold period is off (step 059AKS030; No), the CPU 103 ends the special symbol stop process as it is.

FIG. 13-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS025 of FIG. 13-13 as the process at the start of time reduction. The time saving start time processing is a processing in which the variable display result is "loss (time saving)" and a setting is made to perform time saving control from the next variable display. In the time saving start time processing shown in FIG. 13-16, the CPU 103 first clears the time saving start flag to the off state (step 059AKS051), and sets the time saving medium flag to the on state (step 059AKS052). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the flag is on during the remaining hold period (step 059AKS053). The remaining hold period flag is a flag indicating that the variable display corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure remaining after the end of the time reduction is in progress, and is a flag of step 059AKS063 (see FIG. 13-17) described later. When all the variable displays corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure that is set to the on state by the process are finished (step 059AKS072 described later), or the first remaining after the time saving is finished. 2 When the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the special figure becomes "miss (time reduction)", it is cleared to the off state (step 059AKS055 described later).

When it is determined in step 059AKS053 of FIG. 13-16 that the flag is off during the remaining hold period (step 059AKS053; No), the CPU 103 launches a game ball into the game area on the right side of the player. Is set to send a right-handed instruction command for instructing (step 059AKS054), and the time saving start time processing is ended. By transmitting the right-handed instruction command set in the process of step 059AKS054 to the effect control board 12, the right-handed instruction display of the embodiment shown in FIG. 13-33 (F) is displayed on the effect control board 12 side. Will be done.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step 059AKS053 of FIG. 13-16 that the remaining holding period flag is in the on state (step 059AKS053; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the remaining holding period flag to the off state (step 059AKS055). , Clear various count values (step 059AKS056). In the process of step 059AKS056, the values of the remaining hold count value and the fluctuation count value after the end of the time reduction, which will be described later, may be cleared to the initial value "0". Like the remaining hold count value, the variation count value after the end of the time reduction may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and is a count value indicating the number of variable displays performed after the end of the time reduction state. Although not shown, the variation count value after the end of the time reduction is, for example, in the special symbol variation process in step S112 of FIG. 6, when the flag is on during the remaining hold period, the variable display is performed each time. It should be +1.

After executing the process of step 059AKS056 of FIG. 13-16, the CPU 103 sets to transmit the simple mode right-handed instruction command (step 059AKS057), and ends the time saving start time process. By transmitting the simple mode right-handed instruction command set in the process of step 059AKS057 to the effect control board 12, the right-handed instruction of the aspect shown in FIG. 13-35 (O) is performed on the effect control board 12 side. The display is done. The right-handed instruction command in the simplified mode transmitted and set in step 059AKS057 of FIG. 13-16 is different from the right-handed instruction command transmitted and set in the process of step 059AKS054, which is during the remaining hold period. This is because the variable display result is "missing (time saving)". Specifically, in a short period after the end of the time reduction (at the maximum after the end of the period of four variable display of the maximum number of reserved storages in the second special figure), the time reduction state is controlled again, so that step 059AKS057 If the right-handed instruction command set to be transmitted in the process of step 059AKS054 is transmitted in the process of, the player may be troubled. Therefore, in the process of step 059AKS057, a command for displaying the right-handed instruction is transmitted in a simple manner to prevent the player from being bothered and deteriorating the game interest. ..

FIG. 13-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS028 of FIG. 13-13 as the process at the end of the time saving. The time saving end time processing is a process of ending the time saving control and setting the remaining hold period. Regarding the probabilistic state in which the time saving / medium flag is on and the probabilistic change flag is on, the time reduction control may be continuously performed until the next variable display result becomes a “big hit”. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the time reduction control is terminated even in the probability change state, and the time reduction control may be terminated based on the determination result that the time reduction control is terminated. When the time reduction control is terminated in this way, the normal state may be obtained by also ending the probability variation control, and for the probability variation control, until the next variable display result becomes a "big hit", or further. It may be continued until a predetermined number of special figure games are executed.

In the time saving end processing shown in FIG. 13-17, the CPU 103 first clears the time saving medium flag to the off state (step 059AKS061). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not there is a hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure (step 059AKS062). In step 059AKS062, it may be determined whether or not there is a hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure by checking the hold information corresponding to the second special figure stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 102.

When the second special figure is held (remaining hold) (step 059AKS062; Yes), the flag is set to the on state during the remaining hold period (step 059AKS063), and the second special figure is held (remaining hold). The remaining hold count value is set according to the number (step 059AKS064). Specifically, in step 059AKS064, if the number of hold information corresponding to the second special figure stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 is "4", "4" is set in the remaining hold number count value, and "4" is set. If it is "3", "3" may be set, if it is "2", "2" may be set, and if it is "1", "1" may be set.

After executing the process of step 059AKS064, the CPU 103 initializes by setting the fluctuation count value to "0" after the end of the time reduction (step 059AKS065). Since the fluctuation count value after the end of the time reduction is initialized to "0" in step 059AKS056 of FIG. 13-16, if it is "0", the process of step 059AKS065 may be skipped. good. After executing the process of step 059AKS065, the CPU 103 sets to send a right-handed erase command for erasing the right-handed instruction display (step 059AKS066), and ends the time-saving end time process. By transmitting the right-handed erase command set in the process of step 059AKS066 to the effect control board 12, the process of step 059AKS136 shown in FIG. 13-30 is executed on the effect control board 12 side. , The right-handed command display will be deleted.

When it is determined in step 059AKS062 of FIG. 13-17 that the hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure does not exist (step 059AKS062; No), the CPU 103 fires the game ball to the game area on the left side of the player. A setting is made to send a left-handed instruction command for instructing to return to the so-called left-handed type (step 059AKS067), and the time saving end time processing is ended.

FIG. 13-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS031 of FIG. 13-13 as the remaining hold period end determination process. The remaining hold period end determination process determines whether or not the remaining hold period has ended, that is, whether or not all the variable displays corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure remaining after the end of the time reduction have ended. It is a process to end the remaining hold period when it ends. In the remaining hold period end determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the variation count value after the end of the time reduction matches the remaining hold number count value set in step 059AKS064 of FIG. 13-17 (step 059AKS071). .. If the variation count value after the end of the time reduction does not match the remaining hold number count value (step 059AKS071; No), the CPU 103 ends the remaining hold period end determination process as it is.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation count value after the end of the time reduction matches the remaining hold number count value (step 059AKS071; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the flag during the remaining hold period to the off state (step 059AKS072), and various count values. (Step 059AKS073). In the process of step 059AKS073, the values of the remaining hold count value and the variation count value after the end of the time reduction may be cleared to the initial value "0" as in the process of step 059AKS056. After executing the process of step 059AKS074, the CPU 103 is set to transmit a left-handed instruction command for instructing the player to return to the so-called left-handed shot in which the game ball is launched into the game area on the left side (step 059AKS074). , Ends the remaining hold period end determination process. When the left-handed instruction command set in the process of step 059AKS074 is transmitted to the effect control board 12, left-handed as shown in FIG. 13-34 (N-2) on the effect control board 12. Instructions will be displayed.

FIG. 13-19 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end processing executed in step S117 of FIG. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 13-19, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the effect waiting time at the end of the jackpot has elapsed (step S321). As an example, in the post-processing of the jackpot opening in step S116 shown in FIG. 6, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7", the waiting time at the end of the jackpot, which is the execution period of the ending effect, is in advance. The specified timer initial value is set in the game control process timer. Then, in the process of step S321, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 from the game control process timer value, and the updated game control process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value (for example, "0"). Depending on whether or not it is, it may be determined whether or not the production waiting time at the end of the big hit has elapsed. If the effect waiting time at the end of the jackpot has not elapsed in step S321 (step S321; No), the jackpot end process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the effect waiting time at the end of the jackpot has elapsed in step S321 (step S321; Yes), the jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read out (step S322). , Identify whether the jackpot type was "non-probability", "probability", or "probability". At this time, it is determined whether or not the specified jackpot type is "non-probability variation" (step S323).

When it is determined in step S323 that the jackpot type is "non-probability variation" (step S323; Yes), a setting is made to start control for setting the gaming state to the time saving state (step S324). For example, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag to the on state, and sets a predetermined count initial value (for example, "100") corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed in the time saving state to the time saving number counter. Set to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type is "probability change" or "probability change" (step S323; No), a setting is made to start control for setting the gaming state to the probability change state (step S325). For example, the CPU 103 sets both the probability change flag and the time saving flag to the ON state.

It should be noted that the setting for controlling the different types of probability change states may be made depending on whether the jackpot type is determined to be "probability change" or the jackpot type is determined to be "probability change". As an example, when the jackpot type is determined to be "probability change", both the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are set to the ON state, the initial value of the time reduction count value is not set, and then the special figure display result is displayed. Set so that both probability variation control and time reduction control are continuously performed until a "big hit" is reached. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is determined to be "probability", both the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are set to the on state, and the initial value of the time reduction count value is set in the same manner as when the time reduction state is controlled. After making the setting, the probability variation control is continuously performed until the next special figure display result becomes "big hit", while the time saving control is continued until the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined number (for example, "100"). It may be set as follows. Alternatively, when the jackpot type is determined to be "sudden probability", if the predetermined time saving medium collision probability flag is on, the setting for starting the time saving control together with the probability change control is made, while the time saving medium collision probability flag is off. If there is, the setting for starting only the probability change control may be made. Here, for the time saving medium sudden probability flag, for example, when it is determined in step S298 shown in FIG. 13-13 that the big hit flag is on, the big hit type is "probable" and the time saving flag is on. It suffices to be set to the on state corresponding to the time reduction control being performed.

After executing any of the processes of steps S324 and S325, the special figure process flag is cleared, the value is initialized to "0" (step S326), and then the jackpot end process is terminated.

Next, the processing of the feature unit 059AK on the effect control board 12 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 13-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the command analysis process. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 receives a start winning command (start winning opening designation command, special figure hold storage number designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command) from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not it was present (step S401).

When it is determined that the start winning command has been received (step S401; Yes), the received command is stored in the starting winning command buffer (step S402). When the 1st start opening prize designation command or the 1st special figure hold storage number designation command is received as the start winning command, the start winning command (1st start opening prize designation command, 1st special figure hold storage number designation command) , The symbol determination result specification command, the variation pattern determination result specification command) are stored in the first start winning command buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122. When the 2nd start opening prize designation command or the 2nd special figure hold storage number designation command is received as the start winning command, the start winning command (2nd start opening prize designation command, 2nd special figure hold storage number designation command) , The symbol determination result specification command, the variation pattern determination result specification command) are stored in the second start winning command buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122.

FIG. 13-21 (A) is a configuration example of the command buffer at the time of the first start winning. In the first start winning command buffer, various command data constituting the starting winning command received at the time of the first starting winning is stored. The command buffer at the time of winning the first start corresponds to each of the storage areas (hold display numbers 1 to 4) capable of storing various data for the number corresponding to the maximum value (for example, 4) of the first special figure hold storage number. Area) is provided. As shown in the figure, the command buffer at the time of the first start winning in the feature unit 059AK in this embodiment has an area in which various command data corresponding to the variable display during execution are stored as the hold display number "0". Is provided (the same applies to the command buffer at the time of winning the second start).

When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening, 4 commands, 1st starting opening winning designation command, 1st special figure hold memory designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, and variation pattern judgment result designation command, are 1 The set effect control command (command at the time of starting winning) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, in addition to these first start opening winning designation commands, the first special figure hold memory designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation command, other information is held. A storage area is secured so that it can be stored in association with the stored information.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the data for specifying the start winning command from the beginning of the free area of the first start winning command buffer according to the reception order. The free area of the command buffer at the time of winning the first start, that is, the data in the area where the data is not stored is "0000 (H)". Therefore, when the start winning command is received, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the minimum hold display number in which the storage area of the start winning command is "0000 (H)" in the first start winning command buffer. Each effect control command data is stored in the storage area in the order of the first start opening winning designation command, the first special figure hold storage designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation command.

Further, FIG. 13-21 (B) is a configuration example of the command buffer at the time of winning the second start. In the second start winning command buffer, various command data constituting the starting winning command received at the time of the second starting winning is stored. The command buffer at the time of winning the second start corresponds to each of the storage areas (hold display numbers 1 to 4) capable of storing various data corresponding to the maximum value (for example, 4) of the second special figure hold storage number. Area) is provided. Similar to the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, the command buffer at the time of the second start winning in the feature unit 059AK in this embodiment has a hold display number “0” as shown in the variable display during execution. An area is provided for storing various corresponding command data.

When there is a start prize to the 2nd start winning opening, 4 commands, the 2nd starting opening winning designation command, the 2nd special figure hold memory designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation command, are 1 The set effect control command (command at the time of starting winning) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the command buffer at the time of the second start winning, in addition to these second start opening winning designation commands, the second special figure hold memory designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation command, other information is held. A storage area is secured so that it can be stored in association with the stored information.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the data for specifying the start winning command from the beginning of the free area of the second start winning command buffer according to the reception order. The free area of the command buffer at the time of winning the second start, that is, the data in the area where the data is not stored is "0000 (H)". Therefore, when the start winning command is received, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the minimum hold display number in which the storage area of the start winning command is "0000 (H)" in the second start winning command buffer. Each effect control command data is stored in the storage area in the order of the second start opening winning designation command, the first special figure hold storage designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation command.

Further, in the second start winning command buffer, similarly to the first starting winning command buffer, a storage area for storing other information corresponding to each of the hold display numbers is provided, and a display stage change pattern described later is provided. A storage area for storing is provided. In the example shown in FIG. 10-8 (B), an example is shown in which the effect control command data is not stored in any of the storage areas of the hold display numbers “0” to “4”.

Returning to the description of the flowchart of the command analysis process shown in FIG. 13-20, after executing step S402, or when it is determined that the command at the time of starting winning is not received (step S401; No), the effect control CPU 120 , It is determined whether or not the game state designation command has been received (step S403). When it is determined that the game state designation command has been received (step S403; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 switches the on / off state of the high accuracy flag and the high base flag based on the content of the received game state designation command. (Step S404).

The high-probability flag is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) and is turned on in response to the probable change state. The on state / off state is switched according to the switching of the on state / off state. The high base flag is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) and is turned on in response to the time saving state. The on state / off state is switched according to the switching of the on state / off state. For example, when the game state specification command specifies the high accuracy high base state (for example, when the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are specified to be on), the effect control CPU 120 has a high accuracy flag and a high accuracy flag. Turn both base flags on (if they are already on, keep them on. The same applies to the on / off states for both flags). When the game state specification command specifies the high probability low base state (for example, when the probability variation flag is on and the time saving flag is off), the high probability flag is turned on and the high base is set. Turn off the flag. When the game state specification command specifies the low probability low base state (normal state) (for example, when the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are specified to be off), both the high probability flag and the high base flag are used. Turn it off.

After executing step S404, or when it is determined that the start winning command has not been received (step S403; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes other analysis processing (step S405), and the command analysis processing To finish.

FIG. 13-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 9 as the look-ahead notice setting process. In the hold display setting process shown in FIG. 13-22, the effect control CPU 120 first receives the effect control commands (starting port winning designation command, winning determination result command, hold storage number notification command, etc.) transmitted at the time of starting winning. It is determined whether or not there is a reception (step S1301). In the process of step S1301, for example, whether or not the start opening winning designation command, the winning determination result command, and the hold storage number notification command are newly stored in the first start winning command buffer and the second starting winning command buffer. By confirming, it is sufficient to determine whether or not a command has been received at the time of winning a start.

If no command is received in step S1301 (step S1301; No), the read-ahead notice setting process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the command has been received (step S1301; Yes), the winning determination result corresponding to the received winning determination result command is specified (step S1302). At this time, it is determined whether or not "the winning determination is being restricted" is specified (step S1303). If the winning judgment result is other than "Limited winning judgment" (step S1303; No), whether or not the production control command transmitted at the time of starting winning includes the first starting opening winning designation command. That is, it is determined whether or not the received start opening winning command is the first starting opening winning designation command (step 059AKS081).

In the case of the first start opening winning designation command (step 059AKS081; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 holds or holds the variable display result as "big hit" or "miss (time reduction)" in the stored hold. It is determined whether or not the variable display result is "missing" and the hold, which is the fluctuation pattern of the time saving gap, is stored (step 059AKS082). In the process of step 059AKS082, by confirming the contents of the first start winning buffer shown in FIG. 13-21 (A), the variable display result becomes "big hit" or "loss (time reduction)". It suffices to determine whether or not the result is "loss" and the hold, which is the fluctuation pattern of the time saving gap, is stored.

When neither the hold in which the variable display result is "big hit" or "loss (time reduction)" or the hold in which the variable display result is "loss" and which is the fluctuation pattern of the time reduction is stored (step 059AKS082; No). ), The normal hold change determination table shown in FIG. 13-23 (A) is selected as the table to be used (step 059AKS083).

On the other hand, when either the hold in which the variable display result is "big hit" or "loss (time reduction)" or the hold in which the variable display result is "loss" and the fluctuation pattern of the time reduction is stored (step). 059AKS082; Yes), the restricted hold change determination table shown in FIG. 13-23 (B) is selected as the table to be used (step 059AKS084).

When it is determined in step 059AKS081 that it is not the first start opening winning command (step 059AKS081; No), it is the second starting opening winning command and the time is shortened. The time-saving hold change determination table for special figure 2 shown in C) is selected as the table to be used (step 059AKS085).

After executing any of the processes of step 059AKS083, 059AKS084, and 059AKS085, the effect control CPU 120 pre-reads according to the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern according to the determination ratio shown in the pending change determination table selected as the table to be used. Whether or not to execute the hold display change effect as the advance notice effect and the execution mode are determined (step S1304).

In the normal hold change determination table shown in FIG. 13-23 (A), the received start opening winning command is the first starting opening winning designation command, and the variable display result is "big hit" or in the stored hold. This table is selected when the hold that becomes "miss (time reduction)" or the variable display result is "loss" and neither the hold that is the fluctuation pattern of the time reduction is stored is stored. As shown in the figure, in the normal hold change determination table, when the variable display result is "big hit", the variable display result is "miss" and the fluctuation pattern of super reach loss, or the variable display result of "small hit". In the case of, if it is a variable display result of "loss (time reduction)" or "loss" and it is a fluctuation pattern of the time reduction, in other cases, it corresponds to, and when it is executed, it is a big hit than when it is not executed. The decision ratios are assigned as shown in the figure so that the expectation is high and the jackpot expectation is high in the order of "red"> "green"> "blue" when executing. When the normal time hold change determination table is selected, in step S1304 of FIG. 13-22, whether or not the hold display change effect is executed and the execution mode are determined according to the determination ratio shown in the normal time hold change determination table. ..

In the restricted hold change determination table shown in FIG. 13-23 (B), the received start opening winning command is the first starting opening winning designation command, and the variable display result is "big hit" or in the stored hold. This table is selected when either the hold that is "missing (time saving)" or the holding that is the variable display result is "missing" and is the fluctuation pattern of the time saving is stored. In such a case, the change from the normal state to the time saving state (which may be the probability change state) after the end of the variable display executed first, that is, before the execution of the variable display corresponding to the hold of the read-ahead notice target. Therefore, the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern may differ between the time of pre-reading and the time of executing the variable display corresponding to the hold of the pre-reading notice target. Therefore, in the restricted hold change determination table shown in FIG. 13-23 (B), the execution of the hold display change effect in which the jackpot expectation degree is equal to or higher than a certain value (“green” or higher in this example) is restricted. In the illustrated example, the hold display change effect in the "blue" mode can be executed, but it may be performed only without execution. For example, when the variable display result is "missing" in the stored hold and the hold, which is the fluctuation pattern of the time saving, is stored, the display mode of the hold display to be notified is initially set to "blue". , And after the end of the variable display corresponding to the hold of the fluctuation pattern of the time saving gas, the display mode for the hold subject to the notice (hold displayed in "blue") is changed to the hold display of "green" or higher. You may change it. Further, the active display may be changed to a mode of "green" or higher. When the restricted hold change determination table is selected, in step S1304 of FIG. 13-22, whether or not the hold display change effect is executed and the execution mode are determined according to the determination ratio shown in the restricted hold change determination table. ..

Further, in the normal hold change determination table shown in FIG. 13-23 (A) and the restricted hold change determination table shown in FIG. 13-23 (B), when the variable display result becomes "loss (time reduction)". , An example in which the mode is the same as the case of "big hit" is shown, but for example, when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)" or the variable display result is "loss", the time reduction fluctuation. When it is a pattern, there may be a peculiar aspect (for example, "time?"). According to this, the variation of the hold display change effect increases, and the player's attention can be attracted.

The time saving hold change determination table for special figure 2 shown in FIG. 13-23 (C) is a table selected when the received start opening winning command is the second starting opening winning command. As shown in the figure, in the time saving hold change determination table for special figure 2, the normal time hold change determination table shown in FIG. 13-23 (A) and the limited time hold change determination table shown in FIG. 13-23 (B) are Unlike this, the determination ratio is not assigned when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)" or when the variable display result is "loss" and the variation pattern of the time reduction is lost. If the received start opening winning command is the second starting opening winning designation command and the winning determination is not in progress, the gaming state is in the time saving state (high base control is in progress). In the feature unit 059AK of this embodiment, even if the time saving symbol (special figure) is stopped and displayed in the time saving state, the time saving control is not newly performed, and further, the time saving control is controlled to the time saving state in the remaining hold by the return effect described later. Since the effect suggesting whether or not to be performed is performed, it is not necessary to execute the hold display change effect foretelling that the time will be shortened. Therefore, as shown in the figure, in the time saving hold change determination table for special figure 2, the variable display result is "missing (time saving)" or the variable display result is "missing", which is a fluctuation pattern of the time saving gap. If no decision percentage is assigned. When the time-saving hold change determination table for special figure 2 is selected, in step S1304 of FIG. 13-22, execution of the hold display change effect according to the determination ratio shown in the time-saving hold change determination table for special figure 2. The presence or absence and the execution mode are determined.

Returning to FIG. 13-22, after executing the process of step S1304, or when it is determined in step S1303 that the winning determination is being restricted (step S1303; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the determination result of step S1304. Is stored in the hold display data storage unit in association with the hold number corresponding to the new start winning prize (step S1311). At this time, if it is determined in step S1303 that the winning determination is being restricted, the data corresponding to "no execution (white)" in the pending change determination table shown in FIG. 13-23 may be stored.

Following the process of step S1311, the hold display update setting at the time of starting winning is performed (step S1313), and then the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. For example, when the number of 1st special figure hold storage increases by 1 due to the game ball passing (entering) through the 1st start winning opening, the 1st hold display on the 1st hold display unit 5HR is increased by 1. Add a new first hold display. On the other hand, when the number of the second special figure hold memory increases by 1 due to the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening, the second hold display on the second hold display unit 5HL is increased by 1. Add a new second hold display. The first hold display and the second hold display added at this time may be any hold display in the mode determined in step S1304 and stored in step S1311.

FIG. 13-24 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of FIG. When the variable display start setting process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the time is being shortened (step 059AKS086). In step 059AKS086, it is determined whether or not the time is being shortened by confirming whether or not the high base flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) is set to the ON state. good.

If the time reduction is in progress (step 059AKS086; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the time reduction number to update the time reduction number (step 059AKS086A). The number of time reductions is set in the process of step 059AKS133 (see FIG. 13-30), which will be described later, and is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. After executing the process of step 059AKS086A, or when it is determined in step 059AKS086 that the time is not shortened (step 059AKS086; No), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the left-handed instruction command from the main board 11 side. (Step 059AKS087), and when received (step 059AKS087; Yes), a left-handed instruction display (see M6 in FIG. 13-34 (N-2)) is performed to instruct the player to hit left (see M6 in FIG. 13-34 (N-2)). Step 059AKS088). The left-handed instruction display may be continued for 5 seconds each time from the reception of the left-handed instruction command to the time when the variable display is performed four times, for example. .. When the left-handed instruction command is not received (step 059AKS087; No) or when the process of step 059AKS088 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 issues the right-handed instruction command or the simplified right-handed right-handed instruction command to the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the command was received from (step 059AKS089).

When either of the right-handed instruction command and the simplified right-handed instruction command is received (step 059AKS089; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays the right-handed instruction according to each command (step 059AKS090). Specifically, when the right-handed instruction command is received, the right-handed instruction display M3 of the mode shown in FIG. 13-33 (F) is performed, and when the simplified right-handed instruction command is received, FIG. 13- The right-handed instruction display M3 according to the aspect shown in 35 (O) is performed. In addition, after the right-handed instruction display corresponding to each command is performed in step 059AKS090, other effects are displayed in the variable display each time until the time saving state ends, as shown in FIG. 13-33 (G). The right-handed instruction display may be performed in a manner that does not interfere with the above.

After executing the process of step 059AKS090, or when it is determined in step 059AKS089 that neither the right-handed instruction command nor the simplified right-handed instruction command has been received (step 059AKS089; No), the effect control CPU 120 , It is determined whether or not the display result specification command and the variation pattern specification command can be normally received (step 059AKS090A). In step 059AKS090A, for example, by checking the contents of the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, it may be determined whether or not the display result designation command and the variation pattern designation command can be normally received.

If either of the display result specification command and the variation pattern specification command has not been normally received (step 059AKS090A; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes a missing time process (step 059AKS090B).

FIG. 13-25 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS090B of FIG. 13-24 as the process at the time of missing. In the missed time processing shown in FIG. 13-25, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command can be normally received, that is, whether or not the missed command is a display result designation command (step). 059AKS093). If the variation pattern designation command has not been normally received (step 059AKS093; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the processing at the time of dropping as it is. In this case, the decorative symbol is not variably displayed, and the previous variable display result remains as it is, waiting until the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 side, and the symbol confirmation designation command is received in accordance with the reception. , The decorative design corresponding to the display result specification command may be stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, when the variation pattern specification command can be normally received (step 059AKS093; Yes), that is, when the missed command is the display result specification command, the effect control CPU 120 has the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. Is a fluctuation pattern of time saving determination or a fluctuation pattern of time saving gas, that is, whether or not it is a fluctuation pattern of PB2-4 or PB2-5 (step 059AKS094). In the case of a fluctuation pattern of time saving determination or a fluctuation pattern of time saving gas (step 059AKS094; Yes), since the fluctuation pattern includes a time saving fanning effect period, the stop symbol setting process described later is performed (step 059AKS095). Ends the processing at the time of dropping. In the feature unit 059AK of this embodiment, even if the display result specification command is missed, if the variation pattern specification command can be normally received, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is generated. If it is a fluctuation pattern of time saving confirmation or a fluctuation pattern of time saving gas, it is possible to execute the time saving fanning effect by performing the stop symbol setting process described later, but either the display result specification command or the variation pattern specification command was missed. In that case, it is possible to prohibit the execution of a time-saving effect such as a time-saving fanning effect, such as stopping and displaying a predetermined decorative pattern at the time of omission.

On the other hand, when it is not the fluctuation pattern of the time saving determination or the fluctuation pattern of the time saving gap (step 059AKS094; No), the effect control CPU 120 uses a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command as the final stop symbol. It is determined (step 059AKS096), and the processing at the time of dropping is completed. In step 059AKS096, the combination of decorative symbols that can be selected in the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command may be determined to be the combination having the lowest advantage for the player. According to this, it is possible to prevent inconsistencies such as a result of actually having a low advantage even though the combination of decorative symbols having a high advantage is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game. be able to. In this case, since the display result designation command is missed, it cannot be determined on the side of the effect control board 12 whether or not the variable display result is "missing (time saving)". Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 seems to have a variable display result of "loss (time reduction)" after executing an effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach) according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. In this case, for example, a decorative symbol of "???" may be displayed or a predetermined lost symbol may be shaken until the symbol confirmation designation command is received.

Returning to FIG. 13-24, when the display result designation command and the variation pattern designation command can be normally received (step 059AKS090A; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11 (step 059AKS090A; Yes). It is determined whether or not the special figure display result (variable display result) becomes "missing" based on the display result designation command (command stored in the storage area) or the like (step S551). When it is determined that the special figure display result (variable display result) is "missing" (step S551; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is, for example, a variation pattern determination result specification command (variation pattern determination) transmitted from the main board 11. The non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1, PA1) corresponding to the case where the fluctuation pattern specified by the result specification command storage area) is "non-reach" in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode. -2) It is determined whether or not it is (step S552).

When it is determined in the process of step S552 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S552; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of fixed decorative symbols to be the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination (step S553). ). The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a decorative symbol of a non-reach combination, which is updated by, for example, an effect random counter provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 124 or the RAM 122, and outputs the ROM 121. The fixed decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the non-reach combination) is determined by referring to the decorative symbol determination table of the non-reach combination prepared in advance.

When it is determined in the process of step S552 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S552; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes the stop symbol setting process (step 059AKS092).

FIG. 13-26 is a flowchart showing an example of the stop symbol setting process executed in step 059AKS092 of FIG. 13-24. In the stop symbol setting process, the execution setting of the time saving fanning effect and the execution setting of the return effect are performed, and when the special symbol display result (variable display result) is "missing (time saving)", the time saving symbol is finally stopped. Processing to make a symbol is performed. In addition, the time-saving symbol that is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol is referred to as a time-saving symbol in order to distinguish it from the special symbol.

In the stop symbol setting process in FIGS. 13-26, the effect control CPU 120 displays a special figure based on a display result designation command (command stored in the display result designation command storage area) transmitted from the main board 11. It is determined whether the result is "loss (time reduction)" or "loss" and the fluctuation pattern of the time reduction gap (step 059AKS101).

If the special figure display result is "loss (time reduction)", or if it is "loss" and the variation pattern of the time reduction gap (step 059AKS101; Yes), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 is in the time reduction. Is determined (step 059AKS102). In step 059AKS102, if it is determined whether or not the time is being shortened by confirming whether or not the high base flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) is set to the ON state. good. When the time is not shortened (step 059AKS102; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines the lost symbol of the reach combination as the temporary stop symbol (step 059AKS103). Specifically, in the feature unit 059AK, when the special figure display result is "loss (time reduction)" or "loss" and the variation pattern of the time reduction gap, the reach effect of super reach is executed, and then. A time-saving fanning effect is performed. Therefore, in step 059AKS103, the symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed as a result of the reach effect of the super reach is determined as the lost symbol of the reach combination. In step 059AKS103, for example, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the decorative symbol of the reach combination updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the decorative of the reach combination prepared in advance in the ROM 121 is stored. The temporary stop symbol (decorative symbol of the reach combination) may be determined by referring to the symbol determination table.

After executing the process of step 059AKS103, the effect control CPU 120 executes the time-saving fanning effect setting process for setting to execute the time-saving fanning effect (step 059AKS104).

FIG. 13-27 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS104 of FIG. 13-26 as the time saving fanning effect setting process. In the time-saving fanning effect setting process shown in FIGS. 13-27, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. As shown in 13-28, the time-saving fanning effect pattern is determined (step 059AKS113), and the time-saving fanning effect setting process is completed. Although not shown in FIGS. 13-28, if the time-saving fanning effect setting process is executed due to the stop symbol setting process being performed in the missing time process in FIG. 13-25, the time-saving effect setting process is executed. Since the time-saving type is unknown except for the fluctuation pattern of the ghost, it may be determined to be the time-saving fanning effect pattern of the pattern dedicated to the missing time (for example, the effect pattern of "success D" with the effect time of 5 seconds).

As shown in FIGS. 13-28, when the time saving types are "time saving A" and "time saving B", the time saving fanning effect pattern of "success A" with an effect time of 10 seconds is determined. When the time saving type is "time saving C", the time saving fanning effect pattern of "success B" having an effect time of 2 seconds is determined. When the time saving type is "time saving D", the time saving fanning effect pattern of "success C" having an effect time of 1 second is determined. In the case of a variation pattern of the time saving gas, it is determined to be a time saving fanning effect pattern of "failure" with an effect time of 10 seconds. The effect time is a time corresponding to the time-saving fanning effect period added in step 059AKS013 in FIG. 13-8 (see FIG. 13-9), and the effect control CPU 120 is the display result transmitted from the main board 11. The time corresponding to the time-saving fanning effect period is determined as the time-saving fanning effect time by the designation command and the variation pattern specification command. In addition, in the feature unit 059AK, for example, the same character is displayed because the production time is the same for the time-saving fanning effect pattern of "success A" and the time-saving fanning effect pattern of "failure", and the time-saving symbol is displayed in "success A". Is the success pattern that finally stops and displays, and in "Failure", the time saving symbol does not finally stop and displays, and the decorative symbol of the reach combination stops and displays. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention to whether or not it succeeds (whether or not the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed). Further, in the feature unit 059AK, as shown in FIG. 13-12, the rate at which the variable display result becomes "loss (time reduction)" differs depending on the type of reach effect to be executed. Similarly, the execution ratio differs depending on the type of reach effect to be executed. That is, with respect to the reach effect of Super Reach A, which has a high expectation of a big hit, the variable display result does not become "loss (time reduction)", and the time reduction fanning effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being excessively executed, and it is possible to maintain the expectation that a specific display result will be obtained. Further, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (B), regarding the fluctuation pattern of the time saving gap in which the variable display result does not become "loss (time saving)" even if the time saving fanning effect is executed, the jackpot expectation degree such as Super Reach C is obtained. A low reach effect is performed. Therefore, the rate at which the time-saving fanning effect is executed differs depending on the type of reach effect to be executed, and the rate at which the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of executing the time-saving fanning effect also differs.

After returning to FIG. 13-26 and executing the process of step 059AKS104, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special figure display result is "loss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS105). When the special symbol display result is "loss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS105; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the decorative symbol of the reach combination including the time reduction symbol as the final stop symbol (step 059AKS106), and stops. The symbol setting process ends. In step 059AKS106, the time saving symbol in the mode corresponding to the time saving type may be determined as the final stop symbol (see FIGS. 13-32 (D-1) and 13-34 (M-1)).

In step 059AKS101, when the special figure display result is neither "loss (time reduction)" nor "loss" and is not a fluctuation pattern of the time reduction gap (step 059AKS101; No), the effect control CPU 120 is a decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed this time. It is determined whether or not the variable display of is the variable display corresponding to the first (first) variation of the second special figure performed after the end of the time reduction (step 059AKS107). For example, in step 059AKS107, the time saving end time flag is set to the on state after the time saving number is subtracted by 1 and becomes "0" in step 059AKS086A of FIG. 13-24, and the variable display performed immediately after that is displayed. Whether or not the display is variable corresponding to the second special figure may be determined by whether or not the second symbol variation start designation command has been received.

In the case of variable display (variation) corresponding to the first (first) second special figure performed after the end of the time reduction (step 059AKS107; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the second special figure after the end of the time reduction. Executes the return effect setting process to execute the return effect that suggests whether or not the hold for which the special figure display result is "missing (time reduction)" is stored in the hold memory corresponding to the variable display of the figure. (Step 059AKS108).

FIG. 13-29 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS108 of FIG. 13-26 as the return effect setting process. In the return effect setting process shown in FIGS. 13-29, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a hold in the hold memory corresponding to the second special figure for which the special figure display result is "missing (time reduction)". , Of the effect control command reception buffers provided in the RAM 122, the determination is made by checking the contents of the effect control command reception buffer corresponding to the second special figure (step 059AKS115).

When there is a hold in the hold memory corresponding to the second special figure in which the special figure display result is "missing (time reduction)" (step 059AKS115; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 holds the hold corresponding to the second special figure. A return success pattern is set to notify that there is a hold in the memory in which the special figure display result is "missing (time saving)", that is, the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed again due to one of the remaining holds (step 059AKS116). ), Ends the return effect setting process. On the other hand, when there is no hold in the hold memory corresponding to the second special figure for which the special figure display result is "missing (time reduction)" (step 059AKS115; No), the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the second special figure. A return failure pattern that notifies that there is no hold in the hold memory for which the special figure display result is "missing (time saving)", that is, the time saving symbol will not be stopped and displayed again due to any of the remaining holds. The setting (step 059AKS117) is performed, and the return effect setting process is completed. In addition, in the feature unit 059AK, both the return effect of the return success pattern and the return effect of the return failure pattern execute a common effect (an effect of inciting whether or not the time is shortened again), and as a result, a stop display is displayed. The combination of decorative patterns to be made is different.

After returning to FIG. 13-26 and executing the process of step 059AKS108, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the return effect pattern set in step 059AKS108 is a return success pattern (step 059AKS109). If it is a return success pattern (step 059AKS109; Yes), a decorative symbol of the reach combination including the time saving return symbol is determined as the final stop symbol (step 059AKS110), and the stop symbol setting process is terminated. The time saving return symbol is a symbol different from the time saving symbol determined as the final stop symbol in step 059AKS106 according to the time saving type (see FIG. 13-34 (K-1)). On the other hand, when it is not a return success pattern (step 059AKS109; No), when it is determined in step 059AKS102 that the time is being shortened (step 059AKS102; Yes), or when it is determined in step 059AKS105 that the special figure display result is "missing (time saving)". When it is determined that the display is not (step 059AKS105; No), or when it is determined that the display is not variable corresponding to the first (first) variation of the second special figure performed after the time reduction is completed in step 059AKS107 (step 059AKS107; No). ), The effect control CPU 120 determines the combination of the final stop symbols that constitute the reach combination (step 059AKS111). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a decorative symbol of a reach combination updated by, for example, a random number circuit 124 or a random number counter for effect, and prepares it by storing it in ROM 121 in advance. The final decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the reach combination) is determined by referring to the decorative symbol determination table of the reach combination. In this way, even if it is determined in step 059AKS105 that the special symbol display result is "loss (time reduction)" in the stop symbol setting process, if the time reduction is in progress (step 059AKS102; Yes), the decorative symbol The final stop symbol of is a decorative symbol of the reach combination by the processing of step 059AKS111.

After returning to FIG. 13-24 and executing the process of step 059AKS092, the effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the active display in addition to the settings in the effect control pattern determined in response to the fluctuation pattern. After making settings for executing the effect during variable display including the variable display operation of the decorative pattern such as the effect to be performed or the mini game (step S559), the effect control pattern is one of a plurality of prepared patterns. (Step S560). The effect control CPU 120 selects and uses one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (special figure variation effect control pattern) in response to, for example, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern determination result specification command. Set as a pattern. Further, when it is decided to execute the time saving fanning effect or the returning effect, the effect control pattern corresponding to the time saving fanning effect or the returning effect is selected and set as the usage pattern. If it is determined in step 059AKS090B that the variation pattern designation command has not been normally received in the process when the data is missed, it is not necessary to select the effect control pattern. In this case, the decorative symbol is not variablely displayed and the previous variable display result remains, but it waits until the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 side, and the symbol confirmation designation command is received. At the same time, the decorative design corresponding to the display result specification command may be stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 059AKS090B that the variation pattern specification command has not been normally received in the missing time processing, the effect control pattern dedicated to the missing time may be selected in the step S560. ..

Following the process of step S560, the effect control CPU 120 receives, for example, a predetermined area of the RAM 122 ( The initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit or the like) is set (step S561). Specifically, in step S561, when the execution setting of the time saving fanning effect is made in the time saving fanning effect setting process of step 059AKS104 of FIG. 13-26, it is indicated by the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern determination result specification command. The initial value of the effect control process timer is set by adding the effect time of the time-shortening effect to the time. After the execution of step S561, the effect control CPU 120 makes a setting for starting the variation of the decorative pattern or the like on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step S562). At this time, the effect control CPU 120, for example, issues a display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in the process of step S560 to the VDP of the display control unit 123. In each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5, the decorative symbols are started to fluctuate. Just do it.

After executing the process of step S562, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S563), and then performs the variable display start setting process. To finish.

FIG. 13-30 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display effect processing executed in step S172 of FIG. When the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 13-30 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display time has elapsed based on the timer value of the effect control process timer (step S801). ). For example, when the effect control CPU 120 updates the timer value of the effect control process timer (for example, 1 is subtracted) and the end code is read from the effect control pattern in response to the updated effect control process timer value. In addition, it may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

When it is determined in the process of step S801 that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S801; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the time reduction number display period for displaying the time reduction number (step 059AKS121). ). The time reduction number display period is a period for displaying the time reduction number updated in step 059AKS086A of FIG. 13-24, and may be predetermined in the effect control pattern determined in step S560. When it is determined that the time reduction number display period is reached (step 059AKS121; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays the time reduction number display control updated in step 059AKS086A of FIG. 13-24 as the remaining time reduction number. (Step 059AKS122).

After executing the process of step 059AKS122, or when it is determined in step 059AKS121 that it is not the time reduction display period (step 059AKS121; No), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 is the reach effect period for executing the reach effect. (Step 059AKS123). The reach effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern determined according to the fluctuation pattern. When it is determined that the reach effect period is reached (step 059AKS123; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls to execute the reach effect (step 059AKS124).

After executing the process of step 059AKS124, or when it is determined in step 059AKS123 that it is not the reach effect period (step 059AKS123; No), the effect control CPU 120 is at the symbol temporary stop timing which is the timing to temporarily stop and display the decorative symbol. It is determined whether or not there is (step 059AKS125). The symbol temporary stop timing may be predetermined in the effect control pattern determined when the temporary stop symbol of the reach combination is determined in the stop symbol setting process of FIGS. 13-26 (step 059AKS103). When it is determined that the symbol temporary stop timing is reached (step 059AKS125; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol temporary stop display (step 059AKS126), and temporarily stops the decorative symbol of the reach combination determined in step 059AKS103. Display it.

After executing the process of step 059AKS126, or when it is determined in step 059AKS125 that it is not the symbol temporary stop timing (step 059AKS125; No), the effect control CPU 120 is the time-saving fanning effect period for executing the time-saving fanning effect. Whether or not it is determined (step 059AKS127). The time-saving fanning effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern determined according to the pattern set in the time-saving fanning effect setting process of FIGS. 13-27. When it is determined that the time-saving fanning effect period is in effect (step 059AKS127; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs the time-saving fanning effect control for executing the time-saving fanning effect (step 059AKS128).

After executing the process of step 059AKS128, or when it is determined in step 059AKS126 that it is not the time saving effect period (step 059AKS126; No), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 is the return effect period for executing the return effect. (Step 059AKS129). The return effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern determined according to the pattern set in the return effect setting process of FIGS. 13-29. When it is determined that it is the return effect period (step 059AKS129; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs the return effect control for executing the return effect (step 059AKS130).

After executing the process of step 059AKS130, or when it is determined that it is not the return effect period (step 059AKS129; No), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In addition, control for changing the display mode of the active display and performing the effect during the variable display including the variable display operation of the decorative symbol such as a mini game is performed (step S808), and the effect process during the variable display is performed. finish.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S801 that the variable display time has elapsed (step S801; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 11 is normally received (step S809). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command has not been normally received (step 809; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special figure display result (variable display result) is "missing (time reduction)". (Step 059AKS137). When the special figure display result (variable display result) is not "loss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS137; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the effect process during variable display.

On the other hand, when the special figure display result (variable display result) is "loss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS137; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets "XXX" as the special time reduction number in the time reduction number (step). 059AKS138), after performing the special time reduction notification control that displays "??? times" as the notification of the time reduction number (059AKS139), the variable display during effect processing is terminated. If the symbol confirmation command has not been received normally, the effect itself of notifying the number of time reductions may not be executed. In addition, even if it is received normally, for example, if there is an inconsistency such as the content indicated by the symbol confirmation command and the content indicated by the display result specification command do not match, "? The special time reduction notification control for displaying "?? times" may be performed, or the effect itself for notifying the time reduction number may not be executed.

When the symbol confirmation command is normally received in step S809 (step S809; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 transmits a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, for example. Control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (fixed decorative symbol) that is the display result in the variable display of the symbol (step S810). After executing the process of step 810, the effect control CPU 120 sets the confirmation symbol display time according to the received symbol confirmation command (step 059AKS131). In step 059AKS131, the fixed time indicated by the commands 8F00 to 8F04 set for transmission in step 059AKS043 shown in FIG. 13-15 or step 059AKS044 may be set.

After executing the process of step 059AKS131, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special figure display result (variable display result) is "loss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS132). When the special figure display result (variable display result) is "loss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS132; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is specified by the received symbol confirmation command the number of time reductions (FIG. 13-15 (B)). ) Is set (step 059AKS133), and the time reduction number notification control for displaying the time reduction number (notifying the time reduction number) is performed (step 059AKS134).

After executing the process of step 059AKS134, or when it is determined in step 059AKS132 that the special figure display result (variable display result) is not "loss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS132; No), the effect control CPU 120 is right-handed. It is determined whether or not the erase command is received from the main board 11 side (step 059AKS135), and if it is received (step 059AKS135; Yes), the right-handed instruction display is erased (step 059AKS136). After executing the process of step 059AKS136, or when it is determined in step 059AKS135 that the right-handed erase command has not been received (step 059AKS135; No), the effect control CPU 120 waits for the value of the effect process flag. It is updated to "3" which is a value corresponding to the processing (step S812), and the effect processing during variable display is terminated.

FIG. 13-31 is a timing chart showing each timing during the variable display in the case where the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed and in other cases. 13-31 (A) to (C) show an example in which the variable display result is "loss" (including loss (time reduction)). Specifically, FIG. 13-31 (A) shows an example in which a time-saving symbol (referred to as “time-saving A” as a time-saving type) is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol, and FIG. 13-31. (B) shows an example in which the time saving symbol is not stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol without executing the time saving fanning effect, and FIGS. 13-31 (C) shows the time saving gasse. An example in the case of a fluctuation pattern is shown. In the illustrated example, in order to facilitate understanding, all of FIGS. 13-31 (A) to (C) show an example in which Super Reach C is executed, and FIGS. 13-31 (A) and (C). B) shows an example in which the fluctuation pattern of PB2-1 is selected, and FIG. 13-31 (C) shows an example in which the fluctuation pattern of PB2-5 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 13-31 (A), when the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol, when the variable display is started, the reach state is reached, and then the reach effect of Super Reach C is executed. NS. Then, when the symbol temporary stop timing is reached, as shown in the figure, the decorative symbol of the reach combination is temporarily stopped and displayed (in this example, the decorative symbol of 757). Then, a time-saving fanning production is performed. The time-saving fanning effect period L4 is 10 seconds, similarly to the time-saving fanning effect period L5 shown in FIGS. 13-31 (C) (see FIGS. 13-9 and 13-10). When the symbol confirmation command is received after the time saving fanning effect is completed, the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol (in this example, the combination of the decorative symbols at 7:07), and the fluctuation changes after the confirmation symbol display period L1 elapses. finish. The confirmed symbol display period L1 is 10 seconds (see FIG. 13-15 (B)).

As shown in FIG. 13-31 (B), if the time-saving fanning effect is not executed and the time-saving symbol is not stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the reach state is reached when the variable display is started. After that, the reach production of Super Reach C is executed. After that, when the symbol confirmation command is received (767 in this example). Then, after the confirmation symbol display period L2 elapses, the fluctuation ends. The finalized symbol display period L2 is 0.5 seconds (see FIG. 13-15 (A)), which is the same as the finalized symbol display period L3 shown in FIG. 13-31 (C).

As shown in FIG. 13-31 (C), in the case of the variation pattern of the time saving gap, when the variable display is started, the reach state is reached, and then the reach effect of the super reach C is executed. Then, when the symbol temporary stop timing is reached, as shown in the figure, the decorative symbol of the reach combination is temporarily stopped and displayed (in this example, the decorative symbol of 757). Then, a time-saving fanning production is performed. The time-saving fanning effect period L5 is 10 seconds, similarly to the time-saving fanning effect period L4 shown in FIG. 13-31 (A) (see FIGS. 13-9 and 13-10). When the symbol confirmation command is received after the time-saving fanning effect is completed, the lost symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol (767 in this example). Then, after the confirmation symbol display period L3 elapses, the fluctuation ends. The finalized symbol display period L3 is 0.5 seconds (see FIG. 13-15 (A)), which is the same as the finalized symbol display period L2 shown in FIG. 13-31 (B).

Next, an example of the operation of the effect when the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed or when the time-saving fanning effect is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-32 to 13-35.

As shown in FIG. 13-32 (A), when the game state is the normal state after the reach effect of the super reach C is executed, the symbol temporary stop timing is shown in FIG. 13-32 (B-1). As shown, the decorative design of the reach combination is temporarily stopped and displayed. In the illustrated example, in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", the decorative symbol 5La is "7", the decorative symbol 5Ca is "5", and the decorative symbol 5Ra, respectively. An example is shown in the case where "7" is temporarily stopped and displayed. As shown in the figure, the symbol "5" as the decorative symbol 5Ca may be displayed in a visually recognizable manner as being temporarily stopped while being shaken. Further, the present invention is not limited to the decorative symbol 5Ca in each “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C, and all the decorative symbols may remain swaying. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the time saving state, since it is determined as No in step 059AKS102 in FIGS. 13-26, the process of step 059AKS111 is performed without the decorative symbol of the reach combination being temporarily stopped and displayed. , As shown in FIG. 13-32 (B-2), the lost symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. In the illustrated example, the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result (in the illustrated example, an example of the special symbol display result of "1" which is the time saving type of the time saving A is shown), while the decorative symbol is displayed. Shows an example when the time saving symbol is not stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 13-32 (B-2), after the lost symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol, the fluctuation ends 0.5 seconds after the final stop symbol display period.

When the time-saving fanning effect period starts from the state shown in FIG. 13-32 (B-1), the time-saving fanning effect is executed as shown in FIG. 13-32 (C). In the illustrated example, the message M1 of "maybe time saving !?" is displayed to indicate whether or not the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, for example, two characters battle. Depending on whether or not the player wins, it may be possible to incite whether or not the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed.

Then, when the symbol confirmation command is received, the final stop symbol is displayed as shown in FIGS. 13-32 (D-1) or (D-2). In FIG. 13-32 (D-1), the variable display result is “loss (time reduction)”, and the symbol confirmation command of 8F01 shown in FIG. 13-15 (B) is received as the symbol confirmation command, and “time reduction A”. An example is shown in the case where the time saving symbol 5Cb of the time saving type of is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol, and the special symbol display result also shows the number "1" which is the time saving symbol of the time saving type of "time saving A". An example is shown when a special symbol is displayed as a special symbol display result. In the illustrated example, an example is shown in which the display mode of the active display AHA is changed to the “green” display mode before the time saving symbol 5Cb is stopped and displayed. The display mode may change immediately after the start of the effect, or may change during the reach effect of the super reach. On the other hand, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the time saving gap, since the symbol confirmation command of 8F00 shown in FIG. 13-15 (A) is received, as the final stop symbol as shown in FIG. 13-32 (D-2). The lost symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed. As the special symbol display result, as shown in the figure, a special symbol indicating the symbol “−” which is a lost symbol is displayed as the special symbol display result. Then, the fluctuation ends 0.5 seconds after the finalized symbol display period. In the illustrated example, the display mode of the active display AHA is changed to the display mode of "blue" before the lost symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed. The display mode may be changed immediately after the start of the fanning effect, or may be changed during the reach effect of the super reach. In addition, regarding the active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display, depending on which display mode the active display display mode changes to, the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed even if the reach effect is the same type of super reach. The display mode of the active display may be changed so that the ratio of the active display is different. The change destination of the display mode in the active change effect may be the same as the determination ratio in the normal hold change determination table shown in FIG. 13-23 (A). Further, unlike the normal hold change determination table shown in FIG. 13-23 (A), the variable display result is different depending on whether the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)" or the fluctuation pattern of the time reduction gap. When is "missing (shorter working hours)", the proportion of "green" or "red" display mode may be higher.

By executing the process of step 059AKS134 in FIG. 13-30 in the state shown in FIG. 13-32 (D-1), as shown in FIG. 13-33 (E), the time reduction number display as the time reduction number notification control. M2 is performed. In this case, since the symbol confirmation command of 8F01 shown in FIG. 13-15 (B) is received as the symbol confirmation command, "time reduction 100 times!" Is displayed as the time reduction number display M2. When the process of step 059AKS139 in FIG. 13-30 is executed, "time reduction ??? times" is displayed as special time reduction number notification control, and notification of the time reduction number (time reduction number) is restricted. Just do it. Then, when 10 seconds, which is the confirmed symbol display period specified by the symbol confirmation command of 8F01, elapses, as shown in FIG. 13-33 (F), the time is controlled to a shorter time state and a new variable display (hold display) is performed. Variable display corresponding to HL1) is started. At that time, the hold display HL3 and HL2 shift to the right. Further, by the process of step 059AKS122 in FIG. 13-30, as shown in FIG. 13-33 (F), the time reduction number display M4 of "time reduction remaining 99 times" is displayed. Further, in step 059AKS090 of FIG. 13-24, the right-handed instruction display M3 of the aspect shown in FIG. 13-33 (F) is performed.

After that, the variable display is performed a plurality of times in the time saving state. FIG. 13-33 (G) shows an example of the 81st variable display after the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed. In the time saving state, since the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening, the variable display corresponding to the second special figure is performed, and the hold corresponding to the second special figure is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 13-33 (G), four holding memories corresponding to the second special figure are stored, and four holding displays HR1 to HR4 are displayed. In addition, an example is shown in which the time reduction number display M4 of "time reduction remaining 19 times" is displayed. The right-handed instruction display in the mode displayed in FIG. 13-33 (F) ends with the first variable display after the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed, and the second and subsequent times are finished in FIG. 13-33 (G). ), It is displayed as a right-handed instruction display M3 in a mode that does not interfere with other effects.

Then, when the 100th variable display (100th variation in the time saving state) is completed after the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed, the time saving state ends. FIG. 13-33 (H) shows an example in which the decorative symbols 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra, which are the final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination, are stopped and displayed in the 100th variable display after the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed. Is shown. After the decorative symbols 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra, which are the final stop symbols, are stopped and displayed, the fluctuation ends 0.5 seconds after the confirmed symbol display period specified by the symbol confirmation command of 8F00, and the time saving state ends. When the time saving state ends, the right-handed erase command is received from the main board 11 side, so that the process of step 059AKS136 shown in FIG. 13-30 is performed, and right-handed as shown in FIG. 13-33 (H). The instruction display M3 will be erased. In this state, as shown in the figure, four hold storages corresponding to the second special figure are stored, and four hold displays HR1 to HR4 are displayed, which are variable corresponding to the hold display HR1. The remaining hold period is the period from the start of the display to the end of the variable display corresponding to HR4).

Subsequently, when the time saving state ends and the normal state is reached, as shown in FIG. 13-33 (I), the variable display corresponding to the hold display HR1 is started. In the illustrated example, an example is shown in which the variable display result is "loss" (an example that is not "loss (time reduction)" is also shown). In the feature unit 059AK of this embodiment, although it is in the normal state, the special figure display result becomes "miss (time reduction)" in the variable display corresponding to the hold of the second special figure stored at the end of the time saving state. Since the ratio is high (see FIGS. 13-5 (A) and 13-5 (B)), the ratio of being controlled to the time saving state again is high. Therefore, although it is in a normal state during the remaining hold period, the left-handed instruction display is not performed as shown in the figure, and the right-handed instruction display and the left-handed instruction display are repeatedly displayed, which confuses the player. It is prevented from letting you. As shown in FIG. 13-34 (N-2), the left-handed instruction display is performed in the first variable display performed after the end of the remaining hold period.

The variable display is the first variable display in the second special drawing performed after the end of the time reduction, and since the return effect execution setting is performed in the process of step 059AKS108 in FIGS. 13-26, the return effect is produced. When the period comes, the return effect is executed as shown in FIG. 13-34 (J). In the return effect, for example, depending on whether or not a predetermined mission is cleared, whether or not a hold for which the special figure display result is "missing (time reduction)" is stored (variable corresponding to HR2 to HR4 which is the remaining hold). Whether or not the display result is "missing (time reduction)"), that is, an effect suggesting whether or not the time reduction return symbol is stopped and displayed may be executed. In the case of the return success pattern, the predetermined mission is cleared and the time saving return symbol is stopped and displayed, while in the case of the return failure pattern, the predetermined mission ends in failure and the time saving return symbol is not displayed as stopped. The combination of decorative symbols constituting the reach may be stopped and displayed as the final stop. In addition, there may be a plurality of types of predetermined missions, and the success rate may differ depending on the type of the mission. If the variable display corresponding to the hold display HR1 is "missing (time reduction)", it is determined as Yes in step 059AKS101 of FIGS. 13-26, so that the return effect is not executed, but the return effect is executed. You may try to do it. In this case, the time-saving fanning effect may be executed after the return effect.

When the hold in which the special figure display result is "missing (time reduction)" is stored, that is, when the return is a successful pattern, the process of step 059AKS110 in FIGS. 13-26 changes the display to FIG. 13-34 (K-1). As shown, the combination of decorative symbols including the time reduction return symbol 5Cc is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol, and it is notified that there is a hold in which the variable display result is "miss (time reduction)" in the stored hold. Will be done. In this example, the case where the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the hold display HR4 is "loss (time reduction)" (more specifically, the time reduction type of "time reduction D") is shown.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 13-34 (L-1), the variable display corresponding to the hold display HR2 is executed. At this time, as shown in the drawing, the time-saving return small symbol M5 that makes it visible that the time-saving return symbol 5Cc has been stopped and displayed may be displayed in a manner that does not interfere with other effects. According to this, it becomes possible to visually recognize that the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed during the remaining hold, so that the player can be given a sense of security.

Then, in the variable display corresponding to the hold display HR4, the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the hold display HR4 is "loss (time reduction)" (the time reduction type is "time reduction D"), so that it can be used as a symbol confirmation command. Upon receiving the symbol confirmation command of 8F04 shown in FIG. 13-15 (B), as shown in FIG. 13-34 (M-1), the time saving symbol 5Cb of the time saving type of "time saving D" is stopped as the final stop symbol. Is displayed. As for the special figure display result, unlike FIG. 13-32 (D-1), a special symbol indicating the number "8" corresponding to the time saving symbol of the time saving type of "time saving D" is displayed as the special figure display result. NS. In the illustrated example, the display mode of the active display AHA is changed to the “green” display mode before the time saving symbol 5Cb is stopped and displayed.

By executing the process of step 059AKS134 in FIG. 13-30 in the state shown in FIG. 13-34 (M-1), as shown in FIG. 13-35 (N-1), the time reduction as the time reduction number notification control is performed. The number display M2 is performed. In this case, since the symbol confirmation command of 8F04 shown in FIG. 13-15 (B) is received as the symbol confirmation command, "time reduction 20 times!" Is displayed as the time reduction number display M2. Then, when 2 seconds, which is the confirmed symbol display period specified by the symbol confirmation command of 8F04, elapses, the fluctuation ends, and as shown in FIG. 13-35 (O), the time is controlled to a new state and a new one. Variable display (variable display corresponding to the hold display HL3) is started. Further, by the process of step 059AKS122 in FIG. 13-30, as shown in FIG. 13-35 (O), the time reduction number display M4 of "time reduction remaining 19 times" is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 13-35 (O) in step 059AKS090 of FIG. 13-24, the right-handed instruction display M3 in a simple mode, which is less conspicuous than the mode shown in FIG. 13-33 (F), is displayed. Will be done.

On the other hand, when the hold in which the special figure display result is "missing (time reduction)" is not stored, that is, in the case of the return failure pattern, the processing of step 059AKS111 in FIGS. 13-26 causes FIG. 13-34 (K-2). ), The decorative symbols 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra of the reach combination are stopped and displayed as the final stop symbols, and the fluctuation ends 0.5 seconds after the confirmed symbol display period specified by the symbol confirmation command of 8F00. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 13-34 (L-2), the variable display corresponding to the hold display HR2 is executed. At this time, unlike FIG. 13-34 (L-1), the time-saving return small symbol M5 is not displayed because the return effect was the return failure pattern.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-34 (M-2), the decorative symbols 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra, which are the final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination, are stopped and displayed, and the confirmed symbols specified by the symbol confirmation command of 8F00 are displayed. After 0.5 seconds of the display period, the fluctuation ends and the remaining hold period ends. When the remaining hold period ends, a left-handed instruction command is transmitted from the main board 11 in step 059AKS074 of FIG. 13-18.

Then, when the variable display corresponding to the hold display HL3 is started, the process of step 059AKS088 in FIG. 13-24 causes "return to left-handed!" As shown in FIG. 13-34 (N-2). Left-handed instruction display M6 is displayed. In this way, the left-handed instruction display is performed in the variable display executed next after the variable display corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure remaining after the end of the time reduction is completed.

FIG. 13-36 is a flowchart showing an example of processing in the information output processing performed in the information output processing in step S23 of FIG. In the processing in the information output processing shown in FIGS. 13-36, for example, a processing for outputting signals such as jackpot information, starting information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. I do. When the process in the information output process shown in FIGS. 13-36 is started, the CPU 103 outputs a signal indicating the special figure display result or the normal figure display result as the display signal output process (step S1801). After executing the process of step S1801, the CPU 103 executes the drive signal output process (step S1802) and outputs the drive signals of the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82.

Subsequently, the CPU 103 executes the external information output process (step S1803), and ends the process in the information output process. In step S1803, the jackpot signal 1 indicating that the jackpot is in progress, the jackpot signal 2 indicating that the jackpot is in the middle or the time saving state (the prize is being awarded), the jackpot signal 3 indicating that the time saving state is in progress, and Various signals such as a symbol confirmation signal indicating that the fluctuation has ended are output.

FIG. 13-37 is a timing chart showing the output timings of various signals output in the external information output process in step S1803 of FIG. 13-36. Specifically, FIG. 13-37 (A) shows the output timings of various signals when the time saving state is reached due to the end of the jackpot game state, and FIG. 13-37 (B) shows the time saving state due to the time saving symbol stop. The output timings of various signals in the case of

As shown in FIG. 13-37 (A), when the time is shortened due to the end of the jackpot gaming state, first, a symbol confirmation signal indicating the jackpot symbol stop is output, and thereby (the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped). Then, the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 are output at the same timing. Then, the output of the jackpot signal 1 is stopped at the end of the jackpot game state, but the jackpot signal 3 is output because the time is shortened at that timing. Then, with the passage of time, a symbol confirmation signal indicating a lost symbol stop is output, and when the symbol confirmation signal indicating a jackpot symbol stop is output again without ending the time saving state, the jackpot signal 1 is output and the jackpot signal 3 is output. Stops output. Since it is a big hit in the time saving state, the output of the big hit signal 2 is continued as shown in the figure. Then, the output of the jackpot signal 1 is stopped at the end of the jackpot game state, but the jackpot signal 3 is output because the time is shortened at that timing. After that, with the passage of time, when the final variable display of the predetermined number of time reductions is completed, a symbol confirmation signal indicating a lost symbol stop is output, and the time reduction state ends at the timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped. , The outputs of the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 are stopped at the same timing.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13-37 (B), when the time saving state is reached due to the time saving symbol stop, first, the symbol confirmation signal indicating the time saving symbol stop is output, and thereby (the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped). Then, the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 are output at the same timing. Then, with the passage of time, a symbol confirmation signal indicating a lost symbol stop is output, and when a symbol confirmation signal indicating a jackpot symbol stop is output without ending the time saving state, a jackpot is output at the timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped. At the same time as the signal 1 is output, the output of the jackpot signal 3 is stopped. Then, the output of the jackpot signal 1 is stopped at the end of the jackpot game state, but the time is shortened again at that timing, so that the jackpot signal 3 is output. As shown in the figure, the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output. After that, with the passage of time, when the final variable display of the predetermined number of time reductions is completed, a symbol confirmation signal indicating a lost symbol stop is output, and the time reduction state ends at the timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped. , The outputs of the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 are stopped at the same timing. In this way, since the outputs of the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 are stopped at the same timing, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of deviation and prevent confusion, and the external device is suitable for a time saving state or continuous operation. The state of the villa can be identified. After that, when the symbol confirmation signal indicating the time saving symbol stop is output again, the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 are output at the same timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 059AK in this embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

In the process of step S1240 shown in FIG. 13-4, the CPU 103 can determine "loss (time reduction)" as the special figure display result regardless of whether or not the game state is the time reduction state, and the special figure display result. When "Loss (time reduction)" (special display result) is derived and displayed as, when it is in the normal state, it is controlled to the time reduction state (travel-specific state) in the next special figure game (variable display), while the time reduction. When it is in the state, the control regarding the game state based on the derivation and display of the "loss (time reduction)" is not performed (the new time reduction control is not performed). Further, the effect control CPU 120 reduces the time as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 059AKS106 of FIGS. 13-26 in the normal state when "loss (time reduction)" is derived and displayed as the special figure display result. On the other hand, when the time is shortened, the final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is stopped and displayed in step 059AKS111 of FIGS. 13-26. According to this, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-32 (B-2) and (D-1), there is a "loss (time reduction)" (special display result) depending on whether the game state is the normal state or the time reduction state. The special figure display result of is a common display result (special figure display result indicating the number "1" corresponding to the time saving type of "time saving A"), while the variable display result of the decorative symbol is in the gaming state. In the normal state, the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 059AKS106 of FIG. 13-26, while in the time saving state, the reach is reached in step 059AKS111 of FIG. 13-26. The final stop symbol that composes the combination is stopped and displayed. According to this, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest when the special display result is displayed in the special state.

Further, in the process of step 059AKS104 of FIGS. 13-26, the execution setting of the time saving fanning effect for inciting whether or not the time saving symbol indicating that the time saving symbol is controlled to be controlled to the time saving state from the next variable display is stopped is set. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a time-saving fanning effect. Then, the effect control CPU 120 does not perform the process of step 059AKS104 when the gaming state is in the normal state, and does not perform the process of step 059AKS104 when the game state is in the time saving state. Therefore, in the case of the time saving state (special state), the time saving fanning effect is not executed. According to this, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest when the special display result is displayed in the special state.

Further, when the "loss (time reduction)" (special display result) is derived and displayed as the special figure display result, the CPU 103 is in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 13-15, in the process of step 059AKS043. While the decorative symbol stop command with the fixed time shown in FIG. 13-15 (B) is transmitted, if Yes is determined in step 059AKS041, the decorative symbol stop command with the fixed time set to 0.5 seconds is transmitted. That is, when "loss (time reduction)" (special display result) is derived and displayed as the special figure display result, the variable display result is displayed and confirmed depending on whether it is in the normal state or the special state. Time (fixed time) is different. According to this, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest when the special display result is displayed in the special state.

Further, in the process of step S1240 shown in FIG. 13-4, the CPU 103 can determine "loss (time reduction)" as the special figure display result regardless of whether or not the game state is the time saving state. When "Loss (time reduction)" (special display result) is derived and displayed as the display result, when it is in the normal state, it is controlled to the time reduction state (travel-specific state) in the next special figure game (variable display). , In the time saving state, the control regarding the game state based on the derivation and display of the "loss (time saving)" is not performed (the new time saving control is not performed). Then, as shown in FIG. 13-5, in the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, the second special figure display result determination table "misses" the special figure display result. The determination data is assigned so that the probability of being determined to control the time reduction state from the next variable display as "time reduction)" is high. Further, the effect control CPU 120 returns based on whether or not the hold of "loss (time saving)" is stored in the hold stored at the end of the time saving state by the process of step 059AKS108 of FIGS. 13-26. It is possible to execute the production. Then, the effect control CPU 120 can display a right-handed instruction in the process of step 059AKS090 in FIG. 13-24, and until it receives the left-handed instruction command transmitted in step 059AKS074 in FIG. 13-18, that is, The left-handed instruction display is not performed until all the variable displays corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure stored at the end of the time saving state are finished. According to this, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can display the left-handed instruction display in step 059AKS088 of FIG. 13-24 by receiving the left-handed instruction command in the normal state. Then, the left-handed instruction command is transmitted in step 059AKS074 of FIG. 13-18, that is, when all the variable displays corresponding to the hold of the second special figure stored at the end of the time saving state are completed. The effect control CPU 120 displays the left-handed instruction display in step 059AKS088 of FIG. 13-24 in the variable display performed after receiving the left-handed instruction command, that is, after the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold is completed. .. According to this, it is possible to perform a suitable launch notification, and the game can proceed smoothly.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits different right-handed instruction commands depending on whether or not there is a remaining hold period, as in the processes of step 059AKS054 and step 059AKS057 in FIG. 13-16. Then, on the side of the effect control CPU 120, right-handed instruction display in a mode corresponding to the received command is performed in step 059AKS090 of FIG. 13-24. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from being annoyed and deteriorating the game interest.

In the return effect, the effect control CPU 120 stores, for example, whether or not a hold for which the special figure display result is "missing (time reduction)" is stored depending on whether or not a predetermined mission is cleared (HR2 which is a remaining hold). -Whether or not the variable display result corresponding to HR4 is "loss (time reduction)"), that is, whether or not the time reduction return symbol is stopped and displayed. The return effect includes a return effect of the return success pattern and a return effect of the return failure pattern, both of which aim to clear a predetermined mission to determine whether or not the time is shortened again. The combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed differs depending on whether or not the predetermined mission is cleared as a result of executing the production). According to this, it is possible to attract the player's attention after performing a common effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-7, when the variable display result of the remaining hold is "loss (time reduction)", the CPU 103 determines "time reduction C" or "time reduction D" as the time reduction type. Then, in the process of step 059AKS113 of FIG. 13-27, the effect control CPU 120 determines as a time-saving fanning effect pattern that executes a time-saving fanning effect of different patterns according to the time-saving type, as shown in FIG. 13-28. That is, the time-saving fanning effect executed when the variable display result corresponding to the first special figure in the normal state becomes "loss (time reduction)" and the variable display result corresponding to the second special figure on hold are "loss". (Time saving) ”is executed, and a different pattern of time saving fanning effect is executed. According to this, since different patterns of production are executed depending on the situation, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed erase command in the variable display of the time saving end time by the process of step 059AKS066 in FIG. 13-17. Then, at the end of the variable display of the time saving end time, the effect control CPU 120 erases the right-handed instruction display by the process of step 059AKS136 in FIG. 13-30 based on the command. Therefore, the right-handed instruction display is erased during the remaining hold period. Further, the CPU 103 transmits different right-handed instruction commands depending on whether or not there is a remaining hold period, as in the processes of step 059AKS054 and step 059AKS057 in FIG. 13-16. Then, on the side of the effect control CPU 120, in the first variable display controlled to the time saving state (variable display performed after the variable display in which the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed), the said in step 059AKS090 of FIG. 13-24. A right-handed instruction is displayed according to the received command. According to this, it is possible to perform a suitable launch notification, and the game can proceed smoothly.

Further, the CPU 103 has a big hit signal 1 indicating that it is in a big hit, a big hit signal 2 indicating that it is in a big hit or a time saving state (that it is in a special prize), and a time saving by the process of step S1803 of FIG. 13-36. Various signals such as a jackpot signal 3 indicating that the state is in the state and a symbol confirmation signal indicating that the fluctuation has been completed can be output to, for example, a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Then, when the time saving state is reached due to the time saving symbol stop, as shown in FIG. 13-37 (B), a symbol confirmation signal indicating the time saving symbol stop is output, and a big hit signal is output at the timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped. Is output. According to this, it is possible to preferably identify the time saving state and the consecutive villa state with an external device.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-37 (B), the CPU 103 outputs the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 at the same timing at the timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal corresponding to the end of the time saving state is stopped. Stop. According to this, it is possible to preferably identify the time saving state and the consecutive villa state with an external device.

Further, the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern according to the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 13-12. As shown in the figure, when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)" (special display result) (when the loss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time reduction start flag is on is selected), the super reach A with the highest jackpot expectation is selected. The decision value is not assigned, and the decision value is assigned so that the rate of "loss (time reduction)" differs depending on the type of super reach to be executed. Then, the CPU 103 transmits different right-handed instruction commands depending on whether or not there is a remaining hold period, as in the processes of step 059AKS054 and step 059AKS057 of FIG. 13-16. Then, on the side of the effect control CPU 120, in the first variable display controlled to the time saving state (variable display performed after the variable display in which the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed), the said in step 059AKS090 of FIG. 13-24. A right-handed instruction is displayed according to the received command. According to this, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-11 and 11-12, when the reach effect of Super Reach B or Super Reach C is executed, it becomes a big hit, it becomes a loss (time reduction), or it simply becomes a loss. As such, determination values are assigned so that a plurality of variable display results are obtained. According to this, the variation of the production result is increased, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a variation pattern designation command indicating the determined variation pattern and a display result designation command indicating the determined special figure display result (variable display result), and the effect control CPU 120 performs an effect based on these commands. .. The effect control CPU 120 determines that the variation pattern is such that the reach effect of the super reach B is performed by the received variation pattern specification command, and even if it is determined as No in step S552 of FIG. 13-24, the display is displayed. Based on the result designation command, whether or not to execute the processes of step 059AKS104 and step 059AKS106 differs depending on whether the judgment is Yes or No in 059AKS101 of FIGS. 13-26. That is, even when a variation pattern command of common effect contents such as executing the reach effect of super reach B or super reach C is received, a different effect is executed depending on the content of the display result designation command. According to this, the variation of the production result is increased, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the process of step 059AKS104 of FIGS. 13-26, the execution setting of the time-saving fanning effect (special effect) that fuels whether or not the time-saving symbol indicating that the time-saving symbol is controlled to be controlled to the time-saving state from the next variable display is stopped and displayed. By performing the above, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the time-saving fanning effect. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the time-saving fanning effect after executing the reach effect common to the case where the time-saving fanning effect is executed and the case where the time-saving fanning effect is not executed. According to this, since the special production is executed, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-12, since the ratio of the variable display result to "loss (time reduction)" differs depending on the type of reach effect to be executed, the time reduction fanning effect is also executed in the same manner. The execution rate differs depending on the type of reach effect to be performed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being excessively executed, and it is possible to maintain the expectation that a specific display result will be obtained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (B), regarding the fluctuation pattern of the time saving gap in which the variable display result does not become "loss (time saving)" even if the time saving fanning effect is executed, the jackpot expectation degree such as Super Reach C is obtained. A low reach effect is performed. Therefore, the rate at which the time-saving fanning effect is executed differs depending on the type of reach effect to be executed, and the rate at which the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of executing the time-saving fanning effect also differs. According to this, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being excessively executed, and it is possible to maintain the expectation that a specific display result will be obtained.

Further, in the effect control CPU 120, the rate at which the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed differs depending on which display mode the active display display mode changes, even if the reach effect is the same type of super reach. Change the display mode of the active display. According to this, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being excessively executed, and it is possible to maintain the expectation that a specific display result will be obtained.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a variation pattern designation command indicating the determined variation pattern and a display result designation command indicating the determined special figure display result (variable display result), and the effect control CPU 120 performs an effect based on these commands. .. Even if the content of the received display result specification command is different, the effect control CPU 120 can display the special figure display result (variable) if the received variation pattern specification command is a variation pattern that performs the reach effect of Super Reach B. Regardless of the display result), the common reach effect of Super Reach B is executed. According to this, the effect can be preferably executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-7, the number of time reductions controlled in the time reduction state differs depending on the time reduction type, and as shown in FIG. 13-12, the super reach effect executed according to the time reduction type. The proportions are different. Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-28, the pattern of the time saving fanning effect to be executed is different depending on the time saving type. According to this, it is possible to attract the attention of the player because the number of time reductions thereafter differs depending on the effect to be executed.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits the display result designation command in step S268 of FIG. 13-8, and sets the transmission of the decorative symbol stop command in step 059AKS021 of FIG. 13-15. The effect control CPU 120 sets the execution of the effect based on the content of the received display result specification command in the stop symbol setting process of FIGS. 13-26, and receives the received symbol confirmation command in the process of step 059AKS133 of FIG. 13-30. Set the number of time reductions specified by. According to this, the effect control can be preferably performed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the contents of the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122 in the process of step 059AKS090A in FIG. 13-24, thereby transmitting the display result specification command and the variation pattern specification command. When it is judged whether or not the command can be received normally, and when the command cannot be received normally, the missing time processing shown in FIG. 13-25 is executed, and either the display result specification command or the variation pattern specification command is missed. , It is prohibited to perform a time-saving effect such as a time-saving fanning effect, such as stopping and displaying a predetermined decorative pattern at the time of missing. According to this, it is possible to suitably perform the production while preventing the deterioration of the game interest.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect control CPU 120 could not be normally received in the process of step 059AKS090A in FIG. 13-24, the variation pattern specification command can be normally received and is specified by the variation pattern specification command. When the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern for determining the time reduction or a fluctuation pattern for the time reduction, the stop symbol setting process is executed in step 059AKS095 of FIG. 13-25 to execute an effect related to the time reduction state such as a time reduction fanning effect. It is possible. According to this, it is possible to suitably perform the production while preventing the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the number of time reductions by the received symbol confirmation command in the process of step 059AKS133 in FIG. 13-30. Then, when the symbol confirmation command cannot be received normally, the time saving number notification is executed by performing the special time saving number notification control that displays "??? times" as the notification of the time saving number in the process of step 059AKS139. Restrict. According to this, it is possible to suitably perform the production while preventing the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the hold display change effect in the read-ahead notice setting process shown in FIGS. 13-22. Then, in the hold storage currently stored in step 059AKS082, the variable display result is a hold that becomes a "big hit", a hold that becomes a "loss (time reduction)", or a hold that is a "loss" and the fluctuation pattern is "time reduction". When the hold of the fluctuation pattern is stored, the hold change determination table at the time of limitation shown in FIG. 13-23 (B) is selected, and the hold display change effect is executed. That is, when a hold whose variable display result is "missing (time reduction)" is stored in the currently stored hold storage, the execution of the hold display change effect is restricted. According to this, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in step 059AKS082, the variable display result is "big hit" in the hold storage currently stored, the hold is "loss (time reduction)", or the fluctuation pattern is "loss" and the fluctuation pattern is "time reduction". When the hold of the fluctuation pattern is stored, the hold change determination table at the time of limitation shown in FIG. 13-23 (B) is selected and the hold display change effect is executed. Even when the hold in which the display result is "big hit" is stored, as in the case where the hold in which the variable display result is "miss (time reduction)" is stored in the currently stored hold storage, FIG. 13 Select the hold change determination table at the time of restriction shown in -23 (B) to restrict the execution of the hold display change effect. According to this, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the production due to the transition of the state, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, in step 059AKS082, the variable display result is "big hit" in the hold storage currently stored, the hold is "loss (time reduction)", or the fluctuation pattern is "loss" and the fluctuation pattern is "time reduction". When the hold of the fluctuation pattern is stored, the hold change determination table at the time of limitation shown in FIG. 13-23 (B) is selected and the hold display change effect is executed. Even when the display result is "missing" and the holding of the fluctuation pattern whose fluctuation pattern is "time saving" is stored, the execution of the hold display change effect is restricted. According to this, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest when the production related to the state transition is performed.

As shown in FIG. 13-23 (B), the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the hold display change effect when the hold display change effect is restricted, or even if the hold display change effect is executed, the hold display change of the display mode of "blue" is changed. Perform the production. That is, the hold display change effect indicating the degree of expectation higher than the display mode of "green" is not executed. According to this, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the production due to the transition of the state, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-23 (B), the effect control CPU 120 does not execute a hold display change effect of a type that changes to a display mode such as "green" or "red" when the hold display change effect is restricted. .. According to this, since the execution of a specific type of advance notice effect is restricted, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest without giving the player a sense of unnecessary expectation.

(Modification example of feature part 059AK)
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-5, an example is shown in which the time saving symbol as a special figure display result is a part of "loss", but this is an example. For example, as shown in FIGS. 13-38, a part of the small hit symbol may be a time-saving symbol. In this case, the time saving control may be performed after the end of the small hit game state, and the right-handed instruction display or the like may be performed in the first variable display performed after the end of the small hit game state. Further, as in the above embodiment, even when the small hit symbol which is the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed again in the special drawing game in the time saving state, the time saving state is not newly controlled, and the effect control CPU 120 is used. Instead of the small hit symbol including the time saving symbol, the combination of the decorative symbols constituting the small hit may be simply stopped and displayed.

Further, in the above embodiment, when all the variable displays corresponding to the remaining hold are completed, the left-handed instruction command is transmitted in the process of step 059AKS074 in FIG. 13-18, and the remaining hold is performed by the effect control CPU 120. An example of performing a left-handed instruction display in the first variable display performed after the end of the variable display corresponding to the above is shown. There may be a second aspect that is inconspicuous to the player, and the left-handed instruction display of the second aspect may be performed in the first variable display that is performed after the end of the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold. The left-handed instruction display is performed for 5 seconds each time from the reception of the left-handed instruction command to the time when the variable display is performed four times, for example, from the second aspect with the lapse of time. It may change to the first aspect. Further, the left-handed instruction display is not limited to a simple display, and may include voice, lighting of a lamp, and the like (that is, left-handed notification for notifying left-handed). Then, for example, in the first aspect, the other output sound is erased and the sound for notifying the left-handed is output, while in the second aspect, the sound for notifying the left-handed is output without erasing the other output sound. do it.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the return effect is performed when the variable display (variation) corresponding to the first (first) second special figure performed after the end of the time reduction is performed, but this is an example. Is. The execution timing of the return effect is not limited to the first variable display after the end of the time reduction. , Any of the timings of the 1st to 3rd variable displays performed after the end of the time reduction may be determined by lottery as the execution timing of the return effect. In addition, after the return effect of the return failure pattern is executed, the pattern is switched to the return success pattern, and after the return effect of the return failure pattern is executed, the return effect of the return success pattern is performed in the next variable display. The return effect may be executed a plurality of times until a success pattern is reached over the display.

In the above embodiment, there is an example in which the pattern of the time saving fanning effect executed according to the time saving type is different, that is, when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining hold is "missing (time saving)" (time saving of time saving C or D). An example is shown in which the pattern of the time saving fanning effect is different depending on the type and the case where the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is "loss (time saving)" (time saving type of time saving A or B). This is an example. There are cases where the variable display result corresponding to the remaining hold is "loss (time reduction)" and cases where the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is "loss (time reduction)". , The pattern of the time-saving fanning effect may be common.

Further, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13-15, when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining hold is "loss (time reduction)" (time reduction type of time reduction C or D), or in the normal state. An example in which the time (confirmation time) from the display of the variable display result to the confirmation is different depending on the case where the variable display result of the first special figure is "loss (time reduction)" (time reduction type of time reduction A or B). Is shown, but this is just an example. When the variable display result corresponding to the remaining hold is "loss (time reduction)" (time reduction type of time reduction C or D), the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is "loss (time reduction)". The fixed time may be the same depending on the case (time saving type A or B). According to this, it is possible to suppress an increase in control data.

For example, the fixed time when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining hold is "loss (time reduction)" is the same as the case where the variable display result of the first special figure is "loss (time reduction)" in the normal state. It may be time. According to this, by lengthening the period between the normal state and the time saving state, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the time saving state will be achieved.

In addition, when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining hold is "loss (time reduction)" (time reduction type of time reduction C or D), the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is "loss (time reduction)". (FIGS. 13-35 (N-1) and 13-33 (E)) show an example in which, for example, the number of times of time reduction in a common mode is notified in the fixed time in the case of (time reduction type A or B). However, these may be in different modes.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the right-handed instruction display is deleted after the end of the time saving state and the right-handed instruction display is not performed during the remaining hold period, but this is an example. The right-handed instruction display is not limited to a simple display, but may include voice, lighting of a lamp, etc. (that is, it may be a right-handed notification that notifies right-handed), and an image is displayed during the remaining hold period. The right-handed lamp indicating right-handedness may be turned on without displaying and outputting the sound in the device 5.

Further, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-37 (B), when the final variable display of the predetermined time reduction number of times is completed, a symbol confirmation signal indicating a lost symbol stop is output, and the symbol confirmation is performed. Since the time saving state ends at the timing when the signal output is stopped, an example is shown in which the output with the jackpot signal 3 is stopped at the timing, but this is an example. For example, the variable display result corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure stored at the end of the time reduction has a high ratio of "loss (time reduction)", so that even if the time reduction state ends, it remains. The output of the jackpot signal 3 may not be stopped until the variable display corresponding to the hold is completed. The same applies to the jackpot signal 2. According to this, it is possible to preferably identify the time saving state and the consecutive villa state with an external device.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which a time-saving fanning effect is performed after the reach effect of the super reach, and it is suggested whether or not the time-saving symbol is stopped, but this is an example. For example, as a result of the reach effect, the results of big hit (including small hit), time saving symbol stop, and loss may be displayed. According to this, the variation of the execution result of the reach effect is increased, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)", an example of adding the time reduction fanning effect period to the fluctuation pattern is shown, but in addition to this, for example, the "revival jackpot" is variable. A display result is provided, the same fluctuation pattern as when the variable display result is "missing (shorter time)" can be selected, the revival effect period to be executed after the reach effect is added (for example, 20 seconds), and a big hit is configured after the revival effect. The symbol (special symbol and corresponding decorative symbol) to be displayed may be stopped and displayed. According to this, the variation of the production is increased and the game entertainment can be improved. Further, when the variable display result is "revival jackpot", a process of adding the revival effect period may be executed after step S262 of FIG. 13-8, and the variation of the effect can be increased by a simple process. can.

In the above-described embodiment, after the effect of inciting whether or not the variable display result is a big hit is performed by the reach effect of the super reach, the effect of inciting whether or not the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed is performed by the time-saving fanning effect. In addition to this, for example, in the time saving fanning effect, in addition to whether or not the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed, whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed is more advantageous than the time saving. May be notified. According to this, the expectation that a specific display result can be obtained can be maintained.

Further, in the above embodiment, the symbol confirmation command cannot be normally received in steps S809 and 059AKS137 of FIG. 13-30, and the special symbol display result (variable display result) is the symbol in "loss (time reduction)". If it is a confirmation command, an example of limiting the notification of the number of time reductions by performing the special time reduction notification control that displays "??? times" as the notification of the number of time reductions in step 059AKS139 is shown. The background image may be changed according to the number of time reductions so that the player can specify the number of time reductions to some extent even when the special time reduction notification control is performed. Specifically, the background designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 side according to the remaining number of time reductions, and the background image specified by the received background designation command is displayed on the effect control board 12 side. do it. According to this, since the player can specify the number of time reductions to some extent from the background image, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, each time the variable display is executed, the main board 11 side sends a time reduction number designation command indicating the remaining time reduction number, and the effect control board 12 side sends the remaining time reduction number according to the time reduction number designation command. The number of times may be notified. According to this, even when the special time reduction notification control is performed, the player can specify the remaining time reduction number of times, so that it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest. Further, for example, when the number of time reductions is 100, a special fluctuation pattern may be transmitted from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side at the timing when the remaining 50 times are reached. On the side, the remaining 50 times of time saving notification may be performed according to the reception of the special fluctuation pattern. According to this, even when the special time reduction notification control is performed, the player can specify the remaining time reduction number of times, so that it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest.

In the above embodiment, the variable display result is a "big hit" in the hold memory currently stored in step 059AKS082 of FIG. 13-22, a hold that is a "loss (time reduction)", or a "loss". When the hold of the change pattern whose change pattern is "time saving" is stored, an example of selecting the hold change determination table at the time of limitation shown in FIG. 13-23 (B) and executing the hold display change effect, that is, , When a hold whose variable display result is "missing (time reduction)" is stored in the currently stored hold storage, or when a hold whose variable display result is "big hit" is stored, FIG. 13- An example is shown in which the common limited-time hold change determination table shown in 23 (B) is selected and the execution of the hold display change effect is restricted, but this is an example. The hold that the variable display result is "missing (time saving)" is stored in the hold storage that is currently stored, and the hold that the variable display result is "big hit" is stored. The execution of the hold display change effect may be restricted by selecting the hold change determination table at the time of restriction. For example, on the one hand, the pre-reading notice effect of the hold display change effect may be executed, and on the other hand, the pre-reading notice effect of the dialogue notice may be executed. In this case, it is sufficient to execute a kind of production with a low degree of expectation. In addition, if a hold that causes the variable display result to be "missing (time reduction)" is stored in the currently stored hold memory, the hold display change effect is not executed and the variable display result becomes a "big hit". When the hold is stored, it may be determined whether or not the hold change effect is executed based on the hold change determination table which does not have the display mode of "green" or more shown in FIG. 13-23 (B).

Further, in the above embodiment, a hold in which the variable display result becomes a "big hit" in the hold storage currently stored in step 059AKS082 in FIG. When the hold of the change pattern of "Loss" and the change pattern of "Time saving" is stored, select the hold change determination table at the time of limitation shown in FIG. 13-23 (B), and expect the degree of expectation to be "green" or higher. An example is shown in which the hold display change effect is not executed, but this is an example. For example, in addition to the hold display change effect as the look-ahead notice effect, a plurality of types of look-ahead notice effects such as a dialogue notice and a look-ahead zone notice can be executed, and if Yes is determined in step 059AKS082 of FIG. 13-22, the look-ahead notice is performed. The look-ahead notice effect of the zone notice type may not be executed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being distracted from the hold stored before the read-ahead notice target.

In the above embodiment, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and the special symbols are numbers indicating "0" to "9" and "-". An example represented by a lighting pattern or the like is shown, but this is an example. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of eight LEDs, for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-39, and the special symbol is represented by a lighting combination of these eight LEDs. May be good. Specifically, as shown in the figure, when the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit", it is represented by lighting of three of the eight LEDs, and the variable display result is "missing (time saving)". In the case of "" and "missing", it may be represented by lighting of two LEDs.

Further, in the above embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. 13-34 (L-1), as shown in FIG. 13-34 (M-1), “time saving D” is performed at the central portion of the image display device 5. An example is shown in which the time-saving symbol 5Cb of the time-saving type is displayed as a final stop symbol, and this is an example. For example, as shown in FIG. 13-40, after the state shown in FIG. 13-40 (L-1) (similar to FIG. 13-34 (L-1)), the time saving return symbol 5Cc is stopped and displayed. Since the time-saving return small symbol M5 to be visible is displayed and it has already been notified that the time-saving symbol will stop during the remaining hold period, as shown in FIG. 13-40 (M-3), the decorative symbol is displayed. The variable display of the above may be reduced and displayed (referred to as the reduced symbol M8), and the result display M7, which is the result of whether or not the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed, may be displayed large in the center of the image display device 5. According to this, the game can be sharpened and the game can be improved. Since it has already been notified that the time-saving symbol will stop during the remaining hold period, the execution of the active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display may be restricted during the remaining hold period. In addition to not executing, the restriction may include executing in a mode with low expectation, or executing in an inconspicuous manner such as making the display smaller or transparent.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 059AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 059AK is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result is displayed as the variable display result.
A state control means that can control a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) and
It is provided with an effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S172) capable of executing an effect corresponding to the variable display.
The state control means
When a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, a special figure display result of "loss (time reduction)") is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the normal display result is based on the special display result. Control from the state to the special state (for example, execute the process of step 059AKS025).
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result in the special state, the control based on the special display result is not performed (for example, when Yes is determined in step 059AKS006, the process of step 059AKS006A is not executed).
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result, the effect executing means can execute different effects depending on whether it is in the normal state or the special state (for example, the process of step 059AKS092). Execute, etc.),
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
As the variable display, the identification information is variably displayed, and the identification information for production is variably displayed in response to the variable display of the identification information (for example, the variable display of the first special figure and the second special figure and the decorative symbol). Variable display, etc.),
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result, the identification information common to the normal state and the special state is displayed (for example, FIGS. 13-32 (B-2)) and As shown in (D-1), the special figure display result as "loss (time reduction)" (special display result) is common to the case where the game state is the normal state and the case where the time is shortened. (Special figure display result indicating the number "1" which is the time saving symbol of the time saving type of "time saving A")), the identification information for the effect different between the normal state and the special state. (For example, regarding the variable display result of the decorative symbol, when the game state is the normal state, the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 059AKS106 of FIGS. 13-26, while the time saving is shortened. When it is in the state, the final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is stopped and displayed in step 059AKS111 in FIGS. 13-26).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest when the special display result is displayed in the special state.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
In the normal state, the effect executing means can execute a special effect suggesting that the special display result is displayed as the variable display result (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is No. 1 in step 059AKS102. If it is determined that, the process of step 059AKS104 can be executed, etc.), if it is in the special state, the special effect is not executed (for example, if it is determined that Yes in step 059AKS102, the process of step 059AKS104 is not executed, etc.) ),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest when the special display result is displayed in the special state.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result, the time from the display of the variable display result to the confirmation is different between the normal state and the special state (for example, the normal state). If so, while the decorative symbol stop command for the fixed time shown in FIG. 13-15 (B) is transmitted in the process of step 059AKS043, if Yes is determined in step 059AKS041, the fixed time is set to 0.5 seconds. (Send a command to stop the decorative pattern, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest when the special display result is displayed in the special state.

(Explanation of means relating to feature unit 060AK)
The feature unit 059AK includes the following feature unit 060AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 060AK is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result is displayed as the variable display result.
A state control means that can control a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) and
It is provided with an effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S172) capable of executing an effect corresponding to the variable display.
The state control means
When a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, a special figure display result of "loss (time reduction)") is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the normal display result is based on the special display result. Control from the state to the special state (for example, execute the process of step 059AKS025).
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result in the special state, the control based on the special display result is not performed (for example, when Yes is determined in step 059AKS006, the process of step 059AKS006A is not executed).
As the variable display, the first identification information and the second identification information are variably displayed, and the effect identification information is variably displayed in response to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. The variable display result of the second identification information has a higher ratio of displaying the special display result than the variable display result of the first identification information (for example, the first special figure display result determination table and the second special). In the figure display result determination table, the probability that the second special figure display result determination table is determined to control the special figure display result from the next variable display to the time reduction state as "loss (time reduction)" is higher. , Decision data is assigned, etc.),
The effect executing means is
It is possible to execute different effects depending on whether or not the information regarding the variable display stored at the end of the special state includes the information that the variable display result becomes the special display result (for example, for effect control). The CPU 120 can execute the process of step 059AKS108, etc.),
The second identification information stored at the end of the special state by notifying that the game medium should be launched to a specific path in the game area during control to the special state (for example, executing the process of step 059AKS090). The information regarding the variable display of the above is stored at the end of the special state depending on whether the variable display result includes the information that becomes the special display result or the information that becomes the special display result. Until the variable display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information is completed, the notification that the game medium should be launched to the normal route different from the specific route is not performed (for example, right in the process of step 059AKS090). The striking instruction display is possible, and until the left striking instruction command transmitted in step 059AKS074 is received, that is, until all the variable displays corresponding to the hold of the second special figure stored at the end of the time saving state are completed. Do not display left-handed instructions, etc.),
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The effect executing means is
Notifying that the game medium should be launched to the normal path in the advantageous state and the normal state different from the special state (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 059AKS088) is performed.
In the variable display of the first identification information, which is executed first after the variable display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state is completed, the game medium to the normal route. (In the variable display performed after receiving the left-handed instruction command, that is, after the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold is completed, the left-handed instruction display is displayed in step 059AKS088, etc.).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, suitable launch notification is possible, and the game can be smoothly progressed.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The effect executing means is stored when the special display result is displayed as the variable display result of the first identification information in the advantageous state and the normal state different from the special state, and when the special state ends. When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information, the notification that the game medium should be launched to the specific route performed during control in the special state. The mode is different (for example, right-handed instruction display of the mode according to the command received in step 059AKS090 is performed).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being annoyed and deteriorating the game interest.

(4) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
The effect executing means includes a case where the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state includes information that the variable display result becomes the special display result, and the special display. In the variable display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state, different effects are obtained after the common effect is executed, depending on whether the resulting information is included. (For example, the return effect includes a return effect of a return success pattern and a return effect of a return failure pattern, and both perform a common effect (for example, an effect aimed at clearing a predetermined mission). However, as a result, the combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed differs depending on whether or not the specified mission is cleared),
You may do so.

With such a configuration, it is possible to attract the player's attention after performing a common effect.

(5) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above.
The effect executing means is stored when the special display result is displayed as the variable display result of the first identification information in the advantageous state and the normal state different from the special state, and when the special state ends. The effect when the special display result is controlled as the variable display result corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information is different from that when the special display result is controlled (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-28). The pattern of the time saving fanning effect that is executed depends on the time saving type, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, different patterns of production are executed depending on the situation, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

(6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above.
The case where the special display result is displayed as the variable display result of the first identification information in the advantageous state and the normal state different from the special state, and the case where the second identification information is stored at the end of the special state. The display time of the special display result is the same as when the special display result is displayed as the variable display result corresponding to the information related to the variable display (for example, the variable display result corresponding to the remaining hold is "missing (time reduction)). (Time saving type of time saving C or D) and the case where the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is "missing (time saving)" (time saving type of time saving A or B). Time is common, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in control data.

(7) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above.
The effect executing means is
During execution of the variable display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state, the notification that the game medium should be launched to the specific route is not performed (for example, the process of step 059AKS136). Etc.),
In the first variable display executed after the special display result is displayed, a notification that the game medium should be launched to the specific route is given (for example, the process of step 059AKS090 is executed).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, suitable launch notification is possible, and the game can be smoothly progressed.

(8) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above.
A first signal output means (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a jackpot signal 1) capable of outputting a first signal corresponding to being controlled in the advantageous state, and
A second signal output means (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a jackpot signal 2) capable of outputting a second signal corresponding to being controlled to the advantageous state or the special state, and
A third signal output means capable of outputting a third signal corresponding to being controlled in the special state (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a jackpot signal 3),
A fourth signal output means (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a symbol confirmation signal) capable of outputting a fourth signal corresponding to the end of the variable display is provided.
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result, the fourth signal is output by the fourth signal output means and the third signal is output by the third signal output means at the end of the variable display. Output (for example, when the time saving state is reached due to the time saving symbol stop, as shown in FIG. 13-37 (B), the symbol confirmation signal indicating the time saving symbol stop is output, and the timing at which the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped is stopped. (For example, a big hit signal is output),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably specify the time saving state and the consecutive villa state with an external device.

(9) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above.
A first signal output means (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a jackpot signal 1) capable of outputting a first signal corresponding to being controlled in the advantageous state, and
A second signal output means (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a jackpot signal 2) capable of outputting a second signal corresponding to being controlled to the advantageous state or the special state, and
A third signal output means (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a jackpot signal 3) capable of outputting a third signal corresponding to being controlled in the special state is provided.
The third signal output means continues to output the third signal until the variable display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state is completed (time reduction). Even when the state ends, the output of the jackpot signal 3 is not stopped until the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold ends),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably specify the time saving state and the consecutive villa state with an external device.

(10) The gaming machine according to (8) or (9) above.
The output of the second signal and the third signal are stopped at the same time (for example, at the timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal corresponding to the end of the time saving state is stopped, the outputs of the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 are the same. Stop at the timing, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably specify the time saving state and the consecutive villa state with an external device.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 061AK)
The feature portion 059AK includes the following feature portion 061AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 061AK is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result is displayed as the variable display result.
A state control means that can control a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) and
It is provided with an effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S172) capable of executing an effect corresponding to the variable display.
When the state control means displays a special display result (for example, a special figure display result of "loss (time reduction)") different from the specific display result as the variable display result in the normal state, the special display result. Based on this, the normal state is controlled to the special state (for example, the process of step 059AKS025 is executed).
The effect executing means is
Depending on whether the variable display result is the specific display result or the special display result, a plurality of types of common specific effects can be executed (for example, a plurality of types of reach effects can be executed).
The ratio of the special display result differs depending on which type of the specific effect is executed among the plurality of types of the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-12, “” depending on the type of super reach. The rate of "loss (shorter working hours)" is different, etc.),
While controlling to the special state, the game medium should be notified to be launched to the specific route in the game area, and the game medium should be launched to the specific route in the first variable display executed after the special display result is displayed. Start the notification (for example, display a right-handed instruction in a mode corresponding to the command received in step 059AKS090).
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The effect executing means is common to the specific display result, the special display result, and the specific display result and the predetermined display result different from the special display result. Multiple types of effects can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-11 and 11-12, when the reach effects of Super Reach B and Super Reach C are executed, if a big hit occurs, a loss (time reduction) occurs. In the case of a simple loss, the decision value is assigned so that multiple variable display results are obtained, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, the variation of the production result is increased and the game entertainment can be improved.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
As the variable display, the identification information is variablely displayed, and the identification information for production is variablely displayed in response to the variable display of the identification information (for example, the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed).
Determining means for determining the variable display result (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) and
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the process of step S111) that determines a variable display pattern of the identification information based on the determination result of the determining means, and
A command transmitting means (for example, changed in step S268) for transmitting a variable display result command indicating a variable display result determined by the determining means and a variable display pattern command indicating a variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means. It is further equipped with a pattern specification command, a CPU 103 that sends a display result specification command, etc.).
The variable display pattern determining means has a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result when the variable display result determined by the determination means becomes the specific display result, the special display result, and the specific display result. In some cases, a common variable display pattern can be determined (for example, a variable pattern that performs super reach B or super reach C can be determined regardless of the variable display result).
Variable display of the effect identification information is performed based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmission means (for example, the processes of steps S171 and S172 are executed).
When the effect executing means receives a variable display pattern command indicating the common variable display pattern, the effect executing means executes a different effect depending on the type of the received variable display result command (for example, when it is determined as No in step S552). Even so, different effects are executed depending on whether the command is determined to be Yes or No by 059AKS101).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, the variation of the production result is increased and the game entertainment can be improved.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
After executing the specific effect, the effect executing means can execute a special effect suggesting whether or not the special display result is obtained (for example, after executing the reach effect of super reach, the time-saving fanning effect can be executed. Etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, since the special effect is executed, the game entertainment can be improved.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above.
After executing the specific effect, the effect executing means can execute a special effect suggesting whether or not the special display result is obtained, and whether or not the special effect is executed differs depending on the type of the specific effect (for example,). Depending on the type of reach effect to be executed, the rate at which the time-saving fanning effect is executed differs, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being excessively executed, and it is possible to maintain the expectation that a specific display result will be obtained.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above.
The effect executing means can execute a special effect suggesting whether or not the special display result is obtained after executing the specific effect, and when the special effect is executed depending on the type of the specific effect, the effect is described. The ratio of the special display result is different (for example, the ratio of the time saving fanning effect being executed differs depending on the type of reach effect to be executed, and the ratio of the time saving symbol being stopped and displayed as the execution result of the time saving fanning effect is also different. Different, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being excessively executed, and it is possible to maintain the expectation that a specific display result will be obtained.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above.
The effect executing means is
It is possible to further execute a predetermined effect different from the specific effect (for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the active display).
Depending on the execution mode of the predetermined effect, the ratio of the special display result when the specific effect is executed differs (for example, depending on which display mode the active display display mode changes to, the same type of supermarket Even in the reach production of reach, the rate at which the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed is different),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being excessively executed, and it is possible to maintain the expectation that a specific display result will be obtained.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above.
The effect executing means can execute a special effect suggesting whether or not the special display result is obtained after executing the specific effect, and executes an effect of notifying the specific display result after executing the special effect. It is possible (for example, in the time saving fanning effect, in addition to whether or not the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed, it is notified that the advantage is higher than the time saving, such as whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed). ,
You may do so.

With such a configuration, the expectation that a specific display result can be obtained can be maintained.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above.
As the variable display, the identification information is variablely displayed, and the identification information for production is variablely displayed in response to the variable display of the identification information (for example, the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed).
Determining means for determining the variable display result (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) and
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the process of step S111) that determines a variable display pattern of the identification information based on the determination result of the determining means, and
A command transmitting means (for example, changed in step S268) for transmitting a variable display result command indicating a variable display result determined by the determining means and a variable display pattern command indicating a variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means. It is further equipped with a pattern specification command, a CPU 103 that sends a display result specification command, etc.).
The variable display pattern determining means has a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result when the variable display result determined by the determination means becomes the specific display result, the special display result, and the specific display result. In some cases, a common variable display pattern can be determined (for example, a variable pattern that performs super reach B or super reach C can be determined regardless of the variable display result).
In the variable display of the identification information, the variable display time of the identification information is set based on the variable display result determined by the determination means and the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means (for example, the CPU 103 sets the variable display time of the identification information in step 059AKS013). Perform processing, etc.),
In the variable display of the effect identification information, the variable display time of the effect identification information is specified based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmission means (for example, effect control). CPU 120 executes the process of step S561),
When the types of the received variable display result commands are different, the effect executing means can execute a common effect if the received variable display pattern command is a variable display pattern command indicating the common variable display pattern. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach effect of Super Reach B even when the content indicated by the display result specification command is different),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, the effect can be suitably executed.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above.
There are multiple types of the special display results (for example, "time saving A" to "time saving D").
The state control means can control the special state having a different period according to the type of the special display result (for example, it can control the time reduction state of the number of time reductions according to the time reduction type).
The effect executing means can execute different types of effects depending on the type of the special display result in the variable display that is the special display result (for example, "time reduction B" rather than the time reduction type of "time reduction A". The execution rate of Super Reach C is higher in the time-saving type, and the pattern of the time-saving fanning effect executed according to the time-saving type is different),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to attract the attention of the player because the number of time reductions thereafter differs depending on the effect to be executed.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10) above.
There are multiple types of the special display results (for example, "time saving A" to "time saving D").
The state control means can control the special state having a different period according to the type of the special display result (for example, it can control the time reduction state of the number of time reductions according to the time reduction type).
It is possible to send a first command indicating the number of variable displays executed during control in the special state, and after sending the first command, it is possible to send a second command different from the first command (for example,). In step S268, the display result specification command is transmitted, and in step 059AKS021, the transmission setting of the decorative symbol stop command is performed, such as CPU103).
The effect executing means determines the effect during variable display based on the received first command, and specifies the number of variable displays executed during control to the special state based on the received second command. (For example, the effect corresponding to the content of the display result specification command is executed, and the number of time reductions specified by the received symbol confirmation command is set in step 059AKS133, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, the effect control can be preferably performed.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (11) above.
Determining means for determining the variable display result (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) and
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the process of step S111) that determines a variable display pattern of the identification information based on the determination result of the determining means, and
A command transmitting means (for example, changed in step S268) for transmitting a variable display result command indicating a variable display result determined by the determining means and a variable display pattern command indicating a variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means. It is further equipped with a pattern specification command, a CPU 103 that sends a display result specification command, etc.).
The effect executing means executes the effect based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmitting means, and either the variable display result command or the variable display pattern command. If one of them cannot be received normally, the execution of the effect related to the special state is restricted (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 059AKS090B).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform the production while preventing the deterioration of the game interest.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12) above.
Determining means for determining the variable display result (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) and
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the process of step S111) that determines a variable display pattern of the identification information based on the determination result of the determining means, and
A command transmitting means (for example, changed in step S268) for transmitting a variable display result command indicating a variable display result determined by the determining means and a variable display pattern command indicating a variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means. It is further equipped with a pattern specification command, a CPU 103 that sends a display result specification command, etc.).
The effect executing means is
An effect is executed based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmitting means (for example, the process of step S171 is executed).
When the variable display pattern command is normally received but the variable display result cannot be normally received, the effect related to the special state can be executed when the received variable display pattern command is a specific variable display pattern. Yes (for example, the process of step 059AKS095 can be executed).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform the production while preventing the deterioration of the game interest.

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (13) above.
There are multiple types of the special display results.
The state control means can control the special state having a different period according to the type of the special display result (for example, it can control the time reduction state of the number of time reductions according to the time reduction type).
It is possible to send a first command indicating the number of variable displays executed during control in the special state, and after sending the first command, it is possible to send a second command different from the first command (for example,). In step S268, the display result specification command is transmitted, and in step 059AKS021, the transmission setting of the decorative symbol stop command is performed, such as CPU103).
The effect executing means determines the effect during variable display based on the received first command, and notifies the number of variable displays executed during control to the special state based on the received second command. If the second command cannot be received normally, the notification of the number of variable displays executed during control in the special state is limited (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 059AKS139).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform the production while preventing the deterioration of the game interest.

(Explanation of means relating to feature part 062AK)
The feature section 059AK includes the following feature section 062AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 062AK is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result is displayed as the variable display result.
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls the progress of the game, and
It is provided with an effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes an effect based on an effect control command) capable of executing an effect based on information from the game control means.
The game control means
Determining means for determining the advantageous state (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) and
A determination means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S213) for determining that the advantageous state is obtained before the determination of the determination means, and
A state control means that can control a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) and
Information transmitting means (for example, effect control) capable of transmitting a plurality of types of information including determination result information that can be specified to be controlled to the advantageous state when the determination means determines that the advantageous state is obtained. CPU 103 that sends commands, etc.), including
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result ( For example, the process of step 059AKS025 is executed),
The determination means can determine that the state control means will be in the special state before the state control means controls the special state (for example, the process of step 059AKS001 is executed).
The information transmitting means can transmit special information that can be specified to be controlled to the special state when the determination means determines to be in the special state (for example, designating a display result of "loss (time reduction)"). Commands can be sent, etc.),
The effect executing means is
When the determination result information is received, the look-ahead effect can be executed based on the determination result information (for example, the process of step S161 can be executed).
When the determination result information is received after receiving the special information, the execution of the look-ahead effect based on the determination result information is restricted (for example, when it is determined Yes in step 059AKS082, the processes of step 059AKS084 and step S1304). Etc.),
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The effect executing means is
When the determination result information is newly received after receiving the determination result information indicating that the control is performed in the advantageous state, the execution of the look-ahead effect based on the newly received determination result information is further restricted ( For example, if a hold whose variable display result is a "big hit" is stored in the currently stored hold storage, it is determined as Yes in step 059AKS082),
During the limitation of the look-ahead effect, the look-ahead effect can be executed in the same manner as the look-ahead effect that can be executed when the determination result information is received after receiving the special information (for example, in step 059AKS084 and step S1304). Execute processing, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the production due to the state transition and prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The effect executing means is
When the determination result information is newly received after receiving the determination result information indicating that the suggestion effect suggesting whether or not the special state is controlled is executed, the newly received determination result information is added to the newly received determination result information. Further restricting the execution of the pre-reading effect (for example, if a hold for executing the time-saving fanning effect is stored in the currently stored hold memory, it is determined as Yes in step 059AKS082).
During the limitation of the look-ahead effect, the look-ahead effect can be executed in the same manner as the look-ahead effect that can be executed when the determination result information is received after receiving the special information (for example, in step 059AKS084 and step S1304). Execute processing, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game when the effect related to the state transition is performed.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
While the pre-reading effect is restricted, the effect executing means does not execute the pre-reading effect in an aspect indicating that the advantage controlled in the advantageous state is equal to or higher than the specific advantage (for example, FIG. 13-23 (B)). (For example, do not execute the hold display change effect above "green" as shown in),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the production due to the state transition and prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above.
The effect executing means does not execute a specific type of the look-ahead effect while the look-ahead effect is restricted (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-23 (B), when the hold display change effect is restricted, “green” or “green” or “ Do not execute the type of hold display change effect that changes to a display mode such as "red"),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, since the execution of a specific type of advance notice effect is restricted, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest without giving a useless expectation to the player.

(Explanation of feature part 063AK)
Hereinafter, the feature unit 063AK according to this embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 14-1, the game area 2 formed on the board surface of the game board includes a left game area 063AK1 on the left side of the top side of the image display device 5 and a right side side of the top side of the image display device 5. A right game area 063AK2 is provided. The left game area 063AK1 and the right game area 063AK2 may be separated by, for example, the end face of the image display device 5 inside the game area 2 or the arrangement PL of the nails. When the game ball (game medium) launched from the hitting ball launching device and driven into the game area 2 is guided to the left game area 063AK1, for example, by being guided along the arrangement PL of the nails, the right game area. It becomes impossible or difficult to induce to 063AK2. Further, when the game ball launched from the hitting ball launching device and driven into the game area 2 is guided to the right game area 063AK2, for example, by being guided along the arrangement PL of the nails, the game ball is guided to the left game area 063AK1. And it becomes impossible or difficult to induce.

The left game area 063AK1 is provided with a general winning opening 10 and a winning ball device 6A. On the other hand, the right game area 063AK2 is provided with a variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) and a special variable winning ball device 7 (variable means). The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the variable winning ball device 6B.

The general winning opening 10 is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can win a prize by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball wins (enters) the general winning opening 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is paid out as a prize ball.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening in which a game ball is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can be won by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball wins in the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first start condition, which is a condition for executing the first special figure game, can be satisfied. .. The variable winning ball device 6B forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). When a game ball wins in the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started.

As shown in FIG. 14-2, the special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door 063AK3 that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2) for the large winning opening door (for a special electric accessory). The large winning opening door 063AK3 has a large winning opening 063AK4 that changes between an open state in which the game ball is easy to win (first state) and a closed state in which the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win (second state). ing. FIG. 14-2 shows a state in which the large winning opening door 063AK3 is in a closed state of the large winning opening 064AK4.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door is off, the big winning door 063AK3 closes the big winning door 063AK4, and the game ball wins the big winning door 063AK4. Impossible or difficult to win. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door is on, the big winning door 063AK3 opens the big winning door 063AK4, and the game ball can easily win the big winning door 063AK4. It becomes. When a game ball wins in the large prize opening 063AK4, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball wins in the large winning opening 063AK4, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball wins in, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, or the general winning opening 10.

In the big winning opening 063AK4 formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, the big hit symbol (specific display result) is derived and displayed (stop display) as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, and the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit". , When controlled to the jackpot game state (advantageous state), it is controlled to the open state in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (29 seconds in this embodiment) and the timing until the number of game balls winning in the large winning opening 063AK4 reaches a predetermined number (9 in this embodiment). , Whichever comes first. One cycle in which the large winning opening 063AK4 is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times in the present embodiment) is reached.

Further, in the large winning opening 063AK4 formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, a small hit symbol (special display result) is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, and the display result of the variable display becomes "small hit". , When controlled to the small hit game state, it is controlled to the open state in a predetermined mode. Specifically, in the small hit game state, the open state and the closed state of the large winning opening 063AK4 formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 are repeated. For example, in the small hit game state, the open state for 0.1 seconds and the closed state for 1.0 seconds are repeated. The operation of repeatedly opening and closing the large winning opening 063AK4 is also referred to as opening and closing the large winning opening. The opening and closing of the large winning opening is repeated up to a predetermined upper limit opening number of times (10 times in this embodiment) for 0.1 seconds, or a predetermined upper limit winning number of game balls is placed in the large winning opening 063AK4 (this embodiment). Then, it ends when one of the conditions is satisfied among the winning up to 10).

In the feature unit 063AK, the player is made to perform a game method (hereinafter, referred to as “left-handed”) in which the left game area 063AK1 launches a game ball in a normal state (low accuracy and low base state). A game method in which a game ball is launched into the right game area 063AK2 in a short time state (low accuracy and high base state) while aiming to win a prize in the general winning opening 10 or the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A (a gaming method). Hereinafter, it is referred to as “right-handed”) to aim for winning in the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK, when the player is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the player is made to hit right to the large winning opening 063AK4 formed by the special variable winning ball device 7. It is configured to aim for a prize.

The feature unit 063AK performs a right-handed promotion effect that encourages the player to make a right-handed hit during a period in which the right-handed hit is controlled to a time-saving state, a big hit game state, and a small hit game state.

The game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 formed in the special variable winning ball device 7 passes (enters) the large winning opening switch 063AK5, is detected by the large winning opening switch 063AK5, and then falls into the recess 063AK6. The game ball that has fallen into the recess 063AK6 is guided backward by a guide piece (not shown) and passes through the passage port 063AK7. Behind the passage port 063AK7, a distribution section supply path 063AK8 extending toward the lower left and a discharge path 063AK9 extending toward the lower right are provided.

All the game balls that have won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the big hit game state are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. On the other hand, in the small hit game state, only one of the game balls winning the large winning opening 063AK4 flows down to the distribution unit 063AK18 described later through the distribution unit supply path 063AK8, and the one game Except for the balls, the balls are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9.

14-3 (a) to 14-3 (c) are views showing the configuration of the special variable winning ball device 7 with respect to the feature portion 063AK, as viewed from the arrow I-I in FIG. 14-2. The case is shown. As shown in FIG. 14-3 (a), the special variable winning ball device 7 moves the plunger 063AK11 in the left-right direction by switching between the abbreviated rotating piece 063AK10 and the on state and the off state. It is provided with a solenoid 063AK12 for supplying a distribution unit. The rotating piece 063AK10 has a connecting projection 063AK13 connected to the plunger 063AK11, and rotates about the rotating shaft 063AK14 by switching between the on state and the off state of the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12.

As shown in FIG. 14-3 (a), when the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is in the ON state, the bent surface 063AK15 of the rotating piece 063AK10 faces forward. Further, the lower surface of the distribution section supply path 063AK8 is located at a position lower than the lower surface of the discharge path 063AK9 (provided below). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 14-3 (a), the game ball A1 that first passes through the passage port 063AK7 falls into the distribution section supply path 063AK8, and its movement is restricted by the bending surface 063AK15 of the rotating piece 063AK10. Will be done. As a result, the game ball A1 is held by the rotating piece 063AK10. As shown in FIG. 14-3 (b), the game ball A2 that has passed through 063AK7 following the game ball A1 cannot enter the distribution section supply path 063AK8 due to being blocked by the game ball A1 and proceeds to the right side. Change direction. The game ball A2 flows down the discharge path 063AK9 as it is. The discharge path 063AK9 is provided with a discharge count switch 063AK16, and a game ball that has passed through the discharge path 063AK9 is detected by the discharge count switch 063AK16. The game ball that has passed through the discharge path 063AK9 is discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7. When the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled from the on state to the off state while the rotating piece 063AK10 holds the game ball A1, the plunger 063AK11 supplies the distribution unit as shown in FIG. 14-3 (c). Solenoid 063 AK12 pops out from the main body. As a result, the rotating piece 063AK10 rotates around the rotating shaft 063AK14, and the game ball A1 is repelled toward the distribution section supply path 063AK8. The repelled game ball A1 flows down the distribution section supply path 063AK8.

As shown in FIG. 14-4 (a), the game ball A3 flowing down the distribution section supply path 063AK 8 passes through the distribution section pass switch 063AK17, is detected by the distribution section pass switch 063AK17, and then is distributed. Enter the section 063AK18.

The distribution unit 063AK18 is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7, and guides the game ball that has flowed down through the distribution unit supply path 063AK8 to guide the game ball that has flowed down through the distribution unit supply path 063AK8, and has a jackpot area 063AK19 (specific area) and a time saving area 063AK20 (special area). ) And the loss area 063AK21.

The jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21 are all areas (members) configured to allow the game ball to pass through, and are provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. The jackpot region 063AK19, the time saving region 063AK20, and the loss region 063AK21 are provided below the distribution portion 063AK18.

The game ball that has entered the jackpot area 063AK19 passes through the jackpot area passing switch 063AK22, is detected by the jackpot area passing switch 063AK22, and then passes through the jackpot area discharge path (not shown) to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7. Is discharged to. The game ball discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the jackpot area discharge path is detected by the jackpot area discharge count switch (not shown).

In the special figure game, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed and controlled to the small hit game state, and when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the large winning area 063AK19. Based on this, the game is controlled to the big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state.

The game ball that has entered the time saving area 063AK20 passes through the time saving area passing switch 063AK23, is detected by the time saving area passing switch 063AK23, and then passes through the time saving area discharge path (not shown) to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7. Is discharged to. The game ball discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the time saving area discharge path is detected by the time saving area discharge count switch (not shown).

In the normal state, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game and controlled to the small hit game state, and when the large prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball that wins the large prize opening 063AK4 Based on passing through the time saving area 063AK20, the time saving transition control for controlling the time saving state (special state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state is performed for a predetermined period after the end of the small hit game state. Will be played. On the other hand, in the time saving state, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game and controlled to the small hit game state, and when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball that wins the large winning opening 063AK4. However, when the game has passed the time-saving region 063AK20, the time-saving transition control based on the passage is not performed. That is, when the time saving state is already controlled, even if the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small hit game state, the period during which the time saving transition control is performed to control the time saving state. It is configured so that the control to extend is not performed.

In the present embodiment, in the normal state, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game and controlled to the small hit game state and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the large winning opening 063AK4 is won. When the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the time saving transition control based on the passage is started when the next variable display is started after the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the closed state and the small hit game state is finished. Is performed, and the time is controlled from the normal state to the time saving state. That is, when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, if the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, it is configured not to be controlled to the time saving state until the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the closed state. .. According to such a configuration, after one game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, another game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19 or the loss area 063AK21, so that the game state after the end of the small hit game state It is possible to suppress the possibility that an inconsistency will occur between the control and the production, which will confuse the player and reduce the enjoyment of the game. That is, according to such a configuration, suitable control can be performed according to the state.

The game ball that has entered the loss area 063AK21 passes through the loss area passage switch 063AK24, is detected by the loss area passage switch 063AK24, and then passes through the loss area discharge path (not shown) to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7. Is discharged to. The game ball discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the loss area discharge path is detected by the loss area discharge count switch (not shown).

In the special figure game, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed and controlled to the small hit game state, and when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 has passed through the loss area 063AK21. In this case, after the end of the small hit game state, the control to change the game state based on the passage is not performed.

The jackpot region light emitting portion 063AK25 is provided at the upper end and the lower end of the jackpot region 063AK19. A light emitting portion 063AK26 for a time saving region is provided at an upper end portion and a lower end portion of the time saving region 063AK20. Loss region light emitting units 063AK27 are provided at the upper end and lower end of the loss region 063AK21. The jackpot region light emitting unit 063AK25, the time saving region light emitting unit 063AK26, and the loss region light emitting unit 063AK27 are configured to be visible to the player, and are provided with a light emitting element such as an LED (Light Emitting Diode) so as to be capable of emitting light. .. Although the details will be described later, in the feature unit 063AK, the effect of causing the jackpot region light emitting unit 063AK25, the time saving region light emitting unit 063AK26, and the loss region light emitting unit 063AK27 to emit light in a predetermined manner is performed. FIG. 14-4 (a) shows a state in which the jackpot region light emitting unit 063AK25, the time saving region light emitting unit 063AK26, and the loss region light emitting unit 063AK27 are all turned off.

The distribution unit 063AK18 includes a distribution member 063AK28. The distribution member 063AK28 is formed with a left inclined surface 063AK29 facing diagonally upward to the right and a right inclined surface 063AK30 facing diagonally upward to the left. The game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 is guided by the distribution member 063AK28 and passes through any of the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (b), the distribution unit 063AK18 is provided with a jackpot area entrance 063AK31, a time saving area entrance 063AK32, and a loss area entrance 063AK33. The jackpot area entrance 063AK31, the time saving area entrance 063AK32, and the loss area entrance 063AK33 are all configured to allow game balls to pass through, and are arranged along the left-right direction. The jackpot area entrance 063AK31 communicates with the jackpot area 063AK19, and the game ball that has passed through the jackpot area entrance 063AK31 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19. The time saving area entrance 063AK32 communicates with the time saving area 063AK20, and the game ball that has passed through the time saving area entrance 063AK32 passes through the time saving area 063AK20. The loss area entrance 063AK33 communicates with the loss area 063AK21, and the game ball that has passed through the loss area entrance 063AK33 passes through the loss area 063AK21.

The distribution member 063AK28 is arranged above the jackpot region entrance 063AK31, the time saving region entrance 063AK32, and the loss region entrance 063AK33. The distribution member 063AK28 is formed with a passage port 063AK34 through which a game ball can pass. Hereinafter, in order to facilitate understanding, the P coordinate axes shown in FIG. 14-4 (b) are set. The P coordinate axes are set parallel to the left-right direction. The distribution member 063AK28 is driven by a distribution member motor (not shown), and is located in the left-right direction between the position P6 as the left end position and the position P3 as the right end position shown in FIG. 14-4 (b). Move back and forth along. FIG. 14-4 (b) shows a state in which the distribution member 063AK28 is located at the position P0 as the center position (origin position).

When the distribution member 063AK28 is located at the position P0 shown in FIG. 14-4 (b), the game ball A4 that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 is distributed as shown in FIG. 14-5 (a). It passes through the passage port 063AK34 formed in the member 063AK28, and passes through the time saving area entrance 063AK32. The game ball A4 that has passed through the time saving area entrance 063AK32 passes through the time saving area 063AK20. When the distribution member 063AK28 is located at the position P3 shown in FIG. 14-4 (b), the game ball A5 that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 is distributed as shown in FIG. 14-5 (b). It collides with the left inclined surface 063AK29 formed on the member 063AK28, moves to the left along the inclined direction, and passes through the jackpot region entrance 063AK31 formed on the left side of the distribution portion 063AK18. The game ball A5 that has passed through the jackpot area entrance 063AK31 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19. When the distribution member 063AK28 is located at the position P6 shown in FIG. 14-4 (b), the game ball A6 that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 is distributed as shown in FIG. 14-5 (c). It collides with the right inclined surface 063AK30 formed on the member 063AK28, moves to the right along the inclined direction, and passes through the loss region entrance 063AK33 formed on the right side of the distribution portion 063AK18. The game ball A6 that has passed through the loss area entrance 063AK33 passes through the loss area 063AK21.

The distribution member 063AK28 is configured to be able to execute an operation according to the distribution member operation pattern shown in FIG. 14-6. FIG. 14-6 shows the transition of the position of the distribution member 063AK28 according to the time passage when the distribution member 063AK28 is performing the operation according to the distribution member operation pattern, and the time of the region through which the game ball passes. The transition according to the progress is shown. The distribution member 063AK28 is stopped at the position P0 shown in FIG. 14-4 (b) when the operation according to the distribution member operation pattern is not performed.

As shown in FIG. 14-6, when the distribution member 063AK28 starts the operation according to the distribution member operation pattern, it stops at the position P0 for a predetermined central standby time, and then moves to the right from the position P0 at a constant speed. It moves to, passes through the position P1 on the right side of the position P0 shown in FIG. 14-4 (b), passes through the position P2 on the right side of the position P1 shown in FIG. 14-4 (b), and passes through FIG. 14-4 ( It reaches the position P3 shown in b). The time required for the distribution member 063AK28 to reach the position P0 from the position P0 may be predetermined as the middle right movement time. The distribution member 063AK28 that has reached the position P3 stops at the position P3 for a predetermined right end standby time. Subsequently, the distribution member 063AK28 moves to the left at a constant speed from the position P3, passes through the position P2, passes through the position P1, and reaches the position P0. The time required for the distribution member 063AK28 to reach the position P0 from the position P3 may be predetermined as the right middle movement time. The distribution member 063AK28 that has reached the position P0 stops at the position P0 over the central standby time. Next, the distribution member 063AK28 moves to the left at a constant speed from the position P0, passes through the position P4 on the left side of the position P0 shown in FIG. 14-4 (b), and is shown in FIG. 14-4 (b). It passes through the position P5 on the left side of the indicated position P4 and reaches the position P6 shown in FIG. 14-4 (b). The time required for the distribution member 063AK28 to reach the position P0 to the position P6 may be predetermined as the middle-left movement time. The distribution member 063AK28 that has reached the position P6 stops at the position P6 for a predetermined left end standby time. After that, the distribution member 063AK28 moves to the right from the position P6 at a constant speed, passes through the position P5, passes through the position P4, and reaches the position P0. The time required for the distribution member 063AK28 to reach the central position P0 from the position P6 may be predetermined as the left middle movement time. The distribution member 063AK28 that has reached the position P0 repeats the above-described operation again. In this way, the distribution member 063AK28 reciprocates in the left-right direction between the position P3 and the position P6 by operating according to the distribution member operation pattern.

When the distribution member 063AK28 is performing an operation according to the distribution member operation pattern, as shown in FIG. 14-6, a game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 in response to a change in the position of the distribution member 063AK28. However, it also changes whether it passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21. Specifically, during the period when the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the position P2 and the position P3, the game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 by being guided by the distribution member 063AK28. It will be the jackpot area passing period. The period in which the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the positions P0 and the position P1 and the period in which the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the positions P0 and the position P4 have entered the distribution unit 063AK18. When the game ball is guided by the distribution member 063AK28, the time saving area passage period is set when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. During the period when the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the position P5 and the position P6, the game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 is guided by the distribution member 063AK28 and passes through the loss area 063AK21. It will be a period. The period in which the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the positions P1 and P2 and the period in which the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the positions P4 and P5 enter the distribution unit 063AK18. When the game ball is guided to the distribution member 063AK28, it becomes a passing area uncertain period in which it is not determined whether to enter the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21.

In the present embodiment, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game, and when the small hit game state is controlled, the small hit start effect (small hit) for notifying that the control to the small hit game state is started is performed. The fanfare effect) is feasible, and the distribution member 063AK28 is configured to start an operation according to the distribution member operation pattern in response to the start of the small hit start effect. As shown in FIG. 14-6, the small hit start effect is started in response to the elapse of a predetermined special figure confirmation display time after the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game, and then the small hit start effect is started. It ends when the production time has passed.

In the present embodiment, in the small hit game state, as shown in FIG. 14-6, the opening and closing of the large winning opening is started in response to the end of the small hit start effect. As described above, the opening and closing of the large winning opening is either whether the opening state of 0.1 seconds is repeated up to the predetermined upper limit opening number of times, or whether the game ball wins the large winning opening 063AK4 up to the predetermined upper limit winning number. It ends when either of the conditions is satisfied.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14-6, in the small hit game state, the solenoid 063AK12 for supplying the distribution unit is turned on in response to the end of the small hit start effect and the start of opening and closing of the large winning opening. The state is controlled so that the rotating piece 063AK10 can hold the game ball that has entered the distribution unit supply path 063AK8. The distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the on state and then to the off state according to the elapse of a predetermined game ball holding time. As a result, the rotating piece 063AK10 repels the held game ball toward the distribution section supply path 063AK8, and the repelled game ball flows down the distribution section supply path 063AK8 and enters the distribution section 063AK18. .. With such a configuration, in the present embodiment, only one of the game balls winning the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state flows down to the distribution section 063AK18 through the distribution section supply path 063AK8. Then, except for the one game ball, the ball is discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is not controlled to be turned on in the jackpot game state. With such a configuration, in the present embodiment, all the game balls that have won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the big hit game state are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. In the example shown in FIG. 14-6, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the off state and rotates at time t0 when the game ball holding time elapses after the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the on state. The game ball repelled by the piece 063AK10 enters the distribution unit 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 14-6, the time t0 when the game ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18 is included in the jackpot area passing period. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 at time t0 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 by being guided by the distribution member 063AK28.

The game ball holding time is set longer than the time required to execute the opening and closing of the large winning opening by a predetermined upper limit opening number in the small hit game state. That is, the game ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18 after the opening and closing of the large winning opening is completed.

As shown in FIG. 14-6, the timing at which the game ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18 (time t0 in the example shown in FIG. 14-6) is the special figure confirmation display time, the small hit start effect time, and the game ball. Specified by retention time.

In the present embodiment, when the small hit game state is controlled, the special figure confirmation display time and the game ball holding time are set to the same time regardless of the small hit type, while the small hit start effect time is Depending on the small hit type, it is set to one of a plurality of types of time. With such a configuration, the timing at which the game ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18 differs depending on the small hit type.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the small hit game state is controlled, the small hit start effect time is set to the predetermined first specific time to the third specific time shown in FIG. 14-7 according to the small hit type. Set to one of the times. As shown in FIG. 14-7, the second specific time (for example, 12 seconds) is longer than the first specific time (for example, 11 seconds), and the third specific time (for example, 13 seconds) is longer than the second specific time.

As shown in FIG. 14-7, when the small hit start effect time is set to the first specific time, the special figure confirmation display time elapses after the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game. After the small hit start effect is started, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to be turned on at the timing when the small hit start effect is finished according to the elapse of the first specific time. After that, at time t1 when the game ball holding time elapses after the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the on state, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the off state, and the game is repelled by the rotating piece 063AK10. The ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 14-7, since the time t1 is included in the loss region passing period, the game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 at the time t1 is guided by the distribution member 063AK28 and is lost. It passes through region 063AK21. That is, when the small hit start effect time is set to the first specific time, the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state passes through the loss area 063AK21.

When the small hit start effect time is set to the second specific time, the small hit start effect is started according to the elapse of the special figure confirmation display time after the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game. After that, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to be turned on at the timing when the small hit start effect is completed according to the elapse of the second specific time. After that, at time t2 when the game ball holding time elapses after the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the on state, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the off state, and the game is repelled by the rotating piece 063AK10. The ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 14-7, since the time t2 is included in the time saving region passing period, the game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 at the time t2 is guided by the distribution member 063AK28 to shorten the time. It passes through region 063AK20. That is, when the small hit start effect time is set to the second specific time, the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state passes through the time saving area 063AK20.

When the small hit start effect time is set to the third specific time, the small hit start effect is started according to the elapse of the special figure confirmation display time after the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game. After that, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to be turned on at the timing when the small hit start effect is completed according to the elapse of the third specific time. After that, at time t3 when the game ball holding time elapses after the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the on state, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the off state, and the game is repelled by the rotating piece 063AK10. The ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 14-7, since the time t3 is included in the jackpot area passing period, the game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 at the time t3 is guided by the distribution member 063AK28 to make a jackpot. It passes through region 063AK19. That is, when the small hit start effect time is set to the third specific time, the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state passes through the large hit area 063AK19.

As described above, depending on which of the first specific time to the third specific time is set for the small hit start effect time, the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state is the large hit area 063AK19. Which of the time saving area 063AK20 and the loss area 063AK21 is passed is different. In the feature unit 063AK, the small hit start effect time is set to any of the first specific time to the third specific time according to the small hit type, so that the game ball that wins the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state. , The area corresponding to the small hit type among the large hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21 is passed.

The feature unit 063AK is based on the execution of variable display (hereinafter referred to as "small hit variation") in which the small hit symbol is derived and displayed and the display result of the variable display is "small hit" in the special figure game. As shown in FIG. 14-8 (a), as an effect corresponding to the small hit fluctuation, in addition to the above-mentioned right-handed promotion effect and small hit start effect, a time saving suggestion effect, a passing fanning effect, and a passing notification are provided. The production is configured to be feasible.

In the present embodiment, as a right-handed promotion effect, an effect of displaying a right-handed promotion image indicating an arrow pointing in the right direction is executed on the screen of the image display device 5. As described above, the right-handed promotion effect is executed during the period controlled to the time saving state and the big hit gaming state, and is controlled to the small hit gaming state as shown in FIG. 14-8 (a). Performed in a period.

Further, in the present embodiment, as a small hit start effect, an effect of displaying a right arrow image and a small hit start image on the screen of the image display device 5 is executed. The right arrow image has the shape of an arrow pointing in the right direction, and is an effect image showing the message "Aim to the right!". The small hit start image shows the shape of the special variable winning ball device 7, and also shows the message "Put a ball here!" To encourage the player to win the game ball in the special variable winning ball device 7. It is an image. As described above, the small hit start effect time elapses after the small hit start effect is started in response to the fact that the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game and the control to the small hit game state is started. It ends according to what you did.

The time saving suggestion effect is an effect suggesting that the time saving state is controlled, and is configured to be feasible during execution of the small hit variation. As described above, in the normal state, the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small hit game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20. NS. Correspondingly, in the feature unit 063AK, in the normal state, when the small hit variation is executed, as an effect suggesting that the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a definite special symbol in the special figure game. It is configured so that the time saving suggestion effect can be executed during the execution of the small hit fluctuation. According to such a configuration, in the normal state, in the variable display when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, various effects can be executed and the game entertainment can be improved. can.

As shown in FIG. 14-8 (a), when the normal reach effect, which is the reach effect of the normal reach, the super reach effect, which is the reach effect of the super reach, and the time saving suggestion effect, are executed in the small hit fluctuation, the time is shortened. The suggestion effect is started after the reach is established, the normal reach effect is executed, and the super reach effect is executed, and then the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game, and the small hit fluctuation is completed. finish. Hereinafter, the details of the time saving suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-9 (a) and 14-9 (b).

As shown in FIG. 14-9 (a), when the time saving suggestion effect is started, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5 are started. In the above, the predetermined lost symbol (“767” in the present embodiment) is temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode different from the case where it is derived and displayed. Next, the revariable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the decorative symbol display area 5C of the "middle", and then, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right", FIG. The time saving suggestion symbol suggesting that the time saving state shown in -9 (b) is controlled is temporarily stopped and displayed. As for the time saving suggestion symbol, the decorative symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of "left" and "right", and it is called "chance" in the decorative symbol display area 5C of "middle". It is a combination of decorative symbols on which a decorative symbol indicating a message is displayed. Returning to FIG. 14-9 (a), after the time saving suggestion symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol is revariably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". It is executed, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game, and the time saving suggestion effect ends according to the end of the small hit fluctuation.

Returning to FIG. 14-8 (a), the passing fanning effect suggests that the game ball winning the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through any of the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21 in the small hit game state. This is an effect (an effect that suggests passage between the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21). The passing fanning effect is started in response to the end of the small hit start effect and the start of opening and closing of the large prize opening, and then the game ball that has won the large prize opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state is in the large hit area 063AK19, shortening the time. It ends depending on whether it has passed through either the area 063AK20 or the lost area 063AK21.

The passage notification effect is an effect of notifying which of the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21 the game ball that has won the big winning opening 063AK4 has passed in the small hit game state. In the present embodiment, the passage notification effect is executed as a small hit end effect (small hit ending effect) that notifies that the control to the small hit game state is completed. The passage notification effect is started in response to the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 passing through the large hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21 in the small hit game state, and then the predetermined passage notification effect time. It ends according to the passage.

In the present embodiment, the passage notification effect time is a predetermined number depending on whether the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 has passed through the large hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21 in the small hit game state. It is set to any of 1 special time to 3rd special time. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21, the passage notification effect time is set to the first special time (for example, 5 seconds). Further, in the time-saving state, when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, the time-saving transition control is not performed based on the passage, and the passage notification effect time is such that the game ball loses the time-saving area 063AK21. It is set to the first special time as in the case of passing through. In the normal state, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the passage notification effect time is set to the second special time (for example, 20 seconds). When the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, the passage notification effect time is set to the third special time (for example, 10 seconds). According to such a configuration, suitable control can be performed according to the state.

In the feature unit 063AK, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (b), the time saving suggestion effect and the passing fanning occur depending on whether the small hit variation is executed in the normal state or the small hit variation is executed in the time saving state. It is configured so that whether or not the effect and the passage notification effect are executed or the mode of the effect is different.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (b), when the small hit variation is executed in the normal state, the time saving suggestion effect can be executed during the execution of the small hit variation, while the time saving suggestion effect can be executed. When the small hit variation is executed in the time saving state, the time saving suggestion effect is not executed during the execution of the small hit variation. That is, in the feature unit 063AK, when the small hit variation is executed and the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the normal state, and when the small hit variation is executed and the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the time saving state, It is configured so that different effects can be performed during the execution of small hit fluctuations.

In the feature unit 063AK, in the normal state, when the small hit variation is executed, the time saving suggestion effect can be executed, so that the player can know that the game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20. It is configured so that the game can be enjoyed by giving a feeling of expectation that the time saving transition control is performed and the time saving state is controlled.

On the other hand, in the feature unit 063AK, in the case of the time saving state, when the small hit variation is executed, the time saving suggestion effect is not executed, so that when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the passage is performed. Prevents the player from having the expectation that the game ball will be controlled to the time saving state based on passing through the time saving area 063AK20 even though the time saving transition control based on the time saving is not performed. It is configured so that the decline in the game interest can be suppressed.

In this way, in the feature unit 063AK, when the small hit variation is executed and the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the normal state, and when the small hit variation is executed and the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the time saving state. By being configured so that different effects can be executed during the execution of the small hit variation, a suitable effect can be performed according to the state.

In the feature unit 063AK, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (b), when the small hit fluctuation is executed in the normal state, the big winning opening is opened and closed under the control of the small hit gaming state after the small hit fluctuation is completed. At that time, as a passing fanning effect, a normal passing fanning effect (special effect) is executed, which is an effect suggesting the passage between the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21. On the other hand, when the small hit variation is executed in the time saving state, when the small hit gaming state is controlled to open and close the large winning opening after the small hit variation is completed, the passage of the time saving area 063AK29 is related as a passing fanning effect. Without making any suggestion, a time-saving time-passing fanning effect (specific effect) is executed, which is an effect of suggesting the passage between the jackpot area 063AK19 and the loss area 063AK21.

In the present embodiment, the normal passage fanning effect suggests that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, and the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21. It is a production to do. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the time saving time passing fanning effect does not suggest that the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, but the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 and the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21. It is a production that suggests passing through.

In the feature unit 063AK, when the small hit game state is controlled after the small hit fluctuation is completed in the normal state and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the player is given a normal passing fanning effect. , It is configured to give a feeling of expectation that the game ball is controlled to the time saving state based on passing through the time saving area 063AK20, and to improve the game entertainment.

On the other hand, in the feature unit 063AK, when the small hit game state is controlled after the end of the small hit fluctuation in the time saving state and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game is performed by executing the time saving time passing fanning effect. Expectations from the player that the game ball is controlled in a time-saving state based on the time-saving area 063AK20, even though the control based on the passage is not performed when the ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20. It is configured so that it can be prevented from giving a feeling and the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

In this way, in the feature unit 063AK, when the small hit game state is controlled after the end of the small hit fluctuation in the normal state and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the normal passing fanning effect is executed. In the time saving state, when the small hit game state is controlled after the end of the small hit fluctuation state and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the time saving time passing fanning effect is executed. A suitable effect can be produced according to the state.

In this embodiment, as a normal passing fanning effect, as shown in FIG. 14-10 (a), the normal passing fanning image AK1 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided. The jackpot region light emitting unit 063AK25, the time saving region light emitting unit 063AK26, and the loss region light emitting unit 063AK27 are made to emit light, and the normal time passing fanning sound indicating the message "Big hit? Time saving? Loss?" Is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Perform the production.

The normal time passing fan image AK1 shows the message "big hit", and shows the big hit area passing fan image AK2 suggesting that the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19, and the message "time saving", and the game ball shows the time saving area. It includes a time-saving region passing fanning image AK3 suggesting that it passes through 063AK20, and a losing region passing fanning image AK4 showing the message "missing" and suggesting that the game ball passes through the losing region 063AK21.

In the feature unit 063AK, it is expected that the game ball will be controlled to the big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the big hit area 063AK19 in the small hit game state according to the display mode of the normal passing fan image AK1. Based on the degree (ratio) and the expectation that the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small hit game state, the expected degree of being controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small hit game state, and the game ball in the small hit game state It is configured to be able to suggest the degree of expectation of passing through the loss region 063AK21. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display mode of the normal passing fanning image AK1 and improve the game entertainment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, in the normal passing fanning image AK1, the jackpot area passing fanning image AK2 is the degree of expectation that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the small hitting game state (big hit after the end of the small hitting gaming state). It is displayed in a display area according to the expected degree controlled by the game state), and the time-saving area passing fan image AK3 shows the expectation degree that the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the small hit gaming state (end of the small hit gaming state). It is displayed in a display area according to the expected degree that is later controlled in the time saving state), and the loss area passing fan image AK4 has a display area corresponding to the expected degree that the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21 in the small hit game state. Is displayed.

As will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the second special figure game (special figure game using the second special figure), the first special figure game (first special figure is played). In the special figure game used), the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small hit game state at a higher rate than when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, and is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small hit game state. .. Corresponding to this, in the present embodiment, in the normal state, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the first special figure game and controlled to the small hit game state, in the normal passing fanning effect, it is normal. While the time-passing fan image AK1 is displayed in the display mode shown in FIG. 14-10 (a), when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the second special figure game and controlled to the small hit game state, it is normal. In the time-passing fanning effect, the normal time-passing fanning image AK1 is displayed in the display mode shown in FIG. 14-10 (b). In the display mode shown in FIG. 14-10 (b), the display area of the time-saving region passing fanned image AK2 is larger than that in the display mode shown in FIG. 14-10 (a). In the second special figure game, the normal passing fanning effect shown in FIG. 14-10 (b), which is executed when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed and controlled to the small hit gaming state, is a normal passing fanning image. Except for the difference in the display mode of AK1, the normal passage shown in FIG. 14-10 (a) is executed when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed and controlled to the small hit game state in the first special figure game. It is a production mode similar to the fanning production.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14-10 (c), the time-saving passing fan image AK5 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as a time-saving passing fanning effect, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided. The jackpot region light emitting unit 063AK25 and the loss region light emitting unit 063AK27 are made to emit light without causing the time saving region light emitting unit 063AK26 to emit light, and the speaker 8L and 8R emit a time saving passing fanning voice indicating the message "Is it a big hit? Loss?" Perform an output effect. The time-saving time-saving passing fan image AK5 includes the jackpot area passing fanning image AK2 and the lost area passing fanning image AK4, while the time-saving area passing fanning image AK3 is not included.

Returning to FIG. 14-8 (b), in the normal state, when the game ball winning the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the big hit area 063AK19 in the small hit game state, the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19. A normal time jackpot area passage notification effect is executed to notify that the player passes through 063AK19 and is controlled to the jackpot gaming state after the end of the small hit gaming state. In the present embodiment, as a normal time jackpot area passage notification effect, an effect of displaying a normal time jackpot area passage notification image indicating the message "V" is executed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the normal state, when the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 as a passage notification effect, and the small hit game state. After the end, the time saving area passage notification effect for notifying that the time saving state is controlled is executed. In the present embodiment, as the time-saving area passage notification effect, an effect of displaying a time-saving area passage notification image indicating the message "lucky!" Is executed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the normal state, when the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the loss area 063AK21 in the small hit game state, the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21 as a passage notification effect, and the small hit game state. After the end, the loss area passage notification effect for notifying that the control for changing the game state is not performed is executed. In the present embodiment, as the loss area passage notification effect, an effect of displaying a loss area passage notification image indicating the message "Sorry!" Is executed on the screen of the image display device 5.

On the other hand, in the case of the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (b), when the game ball winning the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the big hit area 063AK19 in the small hit game state, as a passing notification effect. , A time-saving big hit area passage notification effect different from the normal time big hit area passage notification effect is executed, which notifies that the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19 and is controlled to the big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state. NS. In the present embodiment, as a time-saving big hit area passage notification effect, an effect of displaying a time-saving big hit area passage notification image indicating the message "BONUS!" Is executed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the case of the time saving state, when the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small hit game state, the passing notification effect is produced in response to the fact that the time saving transition control based on the passage is not performed. As a result, the above-mentioned loss area passage notification effect is executed.

In the short time state, when the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the loss area 063AK21 in the small hit game state, the loss area passage notification effect is executed as the passage notification effect.

As shown in FIGS. 14-8 (a) and 14-8 (b), in the feature unit 063AK, a small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed. When the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state and then the big winning opening 063AK is controlled to the closed state, the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19 and the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. , Is configured to enable different productions. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect performed when the grand prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to the closed state, and to improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (b), when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game in the normal state, and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state. In addition, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, by executing the time saving area passage notification effect, the player is in a time saving state after the end of the small hit game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by recognizing that it is controlled by.

On the other hand, in the feature unit 063AK, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game in the time saving state and the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. By executing the loss area passage notification effect, the game ball has passed the time saving area 063AK20 to the player even though the time saving transition control based on the game ball passing through the time saving area 063AK20 is not performed. Based on the above, it is possible to prevent a feeling of expectation from being controlled to a time saving state after the end of the small hit game state, and to suppress a decline in the game interest.

In this way, in the feature unit 063AK, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game in the normal state, and when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. When the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game in the time saving state and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. Since different effects can be executed, suitable control can be performed according to the state when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed.

More specifically, in the feature unit 063AK, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state, and when the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21 in the time saving state, both the jackpot area 063AK19 and the time saving area 063AK20 pass. It is configured so that the loss area passage notification effect, which is the same effect as when it was not performed, can be executed. According to such a configuration, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state, the player does not perform the control based on the game ball passing through the time saving area 063AK20. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small hit game state based on the passing of the time saving area 063AK20, and to suppress the deterioration of the game interest. Can be done.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (b), it is executed when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the time saving state and when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the normal state. It is configured to be able to execute a time-saving big hit area passage notification effect different from the normal time big hit area passage notification effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect performed when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, and to improve the game entertainment.

In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the second special figure game that is easily executed in the time saving state, and the game ball is in the big hit area when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state. When passing through 063AK19, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the first special figure game which is easy to be executed in the normal state, and when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19. Is also controlled at a high rate to "big hit A", which is more advantageous to the player than "big hit B" after the end of the small hit game state. With such a configuration, when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, the player is made to pay attention to whether the time-saving jackpot area passage notification effect or the normal time jackpot area passage notification effect is executed, and the game is played. You can improve your interest.

FIG. 14-11 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of the special symbol process process as the special symbol normal process with respect to the feature unit 063AK.

When the special symbol normal processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol hold storage number is "0" (step 063AKS101). The second special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 063AKS101, the RAM 102 may read the second hold storage number count value stored in the second hold storage number counter, and determine whether or not the read value is “0”.

In the present embodiment, for example, a second special figure holding storage unit is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. The second special figure holding storage unit is a special figure game (second special figure game) in which the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the second starting winning is generated, but the game has not been started yet. The hold data of the special figure game) using the second special figure in the symbol display device 4B is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order with the second starting winning opening (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number, and based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the entry of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 or the like are set as pending data, and the number of them is Store until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. In this way, the hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result in this special figure game. Hold that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is determined to control the jackpot game state based on (special figure display result), and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, reach effect). It becomes memory information.

When the second special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step 063AKS101 (step 063AKS101; No), the CPU 103 is stored in the second special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the hold number "1". As the pending data, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 063AKS102). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step 063AKS102, for example, by subtracting 1 from the second reserved storage number count value and updating, the second special figure reserved storage number is updated to be subtracted by 1, and the second special figure reserved storage is updated. The hold data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") is shifted upward one entry at a time. (Step 063AKS103). Further, in the process of step 063AKS103, the RAM 102 may be updated so as to subtract 1 from the total hold storage count value stored in the total hold storage counter. After that, the CPU 103 updates the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to “2” (step 063AKS104).

When the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in step 063AKS101 (step 063AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (step 063AKS114). The first special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 063AKS114, the RAM 102 may read the first hold storage number count value stored in the first hold storage number counter, and determine whether or not the read value is “0”. As described above, the process of step 063AKS114 is executed when it is determined in step 063AKS101 that the second special figure reserved storage number is "0", and the first special figure reserved storage number is "0". Judge whether or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure (special figure 2) is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (special figure 1).

It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to the one that is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, for example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start prizes are generated is provided, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It is only necessary to be able to determine.

In the present embodiment, for example, the first special figure holding storage unit is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. The first special figure reservation storage unit is a special figure game (first special symbol) that has not been started yet, although the game ball enters the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and the first start winning is generated. The reserved data of the special figure game) using the first special figure in the display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order with the first starting winning opening (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number, and based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the entry of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 are stored as pending data. Is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. In this way, the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result in this special figure game. Hold that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is determined to control the jackpot game state based on (special figure display result), and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, reach effect). It becomes memory information.

When the number of first special figure hold storage is other than "0" in step 063AKS114 (step 063AKS114; No), the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the hold number "1". As a result, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 063AKS115). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step 063AKS115, for example, by subtracting 1 from the first reserved storage number count value and updating, the first special figure reserved storage number is updated to be subtracted by 1, and the first special figure reserved storage is updated. The hold data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") is shifted upward one entry at a time. (Step 063AKS116). Further, in the process of step 063AKS116, the RAM 102 may be updated so as to subtract 1 from the total hold storage count value stored in the total hold storage counter. After that, the CPU 103 updates the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value to "1" (step 063AKS117).

After executing any of the processes of steps 063AKS104 and 063AKS117, the CPU 103 determines whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is "big hit", "small hit", or "missing". As the table to be used for this purpose, the special figure display result determination table corresponding to the variable special figure designation buffer value is selected and set (step 063AKS105). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 14-12 (a) is set in the table to be used. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 14-12 (b) is set in the used table.

In the first special symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. 14-12 (a), a definite special symbol that is a variable display result in a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is derived and displayed. Before It is a table referred to for determination based on the random number value MR1 for. In the second special symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. 14-12 (b), a definite special symbol that is a variable display result in a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is derived and displayed. Before It is a table referred to for determination based on the random number value MR1 for.

The first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 14-12 (a) and the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 14-12 (b) are compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. Numerical values (decision values) are assigned to the special figure display results of "big hit", "small hit", and "miss".

In the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 14-12 (a) and the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 14-12 (b), the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is compared. The table data indicating the determined value indicates whether or not the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the big hit game state, and whether or not the special figure display result is controlled as a "small hit" in the small hit game state. It is the decision data assigned to the decision result.

Further, in the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 14-12 (b), a larger number of decision values than in the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 14-12 (a) is "small hit". It is assigned to the special figure display result of. That is, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 14-12 (a) and the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 14-12 (b) are the second special figure display result determination table. The determination data is assigned so that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is high.

Returning to FIG. 14-11, following the processing of step 063AKS105, the CPU 103 selects the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for variation in the special figure selected in step 063AKS105. By comparing with the decision value assigned to the "big hit" in the display result determination table, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is the "big hit" (step 063AKS106).

After executing the process of step 063AKS106, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is determined in step 063AKS106 that the special figure display result is "big hit" (step 063AKS107). Then, when it is determined that the special figure display result is determined to be "big hit" (step 063AKS107; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the on state (step 063AKS108). After that, the CPU 103 selects and sets the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-13 (b) as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 063AKS109). The CPU 103 first performs a random number lottery using the jackpot type determination table set in step 063AKS109, so that the jackpot type is variably displayed in the special figure game (“variable special figure”). "Big hit A" shown in FIG. 14-13 (a) depending on whether it is a special figure or a second special figure (whether the variable special figure buffer value is "1" or "2"). And "big hit B" (step 063AKS110).

Both "big hit A" and "big hit B" shown in FIG. 14-13 (a) are "non-probable variable big hits" that are not controlled to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game state. When it is controlled to "big hit A", it is controlled to a time saving state for a period from the end of the big hit game state until the variable display is executed five times. When it is controlled to "big hit B", it is controlled to a time saving state for a period from the end of the big hit game state until the variable display is executed once. The "big hit A", which has a longer time period controlled to the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state than the "big hit B", has a higher advantage for the player than the "big hit B". In the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 14-13 (b), when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the big hit type is determined to be either "big hit A" or "big hit B". On the other hand, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the big hit type is determined to be "big hit A" and is not determined to be "big hit B". With such a configuration, when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the second special figure game, it is higher for the player than "big hit B" when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the first special figure game. It is controlled to "big hit A", which has a high advantage of.

After returning to FIG. 14-11 and executing the process of step 063AKS110, the CPU 103 corresponds to the jackpot type determined in step 063AK110, for example, the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the RAM 102. (Step 063AKS111), the determined jackpot type is stored. As an example, if the jackpot type is "big hit A", the jackpot type buffer value may be set to "0", and if it is "big hit B", it may be set to "1".

In step 063AKS107, when it is determined in step 063AKS106 that the variable display result is not determined to be a "big hit" (step 063AKS107; No), the CPU 103 is for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for variation. By comparing the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 with the determined value assigned to the "small hit" in the special figure display result determination table selected in step 063AKS105, the special figure display result is set as the "small hit". Whether or not it is determined (step 063AKS118).

After executing the process of step 063AKS118, the CPU 103 determines in step 063AKS118 whether or not it is determined that the special figure display result is "small hit" (step 063AKS119). Then, when it is determined that the special figure display result is determined to be "small hit" (step 063AKS119; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the on state (step 063AKS120). After that, the CPU 103 selects and sets the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. 14-14 (b) as a table to be used for determining the small hit type to one of a plurality of types (step 063AKS121). The CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the small hit type determination table set in step 063AKS121 to determine whether the small hit type is the first special figure or the second special figure (variation). Depending on whether the special figure buffer value is "1" or "2"), it is determined to be one of "small hit A" to "small hit E" shown in FIG. 14-14 (a) ( Step 063AKS122).

As shown in FIG. 14-14 (a), in the "small hit A" and "small hit B", the game balls that have won the large winning opening 063AK4, which is controlled to be open in the small hit game state, are the distribution members. It is a small hit type that passes through the big hit area 063AK19 by being guided to 063AK28. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B", the small hit start effect time is set to the above-mentioned third specific time. As described above, when the small hit start effect time is set to the third specific time, the game ball winning the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the big hit area 063AK19. Therefore, when the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B", the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the large hit area 063AK19. When the game ball winning the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the big hit area 063AK19 in the small hit gaming state of "small hit A", it is controlled to the big hit gaming state of "big hit A" after the end of the small hit gaming state. .. On the other hand, when the game ball winning the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the big hit area 063AK19 in the small hit gaming state of "small hit B", the big hit gaming state of "big hit B" is completed after the end of the small hit gaming state. Is controlled by.

In the "small hit C" and "small hit D", the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4, which is controlled to be open in the small hit game state, is guided to the distribution member 063AK28, so that the time saving area 063AK20 is set. It is a small hit type that passes. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", the small hit start effect time is set to the above-mentioned second specific time. As described above, when the small hit start effect time is set to the second specific time, the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20. Therefore, when the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20. When the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small hit gaming state of "small hit C", the variable display is executed five times after the end of the small hit gaming state. It is controlled to a time saving state. On the other hand, when the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small hit game state of "small hit D", the variable display is executed once after the end of the small hit game state. It is controlled to shorten the time until.

"Small hit E" is a small hit type in which the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4, which is controlled to be open in the small hit game state, is guided to the distribution member 063AK28 and passes through the loss area 063AK21. be. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the small hit type is "small hit E", the small hit start effect time is set to the above-mentioned first specific time. As described above, when the small hit start effect time is set to the first specific time, the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the loss area 063AK21. Therefore, when the small hit type is "small hit E", the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the loss area 063AK21.

In the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. 14-14 (b), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the small hit type is set at a higher rate than when the variable special figure is the first special figure. When the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, it is configured to be determined as a "small hit A" controlled by a "big hit A" which is more advantageous to the player than the "big hit B". With such a configuration, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the second special figure game and the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19 when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, in the first special figure game. When the small hit symbol is derived and displayed and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game is played from "Big hit B" after the end of the small hit game state at a higher rate than when the game ball passes through the large hit area 063AK19. It is controlled by "big hit A", which has a high advantage for the person.

In the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. 14-14 (b), the total of the ratio in which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit A" and the ratio in which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit B". The value corresponds to the degree of expectation that the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the big hit area 063AK19 in the small hit game state. Further, the total value of the ratio in which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit C" and the ratio in which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit D" is the total value of the game ball in the small hit gaming state in the time saving area 063AK20. It corresponds to the expectation degree that is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small hit game state based on passing through. Further, the ratio at which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit E" is a control that changes the game state after the end of the small hit game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed the loss area 063AK21 in the small hit game state. Corresponds to the expectation that will not be done.

As shown in FIG. 14-14 (b), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the ratio (15%) in which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit C" and the small hit type is ". The ratio (15%) determined as "small hit D" and the total value (30%) are determined so that the small hit type is "small hit C" when the variable special figure is the first special figure. It is larger than the total value (25%) of the ratio (15%) and the ratio (10%) in which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit D". That is, in the feature unit 063AK, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the second special figure game, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed at a higher rate than when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the first special figure game, in the small hit game state. The game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, and is configured to be controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small hit game state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the final special symbol of the second special symbol game, and to improve the game interest.

After returning to FIG. 14-11 and executing the process of step 063AKS122, the CPU 103 corresponds to the small hit type determined in step 063AK122, for example, a small hit which is a stored value of the small hit type buffer provided in the RAM 102. By setting the type buffer value or the like (step 063AKS123), the determined small hit type is stored. As an example, if the small hit type is "small hit A", the small hit type buffer value is set to "0", if it is "small hit B", it is set to "1", and if it is "small hit C", it is set to "2". If it is a "small hit D", it may be set to "3", and if it is a "small hit E", it may be set to "4".

In step 063AKS119, when it is determined in step 063AKS118 that the special figure display result is not determined to be "small hit" (step 063AKS119; No), or after executing the process of step 063AKS111 or step 063AKS123, the CPU 103 The definite special symbol is determined in accordance with the pre-determined result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state, and the like (step 063AKS112).

After executing the process of step 063AKS112, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "1" which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step 063AKS113), and then ends the special symbol normal process. When the number of first special figure hold storage is "0" in step 063AKS114 (step 063AKS114; Yes), the CPU 103 sets a predetermined demo display setting (step 063AKS124), and then ends the special symbol normal processing.

In the present embodiment, in the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process, the variation pattern is determined to be any of the variation patterns PA1-1 to PB5-3 shown in FIGS. 14-15.

As shown in FIGS. 14-15, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation patterns PA1-1 to PB2-3 corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "missing" and the case where the variable display result is "big hit" are supported. The variation patterns PA3-1 to PB3-3 and the variation patterns PA4-1 to PB5-3 corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "small hit" are set in advance.

In the present embodiment, three types of super reach, super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C, are set, and a normal reach effect is executed for the fluctuation pattern shown in FIGS. 14-15. Fluctuation patterns PB2-1, PB3-1, PB4-1, PB5-1 in which the reach effect of Super Reach C is executed together with the fluctuation patterns PA2-1, PA3-1, PA4-1, and PA5-1. Fluctuation patterns PB2-2, PB3-2, PB4-2, PB5-2 in which the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed, and variation patterns PB2-3, PB3-3, PB4 in which the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. -3, PB5-3, and. In the present embodiment, as the reach effect of the super reach A, an effect of displaying a character image indicating the character A is performed on the screen of the image display device 5, and as a reach effect of the super reach B, the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. In addition, an effect of displaying a character image showing the character B is performed, and as a reach effect of the super reach C, an effect of displaying a character image showing the character C is performed on the screen of the image display device 5.

Further, the fluctuation patterns PA4-1 to PB5-3 corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "small hit" include fluctuation patterns PA4-1 and PB4-1 to PB4-3 in which the time saving suggestion effect is executed. Fluctuation patterns PA5-1 and PB5-1 to PB5-3 in which the time saving suggestion effect is not executed are included.

FIG. 14-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process as the variation pattern setting process for the feature unit 063AK.

When the variation pattern setting process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step 063AK201). When it is determined that the jackpot flag is on (step 063AKS201; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the jackpot variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14-17 to display the variation pattern as "variable display result". It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PB3-3 corresponding to the case of "big hit" (step 063AK202).

As shown in FIG. 14-17, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern PB3- in which the reach effect of the super reach C is executed at a higher rate than the variation pattern PA3-1 in which the normal reach effect is executed. It is determined to be 1, and the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed at a higher rate than the variation pattern PB3-1. The reach effect of Super Reach A is determined at a rate higher than that of the variation pattern PB3-2. Is determined in the variation pattern PB3-3 to be executed. With such a configuration, the jackpot expectation is higher when the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed than when the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed, and the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed. The time is higher than when the reach effect of Super Reach C is executed, and the time is higher when the reach effect of Super Reach C is executed than when the normal reach effect is executed.

Returning to FIG. 14-16, when it is determined in step 063AK201 that the big hit flag is not on (step 063AKS201; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is on (step 063AKS207). When it is determined that the small hit flag is not on (step 063AK207; No), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14-18 to display the fluctuation pattern in a variable display result. It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA1-1 to PB2-3 corresponding to the case of "loss" (step 063AKS208).

As shown in FIG. 14-18, in the loss fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation pattern PB2- It is determined to be 1, and the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed at a lower rate than the variation pattern PB2-1. The reach effect of Super Reach A is determined to be the variation pattern PB2-2, which is higher than the variation pattern PB2-2. Is determined in the variation pattern PB2-3 to be executed.

Returning to FIG. 14-16, when it is determined in step 063AKS207 that the small hit flag is on (step 063AKS207; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the ON state. Determine (step 063AKS209). The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving state is controlled.

When it is determined that the time saving flag is not set to the ON state (step 063AKS209; No), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the time saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the normal state shown in FIG. 14-19 (a). , Depending on whether the small hit type is "small hit A" to "small hit E", the variation pattern is changed to correspond to the case where the variable display result is "small hit", and the time saving suggestion effect is executed. The fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of PA4-1 to PB4-3 (step 063AKS210). Whether the small hit type is "small hit A" to "small hit E" may be specified based on the small hit type buffer value. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving flag is set to the ON state (step 063AKS209; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the time saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the time saving state shown in FIG. 14-19 (b). As a result, depending on whether the small hit type is "small hit A" to "small hit E", the variation pattern can be changed to the case where the variable display result is "small hit", and the time saving suggestion effect can be achieved. It is determined to be one of the variation patterns PA5-1 to PB5-3 that are not executed (step 063AKS211). With such a configuration, when the small hit fluctuation is executed in the normal state, the time saving suggestion effect can be executed during the execution of the small hit fluctuation, while when the small hit fluctuation is executed in the time saving state, the small hit fluctuation is executed. The time saving suggestion effect is not executed during the execution of.

In both the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the normal state shown in FIG. 14-19 (a) and the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 14-19 (b), the small hit type is the game ball. When is a "small hit A" or a "small hit B" passing through the big hit area 063AK19, the fluctuation pattern is at a higher rate than the fluctuation patterns PB4-1 and PB5-1 in which the reach effect of the super reach C is executed. The variation pattern PB4-2 and PB5-2 in which the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed is determined, and the variation pattern PB4 in which the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed at a higher rate than the variation patterns PB4-2 and PB5-2. -3, PB5-3 is determined. With such a configuration, the degree of expectation that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 (the degree of expectation of passing through the jackpot area) is such that the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed when the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. It is higher when the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed than when the reach effect of Super Reach C is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the reach effects of Super Reach A to Super Reach C is executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

In both the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the normal state shown in FIG. 14-19 (a) and the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 14-19 (b), the small hit type is a game ball. When is a "small hit C" or a "small hit D" passing through the time saving region 063AK20, the fluctuation pattern is at a higher rate than the fluctuation patterns PB4-3 and PB5-3 in which the reach effect of the super reach A is executed. Fluctuation patterns PB4-2 and PB5-2 in which the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed are determined, and variation patterns PB4 in which the reach effect of Super Reach C is executed at a higher rate than the variation patterns PB4-2 and PB5-2. -1, PB5-1 is determined. With such a configuration, the degree of expectation that the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 (the degree of expectation of passing through the time saving area) is such that the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed when the reach effect of Super Reach C is executed. It is higher when the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed than when the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the reach effects of Super Reach A to Super Reach C is executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 14-16, after executing the process of step 063AKS202, 063AKS208, 063AKS210 or 063AKS211th, the CPU 103 sets the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern (step 063AKS203). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the definite special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special symbol display result) is derived and displayed. Is. The CPU 103 can set the timing at which the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is derived by setting the special symbol fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. The special figure fluctuation time is set, for example, by setting a timer value according to the special figure fluctuation time in a game control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Following the process of step 063AKS203, the CPU 103 determines the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. Among them, a setting for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol is made so as to start any of the special symbol games for which the start condition is satisfied (step 063AKS204). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. As a result, the special figure game is started. When the CPU 103 starts the variable display using the first special figure, the CPU 103 controls the first hold indicator 25A to display a display capable of specifying the subtracted 1st special figure hold storage number. The hold indicator 25A may be made to perform (for example, reduce the number of LEDs lit by one). When the CPU 103 starts the variable display using the second special figure, the CPU 103 controls the second hold display 25B to display a display capable of specifying the subtracted second special figure hold storage number. The hold indicator 25B may be made to perform (for example, reduce the number of LEDs lit by one).

After executing the process of step 063AKS204, the CPU 103 issues a command at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (command at the start of fluctuation) in order to notify the effect control board 12 of the special symbol display result, the determination result of the fluctuation pattern, and the like. Set the transmission (step 063AKS205). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sends the first fluctuation start designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command as the fluctuation start command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 ( Step 063AKS202, 063AKS208, 063AKS210 or 063AKS211 command including EXT data indicating the variation pattern), display result specification command (command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), first special figure hold storage number specification command (1 deducted 1st special figure reserved memory count value, that is, a command including EXT data indicating the 1st special figure reserved memory when one reserved memory is exhausted by the start of execution of the special figure game) is sequentially executed. Set the transmission settings for transmission. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends the second fluctuation start designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command as the fluctuation start command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 ( Step 063AKS202, 063AKS208, 063AKS210 or 063AKS211 command including EXT data indicating the variation pattern), display result specification command (command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), second special figure hold storage number specification command (The second special figure reserved memory count value reduced by 1, that is, the command including the EXT data indicating the second special figure reserved memory when one reserved memory is exhausted by the start of execution of the special figure game) is sequentially executed. Set the transmission settings for transmission. In the present embodiment, in the display result designation command (variable display result notification command), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "miss", "big hit", or "small hit" is used. , The decision result of which of the multiple types of big hits should be used when the variable display result is "big hit" (big hit type determination result), and multiple types of small hit types when the variable display result is "small hit" Different EXT data are set according to the determination result (small hit type determination result) of which one to be used.

After executing the process of step 063AKS205, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 063AKS206), and then ends the special symbol normal process.

FIG. 14-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of the special symbol process process as the special symbol stop process with respect to the feature unit 063AK.

When the special symbol stop processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the special symbol confirmation display flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 is on (step 063AKS301). Here, the flag for confirming the special figure is set to the ON state by the process of step 063AKS305, which will be described later, in response to the derivation and display of the confirmed special symbol that is the variable display result in the special figure game.

When the flag for confirming the special symbol is off (step 063AKS301; No), the CPU 103 makes a setting for deriving and displaying the confirmed special symbol (step 063AKS302), and issues a decorative symbol stop command to the effect control board 12. Make settings for transmission (step 063AKS303). The decorative symbol stop command is also called a symbol confirmation command, and is a command that specifies that the variable display (variation) of the decorative symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed.

After executing the process of step 063AKS303, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined time as the special figure confirmation display time (step 063AKS304). In the process of step 063AKS304, the special figure confirmation display time timer value, which is a stored value of the special figure confirmation display time timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, is set to a value corresponding to the predetermined special figure confirmation display time. After that, the CPU 103 sets the special symbol confirmation display flag to the ON state (step 063AKS305), and then ends the special symbol stop process.

In step 063AKS301, when the special figure confirmation display flag is on (step 063AKS301; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed (step 063AKS306). For example, in the process of step 063AKS306, the special figure confirmation display time timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and the special figure confirmation is performed according to whether or not the updated special figure confirmation display time timer value is “0”. It may be determined whether or not the display time has elapsed. If the special symbol confirmation display time has not elapsed in step 063AKS306 (step 063AKS306; No), by ending the special symbol stop process, the process waits until the special symbol confirmation display time elapses.

When the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed in step 063AKS306 (step 063AKS306; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the special figure confirmation display flag and turns it off (step 063AKS307), and then is the jackpot flag turned on? It is determined whether or not (step 063AKS308). At this time, if the jackpot flag is on (step 063AKS308; Yes), a predetermined time is set as the jackpot start effect waiting time (step 063AKS309). The jackpot start effect waiting time corresponds to the jackpot start effect time when the jackpot start effect (big hit fanfare effect) is executed. In the process of step 063AK309, the jackpot start effect waiting time timer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot start effect waiting time timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, is set to a value corresponding to the predetermined jackpot start effect waiting time. After executing the process of step 063AKS309, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command (big hit fanfare command) corresponding to the big hit from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 063AKS310).

After executing the process of step 063AKS310, the CPU 103 clears the jackpot flag and puts it in the off state (step 063AKS311), and clears the time saving flag and puts it in the off state (step 063AKS312). After that, the CPU 103 makes settings for transmitting a game state designation command (effect control command for designating the current game state in pachinko game 1) indicating a normal state from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step). 063AKS313).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the open count value, which is a stored value of the open count counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, to a value corresponding to the upper limit number of rounds (15 in the present embodiment) in the jackpot game state (15 times in the present embodiment). In this embodiment, it is set to "15") (step 063AKS314).

After executing the process of step 063AKS314, the CPU 103 clears the time reduction counter (063AKS315). The time reduction counter is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and counts the time reduction number, which is the remaining number of variable displays controlled in the time reduction state. In the process of step 063AKS315, the time reduction counter is cleared, so that the time reduction count value, which is the stored value of the time reduction counter, is set to "0" as the initial value. After that, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "4", which is a value corresponding to the jackpot release pre-processing (step 063AKS316), and then ends the special symbol stop process.

When it is determined in step 063AKS308 that the big hit flag is not on (step 063AKS308; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is on (step 063AKS317). When it is determined that the small hit flag is not on (step 063AKS317; No), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 063AKS318).

When it is determined in step 063AKS317 that the small hit flag is on (step 063AKS317; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the small hit start effect waiting time to any of the above-mentioned first specific time to third specific time. (Step 063AKS319). The small hit start production waiting time corresponds to the small hit start production time. Specifically, in step 063AKS319, the CPU 103 sets the small hit start effect waiting time by referring to the small hit start effect waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 14-21, and the small hit type is "small hit A" to "small hit A" to ". It is determined to be any of the first specific time to the third specific time according to which of the small hit E ”, and is a stored value of the small hit start effect waiting time timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102. The hit start effect waiting time timer value is set to a value corresponding to the determined small hit start effect waiting time. The small hit type may be specified based on the small hit type buffer value.

As shown in FIG. 14-21, in the present embodiment, when the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B", the small hit start effect time is set to the third specific time. Then, the waiting time for the small hit start effect is also determined at the third specific time. When the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", the small hit start effect waiting time is also the second specific corresponding to the small hit start effect time being set to the second specific time. Determined by time. When the small hit type is "small hit E", the small hit start effect waiting time is also determined to be the first specific time corresponding to the small hit start effect time being set to the first specific time.

After executing the process of step 063AKS319, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command (small hit fanfare command) according to the small hit from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 063AKS320). ..

After executing the process of step 063AKS320, the CPU 103 controls the distribution member 063AK28 to start the operation according to the distribution member operation pattern (step 063AKS321). After that, the CPU 103 clears the small hit flag and puts it in the off state (step 063AKS322), and the opening number count value corresponds to the upper limit opening number of opening and closing of the large winning opening in the small hit game state (10 times in this embodiment). (In this embodiment, "10") is set (step 063AKS323). After executing the process of step 063AKS323, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to “8”, which is a value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step 063AKS324).

After executing the process of step 063AKS318 or step 063AKS324, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag is on (step 063AKS325). When it is determined that the time saving flag is not on (step 063AKS325; No), the CPU 103 ends the special symbol stop process.

When it is determined that the time reduction flag is on (step 063AKS325; Yes), the CPU 103 updates by subtracting 1 from the time reduction count value (step 063AKS326), and the updated time reduction count value is "0". Whether or not it is determined (step 063AKS327). When it is determined that the time reduction count value is not "0" (step 063AKS327; No), the CPU 103 ends the special symbol stop process.

When it is determined that the time reduction count value is "0" (step 063AKS327; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the time reduction flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS328), and transmits a game state specification command indicating the normal state. (Step 063AKS329) is performed, and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

FIG. 14-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S118 of the special symbol process processing as the small hit opening preprocessing with respect to the feature unit 063AK.

When the small hit opening pre-processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the small hit start effect waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS401). In the process of step 063AKS401, the small hit start effect waiting time timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and the small hit start is started depending on whether or not the updated small hit start effect waiting time timer value is "0". It is determined whether or not the production waiting time has elapsed. When it is determined that the small hit start effect waiting time has not elapsed (step 063AKS401; No), the CPU 103 ends the small hit release pre-processing.

When it is determined in step 063AKS401 that the small hit start effect waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS401; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 to be in the ON state (step 063AKS402). After that, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined time as the game ball holding time (step 063AKS403). In step 063AKS403, the CPU 103 sets the game ball holding time timer value, which is the stored value of the game ball holding time timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, to a value corresponding to the predetermined game ball holding time. After executing the process of step 063AKS403, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to “9” which is a value corresponding to the process during the small hit opening (step 063AKS404), and ends the small hit opening preprocessing.

FIG. 14-23 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S119 of the special symbol process process as the process during the opening of the small hit with respect to the feature unit 063AK.

When the small hit opening process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the opening count value is “0” (step 063AKS501). When it is determined that the opening count value is not "0" (step 063AKS501; No), the CPU 103 determines that the number of game balls that have won the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state is a predetermined upper limit in the small hit game state. It is determined whether or not the number of winnings (10 in this embodiment) or more (step 063AKS502). In step 063AKS502, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the number of game balls detected by the large winning opening switch 063AK5 (the number of times the game balls are detected by the large winning opening switch 063AK5) is equal to or greater than the upper limit winning number.

If it is determined in step 063AKS502 that the number of game balls that have won the large winning opening 063AK4 is less than the maximum number of winnings (step 063AKS502; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is the opening timing of the large winning opening 063AK4. (Step 063AKS503). When it is determined that it is the opening timing of the large winning opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS503; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the large winning opening 063AK4 to the open state by controlling the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door to the on state. (Step 063AKS504), the setting for transmitting the designated command during the opening of the large winning opening is made (step 063AKS505). After performing the process of step 063AKS505, the CPU 103 updates by subtracting 1 from the release count value (step 063AKS506).

After executing the process of step 063AKS506, or when it is determined in step 063AKS503 that it is not the opening timing of the large winning opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS503; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is the closing timing of the large winning opening 063AK4. (Step 063AKS507). When it is determined that it is not the closing timing of the large winning opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS507; No), the CPU 103 ends the processing during the small hit opening. When it is determined that it is the closing timing of the large winning opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS507; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the large winning opening 063AK4 to the closed state by controlling the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door to the off state. (Step 063AKS508). After executing the process of step 063AKS508, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting the designated command after opening the big winning opening (step 063AKS509), and ends the process during the small hit opening.

When it is determined in step 063AKS501 that the open count value is "0" (step 063AKS501; Yes), or when it is determined in step 063AKS502 that the number of game balls that have won the large winning opening 063AK4 is equal to or greater than the maximum number of winnings. (Step 063AKS502; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the game ball holding time has elapsed (step 063AKS510). In step 063AKS510, the CPU 103 updates the game ball holding time timer value by subtracting 1, and the game ball holding time elapses depending on whether or not the updated game ball holding time timer value is "0". Determine if it has been done. When it is determined that the game ball holding time has not elapsed (step 063AKS510; No), the CPU 103 ends the small hit opening process.

When it is determined in step 063AKS510 that the game ball holding time has elapsed (step 063AKS510; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 to the off state (step 063AKS511).

After executing the process of step 063AKS511, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the game ball that has won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state has passed through any of the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21. (Step 063AKS512). In step 063AKS512, the CPU 103 is in the small hit gaming state depending on whether or not any of the big hit area passing flag, the time saving area passing flag, and the losing area passing flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 is on. It is determined whether or not the game ball winning the big winning opening 063AK4 has passed through any of the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the losing area 063AK21.

When it is determined that the game ball has not passed through any of the jackpot region 063AK19, the time saving region 063AK20, or the loss region 063AK21 (step 063AKS512; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot region passage switch 063AK22 is turned on (big hit region). It is determined (whether or not the passing switch 063AK22 has detected the game ball) (step 063AKS518). When it is determined that the big hit area passing switch 063AK22 is turned on (step 063AKS518; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the big hit area passing flag to the on state (step 063AKS519), and ends the processing during the small hit opening.

When it is determined in step 063AKS518 that the jackpot area passing switch 063AK22 is not on (step 063AKS518; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving area passing switch 063AK23 is turned on (the time saving area passing switch 063AK23 detects the game ball). Whether or not it was done) is determined (step 063AKS520). When it is determined that the time saving area passing switch 063AK23 is turned on (step 063AKS520; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag is turned on (step 063AKS521). When it is determined that the time saving flag is not on (step 063AKS521; No), the CPU 103 sets the time saving area passing flag to the on state (step 063AKS522), and ends the small hit opening process.

When it is determined in step 063AKS520 that the time saving area passing switch 063AK23 is not on (step 063AKS520; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the losing area passing switch 063AK24 is turned on (the losing area passing switch 063AK24 detects the game ball. Whether or not it was done) is determined (step 063AKS523). When it is determined that the loss area passing switch 063AK24 is not on (step 063AKS523; No), the CPU 103 ends the small hit opening process.

When it is determined in step 063AKS523 that the loss area passing switch 063AK24 is turned on (step 063AKS523; Yes), or when it is determined in step 063AKS521 that the time saving flag is on (step 063AKS521; Yes), the CPU 103 is lost. The area passage flag is set to the ON state (step 063AKS524), and the processing during the small hit opening process is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even when it is determined that the time saving area passing switch 063AK24 is turned on (step 063AKS520; Yes), it is determined that the time saving flag is on (step 063AKS521; Yes). Occasionally, the lost area passage flag is set to the on state without the time saving area passing flag being set to the on state.

In step 063AKS512, when it is determined that the game ball has passed any of the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21 (step 063AKS512; Yes), the CPU 103 wins the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state. It is determined whether or not all the game balls have been discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 (step 063AKS513). In step 063AKS513, the CPU 103 includes the number of game balls detected by the discharge count switch 063AK16 (the number of times the game balls are detected by the discharge count switch 063AK16) and the number of game balls detected by the jackpot area discharge count switch (big hit). The number of game balls detected by the area discharge count switch), the number of game balls detected by the time saving area discharge count switch (the number of times the game ball was detected by the time saving area discharge count switch), and the lost area discharge count switch. Whether or not the total value of the number of game balls detected by (the number of times the game balls are detected by the loss area discharge count switch) matches the number of game balls detected by the grand prize opening switch 063AK5. Accordingly, it is determined whether or not all the game balls that have won the large winning opening 063AK4 have been discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7.

In step 063AKS513, when it is determined that all the game balls that have won the large winning opening 063AK4 have not been discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 (step 063AKS513; No), the CPU 103 ends the processing during the small hit opening process. do. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the game balls that have won the large winning opening 063AK4 have been discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 (step 063AKS513; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the distribution member operation pattern by the distribution member 063AK28. Control is performed to end the according operation (step 063AKS514).

After executing the process of step 063AKS514, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting a hit end designation command (small hit ending command) according to the small hit from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 063AKS515).

In step 063AKS515, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is controlled to the big hit game state or the time saving state after the end of the small hit game state as a hit end designation command according to the small hit, and changes to the big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state. An effect control command indicating the type of big hit in the case of being controlled and the number of variable displays controlled in the time saving state in the case of being controlled in the time saving state after the end of the small hit game state is transmitted.

Specifically, in step 063AK515, the CPU 103 refers to the hit end designation command determination table shown in FIG. 14-24 to determine the states of the big hit area pass flag, the time saving area pass flag, and the lost area pass flag, and the small hit type. According to the above, one of the small hit end designation command 1 to the small hit end designation command 5 is selected as the hit end designation command according to the small hit, and the setting for transmitting the selected command is made.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-24, when the big hit area passing flag is set to the on state and the small hit type is "small hit A", "big hit A" is completed after the end of the small hit game state. The small hit end designation command 1 indicating that the game is controlled to the big hit game state is selected. When the big hit area passing flag is set to the on state and the small hit type is "small hit B", it indicates that the small hit is controlled to the big hit game state of "big hit B" after the end of the small hit game state. The end specification command 2 is selected. When the time saving area passing flag is set to the on state and the small hit type is "small hit C", the time saving state is controlled for a period until the variable display is executed 5 times after the end of the small hit game state. The small hit end designation command 3 indicating that the command is to be performed is selected. When the time saving area passing flag is set to the on state and the small hit type is "small hit D", the time saving state is controlled for a period from the end of the small hit game state until the variable display is executed once. The small hit end designation command 4 indicating that the command is to be executed is transmitted. When the loss area passage flag is set to the ON state, the small hit end specification command 5 indicating that the control to change the game state is not performed after the end of the small hit game state is transmitted regardless of the small hit type. Will be done.

After returning to FIG. 14-23 and executing the process of step 063AKS515, the CPU 103 sets the passage notification effect waiting time to any of the above-mentioned first special time to third special time (step 063AKS516). The passage notification effect waiting time corresponds to the passage notification effect time. In step 063AKS516, the CPU 103 sets the passing notification effect waiting time to the state of the jackpot area passing flag, the time saving area passing flag, and the lost area passing flag by referring to the passing notification effect waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 14-25. Correspondingly, it was determined to be one of the first special time to the third special time, and the passage notification effect waiting time timer value, which is the stored value of the passing notification effect waiting time timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, was determined. Set to a value corresponding to the passage notification effect waiting time.

As shown in FIG. 14-25, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot area passing flag is set to the on state, the passing notification effect waiting time is set to the third special time, and the time saving area passing flag is turned on. When is set to, the passage notification effect waiting time is set to the second special time, and when the loss area passage flag is set to the ON state, the passage notification effect waiting time is set to the first special time. NS.

After returning to FIG. 14-23 and executing the process of step 063AKS516, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to “10” which is a value corresponding to the small hit end process (step 063AKS517), and releases the small hit. End the middle process.

FIG. 14-26 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S120 of the special symbol process process as the small hit end process for the feature unit 063AK.

When the small hit end process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the passage notification effect waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS601). In step 063AKS601, the CPU 103 updates the passage notification effect waiting time timer value by subtracting 1, and waits for the passage notification effect depending on whether or not the updated passage notification effect waiting time timer value is "0". Determine if time has passed. When it is determined that the passage notification effect waiting time has not elapsed (step 063KS601; No), the CPU 103 ends the small hit end process.

When it is determined that the passage notification effect waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS617), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot area passage flag is on (step 063AKS602). When it is determined that the jackpot area passing flag is on (step 063AKS602; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the jackpot area passing flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS603).

After executing the process of step 063AKS603, the CPU 103 sets the big hit type buffer value according to the small hit type (step 063AKS604). Specifically, in step 063AKS604, if the small hit type is "small hit A" controlled to the big hit gaming state of "big hit A" after the end of the small hit gaming state, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "big hit A". While setting the corresponding "0", if the small hit type is "small hit B" which is controlled to the big hit game state of "big hit B" after the end of the small hit game state, the big hit type buffer value is set to "big hit B". Set to "1" corresponding to "". The small hit type may be specified based on the small hit type buffer value.

After executing the process of step 063AKS604, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined time as the jackpot start effect waiting time (step 063AKS605), and transmits a hit start designation command according to the jackpot from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. (Step 063AKS606). After executing the process of step 063AKS606, the CPU 103 clears the time saving flag to turn it off (step 063AKS607), and transmits a game state designation command indicating a normal state from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Make the settings (step 063AKS608). Next, the CPU 103 sets the open number count value to a value corresponding to the upper limit number of rounds in the jackpot game state (step 063AKS609), and clears the time reduction counter (063AKS610). After that, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "4", which is a value corresponding to the large hit release pre-processing (step 063AKS611), and then ends the small hit end processing.

When it is determined in step 063AKS602 that the jackpot area passing flag is not on (step 063AKS602; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving area passing flag is on (step 063AKS612). When it is determined that the time saving area passing flag is on (step 063AKS612; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the time saving area passing flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS613).

After executing the process of step 063AKS613, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag to the ON state (step 063AKS614), and sets the time saving number count value according to the small hit type (step 063AKS615). Specifically, in step 063AKS615, if the small hit type is "small hit C", which is controlled to be in a time saving state over a period from the end of the small hit gaming state until the variable display is executed five times, the time saving count value. Is set to "5", while if the small hit type is "small hit D", which is controlled to be in a time saving state for a period from the end of the small hit game state until the variable display is executed once, the time saving number of times is counted. Set the value to "1". The small hit type may be specified based on the small hit type buffer value. After executing the process of step 063AKS615, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting a game state designation command indicating a time saving state from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 063AKS616).

When it is determined in step 063AKS612 that the time saving area passing flag is not on (step 063AKS612; No), the CPU 103 clears the losing area passing flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS617).

After performing the process of step 063AKS616 or step 063AKS617, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step 063AKS618), and then performs the small hit end process. finish.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the small hit end process is started in response to the completion of the small hit opening process in which the large winning opening is opened, and the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 (step 063AKS612). ; Yes), in the small hit end process, the time saving flag is set to the ON state (step 063AKS614). With such a configuration, when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, if the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, it is not controlled to the time saving state until the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the closed state. It is configured.

In the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4, the feature unit 063AK executes each of the above-described processes as the process in the special symbol process process of step S25, and also executes the above-described processes as the information output process of step S23. Similarly, the process shown in the flowchart of FIGS. 13-36 is executed. With such a configuration, in the information output process of step S23, the feature unit 063AK has the jackpot signal 1 indicating that the jackpot is being hit and the jackpot signal 1 indicating that the jackpot is being hit and the jackpot is being hit or the time is being shortened (in the special prize). In addition to the jackpot signal 2 indicating that there is), the jackpot signal 3 indicating that the time is being shortened is output to an external device such as a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1.

According to such a configuration, when the time saving state is controlled based on the end of the big hit game state, and in the normal state, the game ball which has won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state has the time saving area 063AK4. In either case, the time saving state is controlled after the end of the small hit game state based on the passage, or the time saving state or the consecutive villa state can be preferably specified in the external device.

FIG. 14-27 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of the effect control process process as the variable display start setting process for the feature unit 063AK.

When the variable display start setting process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the sub-side time saving flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is on (step 063AKS701). The sub-side time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving state is controlled. When it is determined that the sub-side time reduction flag is on (step 063AKS701; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the sub-side time reduction count value, which is the stored value of the sub-side time reduction counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122. It is updated by subtracting one (step 063AKS702). The sub-side time reduction counter counts the number of time reductions (the remaining number of variable displays controlled in the time reduction state).

After executing the process of step 063AKS702, the effect control CPU 120 makes a setting for executing the time reduction number notification effect for notifying the time reduction number of times (step 063AKS703). In the present embodiment, as the time reduction number notification effect, an effect of displaying a time reduction number notification image indicating the time reduction number on the screen of the image display device 5 can be executed. In the time reduction number notification effect, the time reduction number notification image is displayed in a display mode indicating the current time reduction number based on the sub-side time reduction count value. In the present embodiment, the time saving number notification effect is executed when the variable display is executed in the time saving state.

After executing the process of step 063AKS703, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the right-handed promotion effect flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is on (step 063AKS704). When it is determined that the right-handed promotion effect flag is not on (step 063AKS704; No), the effect control CPU 120 sets the right-handed promotion effect flag to the on state (step 063AKS705), and controls to start the right-handed promotion effect. (Step 063AKS706).

After executing the process of step 063AKS706, the effect control CPU 120 sets the setting for executing the time saving rush effect to notify that the control to the time saving state has started (controlled from the normal state to the time saving state). (Step 063AKS707). In the present embodiment, as the time saving rush effect, the first time saving rush image showing the message "time saving!" And the message "Put the ball into the electric chew aiming to the right!" Are shown on the screen of the image display device 5. The effect of displaying the second time-saving rush image is executed. The second time-saving rush image is a production image that urges the player to win a game ball in the variable winning ball device 6B. In the present embodiment, the time saving rush effect is executed when the variable display is first executed after being controlled from the normal state to the time saving state.

After executing the process of step 063AKS707, when it is determined in step 063AKS701 that the sub-side time saving flag is not on (step 063AKS701; No), and when it is determined in step 063AKS704 that the right-handed promotion effect flag is on. (Step 063AKS704; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special figure display result is a “big hit” based on the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11 (step 063AKS708). When it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "big hit" (step 063AKS708; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is a decoration that is a jackpot combination as a final stop symbol that is a final stop symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol. The combination of symbols is determined (step 063AKS709). In step 063AKS709, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, a random number lottery by referring to the decoration symbol determination table of the jackpot combination prepared in advance in the ROM 121, thereby producing the decoration symbol of the jackpot combination as the final decoration symbol. decide.

When it is determined in step 063AKS708 that the special figure display result is not a "big hit" (step 063AKS708; No), the effect control CPU 120 displays the special figure based on the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the result is a "small hit" (step 063AKS710). When it is determined that the special figure display result is not "small hit" (step 063AKS710; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines the combination of decorative symbols to be a lost combination as the final decorative symbol (step 063AKS711). In step 063AKS711, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, a random number lottery by referring to the decoration symbol determination table of the loss combination prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121 to obtain the decoration symbol of the loss combination as the final decoration symbol. decide.

When it is determined in step 063AKS710 that the special figure display result is "small hit" (step 063AKS710; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the sub-side time saving flag is on (step 063AKS712). ..

When it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is not set to the ON state (step 063AKS712; No), the effect control CPU 120 sets the normal state small hit time confirmation decoration symbol determination table shown in FIGS. 14-28 (b). By performing a random number lottery using this, as a fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that becomes a small hit combination depending on which of the small hit types "small hit A" to "small hit E", FIG. 14 Any one of the first small hit symbol to the fifth small hit symbol shown in −28 (a) is determined (step 063AKS713). Which of the small hit types "small hit A" to "small hit E" may be specified based on the display result designation command or the like transmitted from the main board 11. On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is set to the ON state (step 063AKS712; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the small hit time confirmation decorative symbol for the time saving state shown in FIGS. 14-28 (c). By performing a random number lottery using the table, depending on which of the small hit types "small hit A" to "small hit E", the small hit combination is a fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol). One of the first small hit symbol to the fifth small hit symbol shown in FIG. 14-28 (a) is determined (step 063AKS714).

In the first small hit symbol shown in FIG. 14-28 (a), the decorative symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and is "middle". This is a combination of decorative symbols in which a rectangular decorative symbol in red indicating a message of "V" suggesting that the player is controlled to the jackpot game state is displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C. As for the second small hit symbol, the decorative symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and the big hit is displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. It is a combination of decorative symbols in which a blue rectangular decorative symbol indicating the message "V" suggesting that the game is controlled is displayed. As for the third small hit symbol, the decorative symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of "left" and "right", and the time is shortened in the decorative symbol display area 5C of "middle". It is a combination of decorative symbols in which a red rectangular decorative symbol indicating the message "hour" suggesting that the state is controlled is displayed. As for the 4th small hit symbol, the decorative symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed in each of the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and the time is shortened in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. It is a combination of decorative symbols in which a blue rectangular decorative symbol indicating the message "hour" suggesting that the state is controlled is displayed. As for the 5th small hit symbol, the decorative symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed in each of the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C is displayed. It is a combination of decorative symbols in which a white rectangular decorative symbol indicating the message "small" is displayed. The first small hit symbol and the second small hit symbol are a combination of decorative symbols suggesting that the jackpot game state is controlled. The third small hit symbol and the fourth small hit symbol are a combination of decorative symbols suggesting that the time saving state is controlled.

In the small hit determination decorative symbol determination table for the normal state shown in FIG. 14-28 (b), when the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B" in which the game ball passes through the large hit area 063AK19. , The fixed decorative symbol is determined to be the 4th small hit symbol at a higher rate than the 5th small hit symbol, and is determined to be the 3rd small hit symbol at a higher rate than the 4th small hit symbol, and is determined from the 3rd small hit symbol. Is also determined as the second small hit symbol at a high rate, and is determined as the first small hit symbol at a higher rate than the second small hit symbol. With such a configuration, the degree of expectation that the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19 and is controlled to the big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state is when the first small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a definite decorative symbol. This is higher than when the second small hit symbol is derived and displayed, and when the second small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the final decorative symbol, it is higher than when the third small hit symbol is derived and displayed. It was higher, and when the 3rd small hit symbol was derived and displayed as the final decoration symbol, it was higher than when the 4th small hit symbol was derived and displayed, and the 4th small hit symbol was derived and displayed as the final decoration symbol. The time is higher than when the fifth small hit symbol is derived and displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the first small hit symbol to the fifth small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the final decorative symbol, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the small hit fixed decoration symbol determination table for the normal state, as shown in FIGS. 14-28 (b), the third small hit symbol and the fourth small hit symbol suggesting that the fixed decorative symbol is controlled to the time saving state. It is configured so that it can be determined as a small hit pattern. According to such a configuration, in the normal state, the player can derive and display the third small hit symbol or the fourth small hit symbol, which suggests that the fixed decorative symbol is controlled in the time saving state. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20, the time saving transition control is performed to give a feeling of expectation that the game ball is controlled to the time saving state, and the game interest can be improved.

Specifically, in the small hit determination decorative symbol determination table for the normal state, as shown in FIG. 14-28 (b), the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit C" in which the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. In the case of "small hit D", the fixed decorative symbol is determined to be the first small hit symbol at a higher rate than the fifth small hit symbol, and is determined to be the second small hit symbol at a higher rate than the first small hit symbol. , The fourth small hit symbol is determined at a higher rate than the second small hit symbol, and the third small hit symbol is determined at a higher rate than the fourth small hit symbol. With such a configuration, the degree of expectation that the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 and is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small hit game state is when the third small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a fixed decorative symbol. However, it is higher than when the 4th small hit symbol is derived and displayed, and when the 4th small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the final decorative symbol, it is higher than when the 2nd small hit symbol is derived and displayed. , When the second small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the final decorative symbol, it is higher than when the first small hit symbol is derived and displayed, and when the first small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the final decorative symbol. Is higher than when the fifth small hit symbol is derived and displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the first small hit symbol to the fifth small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the final decorative symbol, and to improve the interest of the game.

On the other hand, in the small hit time-saving fixed decoration symbol determination table for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 14-28 (c), the third small hit symbol and the fourth small hit suggesting that the fixed decoration symbol is controlled to the time-saving state. It is configured so that it is not determined as a winning symbol. According to such a configuration, in the time saving state, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the time saving transition control based on the passage is not performed, but the time saving state is controlled as a fixed decorative symbol. The third small hit symbol or the fourth small hit symbol is derived and displayed, and the player is expected to be controlled to the time saving state based on the fact that the game ball has passed the time saving area 063AK20. It is configured so that it is possible to prevent the player from being hugged and to suppress the decline in the interest in the game. As described above, in the present embodiment, the third small hit symbol or the fourth small hit symbol suggesting that the fixed decoration symbol is controlled in the time saving state in the normal state can be derived and displayed, while the fixed decoration in the time saving state can be derived and displayed. Since the third small hit symbol or the fourth small hit symbol is not derived and displayed as a symbol, a suitable effect can be performed according to the state.

Returning to FIG. 14-27, after executing the processes of step 063AKS709, step 063AKS711, step 063AKS713 or step 063AKS714, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect control pattern (step 063AKS715). In step 063AKS715, the effect control CPU 120 has a plurality of types of effect control patterns (special figure variation time effect control pattern) prepared (set) in advance according to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command received from the main board 11. ), And set it as the effect control pattern to be used. When the setting for executing the time saving number of times notification effect is made in step 063AKS703, the effect control pattern (time saving number of times notification effect control pattern) corresponding to the time saving number of times notification effect is selected and used in step 063AKS715. Set as a pattern. When the setting for executing the time saving rush effect control is made in step 063AKS707, as the effect control pattern (time saving rush effect control pattern) to select and use the effect control pattern corresponding to the time saving rush effect in step 063AKS715. set.

After executing the process of step 063AKS715, the effect control CPU 120 sets the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 according to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command received from the main board 11. Set (step 063AKS716).

After executing the process of step 063AKS716, the effect control CPU 120 makes a setting for starting variable display of a decorative pattern or the like on the screen of the image display device 5 (step 063AKS717). In step 063AKS717, the effect control CPU 120 transmits, for example, a display control command (command) specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern determined in step 063AKS715 to the VDP of the display control unit 123. Variable display of decorative symbols is started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

After executing the process of step 063AKS717, the effect control CPU 120 sets the settings for updating the display of the hold display or the active display displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in response to the start of the variable display. (Step 063AKS718).

After executing the process of step 063AKS718, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step 063AKS719), and performs the variable display start setting process. finish.

FIG. 14-29 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display with respect to the feature unit 063AK.

When the effect processing during variable display is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the special figure variation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern, has elapsed based on, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer. Is determined (step 063AKS801). Specifically, in step 063AKS801, the effect control CPU 120 updates the timer value of the effect control process timer by, for example, subtracting 1, and the effect control pattern determined in step 063AKS715 (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates). ) To determine whether or not the end code has been read corresponding to the updated timer value, thereby determining whether or not the variable display time has elapsed.

When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step 063AKS801; No), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 is in the reach effect period in which the reach effect is executed based on the timer value of the effect control process timer or the like. (Step 063AKS802). The reach effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step 063AKS715. When it is determined that the reach effect period is reached (step 063AKS802; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls to execute the reach effect (step 063AKS803).

After executing the process of step 063AKS803, or when it is determined in step 063AKS802 that it is not the reach effect period (step 063AKS802; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines the number of time reductions based on the timer value of the effect control process timer and the like. It is determined whether or not the time-reduced number of times notification effect period in which the notification effect is executed is set (step 063AKS804). The time reduction number notification effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (time reduction number notification effect control pattern) determined in step 063AKS715. When it is determined that the time reduction number notification effect period is reached (step 063AKS804; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls to execute the time reduction number notification effect (step 063AKS805).

After executing the process of step 063AKS805, or when it is determined in step 063AKS804 that it is not the time saving number notification effect period (step 063AKS804; No), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the timer value of the effect control process timer and the like. It is determined whether or not the time saving suggestion effect is executed in the time saving suggestion effect period (step 063AKS806). The time saving suggestion effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step 063AKS715. When it is determined that the time saving suggestion effect period is reached (step 063AKS806; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls to execute the time saving suggestion effect (step 063AKS807).

After executing the process of step 063AKS807, or when it is determined in step 063AKS806 that it is not the time saving suggestion effect period (step 063AKS806; No), the effect control CPU 120 reduces the time based on the timer value of the effect control process timer or the like. It is determined whether or not the rush effect is executed in the time-saving rush effect period (step 063AKS808). The time-saving rush effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (time-saving rush effect control pattern) determined in step 063AKS715. When it is determined that the time saving rush effect period is reached (step 063AKS808; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls to execute the time saving rush effect (step 063AKS809).

After executing the process of step 063AKS809, or when it is determined in step 063AKS808 that it is not the time saving rush effect period (step 063AKS808; No), the effect control CPU 120 is set in the effect control pattern determined in step 063AKS715. Based on this, other control is performed to execute the effect during the variable display including the variable display operation of the decorative symbol (step 063AKS810), and the effect process during the variable display is terminated.

When it is determined in step 063AKS801 that the variable display time has elapsed (step 063AKS801; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a symbol determination command has been received from the main board 11 (step 063AKS811). When it is determined that the symbol confirmation command has not been received (step 063AKS811; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the effect processing during variable display.

When it is determined that the symbol confirmation command has been received (step 063AKS811; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 transmits a predetermined display control command to the VDP of the display control unit 123, thereby performing "left" and "middle". In each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "right", the fixed decorative symbol as the final stop symbol determined in step 063AKS709, step 063AKS711, or step 063AKS712 is derived and displayed (step 063AKS812).

After executing the process of step 063AKS812, the effect control CPU 120 sets a predetermined time as the waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command (step 063AKS813), and sets the value of the effect process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process. It is updated to "3" (step 063AKS814), and the effect processing during variable display is terminated.

FIG. 14-30 (a) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S173 of the effect control process process as the special figure hit wait process for the feature unit 063AK.

When the special figure hit wait process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the hit start designation command reception waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS901). When it is determined that the hit start designation command reception waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS901; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the sub-side time reduction flag is on (step 063AKS902).

When it is determined that the sub-side time reduction flag is on (step 063AKS902; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the sub-side time reduction count value is "0" (step 063AKS903). When it is determined that the sub-side time reduction count value is "0" (step 063AKS903; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 clears the sub-side time reduction flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS904) to promote right-handed strike. After clearing the effect flag and setting it to the off state (step 063AKS905), control is performed to end the right-handed promotion effect (step 063AKS906).

After executing the process of step 063AKS906, or when it is determined in step 063AKS902 that the sub-side time saving flag is not on (step 063AKS902; No), the sub-side time saving count value is not "0" in step 063AKS903. When the determination is made (step 063AKS903; No), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “0”, which is a value corresponding to the variable display start wait process (step 063AKS907), and waits for the special figure. To finish.

When it is determined in step 063AKS901 that the waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command has not elapsed (step 063AKS901; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command corresponding to the jackpot has been received. (Step 063AKS908).

When it is determined that the hit start designation command corresponding to the jackpot has been received (step 063AKS908; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets a predetermined time as the jackpot start effect time (step 063AKS909). In step 063AKS909, the jackpot start effect time timer value, which is a stored value of the jackpot start effect time timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122, is set to a value corresponding to the predetermined jackpot start effect time. After executing the process of step 063AKS909, the effect control CPU 120 controls to start the jackpot start effect (step 063AKS910), and sets the value of the effect process flag to "6", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during the jackpot. After updating (step 063AKS911), the waiting process for hitting the special figure is terminated.

When it is determined in step 063AKS908 that the hit start designation command corresponding to the big hit has not been received (step 063AKS908; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command corresponding to the small hit has been received. Determine (step 063AKS912). When it is determined that the hit start designation command corresponding to the small hit has not been received (step 063AKS912; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the special figure hit waiting process.

When it is determined that the hit start designation command corresponding to the small hit has been received (step 063AKS912; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit start effect time to any of the first specific time to the third specific time. (Step 063AKS913). Specifically, in step 063AKS913, the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit start effect time by referring to the small hit start effect time determination table shown in FIG. 14-30 (b), and the small hit type is “small hit”. Depending on which of "A" to "small hit E", it is determined to be any of the first specific time to the third specific time, and the stored value of the small hit start effect time timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122. The small hit start effect time timer value is set to a value corresponding to the determined small hit start effect time. The small hit type may be specified based on the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

As shown in FIG. 14-30 (b), in the present embodiment, when the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B", the small hit start effect time is set to the third specific time. When the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", the small hit start effect time is set to the second specific time, and when the small hit type is "small hit E", the small hit start effect The time is set to the first specific time.

After returning to FIG. 14-30 (a) and executing the process of step 063AKS913, the effect control CPU 120 controls to start the small hit start effect (step 063AKS914), and sets the value of the effect process flag during the small hit. After updating to "4", which is a value corresponding to the effect processing (step 063AKS915), the special figure hit waiting process is terminated.

FIG. 14-31 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S174 of the effect control process process as the small hit medium effect process with respect to the feature unit 063AK.

When the small hit middle effect process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the small hit start effect time set in step 063AKS913 has elapsed (step 063AKS1001). In step 063AKS1001, the small hit start effect time timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and the small hit start effect time elapses depending on whether or not the updated small hit start effect time timer value is "0". Determine if it has been done. When it is determined that the small hit start effect time has not elapsed (step 063AKS1001; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the small hit medium effect process.

When it is determined that the small hit start effect time has elapsed (step 063AKS1001; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the small hit start effect end flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is on (step 063AKS1001; Yes). Step 063AKS1002). When it is determined that the small hit start effect end flag is not on (step 063AKS1002; No), the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the small hit start effect (step 063AKS1004) and turns on the small hit start effect end flag. Set to the state (step 063AKS1005).

After executing the process of step 063AKS1005, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the sub-side time saving flag is on (step 063AKS1006). When it is determined that the sub-side time reduction flag is not on (step 063AKS1006; No), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start the normal pass-through effect (step 063AKS1007), and ends the small hit medium effect process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is on (step 063AKS1006; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start the time saving time passing fanning effect (step 063AKS1008), and ends the small hit medium effect process. do.

When it is determined in step 063AKS1002 that the small hit start effect end flag is on (step 063AKS1002; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hit end designation command corresponding to the small hit has been received (step 063AKS1002; Yes). Step 063AKS1003). When it is determined that the hit end designation command corresponding to the small hit has not been received (step 063AKS1003; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the small hit middle effect process.

When it is determined that the hit end designation command corresponding to the small hit has been received (step 063AKS1003; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 clears the small hit start effect end flag, sets it to the off state (step 063AKS1009), and passes. After controlling to end the normal time passing fanning effect or the time saving passing fanning effect being executed as the time fanning effect (step 063AKS1010), the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect processing. Update to 5 ”(step 063AKS1011).

After executing the process of step 063AKS1011, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has received either the small hit end designation command 1 or the small hit end designation command 2 as the hit end designation command according to the small hit. Determine (step 063AKS1012).

When it is determined that either the small hit end designation command 1 or the small hit end designation command 2 has been received (step 063AKS1012; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the passage notification effect time to the third special time (step 063AKS1012; Yes). Step 063AKS1013). In step 063AKS1013, the passage notification effect time timer value, which is a stored value of the passage notification effect time timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122, is set to a value corresponding to the third special time.

After executing the process of step 063AKS1013, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the sub-side time saving flag is on (step 063AKS1014). When it is determined that the sub-side time reduction flag is not on (step 063AKS1014; No), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start the normal large hit area passage notification effect (step 063AKS1015), and ends the small hit medium effect process. do. When it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is on (step 063AKS1014; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start the time saving big hit area passage notification effect (step 063AKS1016), and ends the small hit medium effect process. do.

When it is determined in step 063AKS1012 that neither the small hit end designation command 1 nor the small hit end designation command 2 has been received (step 063AKS1012; No), the effect control CPU 120 specifies the hit end according to the small hit. As a command, it is determined whether or not any of the small hit end designation command 3 and the small hit end designation command 4 is received (step 063AKS1017).

When it is determined that either the small hit end designation command 3 or the small hit end designation command 4 has been received (step 063AKS1017; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the passage notification effect time to the second special time (step 063AKS1017; Yes). Step 063AKS1018). In step 063AKS1018, the passage notification effect time timer value is set to a value corresponding to the second special time. After executing the process of step 063AKS1018, the effect control CPU 120 controls to start the time saving area passage notification effect (step 063AKS1019), and ends the small hit medium effect process.

When it is determined in step 063AKS1017 that neither the small hit end designation command 3 nor the small hit end designation command 4 has been received (step 063AKS1017; No), the effect control CPU 120 sets the passage notification effect time to the first special. Set to time (step 063AKS1020). In step 063AKS1020, the passage notification effect time timer value is set to a value corresponding to the first special time. After executing the process of step 063AKS1020, the effect control CPU 120 controls to start the loss area passage notification effect (step 063AKS1021), and ends the small hit medium effect process.

FIG. 14-32 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S175 of the effect control process process as the small hit end effect process for the feature unit 063AK.

When the small hit end effect process is started, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the passage notification effect time set in step 063AKS1013, step 063AKS1018, or step 063AKS1020 has elapsed (step 063AKS1101). In step 063AKS1101, the passage notification effect time timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and whether or not the passage notification effect time has elapsed depending on whether or not the updated passage notification effect time timer value is "0". Is determined. When it is determined that the passage notification effect time has not elapsed (step 063AKS1101; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the small hit end effect process.

When it is determined that the passage notification effect time has elapsed (step 063AKS1101; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 uses the small hit end specification command 1 and the small hit end specification command 2 as the hit end specification commands according to the small hits. It is determined whether or not any of them has been received (step 063AKS1102). When it is determined that either the small hit end designation command 1 or the small hit end designation command 2 has been received (step 063AKS1102; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets a predetermined time as the hit start designation command reception waiting time. (Step 063AKS1103), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step 063AKS1104), and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

When it is determined in step 063AKS1102 that neither the small hit end designation command 1 nor the small hit end designation command 2 has been received (step 063AKS1102; No), the effect control CPU 120 specifies the hit end according to the small hit. As a command, it is determined whether or not any of the small hit end designation command 3 and the small hit end designation command 4 is received (step 063AKS1105). When it is determined that either the small hit end designation command 3 or the small hit end designation command 4 has been received (step 063AKS1105; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the sub-side time reduction flag to the ON state (step 063AKS1106). ).

After executing the process of step 063AKS1106, the effect control CPU 120 receives a sub-hit end designation command 3 or a small hit end designation command 4 as a hit end designation command according to the small hit. The side time reduction count value is set (step 063AKS1107). When the small hit end designation command 3 indicating that the variable display is controlled to the time saving state is received for a period from the end of the small hit game state until the variable display is executed five times, in step 063AKS1107, the sub-side time saving count value is set. Set to "5". When the small hit end designation command 4 indicating that the variable display is controlled to the time saving state is received for the period from the end of the small hit game state until the variable display is executed once, in step 063AKS1107, the sub-side time saving count value is set. Set to "1".

When it is determined in step 063AKS1105 that neither the small hit end designation command 3 nor the small hit end designation command 4 has been received (step 063AKS1105; No), the effect control CPU 120 has the sub-side time reduction flag turned on. Whether or not it is determined (step 063AKS1108). When it is determined that the sub-side time reduction flag is on (step 063AKS1108; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the sub-side time reduction count value is "0" (step 063AKS1109).

When it is determined that the sub-side time reduction count value is "0" (step 063AKS1109; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 clears the sub-side time reduction flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS1110) to promote right-handed strike. After clearing the effect flag and setting it to the off state (step 063AKS1111), control is performed to end the right-handed promotion effect (step 063AKS1112).

After executing the process of step 063AKS1107 or step 063AKS1112, or when it is determined in step 063AKS1108 that the sub-side time saving flag is not on (step 063AKS1108; No), the sub-side time saving count value is "0" in step 063AKS1109. If it is determined that this is not the case (step 063AKS1109; No), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “0”, which is a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step 063AKS1113), and makes a small hit. End The production process ends.

Hereinafter, an example of the effect operation according to the feature unit 063AK will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-33 to 14-36.

First, with reference to FIGS. 14-33 and 14-34, an example of the effect operation in the case where the small hit variation is executed in the normal state will be described. Specifically, hereinafter, the small hit fluctuation is executed in the normal state, and during the small hit fluctuation, the reach effect of Super Reach A and the time saving suggestion effect are executed, and the third small hit symbol is executed as the final decorative symbol. Will be described using an example in which is derived and displayed.

In the normal state, FIGS. 14-33 (a) show the lost symbols (“135”) in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Indicates the stopped display state. In FIG. 14-33 (b), the small hit fluctuation is started in the normal state, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". It shows the state that is being done.

FIG. 14-33 (c) shows a state in which the reach is established and the character image AK6 showing the character A is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the reach effect of the super reach A. ..

In FIGS. 14-33 (d), the time saving suggestion effect is started, and a predetermined lost symbol (“767”) is provisionally set in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Indicates the stopped display state. FIG. 14-24 (e) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is revariably displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C in the time saving suggestion effect. FIG. 14-33 (f) shows a state in which the time saving suggestion symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the time saving suggestion effect. There is. FIG. 14-33 (g) shows a state in which the decorative symbols are revariably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the time saving suggestion effect. Shown.

In FIGS. 14-33 (h), the third small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a fixed decorative symbol in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", and the small hit variation. Indicates the finished state.

In FIG. 14-33 (i), the control to the small hit game state is started, and as the small hit start effect, the screen of the image display device 5 has the shape of an arrow pointing to the right, and "Aim to the right! AK8, a right arrow image showing the message, and AK9, a small hit start image showing the message "Put a ball here!", While showing the shape of the special variable winning ball device 7. Indicates the state of being. In the state shown in FIG. 14-33 (i), the right-handed promotion effect is started in response to the start of control to the small hit game state, and the right-handed promotion image AK7 showing an arrow pointing in the right direction is displayed as an image. It is displayed on the screen of the device 5.

In the normal state, after the effect operation shown in FIG. 14-33 (i) is executed, the effect operation shown in FIG. 14-34 (a) is executed. FIG. 14-34 (a) shows a state in which the normal passage fanning effect is being executed. In the normal time passing fanning effect, as shown in FIG. 14-34 (a), the big hit area passing fanning image AK2, the time saving area passing fanning image AK3, and the lost area passing fanning image AK4 are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The normal time passing fan image AK1 including the Is it a short time? Is it a loss? "

Hereinafter, the effect operation when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 while the normal pass fanning effect is being executed in the normal state will be described.

In the normal state, the effect operation shown in FIG. 14-34 (a) ends and the effect operation shown in FIG. 14-34 (b) is executed in response to the game ball passing through the jackpot area 063AK19. FIG. 14-34 (b) shows a state in which the normal time jackpot area passage notification effect is executed and the normal time jackpot area passage notification image AK10 indicating the message “V” is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. ing.

FIG. 14-34 (c) shows that after the small hit game state is completed, the big hit game state is controlled, and as a big hit start effect, the screen of the image display device 5 has the shape of an arrow pointing in the right direction. Shows the state in which the effect of displaying the first jackpot start image AK11 showing the message "Aim to the right!" And the second jackpot start image AK12 showing the message "Put the ball into the attacker!" Is being executed. There is. The second big hit start image AK12 is a production image that urges the player to win a game ball in the special variable winning ball device 7. In the state shown in FIG. 14-34 (c), the right-handed promotion effect is subsequently executed when the small hit game state is controlled, and the right-handed promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Has been done.

Next, in the normal state, when the normal time passing fanning effect is being executed, the effect operation when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 will be described.

In the normal state, the effect operation shown in FIG. 14-34 (a) is completed and the effect operation shown in FIG. 14-34 (d) is executed in response to the game ball passing through the time saving region 063AK20. FIG. 14-34 (d) shows a state in which the time-saving area passage notification effect is executed and the time-saving area passage notification image AK13 indicating the message “lucky!” Is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

FIG. 14-34 (e) shows the screen of the image display device 5 as a time saving rush effect, in which the normal state is controlled to the time saving state according to the start of the next variable display after the small hit game state is finished. In addition, the effect of displaying the first time-saving rush image AK14 showing the message "Time saving!" And the second time-saving rush image AK15 showing the message "Aim at the right and put the ball in the electric chew!" Is executed. Indicates the state of. In the state shown in FIG. 14-34 (e), the right-handed promotion effect is subsequently executed when the small hit game state is controlled, and the right-handed promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Has been done. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 14-34 (e), the time reduction number notification effect is executed according to the control to the time reduction state, and the time reduction number notification image AK16 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It is displayed in a display mode indicating that the number of times is four.

Next, in the normal state, the effect operation when the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21 while the normal pass fanning effect is being executed will be described.

In the normal state, the effect operation shown in FIG. 14-34 (a) ends and the effect operation shown in FIG. 14-34 (f) is executed in response to the game ball passing through the loss region 063AK21. FIG. 14-34 (f) shows a state in which the loss area passage notification effect is executed and the loss area passage notification image AK17 indicating the message “Sorry!” Is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In FIG. 14-34 (g), after the small hit game state ends, when the game state is controlled to the normal state without changing, the next variable display is started, and “left”, “middle”, It shows a state in which variable display is executed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R on the “right”.

Hereinafter, an example of the effect operation in the case where the small hit variation is executed in the time saving state will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-35 and 14-36. Specifically, hereinafter, a case where the small hit variation is executed in the time saving state, the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed during the small hit variation, and the third small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the final decorative symbol. It will be described using an example.

14-35 (a) shows the lost symbols (“135”) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5 in the time saving state. Indicates the stopped display state. In the state shown in FIG. 14-35 (a), the right-handed promotion effect is executed, and the right-handed promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 14-35 (a), the time reduction number notification effect is executed, and the time reduction number notification image AK16 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 indicating that the time reduction number is 4 times. It is displayed in the mode.

In FIG. 14-35 (b), the small hit fluctuation is started in the time saving state, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". It shows the state that is being done. In the state shown in FIG. 14-35 (b), the display mode of the time reduction number notification image AK16 is updated in response to the start of the variable display, and is displayed in a display mode indicating that the time reduction number is 3 times. Has been done.

FIG. 14-35 (c) shows a state in which the reach is established, the reach effect of the super reach A is executed, and the character image AK6 showing the character A is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In FIGS. 14-35 (d), the second small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a fixed decorative symbol in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", and the small hit variation. Indicates the finished state.

In FIG. 14-35 (e), the control to the small hit game state is started, the small hit start effect is executed, and the right arrow image AK8 and the start image AK9 are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Indicates the state. In the state shown in FIG. 14-35 (e), the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed in response to the start of control to the small hit game state, and the right-handed promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Has been done.

In the time saving state, after the effect operation shown in FIG. 14-35 (e) is executed, the effect operation shown in FIG. 14-36 (a) is executed. FIG. 14-36 (a) shows a state in which the time-saving time-passing fanning effect is being executed. In the time-saving time-passing fanning effect, as shown in FIG. 14-36 (a), the time-saving time-passing fanning image including the jackpot area passing fanning image AK2 and the lost area passing fanning image AK4 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. AK5 is displayed, and the jackpot region light emitting unit 063AK25 and the loss region light emitting unit 063AK27 are made to emit light without causing the time-saving region light emitting unit 063AK26 provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 to emit light. An effect is performed to output a short-time passing fanning voice indicating the message "Is it?"

Hereinafter, the effect operation when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 while the time-saving time-saving passing fanning effect is being executed in the time-saving state will be described.

In the time saving state, the effect operation shown in FIG. 14-36 (a) is completed and the effect operation shown in FIG. 14-36 (b) is executed in response to the game ball passing through the jackpot area 063AK19. FIG. 14-36 (b) shows a state in which the time-saving big hit area passage notification effect is executed and the time-saving big hit area passage notification image AK18 indicating the message “BONUS!” Is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Shown.

In FIG. 14-36 (c), after the small hit game state is completed, the big hit start effect is executed under the control of the big hit game state, and the first big hit start image AK11 and the second big hit are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The state in which the start image AK12 is displayed is shown. In the state shown in FIG. 14-36 (c), the right-handed promotion effect is subsequently executed when the small hit game state is controlled, and the right-handed promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Has been done.

Next, the effect operation when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 or the loss area 063AK21 while the time-saving time-saving fanning effect is being executed in the time-saving state will be described. In the time saving state, the same effect operation is executed when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 and when the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21.

In the time saving state, the effect operation shown in FIG. 14-36 (a) is completed and the effect operation shown in FIG. 14-36 (d) is executed in response to the game ball passing through the time saving area 063AK or the loss area 063AK21. Will be done. FIG. 14-36 (d) shows a state in which the loss area passage notification effect is executed and the loss area passage notification image AK17 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In FIG. 14-36 (e), after the small hit game state is completed, when the game state is controlled to the time saving state without changing, the next variable display is started, and “left”, “middle”, It shows a state in which variable display is executed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R on the “right”. In the state shown in FIG. 14-36 (e), the display mode of the time reduction number notification image AK16 is updated in response to the start of the variable display, and is displayed in a display mode indicating that the time reduction number is 2 times. Has been done. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 14-36 (e), the right-handed promotion effect is subsequently executed when the small hit game state is controlled, and the right-handed promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It is displayed in.

As described above, in the feature unit 063AK, the small hit symbol (special display result) is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game in the normal state, and is formed in the special variable winning ball device 7 (variable means). When the game ball (game medium) passes through the time saving area 063AK20 (special area) when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the time saving transition control is performed based on the passage, and the time saving from the normal state is shortened. While controlling to the state (special state), the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game when the time is shortened, and when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball is shortened. When the region 063AK20 is passed, the time saving transition control based on the passage is not performed. Further, in the feature unit 063AK, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game in the normal state and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 and the time saving state. In the special figure game, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, and when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, a different effect can be executed depending on whether the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. .. According to such a configuration, suitable control can be performed according to the state.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK, the same effect is produced when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state and when the game ball does not pass through either the jackpot area 063AK19 or the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state. It is configured to be viable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the feature unit 063AK is configured to be capable of executing different effects depending on whether the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the time saving state and when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the normal state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK, different effects are variably displayed depending on whether the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game in the normal state and the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game in the time saving state. It is configured to be executable during execution. According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform a suitable effect depending on the state.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game in the normal state, it is controlled to the time saving state as an effect suggesting that the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the confirmed special symbol. It is configured so that the time saving suggestion effect suggesting that can be executed during the execution of the variable display. According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute various effects and improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the second special symbol game, it is higher than when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the first special symbol game. It is configured to be controlled in a time-saving state at a rate. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the second special symbol game, and to improve the game interest.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and is shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have a part of the configuration.

In the above embodiment, as a look-ahead notice effect, the display mode of the hold display displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode in the normal time, so that the hold display can be changed. In the display, the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 063AK4 that is controlled to the small hit gaming state or is controlled to the open state in the small hit gaming state is either the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21. The hold display change effect for notifying the passing of the image may be made feasible.

For example, by changing the display color of the hold display corresponding to the variable display that has not been started yet by the hold display change effect, the display color of the hold display is changed to blue, green, or red, which is different from the normal white color, so that the hold display can be displayed. The game ball that has entered the big winning opening 063AK4, which is controlled to the small hit game state by making the change in the display mode recognizable and controlled to the open state in the small hit game state, has the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area. It may be configured so that it can be suggested that it passes through either 063AK20 or the lost area 063AK21.

Specifically, when the hold display change effect is configured to be executable as a look-ahead notice, the look-ahead judgment is performed based on the occurrence of the start prize in the start prize determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process. You just have to be. In the look-ahead determination, for example, a random number lottery is performed by referring to the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 14-12 (a) and the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 14-12 (b). , Fig. 14-14 when the process of pre-reading judgment as to whether the variable display result is "big hit", "small hit", or "missing", or when the variable display result is pre-reading as "small hit" By performing a random number lottery with reference to the small hit type determination table shown in (b), a process of pre-reading and determining which of the small hit types "small hit A" to "small hit E" is performed is performed. Just do it. After that, in the start winning determination process, a setting for transmitting a start winning command indicating the result of the look-ahead determination may be made.

The start prize command that has been set to be transmitted in the start prize determination process is mainly generated by executing the command control process in step S27 of the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12. The start winning command transmitted from the main board 11 is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 at the time of starting winning by executing the command analysis process in step S75 of the effect control main process shown in the flowchart of FIG. It may be stored in the command buffer.

In this case, in the pre-reading notice setting process executed in step S161 of the effect control process process, whether or not the hold display change effect as the pre-reading notice effect is executed in response to receiving the start winning command from the main board 11. And the execution mode may be determined.

In the hold storage that is stored when determining whether to execute the hold display change effect and the execution mode, the hold that the variable display result is "big hit" and the variable display result are "small hit", and the small hit type is , After the end of the variable display executed first, that is, the destination, when any of the "small hit C" or the "small hit D" hold in which the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 is included. By changing from the normal state to the time saving state before executing the variable display corresponding to the hold of the read notice target, the variable display is performed at the time of pre-reading and at the time of executing the variable display corresponding to the hold of the read notice target. Results and variation patterns may vary. In such a case, there will be an inconsistency between the suggested content of the hold display change effect as the look-ahead notice effect and the actual variable display result or variation pattern, which will lead to distrust of the player and reduce the game interest. There is a risk.

Therefore, in the stored hold, a hold in which the variable display result is "big hit" and a hold in which the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D". And, if any of the above is included, the execution of the hold display change effect may be restricted. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

For example, in the pre-reading notice setting process, in the stored hold, the variable display result is "big hit" and the variable display result is "small hit", and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit C". When none of the hold that becomes "small hit D" is included, according to the variable display result and the small hit type according to the decision ratio shown in the normal hold change determination table shown in FIG. 14-37 (a). , Whether or not to execute the hold display change effect and the execution mode may be determined. On the other hand, in the stored hold, the variable display result is "big hit" and the variable display result is "small hit", and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D". When any of the above is included, the variable display result and the small hit are according to the determination ratio shown in the normal hold change determination table shown in the restricted hold change determination table shown in FIG. 14-37 (b). Depending on the type, whether or not the hold display change effect is executed and the execution mode may be determined. In the stored hold, a hold in which the variable display result is "big hit" and a hold in which the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D". Whether or not is included may be determined by checking the contents of the buffer at the time of starting winning.

In the normal hold change determination table, as shown in FIG. 14-37 (a), when the variable display result is "big hit", the hold display change effect is held at a higher rate than it is determined not to be executed (white). The display mode of the display is determined to be blue, the display mode of the hold display is determined to be green at a rate higher than blue, and the display mode of the hold display is determined to be red at a rate higher than green. With such a configuration, the jackpot expectation is higher when the hold display is displayed in red than when it is displayed in green, and when the hold display is displayed in green, it is in blue. It is higher than when it is displayed, and when the hold display is displayed in blue, it is higher than when it is displayed in white (when the hold display change effect is not executed). On the other hand, in the limited time hold change determination table, as shown in FIG. 14-37 (b), the execution of the hold display change effect in which the jackpot expectation is green or higher is restricted. In the example shown in FIGS. 14-37 (b), the hold display change effect in which the hold display is displayed in blue can be executed, but it may be limited to "no execution".

In the normal hold change determination table shown in FIG. 14-37 (a) and the restricted hold change determination table shown in FIG. 14-37 (b), when the variable display result is "small hit", the variable display is made. An example is shown in which the display mode is determined in the same manner as when the result is "big hit", but this is only an example, the variable display result is "small hit", and the small hit type is "small hit A" or When it becomes "small hit B" When the display mode peculiar to it (for example, "big hit?") Or the variable display result becomes "small hit" and the small hit type becomes "small hit C" or "small hit D". There may be a unique display mode (“hour?”). With such a configuration, the variation of the hold display change effect increases, and the player's attention can be attracted.

In the above embodiment, the special figure display result is "small hit" in the hold storage corresponding to the second special figure game stored after the time saving state is completed, and the small hit type is the game ball in the time saving area 063AK20. Even if it is configured so that different effects can be executed depending on whether a hold memory that becomes a "small hit C" or a "small hit D" passing through the above is included and a case where such a hold memory is not included. good. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

For example, in the hold storage corresponding to the second special figure game that is stored after the time saving state ends, the special figure display result becomes "small hit", and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D". If the hold memory that becomes There is a hold in which the special figure display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D" in the hold memory corresponding to). Just do it. On the other hand, the special figure display result becomes "small hit" in the hold storage corresponding to the second special figure game stored after the time saving state ends, and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D". If the hold that becomes is not included, it will not be controlled to the time saving state again by any of the remaining hold (the special figure display result will be "small hit" in the hold memory corresponding to the second special figure game. , There is no hold for which the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D"). As an example, both the return success effect and the return failure effect are the effects in which the combination of different decorative symbols is stopped and displayed after performing the effect of inciting whether or not the time is controlled again as a common effect. All you need is.

In the above embodiment, as an effect corresponding to the small hit variation, the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 controlled to the open state in the small hit game state does not suggest that the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. The jackpot fanning effect suggesting that the ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 and the game ball passes through the loss zone 063AK21 can be executed, and the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the normal state. Based on this, after performing a loss effect suggesting that the game ball did not pass through the big hit area 063AK19, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, and based on the passage, the time saving state is set after the end of the small hit game state. Relief effects that suggest being controlled may be configured to be feasible. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

For example, as a big hit fanning effect, as shown in FIG. 14-38 (a), a message "big hit" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, suggesting that the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19. An effect of displaying the jackpot fanning image AK19 including the image AK20, the loss suggestion image AK21 which indicates the message of "loss" and suggests that the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21 may be configured to be feasible. In this case, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time saving region 063AK20, as a loss effect, as shown in FIG. 14-38 (b), an effect of highlighting the loss suggestion image AK21 included in the jackpot fanning image AK19. Just execute. In the state shown in FIG. 14-38 (b), the frame line of the loss suggestion image AK21 is displayed thicker than the frame line of the jackpot suggestion image AK20 which is not highlighted, so that the loss suggestion image AK21 is highlighted. There is. After performing the effect operation shown in FIG. 14-38 (b) as the loss effect, as a relief effect, as shown in FIG. 14-38 (c), a part of the area where the loss suggestion image AK21 is displayed is displayed. The message "time saving" is displayed, the time saving suggestion image AK22 suggesting that the game ball passes through the time saving region 063AK20 is displayed, the highlighting of the loss suggestion image AK21 is finished, and the time saving suggestion image AK22 is highlighted. All you have to do is execute the production. In the state shown in FIG. 14-38 (c), the frame line of the time saving suggestion image AK22 is displayed thicker than the frame lines of the unhighlighted jackpot suggestion image AK20 and the loss suggestion image AK21, so that the time saving suggestion image AK22 is displayed. Is highlighted.

In the above embodiment, in the special symbol normal processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 14-11, after determining whether or not the special symbol display result is to be a “big hit” (step 063AKS106), the special symbol display result is displayed in step 063AKS106. When it is determined that the "big hit" is not determined (step 063AKS107; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is the "small hit" (step 063AKS118). However, this is only an example, and the process of determining whether or not the special figure display result is a "big hit" and the process of determining whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" are optional. Can be executed in the order of. For example, after executing a process of determining whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit", when the special figure display result is not determined to be a "small hit" in the process, the special figure is displayed. It may be configured to execute a process of determining whether or not the result is a "big hit". Alternatively, by determining whether the special figure display result is "big hit", "small hit", or "loss" by a single process, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is "big hit". The process of determining whether or not to set the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be executed at the same time.

In the above embodiment, only one of the game balls winning the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state flows down to the distribution part 063AK18 through the distribution part supply path 063AK8, and the one is Except for the game balls, it has been described that the balls are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. However, this is only an example, and a plurality of game balls among the game balls that have won the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state are configured to enter the distribution section 063AK18 through the distribution section supply path 063AK8. You may. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In this configuration, one game ball enters the distribution section 063AK18, passes through one of the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21, and then at least one or more other game balls. Enters the distribution section 063AK18 and may pass through other regions of the jackpot region 063AK19, the time saving region 063AK20, and the loss region 063AK21. In this case, among the plurality of game balls that entered the distribution unit 063AK18 in the small hit game state, the game ball that first entered the distribution unit 063AK18 passed through any of the large hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21. Based on the above, the game state after the small hit game state ends may be controlled. For example, when the game ball that first enters the distribution unit 063AK18 in the small hit game state passes through the big hit area 063AK19, even if another game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 or the loss area 063AK21 after the passage, the first Based on the fact that the game ball of No. 1 has passed through the big hit area 063AK19, it may be controlled to the big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state.

Alternatively, of the plurality of game balls that have entered the distribution unit 063AK18 in the small hit game state, which of the large hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21 has passed the game ball that last entered the distribution unit 063AK18. The game state after the small hit game state ends may be controlled based on the above. For example, when the game ball that last entered the distribution unit 063AK18 in the small hit game state passes through the big hit area 063AK19, it is assumed that another game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20 or the loss area 063AK21 before the passage. Also, based on the fact that the last game ball has passed through the big hit area 063AK19, the big hit game state may be controlled after the end of the small hit game state.

Alternatively, the priority order is set in advance between the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21, and a plurality of game balls that have entered the distribution unit 063AK18 in the small hit game state are set in the jackpot area 063AK19. , Time saving area 063AK20 and loss area 063AK21, when passing through multiple areas, the game after the small hit game state ends based on the passage to the area with the highest priority among the areas passed by the game ball. You may control the state. For example, the priority of the jackpot area 063AK19 may be set higher than the priority of the time saving area 063AK20, and the priority of the time saving area 063AK20 may be set higher than the priority of the losing area 063AK21. In this case, when a plurality of game balls that have entered the distribution unit 063AK18 pass through the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss region 063AK21, respectively, the game balls pass through the jackpot area 063AK19 having the highest priority. Then, after the end of the small hit game state, it is controlled to the big hit game state.

In the above embodiment, in the case of the time saving state, when the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 controlled to the open state in the small hit game state passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the time saving transition control based on the passage is performed. I explained it as something that couldn't be done. However, this is only an example, and in the case of the time saving state, when the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 controlled to the open state in the small hit game state passes through the time saving area 063AK20, based on the passage. By performing the time saving transition control and controlling the time saving state for a predetermined period after the end of the small hit game state, the period controlled to the time saving state may be extended. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In this case, the effect of notifying that the period controlled to the time saving state has been extended based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 063AK4 has passed through the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state is produced. It may be configured to be feasible. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. For example, as an effect of notifying that the period controlled in the time saving state has been extended, a time saving number recovery effect of increasing the time saving number indicated by the time saving number notification image AK16 may be performed.

In this case, in the time saving state, without suggesting the passage of the time saving area 063AK20, the suggestion regarding the passage between the jackpot area 063AK19 and the loss area 063AK21 is given (the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20). It is suggested that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 and the game ball passes through the loss region 063AK21 without suggesting). Suggests that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, and the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21. ) It may be configured so that the normal passing fanning effect can be executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In the above embodiment, as an effect corresponding to the small hit fluctuation, the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 063AK4 controlled to the open state in the small hit gaming state has the large hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21. An effect suggesting which of the two should be passed may be configured to be feasible during the execution of the small hit variation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. For example, if the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B" in which the game ball passes through the large hit area 063AK19, a small hit variation suggests that the game ball passes through the large hit area 063AK19. If the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D" in which the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, an effect suggesting that the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 is produced. If the small hit type is "small hit E", which is executed during the execution of the small hit variation and the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21, a small hit suggests that the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21. It may be configured to be executed during the execution of the fluctuation.

In the above embodiment, the normal time passing fanning effect and the short time passing fanning effect are started in response to the end of the small hit variation, the end of the small hit start effect, and the start of opening and closing of the large winning opening. It was explained as. However, this is only an example, and the normal time passing fanning effect and the short time passing fanning effect may be configured to be able to start from the execution of the small hit variation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. In particular, when the normal passage fanning effect is configured to be executable during the execution of the small hit variation, the game ball is hit in the small hit game state by displaying the normal passage fanning image AK1 during the execution of the small hit variation. Based on the expectation that the game ball will be controlled to the big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state based on passing through the area 063AK19, and the small hit game based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small hit game state. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the time is controlled to be shortened after the end of the state and the degree of expectation that the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21 in the small hit game state, and the game interest can be improved.

In the above embodiment, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the normal state, the time saving area passing notification image AK13 indicating the message "lucky!" Is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state, it is a pity! This has been described as executing the loss area passage notification effect of displaying the loss area passage notification image AK17 indicating the message on the screen of the image display device 5. However, this is only an example, and the effect executed when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the normal state is different from the effect executed when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state. It may be a production of. For example, when the game ball passes through the time-saving region 063AK20 in the normal state, the time-saving region light emitting unit 063AK26 is emitted, while when the game ball passes through the time-saving region 063AK20 in the time-saving state, the time-saving region light emitting unit 063AK26 is emitted. It is also possible to perform an effect of not emitting light (turning off). Alternatively, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the normal state, a notification voice indicating the message "time saving!" Is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, while the game ball outputs the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state. When passing through, the effect of not outputting the notification voice from the speakers 8L and 8R may be performed.

In the above embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 has been described as having a jackpot area 063AK19, a time saving area 063AK20, and a loss area 063AK21, but this is only an example. The special variable winning ball device 7 may be configured so as to include a time saving area 063AK20 but not a jackpot area 063AK19 or a loss area 063AK21. According to such a configuration, the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 may be configured to include a plurality of time saving regions 063AK20. In this case, in the small hit gaming state, the time saving state may be controlled for different periods after the small hit gaming state ends, depending on which of the plurality of time saving regions 063AK20 the game ball has passed through. good. For example, the time saving area 063AK20 is configured to include a first time saving area and a second time saving area, and when the game ball passes through the first time saving area in the small hit game state, the small hit game state. After the end of, the time saving state is controlled for a period until the variable display is executed five times, while when the game ball passes through the second time saving area in the small hit game state, after the small hit game state ends. , It may be configured to control the time saving state for a period until the variable display is executed once. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the plurality of time-saving regions 063AK20 the game ball passes through in the small hit game state, and improve the game interest.

In the above embodiment, in the low probability low base state as the normal state, the time saving transition control is performed based on the fact that the game ball has passed the time saving area 063AK20 in the small hitting game state, and the small hitting gaming state is performed. It was explained that it is controlled to the time saving state after the end of. However, this is only an example, and in the high-accuracy low-base state, the time-saving transition control is performed based on the fact that the game ball has passed the time-saving region 063AK20 in the small-hit gaming state, and the small-hit gaming state is performed. It may be configured to be controlled to a time saving state after the end of.

Any part or all of each of the above configurations can be combined with each other in any way.

Each configuration relating to the feature portion 063AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration relating to the other feature portion. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

For example, the feature unit 079SG may be introduced into the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 063AK. Specifically, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 063AK, the production is performed in the first period such as the normal time passing fanning effect, the time saving passing fanning effect, and the reach effect of Super Reach A to Super Reach C as predetermined effects. An effect moving image having a progress speed of the first speed can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a display means, and the progress speed of the effect is the first in the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period. An effect moving image having a second speed slower than the speed can be displayed on the image display device 5, and the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect is the effect sound in both the first period and the second period. The speeds related to the above may be configured to be output at the same speed by the speakers 8L and 8R as sound output means. According to such a configuration, the progress speed of the effect moving image of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the normal time passing fanning effect, the time saving passing fanning effect, and the super reach A to the predetermined effect Since the speed related to the effect sound corresponding to the reach effect of Super Reach C does not change between the first period and the second period, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 063AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 063AK is
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can execute variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the variable display result. In pachinko game machine 1 etc.)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state,
A first state (for example, an open state) in which a game medium (for example, a game ball) has a special area (for example, a time saving area 063AK20) and is easy to enter, and a second state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter (for example, a game ball). Variable means that can be controlled (for example, special variable winning ball device 7) and
It is equipped with an effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect corresponding to variable display.
The variable means is controlled to the first state (for example, FIGS. 14-6 and 14) when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result. -8, Fig. 14-23, etc.),
The state control means
When the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result in the normal state and the game medium passes through the special area when the variable means is controlled to the first state, the above-mentioned is performed based on the passage. Control from the normal state to the special state (for example, FIGS. 14-23, 14-26, etc.).
When the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the special state and the game medium passes through the special area when the variable means is controlled to the first state, control based on the passage is performed. (For example, Fig. 14-23, Fig. 14-26, etc.),
The effect executing means derives and displays the special display result as a variable display result in the normal state, and when the variable means is controlled to the first state, the game medium passes through the special area. In the special state, the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result, and when the variable means is controlled to the first state, a different effect can be executed depending on whether the game medium passes through the special area. (For example, FIG. 14-8, FIG. 14-23, FIG. 14-24, FIG. 14-31, FIG. 14-34, FIG. 14-36, etc.).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, suitable control can be performed according to the state.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, which relates to the feature unit 063AK.
The variable means has a specific area (for example, a jackpot area 063AK19).
The state control means can control the advantageous state when the game medium passes through the specific region (for example, FIGS. 14-23, 14-26, etc.).
The effect executing means is the same effect when the game medium passes through the special area in the special state and when the game medium does not pass through either the specific area and the special area in the special state. Is feasible (eg, FIG. 14-8, FIG. 14-23, FIG. 14-24, FIG. 14-31, FIG. 14-36, etc.).
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above, which relates to the feature unit 063AK.
The effect executing means can execute different effects depending on whether the game medium passes through the specific area in the special state and when the game medium passes through the specific area in the normal state (for example, FIG. 14). -8, FIG. 14-23, FIG. 14-24, FIG. 14-31, FIG. 14-34, FIG. 14-36, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(4) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (1) to (3) according to the feature unit 063AK,
The effect executing means produces different effects depending on whether the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state and when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the special state. It can be executed during the execution of the variable display (eg, FIGS. 14-8, 14-9, 14-15, 14-16, 14-19, 14-33, 14-35, etc.).
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform a suitable effect depending on the state.

(5) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (1) to (4) according to the feature unit 063AK,
The effect executing means brings the special display result into the special state as an effect suggesting that the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result when the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result in the normal state. An effect suggesting control (eg, a time saving suggestion effect) can be performed during the execution of the variable display (eg, FIGS. 14-8, 14-9, 14-15, 14-16, 14). -19, Fig. 14-33, Fig. 14-35, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute various effects and improve the game entertainment.

(6) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (1) to (5) according to the feature unit 063AK,
Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special figure game) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special figure game) can be executed.
When the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the second identification information, the special state is higher than when the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the first identification information. (For example, FIG. 14-14),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the second identification information, and to improve the game interest.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 064AK)
The feature section 063AK includes the feature section 064AK shown below.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 064AK is
In a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) in which variable display can be executed and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state,
A first state (for example, an open state) that has a specific area (for example, a jackpot area 063AK19) and a special area (for example, a time saving area 063AK20) and is easy for a game medium (for example, a game ball) to enter, and a game A second state in which the medium is inaccessible or difficult to enter (for example, a closed state), a variable means that can be controlled (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7), and
It is equipped with an effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect corresponding to variable display.
The state control means
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area, the advantageous state can be controlled (for example, FIGS. 14-23, 14-26, etc.).
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the special region, it is possible to control from the normal state to the special state (for example, FIGS. 14-23, 14-26, etc.).
When the variable means is controlled to the first state, the effect executing means can execute a special effect (for example, a normal passing fanning effect) that suggests passage between the specific area and the special area. Yes (eg, FIGS. 14-8, 14-10, 14-31, 14-34, etc.).
When the variable means is controlled to the first state and the game medium passes through the special region, the state control means controls the variable means to the special state until the variable means is controlled to the second state. No (eg, FIGS. 14-23, 14-26, etc.),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, suitable control can be performed according to the state.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, which relates to the feature unit 064AK.
The effect executing means is
In the normal state, when the variable means is controlled to the first state, the special effect is executed (for example, FIGS. 14-8, 14-10, 14-31, 14-34, etc.).
In the special state, when the variable means is controlled to the first state, a specific effect (for example, a time-saving time-passing fanning effect) that suggests the passage of the specific area without suggesting the passage of the special area is performed. ) (For example, FIG. 14-8, FIG. 14-10, FIG. 14-31, FIG. 14-36, etc.).
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform a suitable effect depending on the situation.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, which relates to the feature unit 064AK.
The effect executing means can execute different effects depending on whether the game medium passes through the specific area in the special state and when the game medium passes through the specific area in the normal state (for example, FIG. 14). -8, FIG. 14-23, FIG. 14-24, FIG. 14-31, FIG. 14-34, FIG. 14-36, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above, which relates to the feature unit 064AK.
The variable means is controlled to the first state (for example, FIGS. 14-6 and 14-) when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable table result. 8, Fig. 14-23, etc.),
The effect executing means produces different effects depending on whether the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state and when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the special state. It can be executed during the execution of the variable display (eg, FIGS. 14-8, 14-9, 14-15, 14-16, 14-19, 14-33, 14-35, etc.).
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform a suitable effect depending on the state.

(5) In the gaming machine of (3) or (4) above, which relates to the feature unit 064AK.
The effect executing means brings the special display result into the special state as an effect suggesting that the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result when the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result in the normal state. An effect suggesting control (eg, a time saving suggestion effect) can be performed during the execution of the variable display (eg, FIGS. 14-8, 14-9, 14-15, 14-16, 14). -19, Fig. 14-33, Fig. 14-35, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute various effects and improve the game entertainment.

(6) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (3) to (5) according to the feature unit 064AK,
In the effect executing means, when the special display result is derived as a variable display result, the variable means is controlled to the first state, and then the variable means is controlled to the second state, the game medium is released. It is possible to perform different effects depending on whether the game medium passes through the specific area or the special area (for example, FIGS. 14-8, 14-23, 14-24, 14-31). , Fig. 14-34, Fig. 14-36, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect executed when the variable means is controlled to the second state, and to improve the game entertainment.

(Explanation of feature 065AK)
The feature unit 065AK will be described. In the feature section 065AK, the description of the parts (configuration, processing, etc.) common to the basic description will be omitted.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the basic explanation, after being controlled to the jackpot game state, it is possible to control to the high base state (time saving state). In the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature unit 065AK, in the low base state (normal state), the display result of the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 20 is the predetermined "time saving symbol" among the "normal symbol loss". When becomes, it is controlled to the high base state (time saving state) regardless of the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. As a result, the game may shift from the low base state to the high base state without going through the jackpot game state, so that it is possible to provide unexpected game playability.

In the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature unit 065AK, when the display result of the normal symbol is "time saving symbol", the state shifts from the low base state to the high base state even during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. It has become like.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature unit 065AK, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect of suggesting / notifying the display result of the normal symbol or the display result of the special symbol. It is possible to suggest and notify that the display result of the normal symbol is "normal symbol hit" or "time saving symbol", or the display result of the special symbol is "big hit" by the predetermined effect. With such a predetermined effect, the player can expect which display result is suggested / notified, and the interest is improved.

(Structure of feature 065AK)
FIG. 15-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 having the feature portion 065AK, and shows the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature portion 065AK is different from the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the basic description shown in FIG. 1 in the arrangement of a part of the configuration. In addition, here, the part different from FIG. 1 will be mainly described, and the same number will be assigned to the same configuration and the description will be omitted.

In the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature unit 065AK shown in FIG. 15-1, the gaming ball launched from the hitting ball launching device is the first path, which is the path on the left side of the frame surrounding the image display device 5, or the image display device. It is guided to the lower side of the game area via the second route, which is the route on the right side of the frame surrounding 5, and either wins (enters) each winning opening or goes to the out opening without entering any winning opening. It is captured.

Launching the game ball so that the game ball passes through the first path on the left side of the image display device 5 is called left-handed, and launches the game ball so that the game ball passes through the second path on the right side of the image display device 5. Making it right-handed is called right-handed. The area where the left-handed game ball can be guided is called the left area, and the area where the right-handed game ball can be guided is also called the right area.

In the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature unit 065AK, the winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5 and in the left region of the gaming area as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the basic explanation, while the winning ball device 6A is a variable winning machine. The ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are provided in the lower right region of the image display device 5 and in the right region of the game area. Therefore, in the high base state in which the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is open, or in the big hit game state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is open, the game is played by hitting right. In the low base state where the winning opening is not opened, the game is played by left-handed.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature portion 065AK, the passing gates 41 are provided in the left region and the right region, so that the normal drawing game can be easily executed even in the low base state where the game is played by left-handed. .. As a result, in the low base state, the display result of the normal symbol becomes a "time saving symbol", and it is possible to secure an opportunity to shift to the high base state.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature portion 065AK, general winning openings 10 are provided in the left region and the right region. The general winning opening 10 may be provided in either area.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature portion 065AK, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, and a movable body lamp 9d are provided as the game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, the frame lamp 9b is provided so as to surround the gaming area, and the attacker lamp 9c is a special variable winning prize in the gaming board 2. It is provided near the ball device 7. A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a position above the image display device 5 of the game board 2, and the movable body lamp 9 is provided on the movable body 32.

Subsequently, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature unit 065AK will be described. FIG. 15-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol process process executed in step S26 of FIG. In the normal symbol process process, when the CPU 103 detects that the gate switch 21 is in the ON state, that is, the game ball has passed through the gate 41 (step S411; Yes), the CPU 103 executes the gate switch pass process (step S412). do.

In the gate switch passing process in step S412, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the count value (gate passing storage number) of the gate passing storage counter has reached the maximum value (“4” in this example). If the maximum value is not reached, the count value of the gate passing storage counter is incremented by 1, the value of the random number for normal symbol determination, which is a software random number, is extracted and stored in the storage area corresponding to the value of the gate passing storage number. In addition, the number of lights of the normal figure hold indicator 25C is increased by 1. After that, one of the processes of steps S400 to S404 as shown below is executed according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

In the normal symbol normal processing of step S400, the CPU 103 is not in a state where the normal symbol variation can be started (for example, the normal symbol variation display is not executed in the normal symbol display 20 and the variable winning prize is obtained. If the ball device 6B is not in the open state) and the number of stored gates is not 0, the value of the random number for determining the hit of the normal symbol stored in the storage area and the normal symbol shown in FIG. 15-3. Using the determination table, it is determined whether or not to make a hit (whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol) and whether or not to make a time-saving symbol. If the game state is in the low base state (if the time saving flag is not set), use the table shown in FIG. 15-3 (A), and if the game state is in the high base state (if the time saving flag is set). For example, the table shown in FIG. 15-3 (B) is used. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (“1” in this example) indicating the normal symbol variation pattern setting process (step S401).

In the normal symbol fluctuation pattern setting process of step S401, the CPU 103 normally sets a value corresponding to the variable display time (normal symbol fluctuation time) until the normal symbol is variably displayed and derived and displayed in the normal symbol process timer. Start the symbol process timer. In addition, a control for transmitting a command for designating the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol to the effect control board 12 is executed. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (“2” in this example) corresponding to the normal symbol variation process (step S402).

The CPU 103 executes variable display (variation) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol variation process of step S402. Then, it is confirmed whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (“3” in this example) indicating the normal symbol stop processing (step S403). ..

The CPU 103 stops the fluctuation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 20 in the normal symbol stop processing in step S403. Then, the normal symbol process timer is started by setting a value corresponding to the symbol confirmation time (stop symbol display time) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol process timer, and when the timer times out, the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol. Check if it exists. If it is not a hit symbol (if it is a lost symbol), if it is a time-saving symbol, the process for starting the time-saving state is executed. If it is not a hit symbol (if it is a lost symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (“0” in this example) indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step S400). If the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the normal symbol process timer is started by setting a value corresponding to the normal electric accessory opening time in the normal symbol process timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (“4” in this example) indicating the normal electric accessory opening process (step S404).

The CPU 103 sets the variable winning ball device (ordinary electric accessory) 6B to the open state in the process during opening of the ordinary electric accessory in step S404. When the normal symbol process timer times out, the variable winning ball device 6B is closed and the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (“0” in this example) indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step S400).

FIG. 15-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a normal symbol determination table in which a determination value regarding the display result of the normal symbol for determining the display result of the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol normal process of step S400. In this embodiment, the range in which the random number for normal symbol determination can be taken is 1 to 250, but the normal symbol determination table is compared with the random number value for normal symbol determination and the determination value is set.

FIG. 15-3 (A) is a normal symbol determination table used in a low base state. As shown in FIG. 15-3 (A), in the low base state, when the random value for normal symbol determination is 1 or 2, it is determined to be a hit (normal symbol hit). If it is determined that the ball is hit by a normal figure, the variable winning ball device 6A is opened for 5 seconds. When the random value for normal symbol determination is 3 to 230, it is determined to be a loss (normal symbol loss). If it is determined that the normal figure is lost, the variable winning ball device 6A is not opened. In the case of hitting or losing a normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 10 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time is 0.5 seconds.

Further, when the random value for normal symbol determination is 231 to 240, it is determined to be a loss (time saving symbol A). When it is determined that the time saving symbol A is determined, the variable winning ball device 6A is not opened, but is controlled to a high base state (time saving state). In the case of the time-saving symbol A, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 10 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time is 10 seconds.

Further, when the random value for normal symbol determination is 241-250, it is determined to be lost (time saving symbol B). When it is determined that the time saving symbol B is determined, the variable winning ball device 6A is not opened, but is controlled to a high base state (time saving state). In the case of the time-saving symbol B, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 15 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time is 10 seconds.

In this way, the time-saving symbol is a part of the time-saving symbol, and a part of the determination value corresponding to the time-saving symbol is assigned to the time-saving symbol.

Further, in the normal symbol normal processing of step S400, after determining (determining) whether or not the symbol is a normal symbol, it is determined whether or not the symbol is a time-saving symbol. By doing so, when it is determined that the symbol is a normal figure and the time saving symbol is due to a random number error or the like, the normal figure hit can be prioritized. In the low base state, it is more advantageous for the player to use the time-saving symbol than to hit the normal symbol. Therefore, it is first determined whether or not to use the time-saving symbol, and then the normal symbol is used. It may be determined whether or not it is a figure hit.

In this embodiment, two types of time-saving symbols are provided, and the period of the high base state (end condition, number of time-savings) is different between the case of the time-saving symbol A and the case of the time-saving symbol B. As shown in FIG. 15-4 (A), when the display result of the normal symbol becomes "time saving symbol A" in the low base state, the high base state continues until the special symbol is changed 50 times (time saving number of times). Is 50 times). Further, when the display result of the normal symbol becomes "time saving symbol B" in the low base state, the high base state continues until the special symbol is changed 100 times (the number of time saving is 100 times). Therefore, the time saving symbol B is more advantageous to the player than the time saving symbol A.

In this embodiment, whether or not the time-saving symbol is used and the type of the time-saving symbol are determined by the random number value for normal symbol determination when the normal symbol is lost, but different random numbers are used. You may decide whether or not to use the time-saving symbol and the type of the time-saving symbol. Further, the types of time-saving symbols are not limited to two types, and there may be one type or three or more types. When there is only one type of time-saving symbol, it is easy to determine the display result by determining whether or not to use the time-saving symbol by the normal symbol determination random value.

As shown in FIG. 15-3 (A), the symbol confirmation time for hitting or losing a normal symbol is 0.5 seconds, whereas the symbol confirmation time for a time-saving symbol is as long as 10 seconds. In this way, by lengthening the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol, it is possible to perform notification of shifting to a high base state (time reduction state) or right-handed at the symbol confirmation time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent or reduce the sudden transition to a high base state and the player being disadvantaged due to lack of preparation. The symbol confirmation time may be constant regardless of the display result.

The fluctuation time for the time-saving symbol B is 15 seconds, and the fluctuation time for other display results is 10 seconds. As a result, the display result can be announced by the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. The fluctuation time may be determined according to the display result, or the fluctuation time of all display results may be the same (for example, 10 seconds).

FIG. 15-3 (B) is a normal symbol determination table used in a high base state. As shown in FIG. 15-3 (B), in the high base state, when the random value for normal symbol determination is 1 to 229, it is determined to be a hit (normal symbol hit). If it is determined that the ball is hit by a normal figure, the variable winning ball device 6A is opened for 7.5 seconds. When the random value for normal symbol determination is 230, it is determined to be a loss (normal symbol loss). When the random value for normal symbol determination is 231 to 240, it is determined to be lost (time saving symbol A). When the random value for normal symbol determination is 241-250, it is determined to be lost (time saving symbol B). In the high base state, even if the time saving symbols (time saving symbols A and B) are set, as shown in FIG. 15-4 (B), the number of time saving (the end condition of the high base state) is not updated and is controlled. It is designed not to affect the high base state inside. That is, in the high base state, the time saving symbol is treated in the same way as the normal diagram loss. If it is determined that the normal figure is lost, the variable winning ball device 6A is not opened.

In the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1.5 seconds and the symbol confirmation time is 0.5 seconds regardless of the display result. As a result, the fluctuation of the normal symbol can be quickly repeated.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15-3, the fluctuation time is determined according to the display result of the normal symbol, but the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the normal symbol is based on the determined display result of the normal symbol. May be decided. In this case, if the display result is a loss of the normal figure, the determination rate of the fluctuation time may be different depending on whether or not the symbol is a time-saving symbol. By doing so, it is possible to suggest whether or not the time-saving symbol is obtained depending on the fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIGS. 15-3 (A) and 15-3 (B), the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol in the high base state is 0.5 seconds, whereas the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol in the low base state is 10. It's getting longer, seconds. In this way, by lengthening the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol in the low base state, it is possible to perform notification of shifting to the high base state (time reduction state) or right-handed in the symbol confirmation time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent or reduce the sudden transition to a high base state and the player being disadvantaged due to lack of preparation. In addition, in the high base state, even if the display result of the normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol, such notification is not necessary. Therefore, by shortening the symbol confirmation time, the change of the next normal symbol should be executed promptly. Can be done. The symbol confirmation time may be constant regardless of the game state.

In this embodiment, even after the display result of the special symbol becomes a big hit and is controlled to the big hit game state, it is controlled to the time saving state. As shown in FIG. 15-5 (A), "big hit A" and "big hit B" are provided as big hit types when the display result of the first special figure is a big hit, and the big hit of "big hit A" is provided. After entering the game state, the high base state continues until the special symbol change is executed 50 times (the number of time reductions becomes 50 times), and after the big hit game state of "Big hit B" is reached, 100 times. The high base state continues until the special symbol change is executed (the number of time reductions is 100). It should be noted that the display result of the first special figure becomes a big hit basically when the base is low. Further, as shown in FIG. 15-5 (B), "big hit C" is provided as a big hit type when the display result of the second special figure is a big hit, and it is a big hit gaming state of "big hit C". After that, the high base state continues until the special symbol change is executed 100 times (the number of time reductions becomes 100 times). It should be noted that the display result of the second special figure becomes a big hit basically at the time of high base.

As described above, in this embodiment, the end condition (number of time reductions) in the high base state (time reduction state) is that the display result of the second special figure is a big hit than the case where the display result of the first special figure is a big hit. It is more advantageous when it becomes. As a result, since the normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol and shifts to the high base state, the end condition of the high base state does not become disadvantageous to the player, so that the player's disappointment can be suppressed. In addition, at the time of high base, the end condition of the high base state (time saving state) in the case of a big hit is more advantageous than the low base state, so once the high base state is reached, it is easy to maintain the high base state for a long time. Can be done.

In the feature unit 065AK, it suffices to be controlled to at least a time saving state after being controlled to the big hit gaming state, and the number of rounds of "big hit A" to "big hit C" and the presence or absence of probability variation control are arbitrary. good. Further, the jackpot type and the number of time reductions shown in FIG. 15-5 are examples, and the number of jackpot types and the number of time reductions may be larger or smaller than those in FIG. 15-5, and for example, the number of time reductions may be the same.

FIG. 15-6 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol stop processing in step S403 of FIG. 15-2. In the normal symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the flag for confirming the normal symbol is set (step 065AKS001). Ordinary symbols are displayed from the time when the display result is derived and displayed until the symbol confirmation time elapses. That is, the symbol confirmation time can be said to be the period from when the display result of the normal symbol is derived and displayed until the next fluctuation of the normal symbol is started. If it is the symbol confirmation time, the flag for displaying the normal symbol confirmation is set.

If the flag for confirming the normal symbol is not set (step 065AKS001; No), the display result of the normal symbol (confirmed normal symbol) is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20 (step 065AKS002), and the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped. The setting for transmitting the designated normal figure stop designation command to the effect control board 12 is executed (step 065AKS003). In step 065AKS003, the effect control board 12 is set to send a normal map stop designation command according to the display result so that the display result of the normal symbol can be specified. Then, the game state (high base state, low base state) and the symbol confirmation period (see FIG. 15-3) according to the normal figure display result are set (step 065AKS004), and the normal figure confirmation display flag is set to the on state. (Step 065AKS005). After that, the normal symbol stop processing is terminated.

If the normal symbol confirmation display flag is set (step 065AKS001; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol confirmation period of the normal symbol has elapsed (step 065AKS011). In the process of step 065AKS011, for example, the timer value corresponding to the symbol determination period set in step 065AKS004 is subtracted to determine whether or not it becomes 0. If the symbol determination period has not elapsed (step 065AKS011; No), the normal symbol stop processing is terminated.

If the symbol determination period has elapsed (step 065AKS011; Yes), it is determined whether or not the display result is a normal symbol (step 065AKS012). When the display result is a normal symbol (step 065AKS012; Yes), the normal symbol process timer is set to the normal electric accessory release time (step 065AKS013), and the value of the normal symbol process flag is set to the normal electric accessory release. The value indicating the intermediate processing (for example, "4") is updated (step 065AKS014), and the normal symbol stop processing is terminated.

When the display result is not a normal figure (step 065AKS012; No), it is determined whether or not the display result is a time-saving symbol (step 065AKS015). If the display result is a time saving symbol (step 065AKS015; Yes), it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set to determine whether or not it is in the high base state (step 065AKS016). If it is not in the high base state (step 065AKS016; No), for example, by checking the value of the special figure process flag, it is determined whether or not it is in the big hit game state (step 065AKS017). In this embodiment, in the case of the jackpot gaming state, since the time saving state is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the transition to the time saving state based on the time saving symbol is not performed. There is. In addition, when the special symbol is changing and the display result of the change is a big hit, it is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state based on the big hit, so that it is a time saving symbol. The transition to the based time saving state may not be performed.

If it is not in the jackpot game state (step 065AKS017; No), the time saving flag is set to the on state (step 065AKS018), and the time saving number counter is set according to the time saving symbol (see FIG. 15-4 (A)). (Step 065AKS019). As a result, it is possible to shift to a high base state (time saving state). Further, in response to the shift to the time saving state, a setting is made to transmit the game state designation command for designating the time saving state to the effect control board 12 (step 065AKS020).

When the display result is not a time-saving symbol but a normal figure loss (step 065AKS015; No), a high base state (step 065AKS016; Yes), a jackpot game state (step 065AKS017; Yes), or step 065AKS020 After executing the process of (step 065AKS021), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value indicating the normal symbol normal process (for example, "0"), and the process when the normal symbol is stopped is terminated.

FIG. 15-7 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process (step S76) shown in FIG. 8 of the feature unit 065AK. In the effect control process process of the feature unit 065AK, in addition to the effect control process process of the basic description shown in FIG. 9, the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) is followed by the normal figure interlocking effect control process (step 065AKS1) and the time reduction. The notification setting process (step 065AKS2) is executed.

FIG. 15-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal figure interlocking effect control process (step 065AKS1) executed in the effect control process process of FIG. 15-7. The normal symbol interlocking effect is an effect that suggests and notifies the display result of the normal symbol in conjunction with the execution of the fluctuation of the normal symbol. The normal drawing interlocking production is included in the predetermined production. In the normal map interlocking effect control process, control is performed to execute the normal map interlocking effect.

In the normal map interlocking effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the normal map interlocking effect executing flag is set (step 065AKS031). The normal map interlocking effect executing flag is set when the execution of the normal map interlocking effect is started as a predetermined effect. If the normal figure interlocking effect executing flag is not set (step 065AKS031; No), it is confirmed whether or not the special figure interlocking effect executing flag is set (step 065AKS032). The special figure interlocking effect executing flag is set when the execution of the special figure interlocking effect is started. In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a special symbol interlocking effect that suggests and notifies the display result of the special symbol in conjunction with the execution of the variation of the special symbol (decorative symbol) as the predetermined effect. The special figure interlocking effect will be described later. When the special figure interlocking effect executing flag is set (step 065AKS032; Yes), that is, when the special figure interlocking effect is being executed as the predetermined effect, a new predetermined effect (normal figure interlocking effect) is executed. Therefore, the normal map interlocking effect control process is terminated.

If the special figure interlocking effect executing flag is not set in step 065AKS032 (step 065AKS032; No), it is confirmed whether or not the normal symbol variation start designation command has been received (step 065AKS051). If the normal symbol variation start designation command has not been received (step 065AKS051; No), the normal symbol interlocking effect control process is terminated.

When the normal symbol fluctuation start designation command is set (step 065AKS051; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the sub time reduction flag is on, and thus whether or not it is in the high base state. Is confirmed (step 065AKS052). In the case of a high base state (step 065AKS052; Yes), the frequency of fluctuation of the normal symbol is high, and the display result is almost the same as the normal figure. To finish.

If it is not in the high base state (step 065AKS052; No), it is confirmed whether or not it is in the jackpot game state (step 065AKS053). Whether or not it is in the jackpot game state is confirmed by, for example, the value of the effect control process flag. In that case, it is assumed that the jackpot game state is when the value of the effect control process flag is 6 or more. In the case of the big hit game state (step 065AKS053; Yes), since the effect during the big hit is not hindered and the high base state is controlled after the end of the big hit game state, the normal figure interlocking effect is not executed. The figure-linked effect control process ends.

When it is not in the jackpot game state (step 065AKS053; No), it is determined whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is being executed (step 065AKS056). Here, it is the time when the fluctuation is executed according to the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the super reach, and it may be determined by whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation exceeds the start timing of the super reach. When the reach effect of the super reach is being executed (step 065AKS056; Yes), in order to pay attention to the reach effect of the super reach, the normal figure interlocking effect control process is terminated without executing the normal figure interlocking effect. Even if the normal map interlocking effect is not executed even during the execution of the effect other than the reach effect of the super reach (the advance notice effect on the image display device 5, the operation effect of the movable body 32, the effect with high expectation of big hit, etc.). good.

When the reach effect of the super reach is not being executed (step 065AKS056; No), a predetermined effect pattern corresponding to whether or not the normal figure interlocking effect is executed and the effect mode when the normal figure interlocking effect is executed is determined (step 065AKS059). In step 065AKS059, as shown in FIG. 15-8 (B), whether or not to execute the normal symbol interlocking effect and a predetermined effect pattern are determined according to the display result of the normal symbol specified from the normal symbol change start designation command.

FIG. 15-8 (C) is a diagram showing a predetermined effect pattern. The predetermined effect is an effect that suggests / notifies the display result of the normal symbol or the display result of the special symbol, and the predetermined effect pattern SP1 is a pattern that suggests that both the normal symbol and the special symbol are lost, and the predetermined effect pattern SP2 Is a pattern for notifying that it will be a "normal figure hit", and a predetermined effect pattern SP3 is a pattern for notifying that it will be a "time saving symbol". The predetermined effect patterns SP4 and SP5 are patterns suggesting that the special symbol becomes a big hit symbol, and the predetermined effect pattern SP5 is expected to be a big hit more than the predetermined effect pattern SP4. In this embodiment, the predetermined effects of all the predetermined effect patterns are started in the same manner, and then the results corresponding to the predetermined effect patterns are notified. Therefore, even if the predetermined effect pattern SP1 suggests that the effect is lost, it can be expected that the predetermined effect pattern will be another predetermined effect pattern at the start of the effect.

After suggesting the display result or the display result of the special symbol, a Gase pattern suggesting that the pattern may be lost may be provided. For example, a pattern that displays an image such as "maybe it is a time saving?" May be provided.

The predetermined effect patterns corresponding to the normal figure interlocking effect are SP1 to SP3, and in step 065AKS059, the presence / absence of execution of the normal figure interlocking effect and the predetermined effect pattern SP1 to SP3 at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 15-8 (B). Which one to use is decided. As shown in FIG. 15-8 (B), when the display result (normal figure display result) of the normal symbol is "per normal figure", the ratio determined to the predetermined effect pattern SP2 is high, and the "normal figure" is determined. In the case of "loss", the ratio of being determined by the predetermined effect pattern SP1 is high, and in the case of "time saving symbol A" or "time saving symbol B", especially in the case of "time saving symbol B" having a large number of time saving times. Is determined by the predetermined effect pattern SP3 at a high rate. As a result, it is possible to suggest and notify the normal map display result by the normal map interlocking effect (predetermined effect). The determination ratio shown in FIG. 15-8 (B) is an example, and any ratio may be used as long as the normal map display result can be suggested and notified by the normal map interlocking effect (predetermined effect). Further, as a predetermined effect pattern for the normal drawing interlocking effect, a predetermined effect pattern other than the predetermined effect patterns SP1 to SP3 may be provided.

Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is determined to execute the normal figure interlocking effect (step 065AKS064). If it is not decided to execute the normal map interlocking effect (step 065AKS064; No), the normal map interlocking effect control process is terminated.

When it is decided to execute the normal figure interlocking effect (step 065AKS064; Yes), the execution time of the normal figure interlocking effect according to the decision result (predetermined effect pattern) in step 065AKS059 is set in the normal figure interlocking effect timer. The value corresponding to is set (step 065AKS078). Then, the normal map interlocking effect (predetermined effect) is started based on the effect control data or the like corresponding to the predetermined effect pattern (step 065AKS079). Then, in response to the start of the normal map interlocking effect, the flag indicating that the normal map interlocking effect is being executed is set (step 065AKS080), and the normal map interlocking effect control process is terminated.

If the normal map interlocking effect execution flag is set (step 065AKS031; No), the value of the normal map interlocking effect timer is subtracted by 1 (step 065AKS034), and the value of the normal map interlocking effect timer becomes 0. It is determined whether or not (step 065AKS035). If the value of the normal figure interlocking effect timer is not 0 (step 065AKS035; No), the normal figure interlocking effect control process ends.

When the value of the normal figure interlocking effect timer becomes 0 (step 065AKS035; Yes), the normal figure interlocking effect is ended (step 065AKS036), and the normal figure interlocking effect executing flag is reset to the off state (step 065AKS037). ), Ends the normal map interlocking effect control process.

FIG. 15-9 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a special figure interlocking effect determination process for determining whether or not a special figure interlocking effect is executed as a predetermined effect and a predetermined effect pattern when the special figure interlocking effect is executed. The special figure interlocking effect determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 15-7 before starting the variation of the decorative symbol. In the special figure interlocking effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the normal figure interlocking effect executing flag is set (step 065AKS091). When the normal figure interlocking effect execution flag is set (step 065AKS091; Yes), that is, when the normal figure interlocking effect is executed as the predetermined effect, a new predetermined effect (special figure interlocking effect) is executed. Therefore, the special figure interlocking effect determination process is terminated. When the normal figure interlocking effect execution flag is not set (step 065AKS091; No), it is confirmed whether or not it is in the high base state by determining whether or not the sub time reduction flag is on (step 065AKS092). ). In the high base state (step 065AKS092; Yes), since the average special figure fluctuation time is short and the period for executing the special figure interlocking effect cannot be secured, the special figure interlocking effect is not executed. The production determination process ends.

Since the special figure interlocking effect determination process is a process executed at the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the special figure interlocking effect is not determined and executed in the case of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. If it is not in the high base state (step 065AKS092; No), it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation started this time is a fluctuation pattern that results in a super reach loss or a super reach jackpot (step 065AKS093). It should be noted that whether or not the fluctuation pattern is a super reach loss or a super reach jackpot can be specifically determined by checking the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command. If it is not a fluctuation pattern of super reach loss or super reach jackpot (step 065AKS093; No), the special figure interlocking effect determination process is terminated. As described above, in this embodiment, the special figure interlocking effect is not executed when the fluctuation pattern is not accompanied by super reach, but the special figure interlocking is performed at a predetermined ratio even when the fluctuation pattern is not accompanied by super reach. The effect (for example, the predetermined effect of the predetermined effect pattern SP1) may be executed.

In the case of a fluctuation pattern of super reach loss or super reach jackpot (step 065AKS093; Yes), a predetermined effect pattern corresponding to whether or not the special figure interlocking effect is executed and the effect mode when the special figure interlocking effect is executed is determined (step 065AKS094). In step 065AKS094, as shown in FIG. 15-9 (B), whether or not to execute the special symbol interlocking effect and a predetermined effect pattern are determined according to the display result of the special symbol (decorative symbol).

The predetermined effect patterns corresponding to the special figure interlocking effect are SP1, SP4, and SP5. In step 065AKS094, the presence / absence of execution of the special figure interlocking effect and the predetermined effect pattern SP1 are performed at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 15-9 (B). , SP4, SP5 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15-9 (B), when the special figure display result is "big hit", the ratio determined by the predetermined effect pattern SP5 is high, and when the special figure display result is "miss". , The ratio determined by the predetermined effect pattern SP4 is high. As a result, the jackpot expectation (reliability) of the predetermined effect pattern SP5 is higher than that of the predetermined effect pattern SP4. Since the predetermined effect patterns SP4 and SP5 are determined when they are variable patterns accompanied by super reach, it is possible to notify that the predetermined effect patterns will be super reach when the special figure interlocking effect of these predetermined effect patterns is executed. Further, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 15-9, a big hit may be obtained even when the predetermined effect pattern SP1 is used, so that an unexpected effect can be executed. The determination ratio shown in FIG. 15-9 (B) is an example, and any ratio may be used as long as the special figure display result can be suggested and notified by the special figure interlocking effect (predetermined effect). Further, as a predetermined effect pattern for the special figure interlocking effect, a predetermined effect pattern other than the predetermined effect patterns SP1, SP4, and SP5 may be provided.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it has been decided not to execute the special figure interlocking effect (step 065AKS095). When it is decided not to execute the special figure interlocking effect (step 065AKS095; Yes), the special figure interlocking effect determination process ends. When it is decided to execute the special figure interlocking effect (step 065AKS095; No), a setting is made to execute the special figure interlocking effect corresponding to the determined predetermined effect pattern (step 065AKS096). In step 065AKS096, for example, effect control data corresponding to a predetermined effect pattern is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 as usage data. Then, the special figure interlocking effect executing flag is set to the ON state (step 065AKS097), and the special figure interlocking effect determination process is completed.

FIG. 15-10 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving notification setting process (step 065AKS2) executed in the effect control process process of FIG. 15-7. The time saving notification setting process is a process for notifying that the display result of a normal symbol shifts to the time saving state when it is controlled to the high base state (time saving state) corresponding to the time saving symbol. ..

In the time saving notification setting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a normal figure stop designation command for designating that the time saving symbol has stopped has been received (step 065AKS101). If the normal figure stop designation command for designating that the time saving symbol has stopped has not been received (step 065AKS101; No), the time saving notification setting process ends.

If a normal figure stop specification command for specifying that the time saving symbol has stopped is received (step 065AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether the sub time saving flag is on or not to determine whether the time saving symbol is in the high base state. Check whether or not (step 065AKS102). In the high base state (step 065AKS102; Yes), the time saving notification setting process is terminated because the control based on the time saving symbol is not executed.

If it is not in the high base state (step 065AKS102; No), the sub-time reduction flag is set to the on state (step 065AKS103). The sub time saving flag is also set to the on state when the big hit game state ends and the time saving state is controlled.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the game is in the big hit game state (step 065AKS104). In the case of the big hit game state (step 065AKS104; Yes), since the time reduction state is controlled after the big hit game state, the time reduction notification setting process is terminated without notifying that the time reduction state has been entered.

When it is not in the jackpot game state (step 065AKS104; No), a right-handed display instructing the right-handed person to hit the image at a predetermined position of the image display device 5 is displayed (step 065AKS105).

Then, it is determined whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is being executed (step 065AKS106). When the reach effect of the super reach is not being executed (step 065AKS106; No), the setting for starting the notification of the transition to the time saving state (time saving transition notification) and the notification of right-handed hitting (right-handed notification). (Step 065AKS107).

Further, when the reach effect of the super reach is being executed (step 065AKS106; Yes), a setting for starting the right-handed notification is made at the start of the next fluctuation (step 065AKS108). As described above, in this embodiment, when the reach effect of the super reach is being executed, the time reduction shift notification and the right-handed notification are not executed in order to pay attention to the reach effect of the super reach, and the right-handed hit is performed in the next fluctuation. It is designed to execute notification. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the reach production of Super Reach from being hindered. It should be noted that the time saving shift notification and the right-handed notification are not executed even during the execution of the effects other than the reach effect of the super reach (the advance notice effect on the image display device 5, the operation effect of the movable body 32, the effect with high expectation of big hit, etc.). It may be. Further, although the shift to the time saving state may have already been performed at the start of the next fluctuation, the time saving shift notification may be executed at the next fluctuation.

Although the time saving shift notification and the right-handed notification are not executed, the right-handed display is displayed, so that it is possible to indicate that the time saving state has been shifted to the minimum, which is disadvantageous because the player cannot grasp the game state. Can be reduced.

After executing the process of step 065AKS107 or step 065AKS108, the time saving notification setting process is terminated.

FIG. 15-11 is a timing chart showing the effect contents at the time of time reduction transition. In FIGS. 15-11, ON of "special symbol fluctuation" indicates that the special symbol is changing, and OFF indicates that the special symbol is stopped. ON of "normal symbol fluctuation" indicates that the normal symbol is changing, and OFF indicates that the normal symbol is stopped. ON of the "right-handed image" indicates that the right-handed image is displayed on the image display device 5, and OFF indicates that the right-handed image is not displayed.

FIG. 15-11 (A) is a timing chart when the reach effect of the super reach is not executed when the time saving symbol is stopped. As shown in FIG. 15-11 (A), when the time saving symbol is stopped as a display result of the normal symbol during the fluctuation of the special symbol, the time saving shift notification and the right-handed notification are executed. In addition, a right-handed image is displayed at the timing when the time-saving symbol stops. Then, after the symbol determination time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed, the time-saving control is started at the next start of fluctuation of the normal symbol. In this way, by executing the time saving shift notification and the right-handed notification at the symbol confirmation time of the time saving symbol before the time saving control is actually started, even if the time saving state is shifted during the fluctuation of the special symbol, the time saving is shortened. It is possible to appropriately notify that the game is to be changed to the state and that the game is to be played by right-handed hitting.

FIG. 15-11 (B) is a timing chart when the reach effect of the super reach is not executed when the time saving symbol is stopped. As shown in FIG. 15-11 (B), when the super reach occurs during the fluctuation of the special symbol and the time saving symbol stops as a result of displaying the normal symbol during the reach production of the super reach, the time saving symbol stops at the timing of stopping. The right-handed image is displayed, but the time saving shift notification and the right-handed notification are not executed. Then, at the start of the next fluctuation after the end of the fluctuation accompanied by super reach, the right-handed notification is executed. If the next fluctuation start timing is after the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol, the time is already shortened. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the time-saving symbol is stopped during the reach production of the super reach, the next time. The time saving notification is not performed at the start of the fluctuation of. On the other hand, the time saving notification may be executed at the start of the next fluctuation. For example, as shown in FIG. 15-11 (B), when the symbol determination time of the time-saving symbol elapses after the start of the next fluctuation, the time-saving notification may be executed at the start of the next fluctuation.

If the end timing of the fluctuation of the special symbol being executed when the time-saving symbol is stopped is before the lapse of the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol, which is the timing when the time-saving control is actually started, this special symbol is used. Since it is not necessary to rush to execute the time saving shift notification or right-handed notification during the fluctuation of the time saving symbol, the time saving transition notification or right-handed notification is sent after the start of the next special symbol fluctuation and before the lapse of the symbol confirmation time of the time saving symbol. You may want to do it.

Subsequently, an example of the effect operation of the feature unit 065AK will be described. 15-12 to 15-14 show an example of an effect operation of a predetermined effect of the feature unit 065AK. FIG. 15-12 (A) is a downward arrow indicating that the decorative symbol is changed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. There is. At the upper left of the image display device 5, a small symbol that is always visible to the player is also changed. Further, a predetermined effect area 65AK11 is provided in the lower center portion of the image display device 5. In this embodiment, the predetermined effect (normal figure interlocking effect, special figure interlocking effect) is executed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11. The predetermined effect area 65AK11 may be constantly displayed on the image display device 5, or may be displayed when the predetermined effect is executed. For example, the predetermined effect area 65AK11 may be erased in the high base state or the big hit game state in which the predetermined effect is not executed.

When it is decided to execute the predetermined effect, as shown in FIG. 15-12 (B), the effect image is scrolled and displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11, and the predetermined effect is started. In FIG. 15-12 (B), it is shown that the effect image is scrolled by the downward arrow. After that, the effect result according to the predetermined effect pattern is notified.

In the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP1, as shown in FIG. 15-12 (C), the effect image of “x” is displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 and the process is stopped. As a result, it is notified that the predetermined effect fails and the degree of expectation that the display result of the normal symbol or the special symbol is a hit is low.

In the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP2, as shown in FIG. 15-12 (D), the effect image of “◯” is displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 and the process is stopped. As a result, it is notified that the predetermined effect is successful and that the normal symbol is a hit.

In the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP4, as shown in FIG. 15-12 (E), the effect image of the musical note is displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 and the process is stopped. As a result, it is notified that the predetermined production is successful, the expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit is high, and the super reach will be executed.

In the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP5, as shown in FIG. 15-12 (F), the effect image of the characters "heat" is displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 and the process is stopped. As a result, the predetermined production is successful, and it is notified that the expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit is higher and that the super reach will be executed.

In the case of the predetermined effect patterns SP4 and SP5, for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-12 (E) and 15-12 (F), the decorative symbols having the same numbers stop in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and reach. After that, the effect result of the predetermined effect (the effect image of the musical notes and the characters of "heat") is displayed. By doing so, when a predetermined effect is executed during the reach, it can be expected that the super reach will be achieved.

The predetermined effect patterns SP1 and SP2 are executed as the normal figure interlocking effect, and the predetermined effect patterns SP1, SP4, and SP5 are executed as the special figure interlocking effect. Since the normal symbol interlocking effect is executed regardless of the fluctuation of the special symbol (decorative symbol), it can be executed at any timing during the fluctuation of the special symbol (decorative symbol).

FIG. 15-13 is an example of an effect operation when a predetermined effect (ordinary figure interlocking effect) of the predetermined effect pattern SP3 is executed. FIG. 15-13 (A) shows that the variation of the decorative symbol is executed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. At the upper left of the image display device 5, a small symbol that is always visible to the player is also changed. Further, a predetermined effect area 65AK11 is provided in the lower center portion of the image display device 5.

When it is decided to execute the predetermined effect, as shown in FIG. 15-13 (B), the effect image is scrolled and displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11, and the predetermined effect is started.

In the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP3, as shown in FIG. 15-13 (C), the effect image of "hour" is displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 and the process is stopped. As a result, it is notified that the predetermined effect is successful and the display result of the normal symbol becomes the time-saving symbol.

When the time saving symbol is stopped, as shown in FIG. 15-13 (D), a right-handed display instructing right-handed is displayed in the lower right part of the image display device 5, and a “time-saving rush” is displayed in the central part of the image display device 5. The time saving transition notification is executed when the image of the characters "!" Is displayed. At this time, the number of time reductions is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5. Here, "100 times" is displayed corresponding to the time saving symbol B.

After that, as shown in FIG. 15-13 (E), a right-handed notification is executed in which an image of the characters "Aim right!" Is displayed in the central portion of the image display device 5. Then, as shown in FIG. 15-13 (F), the image of the right-handed notification is erased and the right-handed notification ends. At this time, the effect image of "time" is also deleted in the predetermined effect area 65AK11. As described above, in this embodiment, even when the special symbol (decorative symbol) is changing, when the display result of the normal symbol becomes the time-saving symbol, the state shifts to the time-saving state. In that case, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect for notifying that the time saving symbol is stopped, and the time saving transition notification and the right-handed notification as shown in FIGS. 15-13 (D) and 15-13 (D) and (E) are executed. Therefore, it is possible to preferably notify the transition to the time saving state. As a result, the player can continue the game without being confused.

FIG. 15-14 is an example of an effect operation in which a predetermined effect (general figure interlocking effect) of the predetermined effect pattern SP3 is executed during the reach effect of the super reach. In FIGS. 15-14 (A), the decorative symbols showing the number "7" are stopped in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the decorative symbols are changed in the inner decorative symbol display area 5C. It shows that it is in reach. At the upper left of the image display device 5, a small symbol that is always visible to the player is also changed. Further, a predetermined effect area 65AK11 is provided in the lower center portion of the image display device 5.

When it is decided to execute the predetermined effect, as shown in FIG. 15-14 (B), the effect image is scrolled and displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11, and the predetermined effect is started. At this time, the reach effect of the super reach is started in the image display device 5.

In the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP3, as shown in FIG. 15-14 (C), the effect image of "hour" is displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 and the process is stopped. As a result, it is notified that the predetermined effect is successful and the display result of the normal symbol becomes the time-saving symbol.

When the time saving symbol is stopped during the super reach effect, as shown in FIG. 15-14 (D), a right-handed display instructing right-handed is displayed in the lower right portion of the image display device 5, but the image display device 5 The time saving shift notification and the right-handed notification in the above are not executed, and the reach effect of the super reach is continuously executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 15-14 (E), the decorative symbol showing the number "6" stops in the decorative symbol display area 5C inside, resulting in a loss. At this time, the effect image of "time" is also deleted in the predetermined effect area 65AK11. Then, as shown in FIG. 15-14 (F), a right-handed notification in which an image of the characters "Aim to the right!" Is displayed in the central portion of the image display device 5 as the next decorative symbol starts to fluctuate. Is executed. At this time, the number of time reductions is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5. Here, "49 times" is displayed corresponding to the time saving symbol A. Here, the number of time reductions is subtracted from 50 times to 49 times due to the transition to the time reduction state during the previous fluctuation and the digestion of one fluctuation.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the display result of the normal symbol becomes the time saving symbol during the reach production of the super reach, the time saving transition notification and the right-handed notification are not executed, and the reach production of the super reach is prioritized. Is executed. When a big hit is obtained as a result of the super reach, the time is controlled after the big hit game state corresponding to the big hit. Therefore, even if the time saving transition notification is executed during the reach production of the super reach, the notification may be wasted or the production may be annoying, so that the reach production of the super reach is prioritized. Then, when the display result is lost, the right-handed notification is executed at the time of the next fluctuation, so that it is possible to preferably notify that the time has been shortened or that the player has right-handed. If the display result of the normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol during the reach production of the super reach and the display result of the fluctuation accompanying the super reach becomes a big hit, the display result of the normal symbol becomes the time-saving symbol. The corresponding notification (time saving transition notification, right-handed notification) may not be executed, or the notification corresponding to the fact that the display result of the normal symbol becomes the time saving symbol due to the first fluctuation after the end of the jackpot game state is sent. You may want to do it.

(Modification example of feature part 065AK)
This feature portion is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further features may be added. The processing contents and determination ratios of the flowcharts and the determination methods of various effects shown in the above-described examples and modifications are merely examples, and the same effects as those of the above-described examples can be obtained. Anything may be used as long as it can be carried out suitably. Further, the effect example shown in the above embodiment is an example, and can be appropriately changed as long as the same effect can be achieved. Moreover, not all of the configurations described in the above-described embodiment are essential configurations, and some of them may be missing. Moreover, you may combine this feature part and other feature part as appropriate.

In the case of pre-reading the display result of the special symbol and executing the pre-read notice effect, if the display result of the normal symbol is a time-saving symbol, the execution of the pre-read notice effect may be restricted. For example, when the display result of the normal symbol is the time-saving symbol, the pre-reading notice effect may not be executed until the time-saving symbol is stopped and the time-saving state is entered. In addition, if the display result of the normal symbol before the start of fluctuation is pre-read and there is pending data of the normal symbol that becomes the time saving symbol, the pre-reading notice effect for notifying the display result of the special symbol may be restricted. good. By doing so, the game state is changed after the pre-reading notice effect is executed, so that the fluctuation pattern changes between the pre-reading time and the actual fluctuation execution time, which is consistent with the production content of the pre-reading notice effect. It is possible to prevent it from disappearing.

As signals to be externally output to the hall computer or data display, in addition to the big hit signal (output during the big hit) and the special prize medium signal (output during the big hit and during the time reduction), the time reduction medium signal (output only during the time reduction) is provided. May be good.

In the above embodiment, when the display result of the normal symbol becomes the time saving symbol in the big hit game state, the control to the time saving state is not performed, but when the big hit occurs in the low base state, the big hit is obtained. In the corresponding big hit game state, the time saving state may be controlled based on the time saving symbol. In this case, the order is as follows: start of big hit game state → start of time saving control based on the time saving symbol → end of big hit game state, and the base changes before and after the big hit game state. Therefore, the number of time reductions based on the control of the jackpot gaming state may be set at the start of fluctuation after the jackpot gaming state ends. For example, if the number of time reductions when a big hit is made in the low base state is 50 or 100 times, and when the number of time reductions when a big hit is made in the high base state is 100 times, the time reduction during the big hit game state is achieved. When the symbol is stopped, the number of time reductions after the end of the big hit game state is set to 100 times. By setting the number of time reductions at the start of fluctuation after the end of the big hit game state, it is possible to suitably shift to the state even if the game state changes during the big hit. In addition, when the big hit game state is reached, the number of time reductions may be constant regardless of the game state, or the number of time reductions may be determined at a constant rate.

In the above embodiment, the predetermined effect (normal pattern interlocking effect, special figure interlocking effect) that suggests / notifies the display result of the normal symbol or the display result of the special symbol is the effect result by scrolling the effect image in the predetermined effect area 65AK11. (FIGS. 15-12 to 15-14), but any effect may be used as long as it can suggest and notify the display result of the normal symbol or the display result of the special symbol. In addition, the predetermined effect may be at least an effect that suggests / notifies whether or not the normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol, or the display result of the special symbol.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the display result of the normal symbol becomes the time saving symbol in the high base state, the number of time reductions is not updated, but the display result of the normal symbol becomes the time saving symbol in the high base state. If this happens, the number of time reductions may be updated or added. In addition, the determination ratio of the number of time reductions and the number of time reductions differs depending on whether the display result of the normal symbol is the time saving symbol in the low base state or the display result of the normal symbol is the time saving symbol in the high base state. It may be.

In the above embodiment, the execution of the time saving transition notification and the right-handed notification is restricted in a predetermined case such as during the reach production of the super reach, but the time saving symbol is used regardless of the production content during the execution. When shifting to the time saving state accordingly, the time saving transition notification or the right-handed notification may be executed. For example, when the time saving shift notification or the right-handed notification is executed by a display means different from the image display device 5, the time saving transition notification or the right-handed notification may be executed regardless of the effect content of the image display device 5. good.

(Means pertaining to feature 065AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 065AK is
The special identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variablely displayed, and the special variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) is based on the fact that the variable display result of the special identification information becomes a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol). It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 65AK1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) in which the game medium can easily enter the big winning opening)).
Ordinary identification information (for example, ordinary symbol) is variably displayed, and based on the fact that the variable display result of ordinary identification information becomes a predetermined result (for example, per ordinary symbol), ordinary variable means (for example, variable winning ball device 6B (for example, the first) 2 Start winning opening)) and variable control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S404) that changes the game medium to a predetermined state (for example, an open state) that is easy for the game medium to enter.
A state control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step 065AKS018) capable of controlling the normal variable means to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which the normal variable means is more likely to change to the predetermined state than the normal state.
It is provided with an effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the effect.
The state control means can control the normal state to the special state based on the fact that the variable display result of the normal identification information is a special result (for example, a time saving symbol) different from the predetermined result (for example, a step). Execute the process of 065AKS018),
The effect executing means includes a specific effect (for example, a predetermined effect of predetermined effect patterns SP4 and SP5, a special figure interlocking effect) suggesting that the variable display result of the special identification information becomes the specific display result, and a variable display of the normal identification information. It is possible to execute a special effect (for example, a predetermined effect of the predetermined effect pattern SP3, a normal figure interlocking effect) that suggests that the display result is the special result.
The state control means can control from the normal state to the special state even if the variable display of the special identification information is being executed when the variable display result of the normal identification information becomes the special result (the normal state). For example, the process of step 065AKS018 is executed).
According to such a configuration, the state transition can be suitably performed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A predetermined notification means that performs a predetermined notification (for example, a time saving shift notification, a right-handed notification) based on the change of the ordinary variable means to the predetermined state, and a predetermined notification means.
Depending on the effect content during the variable display of the special identification information, a predetermined notification limiting means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 065AKS106 and step 065AKS108) may be provided. ..
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the predetermined notification from interfering with the effect during the variable display of the special identification information.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
In the effect executing means, in the normal state, the variable display result of the normal identification information is the predetermined result, the variable display result of the normal identification information is the special result, and the variable display result of the special identification information is the above. It is possible to execute an effect that suggests which of the specific display results will be obtained (for example, the predetermined effects of the predetermined effect patterns SP1 to SP5 can be executed. FIGS. 15-12 and 15-13). You may do so.
With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the display results of both the ordinary identification information and the special identification information.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
The state control means can be controlled to the special state based on being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 15-5).
When the variable display of the special identification information after being controlled to the advantageous state is started, it is controlled based on the fact that the special identification information is controlled to the advantageous state according to whether it is the normal state or the special state. The termination conditions of the special state may be different.
According to such a configuration, the state transition can be preferably performed.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above.
When the variable display result of the ordinary identification information is the special result, it takes longer time from the display of the variable display result to the confirmation than when the variable display result of the ordinary identification information is the predetermined result (for example, FIG. 15-3 (A)) may be used.
According to such a configuration, the state transition can be preferably performed.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above.
In the case of the normal state, the time from the display of the special result as the variable display result of the normal identification information to the confirmation is longer than in the case of the special state (for example, FIGS. 15-3 (A), (Fig. 15-3 (A)). B)) may be done.
According to such a configuration, the state transition can be preferably performed.

(Explanation related to the association of feature parts)
Each configuration relating to the feature portion may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration relating to the other feature portion. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

(Explanation of feature section 079SG)
Next, the feature portion 079SG (hereinafter, abbreviated as the present feature portion 079SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 16-1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 079SG. As shown in FIG. 16-1, the voice control board 13 in the feature unit 079SG is used for voice synthesis to generate sounds (effect sounds) output from the speakers 8L and 8R in cooperation with the effect control CPU 120. The IC079SG132, the amplification circuit (amplifier) 079SG134 for amplifying the output sound of the sound generated by the voice synthesis CI079SG132, and the voice data ROM 079SG133 are mounted, and the effect control CPU 120 is from the main board 11. The sound number data is output to the voice synthesis IC079SG132 based on the effect control command, and the sound corresponding to the sound number data is generated in the voice synthesis IC079SG132.

When the sound number data is input from the effect control CPU 120, the voice synthesis IC 079SG 132 individually generates voices and sound effects corresponding to the input sound number data for each of the speakers 8L and 8R, and causes the amplifier circuit 079SG134. Output. The amplifier circuit 079SG134 amplifies the voice and sound effects output from the voice synthesis IC 079SG132, and outputs them to the speakers 8L and 8R.

The audio data ROM 079SG133 stores control data for each of the speakers 8L and 8R for outputting a sound corresponding to the effect performed by the effect command corresponding to the sound number data in association with the sound number data. .. That is, these control data are output modes (frequency characteristics, timing (delay), etc.) of sound effects such as sound effects and BGM (music) output from each speaker 8L, 8R during the effect period (for example, the decorative pattern variable display period). Is a collection of data including audio data and the like described in chronological order.

FIG. 16-2 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an image display device 5 in the feature unit 079. The display area of the image display device 5 in the feature unit 079SG is formed in a rectangular shape having a height L and a left-right width L when viewed from the front. Most of the display area constitutes a first display area 079SG005F for displaying an effect such as a variable display of a decorative pattern, a reach effect, an operation promotion effect described later, and a still image display effect. Further, the lower end of the image display device 5 has a first reserved storage display area 079SG005D in which the first special figure reserved storage number can be displayed by the number of white circular hold displays, and the second special figure reserved storage number is outlined. A second display area 079SG005Sa including a second hold storage display area 079SG005U that can be displayed by the number of circular hold displays and a telop display area 079SG005T that can display a telop indicating a game state is configured.

That is, the portion of the entire display area of the image display device 5 excluding the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is the first display area 079SG005F.

The second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb display information related to the game (hold display, telop display, fourth symbol) at the peripheral portion of the display area of the image display device 5 rather than the first display area 079SG005F. This is the display area for displaying (displaying the number of stored items on hold). That is, the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb in the feature unit 079SG are also UI (user interface) display areas in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Then, the upper right end portion of the image display device 5 includes a fourth symbol 079SG005J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed, a display of the first special symbol reserved storage number, and a display of the second special symbol reserved storage number. 3 Display area 079SG005Sb is configured.

Of these, the second display area 079SG005Sa is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and its height is formed to be less than half the height H of the entire display area of the image display device 5. The left-right width is formed to have the same length as the left-right width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. Further, although the third display area 079SG005Sb is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, its height and left-right width are formed to be extremely shorter than the height H and the left-right width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. There is.

Therefore, in the feature unit 079SG, the area of the first display area 079SG005F in the entire display area of the image display device 5 is larger than the combined area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. ..

As shown in FIG. 16-2 (B), in the first hold storage display area 079SG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold display operation process (see FIG. 8-13) described later. As a result, each hold display can be rotated and displayed at a constant speed (for example, rotation speed V3) around the vertical axis.

As shown in FIG. 16-2 (C), in the telop display area 079SG005T, the effect control CPU 120 executes the telop operation process (see FIG. 16-13) described later to respond to the gaming state and the effect being executed. A message (for example, a message according to the state of the effect such as "XX mode is in progress!" During a specific reach effect) is moved by a constant speed (for example, movement speed V3) from the left to the right. It is possible to display while.

The characters included in the message according to the game state reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and end the display, and at the same time, are displayed again at the left end of the telop display area 079SG005T and are displayed again from the left to the right. Moved in the direction. Therefore, when the message corresponding to the game state is displayed while being moved in the telop display area 079SG005T, the entire message according to the game state is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, so that the player can see the message. It is easier to recognize the current game state.

In the feature unit 079SG, the hold display in the first hold storage display area 079SG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U and the message in the telop display area 079SG005T are rotated and moved at a common constant speed (V3). Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold display in the first hold storage display area 079SG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U and the message in the telop display area 079SG005T have different constant speeds. It may be rotatable and movable with.

As shown in FIG. 16-2 (D), the fourth symbol 079SG005J has an upper symbol 079SG005Ja and a lower symbol 079SG005Jb, and the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb blink alternately at a fixed cycle. Indicates that a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Further, when the variable display result is off, both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are turned off (OFF) at the end timing of the variable display, while the variable display result is a big hit or a miss. In that case, both are lit (turned on) at the end timing of the variable display.

The display of the first special figure reserved storage number and the display of the second special figure reserved storage number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are the timing when a new reserved storage occurs and the timing when a new variable display is started. Only the number changes. That is, the display of the first special figure reserved storage number and the display of the second special figure reserved storage number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, and the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U. , Unlike the telop display area 079SG005T, the display mode does not change except for the start timing of the variable display.

Next, the display control unit 123 in the feature unit 079SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying an image on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 can display a predetermined image on the image display device 5 based on the image data of 1 stored in the CGROM based on the instruction by the effect control CPU 120, and can display a plurality of types of image data. By arranging and displaying an image on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When the predetermined image is not displayed on the image display device 5, the image of the predetermined image is arranged by arranging other image data on the front side of the image data of the predetermined image with a transparency of 0% depending on the situation. The predetermined image is not displayed on the effect screen by controlling the image based on the data so as not to be displayed on the effect screen and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 that has created the display data in which the image data of the predetermined image is not arranged. It may be controlled as such.

As shown in FIGS. 16-3 (A) to 16-3 (D), for example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 3 are arranged. An image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the created display data.

As shown in FIG. 16-3 (A), the image data 1 displays the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and the fourth This is data drawn to display the symbol 079SG005J in the third display area 079SG005Sb. It is also data drawn for displaying a small symbol of the image data 1 decorative symbol in the first display area 079SG005F (on the left side of the third display area 079SG005Sb).

As shown in FIG. 16-3 (B), the image data 2 is data drawn for displaying the images of the chance-up effect, the still image display effect, and the operation promotion effect, which will be described later, in the first display area 079SG005F. ..

As shown in FIG. 16-3 (C), the image data 3 is data drawn for displaying the variable display of the decorative pattern and the reach effect in the first display area 079SG005F.

As shown in FIGS. 16-3 (A) to 16-3 (C), the image data 1, the image data 2, and the image data 3 have display priorities for displaying an image on the image display device 5. Is set. As for the display priority, the image data 1 is set to be the highest and the image data 3 is set to the lowest (image display priority in the image display device 5: image data 1> image data 2> image data 3). .. That is, in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed as an image lower than the image based on the image data 1, and is based on the image data 3. The image is displayed as an image of a lower layer (bottom layer) than the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 16-3 (D), in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 3, and the image based on the image data 1 is displayed. The image based on the image data 2 and the image based on the image data 3 are displayed with priority.

As shown in FIG. 16-3 (D), when the image based on the image data 1, the image based on the image data 2, and the image based on the image data 3 are simultaneously displayed on the image display device 5, the image data 3 Since the image based on is displayed as the image of the lowest layer, at least a part of the image based on the image data 3 becomes difficult to see or invisible due to the image based on the first data or the image based on the image data 2. There is.

Although details will be described later in this feature unit 079SG, the image based on the image data 1 and the image data 2 is displayed on the image display device 5 as a moving image whose progress speed is always constant, while on the image data 3. The based image is displayed on the image display device 5 as a plurality of moving speed moving images or still images based on the data stored in the CGROM in advance.

In particular, in this feature unit 079SG, although details will be described later, it is possible to display a moving image of the reach effect at a normal progress speed V1 and a progress speed V2 (slow motion) slower than the V1 during the reach effect of the super reach. It has become. This is because the data for the production moving image displayed at the progress speed V1 and the data for the production movie displayed at the progress speed V2 are stored in advance in the CGROM, but the present invention is limited to this. Only the data for the production video to be displayed at the progress speed V1 is stored in advance in the CGROM, and a part of the production video for the reach production is set to the progress speed V2 by performing a predetermined process on the data. It may be possible to display it.

As described above, in the feature unit 079SG, the progress speed of the reach effect recognized by the player is set to V1 by setting the image progress speed, which is the speed at which the effect moving image changes, to the first speed, which is the non-slow motion period and the image. By setting the progress speed to V2, which is slower than V1, the slow motion period is set to the second speed at which the progress speed of the reach effect recognized by the player is slow. That is, the slow motion video, which is a production video in which the progress speed of the production in the feature unit 079SG is slow, is a video progress as compared with the non-slow motion video whose video progress speed is V1 displayed in front of the slow motion video. Anything with a slow speed will do.

The feature unit 079SG exemplifies a form in which a slow motion period is provided in all super reach effects (see FIGS. 16-18 to 16-25), but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, for example, as a super reach effect, the content of the effect moving image displayed on the image display device 5 is the same as the content of the super reach effect shown in FIGS. 16-18 to 16-25, but the video progress speed. Does not change from V1 to V2, that is, the slow motion period does not occur. By executing the super reach effect, the slow motion period is achieved in the super reach effect shown in FIGS. 16-18 to 16-25. May be made easier for the player to recognize.

That is, in the case of executing the super reach effect in which the content of the effect movie is the same but the video progress speed does not change to V2, the effect movie is a second speed slower than the first speed in the present invention. By displaying the production video with the same content at a video progress speed V2, which is slower than the video progress speed V1 in the non-slow motion super reach production, for a longer period than the non-slow motion super reach production. The displayed production video corresponds to this.

As described above, the feature unit 079SG configures a slow motion effect in which the reach effect felt by the player is slow by slowing the video advance speed of the effect moving image, and the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Although the output of the above is illustrated as a form that does not change from the playback speed V3, the present invention is not limited to this, and the speakers 8L, 8R are not limited to this, and the video progress speed of the production moving image is not changed (V1 remains). By conversely increasing the reproduction speed of the sound output from the speaker and the light emission cycle of the game effect lamp 9, a pseudo slow motion that the player feels that the progress speed of the reach effect has slowed down may be configured.

That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 079SG includes a plurality of effect output means including display means capable of displaying the effect moving image, and the progress speed of the effect by at least one of these effect output means. Is different between the slow motion period and the non-slow motion period, so that the player can recognize that the effect being executed is slow motion in the slow motion period.

It should be noted that the feature unit 079SG exemplifies a mode in which the display of the production moving image of the reach effect is always executed at the progress speed V2 during the slow motion period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the slow motion is not limited to this. During the period, the progress speed of the display of the effect moving image of the reach effect may be changed (for example, the progress speed gradually decreases with the passage of time, or the progress speed increases or decreases within a predetermined range).

FIG. 16-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 079SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 16-4 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 16-4 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a symbol (also referred to as an effect symbol). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 16-4 (B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (pre-determined result) and the determined result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 16-4 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specification command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. .. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C". The command 8C04H is the fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot". The command 8C05H is the sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is used as the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is executed by the time saving control. On the other hand, it is a second game state specification command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, the command 9502H is used as the third game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) in which the time saving control is performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is used as the time saving control and probability change. This is the fourth game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high accuracy high base state, time reduction probability change state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit game or a small hit game. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that it is a period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game or the small hit.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. .. In the notification command during opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening of the big winning opening, different EXT data are set according to the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "10") in the big hit state described later, for example. ..

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A has been satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B has been satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The commands shown in FIG. 16-4 (A) are examples, and some of these commands may not be provided, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You may add a command different from the command in. For example, a prize ball number notification command for making it possible to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of a game ball at each winning opening, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times that the probability change control or the time reduction control is executed, or the like may be provided.

FIG. 16-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 16-5, in the feature unit 079SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern , Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 for determining the display result of the general map is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 shown in FIG. 16-10, and updates various numerical data by software to update the random number value. Numerical data indicating a part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a "big hit" to the big hit game state, for example. It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type has any of "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random value used to determine, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to "1" to "". It takes a value in the range of 997.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "out of normal figure". It is a random number value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 16-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. The feature unit 079SG uses a special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The first special figure and the second special figure may use individual special figure display result determination tables.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. This is the referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature unit 079SG, depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the special figure display result judgment table 1, whether or not the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment is controlled to the big hit game state with the special figure display result as a "big hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature unit 079SG, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are obtained than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the big hit game state when it is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the jackpot gaming state is higher than the probability of being determined (about 1/300 in the feature section 079SG) (about 1 in the feature section 079SG). / 30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, it is determined that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probability changing state (high probability state), it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the case of the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of the game is high.

Further, FIG. 16-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the definite special symbol that becomes The table referenced for.

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the feature unit 079SG, regardless of whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, whether or not the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in the feature unit 079SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different between the case of the special figure game of the first special figure and the case of the second special figure. There is. Specifically, in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, it is assigned to "small hit". Judgment value is not assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning is formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control. In the high base state where a prize is given to the mouth and a lot of variable display of the second special figure is executed, "small hit" is almost not generated, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. In a high base state in which a game ball easily enters the winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which a large number of game balls cannot be obtained and to prevent the game interest from being deteriorated.

FIG. 16-7 (A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in the feature unit 079SG sets any of a plurality of jackpot types based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit". It is a table referenced to determine the crab. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (first). 2 The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot A", depending on whether the game is a special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B). It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "probability variation jackpot B" and "probability variation jackpot C".

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 079SG will be described with reference to FIG. 16-7 (B). In the feature unit 079SG, the jackpot type includes high accuracy control and time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability change big hit A", "Probability change big hit B", "Probability change big hit C" that are executed and shift to the high accuracy high base state, and after the end of the big hit game state, only the time saving control is executed and it becomes the low accuracy high base state. A "non-probability change jackpot" to be transferred is set.

The big hit game state by the "probability change big hit A" is a big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. The jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot B" is a jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. The jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot C" is a jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds) in a first state that is advantageous to the player. Further, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds) in a first state that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, "Probability change jackpot A" is called 10 rounds (10R) probability variation jackpot, "Probability variation jackpot B" is called 5 rounds (5R) probability variation jackpot, and "Probability variation jackpot C" is called 2 rounds (2R) probability variation jackpot. It may be called and the "non-probable variable jackpot" may be referred to as a two-round (2R) non-probable variable jackpot.

Further, although not particularly shown, the small hit game state in the feature unit 079SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player twice, and the opening time is the same as the probability variation big hit C. It is an open period (0.1 seconds in this feature unit 079SG). After the small hit game is completed, the game state immediately before the small hit game is inherited.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probabilistic jackpot A, the probabilistic jackpot B, and the probabilistic jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. .. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature unit 079SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times. It ends when it becomes a big hit game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 16-7 (A), "probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot A" are set according to whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure. The allocation of judgment values for the jackpot types of "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" is different. That is, when the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the determination value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "probability change jackpot B" or "probability change" with a small number of rounds. While assigned to the jackpot type of "big hit C", if the special figure that is variably displayed is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined to control the jackpot type to the jackpot state with a small number of rounds as "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Due to the high opening control, in the game state in which the game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the frequent occurrence of the big hit state in which the number of winning balls obtained is small is avoided, and the game interest is reduced. It is designed to prevent this.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 16-7 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of whether it exists, the probability of becoming a non-probability jackpot and the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is a special figure game of the first special figure or a second special figure. It is said that.

Therefore, as described above, the allocation of the judgment values for the "probability variation jackpot B" and the "probability variation jackpot C" differs depending on whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the allocation of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure, and for the "probability change jackpot A" having a large number of rounds, the second It is set so that the case of the special figure game of the special figure is easier to determine than the case of the special figure game of the first special figure.

Even in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special figure game of the first special figure is the big hit of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". It may be assigned to a type. For example, in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, a smaller judgment value than in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data regardless of whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 16-8 shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 079SG. In the feature unit 079SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is variable according to each of the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach". A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. Although the feature unit 079SG provides only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, and so on are provided. It may be provided. Further, in the super reach fluctuation pattern, a plurality of super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, such as super reach α, super reach β, and so on.

The fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 079SG also includes a fluctuation pattern (PC1-1) of a special hit corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a “small hit”.

As shown in FIG. 16-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 079SG is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

Further, in the present feature unit 079SG, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, and the like. Then, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation pattern belonging to the determined type, it is determined using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided to determine these variation pattern types. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value of the above, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 16-9 is an explanatory diagram of a method of determining a fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 079SG. In this feature unit 079SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is different depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved storages.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16-9, when the variable display result is a non-probability variation jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is used using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach α3 jackpot fluctuation pattern) and PB1-4 (super reach β1 jackpot fluctuation pattern) And PB1-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β3 jackpot). If the variable display result is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is set to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot) using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. It is determined from the fluctuation pattern) and PB1-2 (the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot).

As shown in FIG. 16-9, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table have different numbers of determination values assigned to PB1-2 to PB1-5. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, 45 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 150 determination values are assigned to PB1-3, 300 determination values are assigned to PB1-4, and 500 determination values are assigned to PB1-5. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, 30 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 135 determination values are assigned to PB1-3, 315 determination values are assigned to PB1-4, and 515 determination values are assigned to PB1-5. That is, in this feature unit 079SG, when the variable display result is a probabilistic jackpot, PB1-3 and PB1-4, which are fluctuation patterns of the super reach β system, are at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-probability jackpot. Since it is determined to be, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

If the variable display result is a small hit, a special hit variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special hit variation pattern) using the special hit variation pattern determination table. do.

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 2 or less, the deviation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern determination table A is selected. Using the out-of-reach variation pattern determination table A, the variation patterns are PA1-1 (non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach out-of-range variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α2 out-of-reach variation pattern), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern out of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern out of super reach β2), and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern out of super reach β3).

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 3, the deviation pattern determination table B for deviation is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 loss), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern out of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern out of super reach β2), and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern out of super reach β3).

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 4, the deviation pattern determination table C for deviation is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C for use, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 loss), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern out of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern out of super reach β2), and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern out of super reach β3).

If the variable display result is "out of place" in the time saving state (high base state), the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determination table D is used to set the variation pattern to PA1-4. (Non-reach out-of-time shortening fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach out-of-time fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α2 out-of-order fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach α3 out-of-range fluctuation pattern), and PA2 It is determined from -4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β2 deviation) and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β3 deviation).

That is, when the variable display result is "off" in the feature unit 079SG, the special figure is based on the fact that the number of reserved memory of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, or the time is shortened. Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), the variable display is executed at a higher rate due to the shortening fluctuation pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4). It is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being delayed.

As shown in FIG. 16-8, the reach effect of the super reach α1 (the reach effect executed by the variable display of the fluctuation pattern PB1-2) is variable after the first half of the first reach effect described later is executed. The reach effect that the display result is a big hit, and the reach effect of Super Reach α2 (the reach effect executed by the variable display of the variable pattern PA2-2) executes the first half part and the second half part of the first reach effect described later. This is a reach effect in which the variable display result is out of alignment, and the reach effect of the super reach α3 (the reach effect executed by the variable display in the variable pattern PA2-3 or PB1-3) is the first reach described later. This is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a big hit or a miss by executing the second reach effect described later after executing the first half portion and the second half part of the effect.

As for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3, as shown in FIGS. 16-8 and 16-9, the longer the special figure variable display time is, the more variable the display is. The rate at which the result is a big hit (big hit expectation) is set to be high. That is, for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3, the ratio of the variable display result being a big hit is executed by the first reach effect. The variable display result is set higher than the rate at which it becomes a big hit.

In addition, the reach effect of super reach β1 (reach effect executed by the variable display of the variable pattern PB1-4) is a reach effect in which the variable display result becomes a big hit after executing the first half of the third reach effect described later. Yes, in the reach effect of super reach β2 (the reach effect executed by the variable display of the variable pattern PA2-4), the variable display result is out of alignment after executing the first half part and the second half part of the third reach effect described later. The reach effect of the super reach β3 (the reach effect executed by the variable display in the variable pattern PA2-5 or PB1-5) is the first half part and the second half part of the third reach effect described later. After that, the fourth reach effect, which will be described later, is executed, and the variable display result is a big hit or a miss.

As for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5, as shown in FIGS. 16-8 and 16-9, the longer the special figure variable display time is, the more variable the display is. The rate at which the result is a big hit (big hit expectation) is set to be high. That is, for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit after the fourth reach effect is executed is executed by the third reach effect. The variable display result is set higher than the ratio that becomes a big hit.

In the present feature unit 079SG, the embodiment in which the second reach effect is always executed after the first reach effect and the fourth reach effect is always executed after the third reach effect is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. The second reach effect and the fourth reach effect may be performed by themselves.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, each reach effect can be executed by a combination of the first reach effect and the second reach effect during the variable display, and can be executed by the combination of the third reach effect and the fourth reach effect. Although possible forms have been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach effect is a combination other than these combinations (for example, the first reach effect and the fourth reach effect, the second reach effect and the third). A case may be provided in which the execution is performed by a combination of reach effects and the like).

Further, in the present feature section 069SG, as shown in FIG. 16-9, the fluctuation patterns of the super reach β system (fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) are generally super reach α system. The rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit (big hit expectation) is set higher than the fluctuation pattern of (variation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3). A part of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β system (variation pattern PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) is not limited, and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α system (variation pattern PA2- 2. The jackpot expectation may be lower than any of PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3).

The RAM 102 in the feature unit 079SG has a game control data holding area 079SG150 as shown in FIG. 16-10, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is provided. The game control data holding area 079SG150 shown in FIG. 16-10 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 079SG151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 079SG151B, a normal drawing holding storage unit 079SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 079SG152. , The game control timer setting unit 079SG153, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, and the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 are provided.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A is a special feature in which the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting winning (first starting winning) is generated, but has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the first starting winning opening with the holding number, and determines the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern extracted from a random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As a result, the data is stored until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 079SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes the pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B has not been started yet, although the game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the second starting winning opening with the holding number, and determines the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern extracted from a random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As a result, the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 079SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes the pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit 079SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal figure hold storage unit 079SG151C associates the game ball with the hold number in the order in which it passes through the passage gate 41, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 079SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 079SG152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 079SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 079SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 079SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and is stored as a random count value according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 holds the effect control data as shown in FIG. 16-11 (A) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. Area 079 SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 079SG190 shown in FIG. 16-11 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 079SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 079SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 079SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 079SG191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 079SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 079SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 079SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 079SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 079SG193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the feature unit 079SG, the data constituting the start winning command buffer 079SG194A as shown in FIG. 16-11 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194. The reception command buffer 079SG194A at the time of starting winning is stored in the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage. A corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display are provided. Further, the start winning command buffer 079SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage. (Area corresponding to) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display are provided. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (the 1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command) and the hold memory number notification command (the first) Two commands (1 hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A associate these start opening winning designation commands with the hold storage number notification command. , A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage separately is secured.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in a variable manner while being shifted upward one by one. It is designed to be cleared in the special figure hit waiting process that is executed when the is finished.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the command buffer 079SG194A received at the time of starting winning. Then, at the time of the start winning to the second start winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 079SG194A. go. At the time of the start winning, the start opening prize designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is placed in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , The hold storage number notification command will be stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A shown in FIG. 16-11 (B) is an entry (buffer) corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display that ended immediately before each time the variable display of the decorative symbol was started. The entry (entry with the number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2") is deleted. The stored contents of the entries after the hold storage of the variable display to be started are shifted from those stored in the entry corresponding to -1 ”. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol of the first special figure hold storage is completed in the stored state shown in FIG. 16-11 (B), each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted and the buffer number is deleted. Each command stored in "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is moved to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1". Each command that is shifted and stored in the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start winning determination process of the feature unit 079SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16-12. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting port switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in a state (step 079 SGS101). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 079 SGS101; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the first special figure, is the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 079 SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. When the number of reserved first special figure is not the upper limit value in step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is set to "1" (step 079SGS102; N). Step 079 SGS103).

Variable when the first start port switch 22A is off in step 079SGS101 (step 079SGS101; N) or when the first special figure hold storage number reaches the upper limit value in step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; Y). Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( Step 079 SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 079 SGS104; Y), the number of reserved special figures reserved for the special figure game using the second special figure is the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 079 SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. When the second special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in step 079SGS105 (step 079SGS105; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is set to "2" (step 079SGS105; N). Step 079 SGS106).

After executing any of the processes of step 079SGS103 and step 079SGS106, the number of special figure hold storages corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (step 079SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first hold memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (step 079 SGS108). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, may be updated so as to be added by 1.

After executing the process of step 079SGS108, the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for the purpose and the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (step 079 SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step 079 SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A stores numerical data indicating the random values MR1 to MR3, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the start port buffer value is "2". Numerical data indicating the random values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of step 079SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used for determining the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the variable display mode including the variable display time.

Following the process of step 079 SGS110, the transmission setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (step 079 SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first start opening prize designation command to 12 is made. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is subjected to. Make settings to send the second start port winning designation command. The start port winning designation command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

Following the process of step 079 SGS111, for example, by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the hold storage is stored in the effect control board 12. Make settings for sending the number notification command (step 079 SGS113). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

After executing the process of step 079SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079SGS115), and then the process of step 079SGS104 is performed. move on. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (step 079 SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079 SGS116), and then the start prize is won. End the process. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 16-13 is a part of a flowchart showing the effect control process processing in the feature unit 079SG. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 updates the hold display in the first hold storage display area 079SHSG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U after executing the pre-reading advance notice setting process (step S161), and these first Hold display operation processing (step 079SG162) for operating (rotating display) the hold display displayed in the hold storage display area 079SHSG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the operation display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T. After executing the telop operation process (step 079SGS163) to be performed and the fourth symbol display process (step 079SG164) to execute the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J, any one of steps S170 to S177 is executed according to the value of the effect control process flag. Executes the processing of.

16-14 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 079 SGS271). When the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A are set. The various command data and various flags stored in association with each other are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 079SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is off in step 079SGS271 (step 079SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273). When the second variation start command reception flag is off (step 079SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is finished, and when the second variation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273; Y), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the received command buffer 079SG194A at the time of starting winning are stored for each buffer number. Shift to the top (step 079 SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 079SGS272 or step 079SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 079SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 079SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In the feature unit 079SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, three symbols "7" as stop symbols. ”Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command or the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B or the probability variation jackpot C, the stop symbol is other than "7". It is determined from a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to the non-probability change jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged as even symbols as the stop symbol. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbol is determined from "334", "778", etc., which are chance eyes. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the deviation, it is a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are not uniform as the stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance eyes. (Out of design) is decided.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (step 079 SGS277). When the variable display variation pattern is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; N), the process proceeds to step 079SGS283, and when the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; Y). Executes the chance-up effect determination process (step 079 SGS278), and determines whether or not to execute the chance-up effect in the latter half of the first reach effect or the second half of the third reach effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 16-15, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the chance-up effect is decided to be executed at a rate of 20%, and the chance-up effect is not executed at a rate of 80%. decide. When the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 80%, and the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 20%. That is, in the variable display of the reach of the feature unit 079SG, when the chance-up effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is set higher than when the chan-up effect is not executed.

As shown in FIGS. 16-27 and 16-32, the feature unit 079SG is provided with only one effect pattern as the effect mode of the chance-up effect, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a plurality of effect patterns may be provided as an effect mode of the chance-up effect, and the jackpot expectation may be different depending on which effect pattern the chance-up effect is executed.

Further, in the present feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 16-27 and 16-32, there is only one production start timing of the chance-up effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the chance-up effect is not limited to this. A plurality of production start timings of the production may be provided, and the jackpot expectation may be different depending on which production start timing the chance-up production is started.

Further, after the execution / non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined in step 079 SGS278, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3). (Step 079 SGS279). When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3) (step 079SGS279; Y), the notification effect (big hit notification effect or loss) is performed after the second reach effect is completed. In the period until the notification effect) is started, the still image display effect for determining the effect pattern of the still image display effect that displays the still image displayed on the image display device 5 at the end of the second reach effect. The determination process (step 079SGS280) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 079SGS283.

In the still image display effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 16-16 (A), the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern of the still image display effect at a rate of 100% when the variable display result is out of alignment. If the pattern SG-1 is determined and the variable display result is a big hit, the effect pattern of the still image display effect is determined to be the pattern SG-1 at a rate of 80%, and the pattern SG-2 is determined at a rate of 20%. do.

As shown in FIG. 16-16 (B), the pattern SG-1 for the still image display effect stops the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 at the end of the second reach effect. It is an effect pattern to be displayed as an image, and the still image display effect pattern SG-2 is after displaying the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 as a still image at the end of the second reach effect. , It is an effect pattern that changes the color of the still image.

In particular, the pattern SG-2 is an effect pattern that is executed only when the variable display result is a big hit. Therefore, when the second reach effect is executed, is the still image display effect executed in the pattern SG-2? It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not (whether or not the color of the still image changes).

Further, when it is not the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α3 in step 079SGS281 (step 079SGS281; N), it is further determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the super reach β3 (PA2-5 or PB1-5) (step 079SGS281; N). Step S079SGS282). When the variable display variation pattern is a variation pattern other than super reach β3 (step 079 SGS281; N), the process proceeds to step 079 SGS283, and when the variable display variation pattern is a super reach β3 variation pattern (step 079 SGS281; Y). ), The operation promotion effect determination process (step 079SGS282) for determining the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B during the execution of the fourth reach effect is executed, and the process proceeds to step 079SGS283. ..

In the operation promotion effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 16-17 (A), when the variable display result is out of alignment, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect at a rate of 80% SS. It is determined to be -1, and the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%. When the variable display result is a big hit, the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, and to pattern SS-2 at a rate of 80%.

As shown in FIG. 16-17 (B), the operation promotion effect pattern SS-1 is an effect pattern for displaying the image of the push button 31B on the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, and is an operation promotion pattern. The effect pattern SS-2 is an effect pattern for displaying the image of the push button 31B in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 in a size larger than that of the pattern SS-1.

That is, as the operation promotion effect in the feature unit 079SG, when the image of the large size push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-2). When the image of the push button 31B of a normal size is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (when the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-1), the ratio is higher. Since the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit (the big hit notification effect is executed) is high, the player is made to pay attention to the size of the image of the push button 31B displayed on the image display device 5 when the operation promotion effect is executed. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In step 079 SGS283, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not each effect such as the above-mentioned chance-up effect, still image display effect, and operation promotion effect is executed, and the effect control pattern (process table) according to the effect pattern and the variation pattern designation command. select. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 079 SGS284).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (step 079SGS285). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (phone number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 079SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 079SGS286). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 079 SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Every time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. The variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is realized by outputting the signal corresponding to the image data to the image display device 5 and displaying the image according to the signal by the image display device 5. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 079 SGS288).

In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts (-1) the value of the process timer each time the variable display effect process is executed, and the process timer after the subtraction is timered out. Determine if it has been done. Then, if the process timer after subtraction is not timer-out, the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and if the process timer after subtraction is timer-out, the process data The production device may be controlled according to the contents of the next process data by switching and starting the next process timer.

Next, an effect mode of variable display of super reach α1 to α3 and super reach β1 to β3 in the feature unit 079SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 16-18 to 16-35.

First, with respect to the variable display of super reach α1 to α3 shown in FIGS. 16-18, 16-19, 16-26 (A) to 16-26 (G), when the variable display is started, an image is displayed. In the first display area 079SG005F of the device 5, an effect moving image such as a variable display of a decorative pattern is started at V1 which is a normal traveling speed. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction (the progress speed of the moving image in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed in V3, which is the normal progress speed. At the same time, from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sound, and the like corresponding to the variable display are started at V4, which is a normal reproduction speed.

Further, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, in the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005jb are started to be alternately lit (blinking) at a fixed cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 is started to blink at a fixed cycle. NS. Hereinafter, the blinking and lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in the feature unit 079SG means that the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are all blinked and lit in synchronization. The invention is not limited to this, and the blinking and lighting of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d do not necessarily have to be synchronized.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 16-18, 16-19, 16-26 (A) to 16-26 (C), when the development timing of the reach effect is reached due to the progress of the variable display, the first half of the reach effect is reached. During the execution period, the battle production between the ally character A and the enemy character A is started. As the battle effect progresses, when the latter half of the first half of the first reach effect execution period is approached, the display of a moving image in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character A is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. NS. When the display of the moving image is started, the traveling speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from the above-mentioned V1 to V2 which is slower than the V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, it is displayed in slow motion that the ally character A hits the enemy character A.

During the period in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character A in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the video of the battle effect is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). Is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and BGM, directing sound, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the playback speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of the super reach α1, when the first half of the reach effect execution period ends, as shown in FIGS. 16-18 and 16-26 (E) to 16-26 (G). In addition, in the first display area 079SG005F, as a jackpot notification effect, after a video in which the attack of the ally character A is successful and the enemy character A collapses is displayed, the decorative symbol is stopped by the combination of jackpots and controlled to the jackpot game state. It is notified that it will be done. In particular, when the jackpot notification effect is started, the first hold storage display area 079SG005D, the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed with 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIGS. 16-26 (H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. Further, the display of the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination showing the jackpot of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the lighting display of the fourth symbol (the lighting display of both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb). ) Is performed.

During the jackpot notification effect, the moving image of the part where the attack of the ally character A is successful is displayed at V1 which is the normal progress speed (corresponding to FIG. 16-26 (E)), and the enemy character thereafter. The display of the moving image of the part where the character collapses is executed at the traveling speed V2, which is slower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 16-26 (F)). Then, the moving image of the portion where it is notified that the decorative symbol is stopped by the combination of big hits and controlled to the big hit game state is executed again at V1 which is the normal progress speed (FIG. 16-26 (G)). Applicable to).

During the jackpot notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of super reach α2 or super reach α3, when the first half of the first reach effect execution period ends, as shown in FIGS. 16-19 and 16-26 (D). , The attack of the ally character A is not successful, and the second half of the first reach effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 16-19 and 16-27 (A) to 16-27 (B), when the second half execution period of the first reach effect is entered, the battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the production moving image of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and BGM, production sound, etc. are transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the playback speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In the latter half execution period of the first reach effect, when the effect movie of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, the chance-up effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 16-27 (B). .. The chance-up effect is executed at the progress speed V1 as in the effect movie of the battle effect.

As the battle effect progresses, when the latter half of the second half execution period of the first reach effect is approached, the display of a moving image in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character A is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. NS. When the display of the moving image is started, the traveling speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from V1 to V2 which is slower than the V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, it is displayed in slow motion that the ally character A hits the enemy character A.

During the period in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character A in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the video of the battle effect is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). Is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and BGM, directing sound, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the playback speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of the super reach α2, as shown in FIGS. 16-19 and 16-27 (E) to 16-27 (G) when the second half execution period of the first reach effect is completed. In addition, in the first display area 079SG005F, as an out-of-order notification effect, after the attack of the ally character A fails and is defeated by the enemy character A, the decorative symbol stops with a combination of out-of-orders and the variable display result is out of order. Is notified.

During the missed notification effect, the moving image is displayed at V1 which is the normal progress speed in the part where the attack of the ally character A fails and the part where the variable display result is notified that the variable display result is missed. NS.

Further, during the disengagement notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIGS. 16-27 (H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the detachment, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination indicating the detachment of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb) are extinguished. ) Is performed.

On the other hand, when the variable display is the variable display of the super reach α3, as shown in FIGS. 16-20, 16-21 and 16-27 (D), the ally in the latter half execution period of the first reach effect. The attack of character A succeeds and defeats the enemy character A. Then, the first half of the second reach effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 16-20, 16-21 and 16-28 (A) to 16-28 (B), when the first half execution period of the second reach effect is entered, the ally character A and the enemy character B become Battle production progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the production moving image of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and BGM, production sound, etc. are transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the playback speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

As the battle effect progresses, when the second half of the first half execution period of the second reach effect is approached, as shown in FIGS. 16-20, 16-21 and 16-28 (C), an image is displayed as an effect effect. The display of the concentrated line is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, and the display of the moving image in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character B is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. When the display of the moving image is started, the traveling speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from V1 to V2 which is slower than the V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, it is displayed in slow motion that the ally character A hits the enemy character B.

During the period in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character B in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the video of the battle effect is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). Is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and BGM, directing sound, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the playback speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternating blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened (the blinking cycle is shorter). It will be faster). Further, as shown in FIG. 16-28 (D), the number of concentrated lines as the above-mentioned effect effect is gradually increased and displayed.

That is, in the latter half execution period of the second reach effect, the progress speed of the video of the battle effect decreases to V2, so that the number of concentrated lines displayed in the first display area 079SG005F increases and the game effect lamp 9 blinks violently. Therefore, by increasing the number of concentrated lines and blinking the game effect lamp 9, it is possible to effectively draw the player's attention to the effect result of the battle effect (whether the jackpot notification effect or the out-of-order notification effect is executed). It is possible.

Then, after the second half of the reach effect execution period is completed, as shown in FIGS. 16-20, 16-21 and 16-28 (E), it is displayed at the end of the battle effect as a still image display effect. The image (the image immediately before the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B in the feature unit 079SG) is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F.

During the execution period of the still image display effect, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is switched from V1 to 0, but the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the telop from the left to the right The movement in the direction is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing, and the BGM, the effect sound, and the like are output from the speakers 8L and 8R while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternating blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is the progress of the video of the battle effect. It returns to the cycle before the speed drops to V2.

When the pattern SG-2 is determined as the effect pattern of the still image display effect, as shown in FIGS. 16-29 (A) to 16-29 (E), the battle effect is performed as the still image display effect. The color of the image displayed at the end of is reversed. Then, after the end of the still image display effect in which the colors are reversed, as a jackpot notification effect, the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B, and after the enemy character B collapses, it is controlled to the jackpot game state. Be notified. In particular, when the decorative symbol stops in a combination indicating a jackpot as the jackpot notification effect, the first hold storage display area 079SG005D, the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden and the first display is performed. An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIGS. 16-29 (F), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. Further, the display of the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination showing the jackpot of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the lighting display of the fourth symbol (the lighting display of both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb). ) Is performed.

As a jackpot notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SG-2, as shown in FIG. 16-20, a moving image in which the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B is performed at the progress speed V1. Although it is displayed, the moving image in which the enemy character B collapses is displayed at the progress speed V2. Then, the moving image in which the decorative symbol stops in the combination of big hits after the enemy character B collapses is displayed at the progress speed V1. In particular, when the decorative symbol stops in a combination indicating a jackpot as the jackpot notification effect, the first hold storage display area 079SG005D, the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden and the first display is performed. An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa.

During the jackpot notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, when the pattern SG-1 is determined as the still image display effect, the color of the image displayed at the end of the battle effect is not reversed as the still image display effect, and FIG. 16-30 (A). )-As shown in FIGS. 16-30 (D), when the jackpot notification effect is executed as described above, and as shown in FIGS. 16-30 (F) to 16-30 (H), the miss notification is announced. The production may be executed.

The jackpot notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SG-1 is as shown in FIG. 16-20, the same as the jackpot notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SG-2. In addition, the moving image in which the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B is displayed at the progress speed V1, but the moving image in which the enemy character B collapses is displayed at the progress speed V2. Then, after the enemy character B collapses, it is displayed at the progress speed V1. During the jackpot notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 16-30 (E), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. Further, the display of the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination showing the jackpot of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the lighting display of the fourth symbol (the lighting display of both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb). ) Is performed.

Further, when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SG-1, the attack of the ally character A does not hit the enemy character B, and the attack of the enemy character B is conversely the attack of the ally character A. After a hit and the ally character A collapses, the decorative symbol stops in a combination of being off, and it is notified that the jackpot game state is not controlled.

As an out-of-order notification effect, as shown in FIG. 16-21, a moving image until the attack of the ally character A is not hit and is defeated by the enemy character B is displayed at the progress speed V1. During the disengagement notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 16-30 (I), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the detachment, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination indicating the detachment of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb) are extinguished. ) Is performed.

Next, regarding the variable display of the super reach β1 to β3 shown in FIGS. 16-22, 16-23, 16-31 (A) to 16-31 (H), when the variable display is started, the image In the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, an effect moving image such as a variable display of a decorative pattern is started at V1 which is a normal traveling speed. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction (the progress speed of the moving image in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed in V3, which is the normal progress speed. At the same time, from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sound, and the like corresponding to the variable display are started at V4, which is a normal reproduction speed.

Further, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, in the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005jb are started to be alternately lit (blinking) at a fixed cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 is started to blink at a fixed cycle. NS.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 16-22, 16-23, 16-31 (A) to 16-31 (C), when the development timing of the reach effect is reached due to the progress of the variable display, the first half of the third reach effect is reached. During the execution period, the battle production between the ally character B and the enemy character A is started. As the battle effect progresses, when the latter half of the first half execution period of the third reach effect is approached, the display of a moving image in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character A is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. NS. When the display of the moving image is started, the traveling speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from the above-mentioned V1 to V2 which is slower than the V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, it is displayed in slow motion that the ally character B hits the enemy character A.

During the period in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character A in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the video of the battle effect is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). Is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and BGM, directing sound, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the playback speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of the super reach β1, when the first half execution period of the third reach effect ends, as shown in FIGS. 16-22 and 16-31 (E) to 16-31 (G). In the first display area 079SG005F, as a jackpot notification effect, it is notified that after a moving image in which the attack of the ally character B is successful and the enemy character A collapses is displayed, the control to the jackpot gaming state is performed. In particular, when the jackpot notification effect is started, the first hold storage display area 079SG005D, the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed with 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIGS. 16-31 (H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. Further, the display of the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination showing the jackpot of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the lighting display of the fourth symbol (the lighting display of both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb). ) Is performed.

During the jackpot notification effect, the video of the part where the attack of the ally character B succeeds is displayed at V1 which is the normal progress speed (corresponding to FIG. 16-30 (E)), and the enemy character thereafter. The display of the moving image of the part where the character collapses is executed at the traveling speed V2, which is slower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 16-30 (F)). Then, the moving image of the portion notified that the decorative symbol is stopped by the combination of big hits and controlled to the big hit game state is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (FIG. 16-30 (G)). Applicable to).

During the jackpot notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of super reach β2 or super reach β3, when the first half execution period of the third reach effect ends, as shown in FIGS. 16-23 and 16-31 (D). , The attack of the ally character B is not successful, and the second half of the third reach effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 16-23 and 16-32 (A) to 16-32 (B), when the second half execution period of the third reach effect is entered, the battle effect between the ally character B and the enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the production moving image of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and BGM, production sound, etc. are transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the playback speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In the latter half execution period of the third reach effect, when the effect movie of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, the chance-up effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 16-32 (B). .. The chance-up effect is executed at the progress speed V1 as in the effect movie of the battle effect.

In particular, in the image display device 5, the small design is displayed with priority over the production video of the chance-up effect, while the production video of the chance-up effect is the image shown in the decorative design (FIGS. 16-32 (B)). It is displayed with priority over "7") displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display device 5. Therefore, in this feature unit 079SG, during the execution period of the chance-up effect, the player can recognize that the variable display is being performed by visually recognizing the small symbol, and display the effect video of the chance-up effect. By displaying the symbol with priority over the symbol, it is possible to reliably secure an area for displaying the effect moving image of the chan-up effect in the image display device 5.

In this feature section 079SG, the production video of the chance-up effect is displayed with priority over the decorative design, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative design is displayed from the production video of the chance-up effect. May be displayed with priority. By doing so, the player can easily recognize which combination of decorative symbols the reach effect during execution has evolved from, so that the game interest can be improved.

As the battle effect progresses, when the latter half of the second half execution period of the first reach effect is approached, the display of a moving image in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character A is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. NS. When the display of the moving image is started, the traveling speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from V1 to V2 which is slower than the V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, it is displayed in slow motion that the ally character B hits the enemy character A.

During the period in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character A in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the video of the battle effect is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). Is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and BGM, directing sound, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the playback speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of the super reach β2, as shown in FIGS. 16-23 and 16-32 (E) to 16-32 (G) when the second half execution period of the third reach effect is completed. In the first display area 079SG005F, as an out-of-order notification effect, it is notified that the variable display result is out of alignment after the attack of the ally character B fails and is defeated by the enemy character A.

During the missed notification effect, the moving image is displayed at V1 which is the normal progress speed in the part where the attack of the ally character B fails and the part where the variable display result is notified that the variable display result is missed. NS.

Further, during the disengagement notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIGS. 16-32 (H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the detachment, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination indicating the detachment of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb) are extinguished. ) Is performed.

On the other hand, when the variable display is the variable display of the super reach β3, as shown in FIGS. 16-24, 16-25 and 16-32 (D), the ally in the latter half execution period of the third reach effect. The attack of character B succeeds and defeats enemy character A. Then, the first half of the fourth reach effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 16-24, 16-25 and 16-33 (A) to 16-33 (B), when the first half execution period of the fourth reach effect is entered, the ally character AB and the enemy character B The battle production progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the production moving image of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and BGM, production sound, etc. are transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the playback speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

As the battle effect progresses, the latter half of the first half execution period of the fourth reach effect is approached, and as shown in FIGS. 16-24, 16-25 and 16-33 (C), the image display device 5 In the first display area 079SG005F, the display of the moving image in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character B is started. When the display of the moving image is started, the traveling speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from V1 to V2 which is slower than the V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, it is displayed in slow motion that the ally character B hits the enemy character B.

During the period in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character B in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the video of the battle effect is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). Is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and BGM, directing sound, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the playback speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternating blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened (the blinking cycle is shorter). It will be faster).

That is, in the latter half execution period of the fourth reach effect, the game effect lamp 9 blinks violently as the progress speed of the video of the battle effect decreases to V2, so that the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 causes the battle effect. It is possible to effectively draw the player's attention to the effect result (whether the jackpot notification effect or the out-of-order notification effect is executed).

Then, as the latter half of the fourth reach effect progresses, the operation promotion effect is executed. When the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect is determined to be the pattern SS-1, the push button 31B together with the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba that imitates the shape of the push button 31B in the center of the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. The display of the meter 079SG005M and the effect image 079SG005E suggesting the operation acceptance period of the meter 079SG005M is started, and the update display of the meter 079SG005M and the enlarged update display of the effect image 079SG005E toward the peripheral edge of the image display device 5 are started. As described above, since the images of these operation promotion effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on the image data 2 (see FIG. 16-3), they are constant regardless of the progress speed of the battle effects. It is displayed as a moving speed video.

As shown in FIG. 16-33 (D), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B can be notified to the player by the update display of the meter 079SG005M, while the effect image 079SG005E is enlarged. The update display progresses. Since the effect image 079SG005E has a predetermined transmittance (for example, 10% to 50%), the player can visually recognize the battle effect through the effect image 079SG005E, and when the operation promotion effect is not executed. The visibility of the battle effect is lower than that. Since the execution period of the operation promotion effect is included in the latter half of the fourth reach effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation promotion effect.

As shown in FIGS. 16-33 (D) and 16-33 (E), the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, but the end timing (push) of the operation promotion effect. At the time of the end timing of the operation reception of the button 31B), the scene does not proceed to the scene where it is known whether or not the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character B, that is, the jackpot notification effect or the miss notification effect is not started. It has become.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 16-34 (A) to 16-34 (E), when the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect is determined to be the pattern SS-2, the first display of the image display device 5 In the center of the area 079SG005F, as an operation promotion image imitating the shape of the push button 31B, the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, which is larger in size than the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba, and the meter 079SG005M suggesting the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B are displayed. Then, the update display of the meter 079SG005M is started. As described above, since the images of these operation promotion effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on the image data 2 (see FIG. 16-3), they are constant regardless of the progress speed of the battle effects. It is displayed as a moving speed video.

As shown in FIG. 16-34 (D), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B can be notified to the player by the update display of the meter 079SG005M, while the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb makes it possible to notify the player. Most of the images of the battle production are hidden. As described above, the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is an image having a size larger than that of the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and having a transmittance of 0%. Therefore, when the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-2, the visibility of the battle effect is lower than that in the case where the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-1. Since the execution period of the operation promotion effect is included in the latter half of the fourth reach effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation promotion effect.

As shown in FIGS. 16-34 (D) and 16-34 (E), the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, but the end timing (push) of the operation promotion effect. At the time of the end timing of the operation reception of the button 31B), the scene does not proceed to the scene where it is known whether or not the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character B, that is, the jackpot notification effect or the miss notification effect is not started. It has become.

Then, when the player operates the push button 31B during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, or when the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B (the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is set). When it ends), the jackpot notification effect or the miss notification effect is executed from the timing when the players operate the push button 31B or the timing when the operation promotion effect ends.

As a big hit notification effect after the operation promotion effect, as shown in FIGS. 16-24 and 16-35 (A) to 16-35 (C), a moving image in which the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character B is Although it is displayed at the progress speed V1, the moving image in which the enemy character B collapses is displayed at the progress speed V2. Then, the moving image after the enemy character B has fallen is displayed at the progress speed V1. During the jackpot notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIGS. 16-35 (D), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. Further, the display of the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination showing the jackpot of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the lighting display of the fourth symbol (the lighting display of both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb). ) Is performed.

Further, as the disengagement notification effect after the operation promotion effect, as shown in FIGS. 16-25 and 16-35 (E) to 16-35 (G), the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character B. On the contrary, after the attack of the enemy character B hits the ally character B and the ally character B collapses, it is notified that the jackpot game state is not controlled. In particular, when the disengagement notification effect is executed, the first hold storage display area 079SG005D, the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed with 079SG005Sa.

As the missed notification effect, as shown in FIGS. 16-25, a moving image until the attack of the ally character B does not hit and the decorative symbol stops due to the combination of missed is displayed at the traveling speed V1. During the disengagement notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIGS. 16-35 (H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the detachment, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination indicating the detachment of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb) are extinguished. ) Is performed.

16-26 (H), 16-27 (H), 10-29 (F), 16-30 (E), 16-30 (I), 16-31 (H), FIG. As shown in 16-32 (H), 16-35 (D), and 16-35 (H), in the feature unit 079SG, a telop (message) is displayed on the image display device 5 at the end timing of the variable display. The form in which the telop display area 079SG005T including the telop display area 079SG005T is displayed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and at the end timing of the variable display, the display itself of the telop display area 079SG005T on the image display device 5 is displayed. On the other hand, the display of the telop (message) in the telop display area 079SG005T itself may not be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, in the variable display of the super reach α3 and the super reach β3, the game effect lamp 9 is used only during the slow motion period immediately before the notification effect (the period during which the display of the effect movie of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2). Although the embodiment of shortening the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened in a slow motion period other than immediately before the notification effect. Further, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened even in a part of the period (non-slow motion period) in which the display of the effect moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V1.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 16-19 to 16-25, each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect. During the first half execution period, the moving image of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1, and the latter half of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect. During the partial execution period, the moving image of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2. Therefore, while the moving image of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2, the degree of emotional transfer of the player to the ally character displayed during the reach effect is increased, and the jackpot notification is given. Since it is possible to raise the expectation that the production will be executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. On the other hand, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach production, the second reach production, the third reach production, and the fourth reach production, BGM and production sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R are produced. Since the output remains unchanged at V4, which is the normal playback speed, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

Further, since the sound output hand in the feature unit 079SG includes the voice synthesis IC 079SG132, the amplifier circuit 079SG134, and the speakers 8L and 8R, the reproducibility is achieved during variable display including execution of reach effect and execution of jackpot game. It is possible to output high-quality BGM (music), sound effects, and other directing sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R at an appropriate volume, which makes it possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 16-20, 16-21, 16-24, and 16-25, the game effect is exhibited during the second half execution period of the second reach effect and the second half execution period of the fourth reach effect. Since the lamp 9 blinks at a shorter cycle than usual, the effect can be improved by blinking the game effect lamp 9 at a shorter cycle during the period when the progress speed of the effect moving image is V2.

In the feature unit 079SG, a mode in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the second half execution period of the reach effect and the second half execution period of the fourth reach effect is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. The blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be gradually shortened according to the progress of the second reach effect and the fourth reach effect. By doing so, the player can recognize that the notification effect will be executed soon by the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, the feature unit 079SG exemplifies a mode in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the second half execution period of the reach effect and the second half execution period of the fourth reach effect, but the present invention is limited to this. The blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be executed at any timing from the first reach effect to the fourth reach effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 16-19 to 16-25, the progress of the effect video of the reach effect during each execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect. While the speed changes between V1 and V2, the rotation speed of the hold display and the moving speed of the telop are both constant at V3, and the reproduction speed of the production sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is constant at V4. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

The feature unit 079SG exemplifies a mode in which both the rotation speed of the hold display and the movement display speed of the telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa are V3, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The rotation speed of the hold display and the movement display speed of the telop may be different speeds as long as they are constant regardless of the progress of each reach effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16-2 (A), the area of the first display area 079SG005F is larger than the combined area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. During execution, the player can more easily recognize the reach effect displayed in the first display area 079SG005F than the hold display or telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 16-18 to 16-25, the rotation display of the hold display is the rotation speed V3 in the first hold storage display area 079SG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U during the period other than the reach effect. In the telop display area 079SG005T, the movement display of the telop is executed at the movement speed V3, that is, the rotation display of the hold display and the movement display of the telop are executed at the same speed as during the reach production, so that the player can perform the telop movement display. It is possible to prevent these pending displays and telops from becoming difficult to recognize.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16-2 (C), the characters included in the telop (message) in the telop display area 079SG005T reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T, and at the same time the display ends, the telop display area is displayed. Since it is displayed again at the left end of the 079SG005T and moved from the left to the right again, the entire telop (message) is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T. Therefore, the player can always recognize the entire movement display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T.

The feature unit 079SG exemplifies a form in which the entire telop is always moved and displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, but the present invention is not limited to this and moves in the telop display area 079SG005T. Some of the displayed telops may be invisible to the player at some time.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 16-20, 16-21, and 16-28, during the second half execution period of the reach effect, the effect movie of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2 and the image is displayed. By executing the effect effect of displaying the concentrated line on the display device 5, the effect effect of the second half of the reach effect can be enhanced by the effect effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved. In particular, in this feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 16-28 (C) and 148 (D), the number of concentrated lines displayed increases as the battle effect progresses. It is possible for the player to more easily recognize that the second reach effect is completed and the jackpot notification effect or the miss notification effect is executed due to the increase.

In the present feature unit 079SG, a form in which the effect effect in the present invention is displayed as a concentrated line is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation of the movable body 32 within a predetermined range, the speaker 8L, and the like. The output of the specific sound effect from the 8R, the vibration of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, the vibration of the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the vibration of the image display device 5 itself, etc. are executed as the effect effect, and the second reach effect ( As the battle effect progresses, the effect level of the effect effect is gradually increased (for example, the operating range of the movable body 32 is widened, the volume of the specific effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is increased, and the stick. The vibration of the controller 31A and the push button 31B may be increased, the vibration of the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the image display device 5 itself may be increased, and the like).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 16-26 (G), 16-29 (E), 16-30 (D), 16-31 (G), and 16-35 (C), as a jackpot notification effect. When the decorative symbol is stopped by the combination of big hits, the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa are hidden and the first display area 079SG005F is displayed. Since the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the player is made to recognize that the jackpot gaming state is controlled while further improving the visibility of the jackpot notification effect in the second display area 079SG005Sa. It can be done easily.

When executing the jackpot notification effect, the feature unit 079SG hides the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa. Although the form of displaying the image of the jackpot notification effect in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second display area 079SG005Sa is used. In a state where the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are displayed, the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa (the first). 2 In the display area 079SG005Sa, the image of the jackpot notification effect may be displayed overlapping with the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T).

At this time, the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are transparently displayed or reduced, or the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U are displayed. The visibility of the jackpot notification image may be improved by hiding only one of the hold display displayed in the hold display area.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 16-28 and 16-29, during the second half execution period of the reach effect, the still image display effect can be executed in the first display area 079SG005F, while FIGS. 16-20 and FIGS. As shown in 16-21, during the still image display effect execution period, the rotation display of the hold display in the first hold storage display area 079SG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and FIG. 16-2. Since the telop movement display in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in (C) continues without stopping, the hold display is being displayed and the telop movement display is being displayed during the execution period of the still image display effect. Can be easily recognized by the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the display of the hold display and the display of the telop by stopping the rotation display of the hold display and the movement display of the telop. ..

Further, as shown in FIGS. 16-16 and 16-29 (A) to 16-29 (B), when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SG-2, the colors of the still image are reversed. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the still image display effect is executed by reversing the color of the still image.

In the feature unit 079SG, as a still image display effect, as a form of changing the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, a form of reversing the color of the still image is exemplified. The form of changing the color of the still image is not limited to that of changing the color of the still image to black and white, changing only a part of the color of the still image, and adding a new color to the still image. It may be added.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16-29 (B), when the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed by executing the still image display effect in the pattern SG-2, Since the colors of the hold display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the color of the fourth symbol displayed in the third display area 079SG005Sb are not inverted, the player is displayed in these second display areas 079SG005Sa. By comparing the hold display, telop, fourth symbol, etc. with the still image, it is possible to easily recognize that the color of the still image has changed.

In addition, in each variable display of the super reach in this feature unit 079SG, a pattern that shifts to the second reach effect or the fourth reach effect after the execution of the first reach effect or the third reach effect, and the first reach effect or the third reach effect. Since there is a pattern in which the variable display that shifts to the second reach production and the fourth reach production ends after the production is executed, the display of the production video of the reach production progresses during the first reach production and the third reach production. Whether or not to shift to the second reach effect or the fourth reach effect after being executed at the speed V2, and the display of the effect video of the reach effect during the second reach effect or the third reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is notified that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state after the game is played, the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 16-19, 16-20, 16-21, 16-23, 16-24, and 16-25, the first reach effect and the third reach effect are performed during the first reach effect. During the 1st reach production second half execution period and the 3rd reach production second half execution period, the production in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character and the 1st reach production second half execution period or the 3rd reach production second half execution period proceed at the same time. Since it is executed at speed V1, the progress speed when shifting from the first reach effect first half execution period to the first reach effect second half execution period or from the third reach effect first half execution period to the third reach effect second half execution period. However, in the second half execution period of the first reach production and the second half execution period of the third reach production, the expectation that the ally character is controlled to the jackpot game state by being different from the progress speed of the production in which the enemy character is defeated is excessively raised. It is possible to prevent it from happening. Further, FIGS. 16-18, 16-20, 16-22, 16-24, 16-25 and 16-26 (E) to 16-26 (G), 16-29 (C). 16-29 (E), 16-30 (B) to 16-30 (D), 16-31 (E) to 16-31 (G), 16-35 (A). As shown in 16-35 (C), in the jackpot notification effect of this feature unit 079SG, while the video is displayed at the progress speed V2 when the enemy character collapses due to the hit of the attack of the ally character, while it is executed. 16-19, 16-21, 16-23, 16-25 and 16-27 (E) to 16-27 (G), 16-30 (F) to 16-30 (H). ), FIGS. 16-32 (E) to 16-32 (G), and 16-35 (D) to 16-35 (F). Since the display of is executed at the progress speed V1, when the disengagement notification effect is executed, the display of the effect video of the disengagement notification effect is not executed at the progress speed V2, so that the player is dissatisfied. Can be prevented from increasing excessively, and the game entertainment can be improved.

In addition, in the present feature unit 079SG, when the variable display result of the super reach is the deviation notification effect, the display of the effect video of the deviation notification effect is executed at the progress speed V1. The present invention is not limited to this, and in a part of the variable display of the super reach, the display of the effect moving image of the off notification effect may be executed at a progress speed V2 slower than V1. By doing so, it is possible to create variations in the production of the out-of-court notification effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the present feature unit 079SG, an example is exemplified in which the traveling speed V1 of the production moving image during the jackpot notification effect is the third speed in the present invention, and the traveling speed V2 of the effecting moving image during the jackpot notification effect is the fourth speed in the present invention. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the traveling speed V1. Further, the fourth speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the traveling speed V2 as long as the speed is slower than the third speed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 16-24 and 16-25, the operation promotion effect is executed when the display of the video of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2 during the latter half execution period of the fourth reach effect. Therefore, the effect of the fourth reach effect can be enhanced by the operation promotion effect.

It should be noted that the feature unit 079SG exemplifies a mode in which the display of the effect moving image of the fourth reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2 during the execution of the operation promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. During the execution of the operation promotion effect, the display of the effect moving image of the fourth reach effect may be executed at the progress speed V1. Further, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect suggesting that the operation promotion effect is executed before the operation promotion effect is executed, and during the execution period of the suggestion effect, the effect video of the fourth reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. It may be executed.

Further, as the operation promotion effect of the feature unit 079SG, in addition to the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, the meter 079SG005M for notifying the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F. While the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb and the meter 079SG005M are being displayed, the display of the effect video of the fourth reach effect at the progress speed V2 is continuously executed, but the notification effect is not progressed. .. Further, when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, and when the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. Then, the same jackpot notification effect or miss notification effect is executed. Therefore, since the notification effect is not executed at the timing before the end of the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B (until the end of the operation promotion effect), the push button is not operated by the player. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing whether or not the push button 31B is controlled to the jackpot game state during the operation acceptance period.

Although the feature unit 079SG exemplifies a form in which the detection means in the present invention is a push button 31B, the present invention is not limited to this, and the detection means is other than the push button 31B such as the stick controller 31A. In addition to the operation means of the above, sensors such as a motion sensor and a touch sensor that can detect the movement of the player may be used.

Further, FIGS. 16-18, 16-20, 16-22, 16-24, 16-26 (E) to 16-26 (G), 16-29 (C) to 16-29. (E), FIGS. 16-30 (B) to 16-30 (D), 16-31 (E) to 16-31 (G), 16-35 (A) to 16-35C). As shown, in the jackpot notification effect in the feature unit 079SG, the video of the part where the attack of the ally character hits the enemy character is displayed at the progress speed V1, while the video of the part where the enemy character collapses is the progress speed V2. It is displayed in. On the other hand, FIGS. 16-19, 16-21, 16-23, 16-25 and 16-27 (E) to 16-27 (G), 16-30 (E) to 16-. As shown in 30 (G), FIGS. 16-32 (E) to 16-32 (G), and 16-35 (D) to 16-35 (F), the disengagement notification effect of the feature unit 079SG is produced. The moving image is displayed at the progress speed V1 and is not displayed at the progress speed V2. That is, when the jackpot notification effect is executed, the player can be impressed that the jackpot gaming state is controlled by displaying a part of the effect movie of the jackpot notification effect at the progress speed V2. can.

Further, in the present feature unit 079SG, as a special effect that can be executed only when the variable display result is a big hit in the present invention, the still image display effect can be executed by the pattern SG-2 (still image display effect in which the colors are inverted). Therefore, as a still image display effect, the player can pay attention to whether or not the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed, so that the game interest can be improved.

In the feature unit 079SG, a form in which the still image display effect of the pattern SG-2 is a special effect in the present invention is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special effect in the present invention is not limited to this. , An effect other than the still image display effect of the pattern SG-2 (for example, an effect in which a specific character is displayed, an effect in which the color of the effect is gold or rainbow, etc.) may be executed.

Further, in the operation promotion effect of the feature unit 079SG, the pattern SS-1 in which the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba imitating the push button 31B is imitated in the first display area 079SG005F and the push button 31B imitating the push button 31B in the first display area 079SG005F. As the operation promotion image, the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, which is larger in size than the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba, can be displayed in any of the effect patterns of the pattern SS-2. When the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-1, the battle effect of the fourth reach effect can be visually recognized through the effect image 079SG005E displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, while the battle effect of the fourth reach effect can be visually recognized in the pattern SS-2. When the operation promotion effect is executed, most of the battle effect of the fourth reach effect is hidden by the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba. The visibility of the battle production of 4 reach production is low. Further, as shown in FIGS. 16-17, the ratio at which the variable display result becomes a big hit when the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 is when the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-1. Since the variable display result is lower than the jackpot ratio, the player can pay attention to whether the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-1 or the pattern SS-2, and the game interest can be improved. Further, as shown in FIGS. 16-24, 16-25 and 16-33 (C) to 16-33 (E), when the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed as the operation promotion effect, the operation promotion image is displayed. While the 079SG005Ba is being displayed, the display of the production video of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V2, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

In the feature unit 079SG, when the operation promotion effect is executed by the pattern SS-2, the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is displayed on the image display device 5, and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb causes the traveling speed V2 (slow motion). ) Has illustrated a form in which the visibility of the production video (battle production) of the fourth reach effect is reduced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is the pattern SS. When executed in -2, in addition to the display of the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, a dedicated background image is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that the production video (battle) of the fourth reach effect is displayed. The production) may be completely invisible. In addition, during the period when the production video (battle production) of the 4th reach production is completely invisible due to the background image dedicated to the operation promotion production pattern SS-2, the production video of the 4th reach production is displayed. The display may be executed at the traveling speed V1 (non-slow motion).

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as the reach effect of the super reach, the second reach effect can be executed after the first reach effect, and the fourth reach effect can be executed after the third reach effect. Further, as the variable display of the super reach, the variable display of the super reach α1 that notifies the big hit after the first half execution period of the first reach effect and the variable display of the super reach β1 that notifies the big hit after the first half execution period of the third reach effect. Display, variable display of super reach α2 that executes the first half of the first reach effect and then the second half of the first reach effect to notify the deviation, and the second half of the third reach after the first half of the third reach effect. Variable display of super reach β2 that executes the partial execution period and notifies the deviation, variable display of super reach α3 that shifts to the second reach effect after the first reach effect exchange, third reach effect exchange partial execution period It is possible to execute the variable display of the super reach α3 that shifts to the fourth reach effect after When shifting to the execution period, when shifting from the first reach effect second half execution period to the second reach effect first half execution period, when shifting from the third reach effect first half execution period to the third reach effect second half execution period , When shifting from the third reach production second half execution period to the fourth reach production first half execution period, the production video of each reach production is executed at the progress speed V2, and the first reach production first half execution period is started. When shifting to the second half of the reach effect execution period, when shifting from the second half of the reach effect to the first half of the reach effect, the first half of the reach effect to the second half of the reach effect When shifting from the third reach production second half execution period to the fourth reach production first half execution period, BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the same playback speed V4 as in other periods. Therefore, when shifting from the first reach effect first half execution period to the first reach effect second half execution period, when shifting from the first reach effect second half execution period to the second reach effect first half execution period, the third reach When shifting from the first half of the production period to the second half of the third reach production, and when shifting from the second half of the third reach production to the first half of the fourth reach production, the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to prevent it from being stored. Further, by displaying the effect video of each reach effect at the progress speed V2, it is possible to easily recognize the branch of the reach effect drawn by the player.

The variable display of the super reach of the feature unit 079SG exemplifies a form in which two reach effects can be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display of the super reach is 3 or more. The reach effect may be executable, or only one reach effect may be executable.

Although the feature portion 079SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these feature portions, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included.

For example, in the feature unit 079SG, a first reach effect, a second reach effect, a third reach effect, and a fourth reach effect are provided as the reach effect of the super reach, and a part of the effect movie of the reach effect is provided in all of these reach effects. Although the embodiment in which the display of the above is executed at the progress speed V2 (slow motion) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display of the production moving image is not executed at the progress speed V2 in each reach effect (a pattern in which the display of the production video is not executed at the progress speed V2. A pattern in which the display of the production moving image is always executed at the progress speed V1) and a pattern in which a part of the production movie is displayed at the progress speed V2 may be provided. Further, the effect contents may be different between the reach effect in which a part of the effect moving image is displayed at the progress speed V2 and the reach effect in which the display of the effect moving image is not executed at the progress speed V2. By doing so, it is possible to create variations in the reach production of the super reach, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, the production sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R always has a constant playback speed (reproduction speed V4) regardless of whether or not the display of the production video is executed at the progress speed V2. Although the output form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, as the modified example 079SG-1, the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach are shown. In the first half of each reach production second half execution period of the production, the playback speed V4 from the speakers 8L, 8R as in the first half execution period of each reach production of 1 reach production, 2nd reach production, 3rd reach production, and 4th reach production. While outputting the production sound at, what is V4 in the latter half of each reach production (slow motion period) of the first reach production, the second reach production, the third reach production, and the fourth reach production? The production sound may be output at a different reproduction speed (for example, V5 slower than the reproduction speed V4). By doing so, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect sound on the reach effect by making the reproduction speed of the effect sound different while the display of the effect video of the reach effect is being executed at the progress speed V2. You can improve your interest.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 16-33 and 16-34, the first display area 079SG005F is visually recognized during the execution period of the reach effect by displaying the effect image 079SG005E and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb. The present invention exemplifies a form in which the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb cannot be reduced while the property can be reduced, but the present invention is not limited thereto. As a modification 079SG-2, it may be possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

Further, when it is possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb in this way, as shown in FIGS. 16-36 and 16-37, after the end of the reach effect. , The visibility of the first display area 079SG005F may be reduced as a part of the notification effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 16-36 (A) to 16-36 (D), when the second reach effect is executed, when the second reach effect is completed together with the still image display effect, A circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is enlarged and displayed toward the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb as a part of the jackpot notification effect or the loss notification effect. To go. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is concealed by the effect image 079SG005Ea), it is shown in FIGS. 16-36 (E) and 16-36 (F). As described above, it is sufficient to notify that the jackpot gaming state is controlled as the jackpot notification effect, or that the jackpot gaming state is not controlled as the loss notification effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 16-37 (A) to 16-37 (D), when the fourth reach effect is executed, the player operates the push button 31B, or the player pushes. When the operation promotion effect is completed without operating the button 31B, a circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area and the effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed second as part of the jackpot notification effect or the loss notification effect. Enlarged display is performed toward the area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is concealed by the effect image 079SG005Ea), it is shown in FIGS. 16-37 (E) and 16-37 (F). As described above, it is sufficient to notify that the jackpot gaming state is controlled as the jackpot notification effect, or that the jackpot gaming state is not controlled as the loss notification effect.

The effect image 079SG005Ea shown in FIGS. 16-36 and 16-37 is an image based on the image data 2 shown in FIG. 16-3 (B), and the drawing range is expanded as an image based on the image data 2. Therefore, it is possible to reduce only the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F and not to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

As described above, in the present modification 079SG-2, the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be changed, while the second display area is shown in FIGS. 16-36 and 16-37. After the end of the reach effect or after the end of the fourth reach effect, the effect image 079SG005Ea reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F, but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. Does not change, so that the player can easily recognize the timing when the notification effect is set by changing the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F, and the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be improved. Since it does not change, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the hold display, the telop display, the variable display of the fourth symbol, and the like.

Further, the effect image 079SG005Ea that reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is an image drawn as an image of the second image data shown in FIG. 16-3 (B), and is the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display area 079SG005Sa. Since the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is changed by drawing so as to enlarge the display toward the display area 079SG005Sb, the first display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb are not changed. Only the visibility of the display area 079SG005F can be accurately reduced, and the drawing of the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea as the second image data can be drawn from the center of the first display area 079SG005F to the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display. Since the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is lowered by executing toward the area 079SG005Sb, it is possible to make it difficult to change the visibility of the area corresponding to the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

Further, in the present modification 079SG-2, a mode in which the operation promotion effect is executed during the fourth reach effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is one of the notification effects. It may be executed as a part.

When the operation promotion effect is executed as a part of the notification effect, it is the same as the modified example 079SG-2 as shown in FIGS. 16-38 (A) to 16-38 (F) as the modified example 079SG-3. In addition, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by enlarging the effect image 079SG005Ea. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F, as shown in FIG. 16-38 (D), the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M are displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F as an operation promotion effect. do.

By displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M as images based on the first image data shown in FIG. 16-2 (A), it is possible to avoid deterioration of visibility due to the effect image 079SG005Ea.

After that, the player operates the push button 31B, or the player is controlled to the jackpot game state based on the end of the operation promotion effect without operating the push button 31B, or the jackpot game state. Is notified that it is not controlled.

As described above, in the present modification 079SG-3, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is lowered by the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M displayed as the image of the first image data. Since the visibility of the push button 31B is not lowered, the operation promotion effect can be made to stand out with respect to the fourth reach effect, so that the player can be effectively encouraged to operate the push button 31B.

Further, the feature unit 079SG exemplifies a form in which the variable display result is always a big hit when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect. The present invention is not limited to this, and as the modified example 079SG-4, when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect, the jackpot type of the jackpot is always specified. The probability variation jackpot (furthermore, the probability variation jackpot A that is most advantageous to the player) may be set. Furthermore, as an effect pattern when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect, the jackpot game state is controlled again after the disconnection notification effect is once executed. It may be possible to execute a revival effect that notifies. In the case where the revival effect is executed after the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 in this way, the big hit type is a probable big hit and a non-probable big hit (non-probable big hit). A case where the game is controlled to the jackpot game state and a case where the probability variation jackpot is controlled to the jackpot game state) may be provided. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the jackpot notification effect is executed after the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2, so that the game interest can be improved. ..

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, a form of displaying a message indicating a game state is exemplified as a telop displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop display area 079SG005T is not limited to this. As the displayed telop, even if it is possible to display a message suggesting whether or not the variable display being executed or the variable display that has not been started is controlled to the jackpot game state, the title of the reach effect being executed, and the like can be displayed. good.

Further, the feature unit 079SG exemplifies a form in which a telop can be displayed according to the state of the effect being executed in the telop display area 079SG005T, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop display area 079SG005T is not limited thereto. The telops displayed in are those that can identify the game state, the degree of expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit in the variable display during execution (big hit expectation), the explanation of the effect during execution (especially the reach effect), and the reach effect. It may be a notice effect or the like that can be executed from a timing earlier than that.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 16-33 and 16-34, the operation promotion effect (operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and operation promotion) is performed during the period when the moving image of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. Although the embodiment (display of image 079SG005Bb) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is executed after the moving image of the reach effect returns from the progress speed V2 to the progress speed V1. May be good.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 16-33 and 16-34, the feature unit 079SG exemplifies a mode in which the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb are displayed on the image display device 5 as the operation promotion effect. The present invention is not limited to this, and as the operation promotion effect, not only the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb are displayed, but also the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb are displayed, for example. As an effect before displaying, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B move toward the center of the image display device 5, and finally the images of the push buttons 31B are duplicated and displayed to promote the operation. You may execute the effect that 079SG005Ba and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb are displayed.

When the effect of moving the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B toward the center of the image display device 5 as a precursor effect of the operation promotion effect is executed, for example, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B are displayed. The moving display speed of the image display device 5 may decrease as it approaches the central portion of the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can accurately recognize that the operation promotion effect is executed, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 16-20, 16-21, 16-24, and 16-25, when the display of the moving image of the reach effect is executed at the traveling speed V2, Although the embodiment in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. When the display of the reach effect video is executed at the progress speed V2, the number of colors (emission colors) of the game effect lamp 9 is different from that when the reach effect video display is executed at the progress speed V1. You may. For example, when the display of the video of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V1, the game effect lamp 9 can emit light in a plurality of colors, while the display of the video of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2. In this case, the game effect lamp 9 may be capable of emitting light in a single color (for example, only white). By doing so, when the display of the moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, it is possible to prevent the game enjoyment from being lowered due to the emission color of the game effect lamp 9.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 16-20, 16-21, 16-24, and 16-25, when the display of the moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, Although the embodiment in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. When the display of the moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be lengthened. By doing so, it is possible to give a sense of unity between the display of the video of the reach effect and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 16-26, 16-29, 16-30, 16-31, and 16-35, as an effect mode of the jackpot notification effect, the reach effect is completed. Later, a form in which the decorative symbol is displayed while swinging with a combination indicating a jackpot is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative symbol is displayed while swinging with a combination indicating a jackpot. The timing may be during the reach production.

Further, the present invention is a gaming machine in which a player can select at least a part of production sounds such as BGM output from speakers 8L and 8R during a game by operating an operating means that can be operated by the player. May be applied to. By doing so, when the player sets the output of the effect sound that suits his / her own taste, the speaker 8L is displayed when the display of the moving image of each reach effect is executed at the progress speed V1. , Since the effect sound output from 8R is reproduced at the reproduction speed V4 without changing, the effect sound is reproduced from the reproduction speed V4 even though the player himself selects the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. However, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest due to the low-speed playback.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as the end suggestion effect in the present invention, it is possible to execute an effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character in the first reach effect second half execution period and the third reach effect second half execution period. Although the variable display result is always out of alignment when is executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the first reach effect second half execution period and the third reach effect second half execution period. After the effect that the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed, the display on the image display device 5 is once switched to the display of the normal background image before the reach effect, and then the effect indicating that the variable display result is a big hit. A case may be provided in which (for example, a resurrection effect) is executed.

When the revival effect is executed in this way, the revival effect is performed for the player by lighting and blinking the game effect lamp 9 before displaying the moving image of the revival effect on the image display device 5. May be made aware that is executed. Further, as an effect mode of the revival effect, for example, the ally character may attack the enemy character again and defeat the enemy character. In particular, when executing the resurrection effect, a part of the video of the resurrection effect (for example, a video of a scene in which an enemy character collapses) is displayed at a progress speed of V2 so as to enhance the effect of the resurrection effect. May be good.

Further, although a plurality of feature portions and modified examples are disclosed in the present specification, the gaming machine of the present invention is implemented by combining two or more feature portions and modified examples from these plurality of feature portions and modified examples. You may.

For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 079SG may be a pachinko gaming machine whose jackpot probability can be changed by changing the set values as shown in FIGS. 1 to 9. In such a case, for example, in the variable display of the super reach α1 and the super reach β1, a pattern is provided in which the variable display result is out of alignment, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a high setting value (for example, 6) that is advantageous for the player. When is set, even if the variable display result is out of order in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1 at a higher rate than when other set values are set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. good. By doing so, the fact that the variable display result is out of alignment in the variable display of the super reach α1 and the super reach β1 can be used as a suggestion that the high setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the variable display result is out of order while suppressing the deterioration of the player's interest due to the variable display result being out of place in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1. It will be possible.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, the pachinko game machine 1 is exemplified as a game machine that plays a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game machine that plays a predetermined game is at least a predetermined game. It may be a slot machine or a general game machine other than the pachinko game machine 1 as long as it performs the above.

(Explanation related to the association of feature parts)
Each configuration relating to the feature portion 059AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the configurations relating to the other feature portions such as the feature portion 063AK, the feature portion 065AK, and the feature portion 079SG. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions. For example, in addition to controlling the time saving state by stopping and displaying the time saving symbol like the feature part 059AK, the small hit game state ends based on passing through the time saving area 063AK20 like the feature part 063AK. Then, it may be controlled to shorten the time for a predetermined period. In addition to this, even when the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result of the normal symbol as in the feature unit 065AK, the time-saving state may be controlled. According to this, the opportunity to be controlled to the time saving state increases, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, for example, the feature unit includes a time-saving fanning effect in the feature unit 059AK, a normal time-passing fanning effect and a time-saving time-passing fanning effect in the feature unit 063AK, a predetermined effect in the feature unit 065AK, and a reach effect of Super Reach A to Super Reach C. It may be a predetermined effect in 079SG. Then, in the first period of the predetermined effect, the effect moving speed at which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed on the image display device 5 as the display means, and the predetermined effect after the first period can be displayed. In the second period, it is possible to display the effect moving image, which is the second speed in which the progress speed of the effect is slower than the first speed, on the image display device 5, and the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect is the first period. In any of the second period and the second period, the speed related to the effect sound may be output at the same speed by the speakers 8L and 8R as the sound output means. According to this, the progress speed of the production video of the predetermined production changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed related to the production sound does not change between the first period and the second period. It is possible to prevent giving a feeling of strangeness.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With display means,
The display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is a region around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area.
The display means
In the first display area and the second display area, the background image corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed.
In the second display area, it is possible to display the grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the granted gaming value on the front side of the background image.
At least in the first display area, the amount of game value given has reached the first predetermined amount as a notification display on the front side of the background image to notify that the amount of game value has reached a predetermined amount. It is possible to display a first notification display for notifying that and a second notification display for notifying that the amount of game value to be given has reached the second predetermined amount.
The grant amount display is updated every time the game value is granted in the advantageous state.
The notification display ends when a specific period has elapsed from the start of the display, and the display ends.
The characters used for the notification display are characters having a size larger than the characters used for the grant amount display.
The characters used for the grant amount display and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed.
The background image of the specific character used for the given amount display is invisible from the specific area, and the specific character is invisible.
As for the specific characters used in the notification display, the background image can be visually recognized from the specific area.
Moreover,
A game control means that controls the progress of the game,
It is provided with an effect executing means capable of executing an effect based on the information from the game control means.
The game control means
The deciding means for determining the advantageous state and
A determination means for determining that the advantageous state is obtained before the determination of the determination means, and
A state control means that can control a special state in which variable display is easier to execute than the normal state,
Includes an information transmitting means capable of transmitting a plurality of types of information including determination result information capable of identifying that the determination means is controlled to the advantageous state when the determination means is determined to be in the advantageous state to the effect executing means. ,
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result.
The determination means can determine that the special state is reached before the state control means controls the special state.
The information transmitting means can transmit special information that can be specified to be controlled to the special state when the determining means determines that the special state is set.
The effect executing means is
When the determination result information is received, the look-ahead effect can be executed based on the determination result information.
When the determination result information is received after receiving the special information, the execution of the look-ahead effect based on the determination result information is restricted.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images